Corel DESIGNER User Guide X5 Instruction Manual UG EN
User Manual: corel Corel Designer - X5 - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Corel Designer Software, Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 882
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Copyright © 2010 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved. Corel DESIGNER® X5 User Guide Product specifications, pricing, packaging, technical support and information (“specifications”) refer to the retail English version only. The specifications for all other versions (including other language versions) may vary. Information is provided by Corel on an “as is” basis, without any other warranties or conditions, express or implied, including, but not limited to, warranties of merchantable quality, satisfactory quality, merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising by law, statute, usage of trade, course of dealing or otherwise. The entire risk as to the results of the information provided or its use is assumed by you. Corel shall have no liability to you or any other person or entity for any indirect, incidental, special, or consequential damages whatsoever, including, but not limited to, loss of revenue or profit, lost or damaged data or other commercial or economic loss, even if Corel has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or they are foreseeable. Corel is also not liable for any claims made by any third party. Corel's maximum aggregate liability to you shall not exceed the costs paid by you to purchase the materials. Some states/countries do not allow exclusions or limitations of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. Corel, the Corel logo, CorelDRAW, Corel DESIGNER, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelDRAW Concept Share, CorelTUTOR, Application Recovery Manager, CONNECT, Digital Studio, Grammar As-You-Go, iGrafx, Knowledge Base, PaintShop Photo, Painter, Perfect Shapes, PowerClip, PowerTRACE, Presentations, Quattro Pro, QuickCorrect, VideoStudio, WinDVD, WinZip, and WordPerfect are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the U.S., and/or other countries. Other product, font, and company names and logos may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 117080 Contents Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Installing Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing startup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with trial versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Corel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Connect to technical design assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Exchange files seamlessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Create technical illustrations with confidence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Publish to technical communication standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Use color with certainty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Create graphics for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Learn about Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Learning resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Help and tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips and tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro programming guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network deployment guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web-based resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customized training and integration resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 22 25 26 26 27 27 27 28 Corel DESIGNER workspace tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Corel DESIGNER terms and concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Contents i Corel DESIGNER application window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Corel DESIGNER workspace tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Corel DESIGNER basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Understanding vector graphics and bitmaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Starting and opening drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Zooming, panning, and scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Previewing drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Choosing viewing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Working with views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Saving drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Backing up and recovering files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Adding and accessing drawing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Closing drawings and quitting Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Finding and managing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Exploring Corel CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Browsing and searching for content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Viewing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Using and managing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Working with precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Using gravity snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Using dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Using constrain keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Using object coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Working with templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Searching for templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Creating templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Using saved templates to create files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Editing templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Loading styles from other templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ii Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Collaborating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Using CorelDRAW ConceptShare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Lines, shapes, and outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Setting the default property values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing multiple line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing connector lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting lines and outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding arrowheads to lines and curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying linear-pattern brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spraying linear patterns along a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 128 135 135 139 144 149 153 156 159 160 Drawing shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Drawing rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing polygons and stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing predefined shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing by using shape recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 169 171 172 173 174 Shaping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Working with curve objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shaping curve objects by using Reflect Nodes mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners of curve objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding and intersecting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating new objects from boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 177 184 184 190 192 195 196 197 iii Smudging objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Roughening objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Applying distortion effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Shaping objects by using envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Reference: Shaping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Understanding projected drawing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Using projected drawing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Customizing drawing profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Objects, symbols, and layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Working with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Selecting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Changing object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Copying object properties, transformations, and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Cloning objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Moving objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Sizing and scaling objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Rotating objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Flipping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Skewing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Aligning and distributing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Changing the order of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Grouping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Combining objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Locking objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Finding and replacing objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Accessing and displaying geometric information about objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Inserting bar codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 iv Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Using symbols in drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing collections and libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, editing, and deleting symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing symbols between drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference: Working with symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 253 254 257 258 Creating objects for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Exporting bitmaps for the Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and applying Web presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting objects with transparent colors and backgrounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding bookmarks and hyperlinks to documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding hotspots and alternate text to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 269 269 271 273 275 Working with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Creating layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Changing layer properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Moving and copying layers and objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Object linking and embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Inserting linked or embedded objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Editing linked or embedded objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Working with object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Setting up the project database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Managing object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Applying CGM data to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Color and fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Working with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Understanding color models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding color depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Document palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 305 308 309 319 v Creating and editing custom color palettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Organizing and displaying color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Displaying or hiding color palettes in the Palette libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Setting the properties of color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Filling objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Applying uniform fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Applying fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Applying hatch fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Applying pattern fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Applying texture fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Applying PostScript texture fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Applying mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Applying fills to areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Working with fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Working with graphics, text, and color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Creating, applying, and editing graphics styles or text styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Customizing the Graphic and Text Styles docker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Creating and applying color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Editing and sorting color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Moving and copying color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Using color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Understanding color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Getting started with color management in Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Installing, loading, and embedding color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Assigning color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Converting colors to other color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Choosing color-conversion settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Soft proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Working with color management presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Working with color management policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Managing colors when opening documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Managing colors when importing and pasting files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Managing colors for print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 vi Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Using a safe CMYK workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Managing colors for online viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Adding 3D effects to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Contouring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying perspective to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blending objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 397 399 404 407 410 Changing the transparency of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Applying transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Applying merge modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Using lenses with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Applying lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Editing lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Adding and formatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Adding text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoding text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the basic properties of text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding, editing, and converting text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spacing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting and rotating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting text to a path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hyphenating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 429 433 433 434 438 440 443 446 447 448 451 455 vii Combining and linking paragraph text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Wrapping paragraph text around objects, artistic text, and text frames . . . . . . 461 Embedding graphics and adding special characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Inserting formatting codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Displaying nonprinting characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Working with Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Formatting Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Using line-breaking rules for Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Managing fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Substituting fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Previewing and displaying fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Using writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Using QuickCorrect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Using the spelling checker and Grammatik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Using the thesaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Working with languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Customizing the writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Using checking styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Using rule classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Analyzing a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Using word lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Checking statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Reference: Using writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Pages and layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Working with pages and layout tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Specifying the page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Choosing a page background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Adding, duplicating, renaming, and deleting pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Using the rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Calibrating the rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Setting up the grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 viii Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Setting up guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Setting the drawing scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Working with tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Adding tables to drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting, moving, and navigating table components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting and deleting table rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing table cells, rows, and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting tables and cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with text in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting tables to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging and splitting tables and cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating tables as objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding images, graphics, and backgrounds to tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing tables in a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 523 526 527 529 531 532 533 535 535 536 Bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Working with bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Converting vector graphics to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cropping bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the dimensions and resolution of bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straightening bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying special effects in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with colors in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Image Adjustment Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Tone Curve filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforming color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing bitmaps with Corel PHOTO-PAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 541 544 544 545 546 548 550 551 553 554 561 564 565 566 ix Working with bitmap color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Changing the color mode of bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Changing bitmaps to black-and-white images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Changing bitmaps to duotones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Tracing bitmaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 PowerTRACE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Previewing traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Fine tuning traced results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Adjusting colors in traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Setting default tracing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Tips for tracing bitmaps and editing traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Working with RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Using RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Bringing RAW camera files into Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Adjusting the color and tone of RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Sharpening and reducing noise in RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Previewing RAW camera files and obtaining image information . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Printing basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Printing your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 Laying out print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 Previewing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Applying print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 Fine-tuning print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Printing colors accurately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Printing to a PostScript printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Using print merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Viewing preflight summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 x Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Preparing files for print service providers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Preparing a print job for a print service provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing printers’ marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintaining OPI links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with color trapping and overprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying In-RIP trapping settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing to film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with a print service provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 626 629 632 633 635 639 642 643 File formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Importing and exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Importing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 Working with 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Installing Deep Exploration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Importing 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Exporting to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Exporting documents as PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . Reducing the size of PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with text and fonts in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying an encoding format for PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a viewing option for EPS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying color management options for exporting PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting security options for PDF files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing preflight summaries for PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing PDF files for a print provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 659 663 664 666 669 669 670 671 673 675 676 xi Working with office productivity applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 Importing files from office productivity applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Exporting files to office productivity applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Adding objects to documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Exporting to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Setting preferences for exporting images to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Creating Web-compatible text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 Previewing and verifying files before exporting to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Exporting to HTML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 Supported file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Adobe Illustrator (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 Windows Bitmap (BMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 OS/2 Bitmap (BMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 CorelDRAW (CDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 Corel Symbol Library (CSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Cursor Resource (CUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Microsoft Word (DOC, DOCX, or RTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 Microsoft Publisher (PUB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 Corel DESIGNER (DES, DSF, DS4, or DRW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) and AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707 PostScript (PS or PRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716 JPEG (JPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 JPEG 2000 (JP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 PICT (PCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 xii Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide PaintBrush (PCX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPGL Plotter File (PLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable Network Graphics (PNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adobe Photoshop (PSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corel Painter (RIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macromedia Flash (SWF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TARGA (TGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrueType Font (TTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visio (VSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WordPerfect Document (WPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAW camera file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows Metafile Format (WMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional file formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended formats for importing graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended formats for exporting graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General notes on importing text files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 724 727 729 730 732 733 739 740 741 742 743 743 744 745 745 746 746 748 749 749 Customizing and automating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Setting basic preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753 Disabling warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Viewing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754 Customizing Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755 Saving defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using multiple workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 755 756 758 761 763 xiii Customizing the property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Customizing the status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Customizing feedback sounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 Customizing filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 Customizing file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 Using macros to automate tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .775 Working with macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Comparing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 xiv Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Getting started Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Learning resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Corel DESIGNER workspace tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Corel DESIGNER basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Finding and managing content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Working with precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Working with templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Collaborating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 1 Welcome Corel DESIGNER® is a precision graphics application that is created to meet the demands of technical illustrators. Its intuitive user interface lets you get started quickly to produce professional results. This section contains the following topics: • Installing Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite applications • Changing languages • Changing startup settings • Registering Corel products • Working with trial versions • Updating Corel products • Corel Support Services • About Corel Installing Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite applications The installation wizard makes it easy to install Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite applications and components. You can choose a typical installation to quickly install the suite, or you can customize the installation by choosing different options. You can also use the installation wizard to do the following: • modify the current installation by adding or deleting components • repair the current installation by reinstalling all application features • uninstall Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite Repairing an installation is helpful when you encounter problems in using the application, or when you suspect that the installation is corrupt. Before repairing an installation, try resetting the current workspace to the default settings by holding down F8 while starting the application. Welcome 3 To install Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite applications 1 Close all applications, including all virus detection programs. 2 Insert the DVD in the DVD drive. (Windows® 7 and Windows Vista®) If the installation wizard does not start automatically, click Start on the Windows® taskbar, and type X:\autorun.exe in the search box, where X is the letter that corresponds to the DVD drive. (Windows® XP) If the installation wizard does not start automatically, click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run. Type X:\autorun.exe, where X is the letter that corresponds to the DVD drive. 3 Read the license agreement, and then enable the I accept the terms in the license agreement check box. 4 Click Next. 5 Type your name in the User name text box. 6 Type your serial number in the Serial number text box. The serial number is not case-sensitive. 7 Click Next. 8 Follow the installation wizard instructions for installing the software. To modify or repair a Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite installation 1 Close all applications. 2 On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control panel. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Click Uninstall a program. • (Windows XP) Click Add or remove programs. 4 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Double-click Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite on the Uninstall or change a program page. • (Windows XP) In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite from the list, and click Change/Remove. 5 Follow the instructions that appear. 4 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To uninstall Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite 1 On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control Panel. 2 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Click Uninstall a program. • (Windows XP) Click Add or remove programs. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Double-click Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite on the Uninstall or change a program page. • (Windows XP) In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite from the list, and click Change/Remove. 4 Enable the Remove option in the wizard that appears, and follow the instructions. To completely uninstall the product by removing user files, such as presets, usercreated fills, and customized files, enable the Remove user files check box. Changing languages If an application has been installed in more than one language, you can change the language of the user interface and Help at any time. If you did not install a specific Writing Tools language when you first installed the product, you can do so now. To change the language of the user interface and Help 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, click Global. 3 Choose a language from the Select the language for the user interface list box. If you want to change the language of the user interface and Help when you start the application, enable the Ask me the next time the software starts check box. 4 Restart the application. To add a language for Writing Tools 1 Close any open applications. 2 On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control panel. Welcome 5 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Click Uninstall a program. • (Windows XP) Click Add or remove programs. 4 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Double-click Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite on the Uninstall or change a program page. • (Windows XP) Choose Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite from the Currently installed programs list. 5 Click Change/Remove. 6 On the feature tab, click Writing tools, and enable the check box next to the language that you want to install. 7 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard. Changing startup settings You can specify the startup settings for Corel DESIGNER, which control how the application appears when it’s opened. For example, you can start the application with the Welcome screen open or a new blank document. To change startup settings 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click General. 3 In the Getting started area, choose an option from the On Corel DESIGNER X5 start-up list box. If you want to hide the Create a new document dialog box when starting documents, disable the Show new document dialog box check box. Registering Corel products Registering Corel® products is important. Registration provides you with timely access to the latest product updates, valuable information about product releases, and access to free downloads, articles, tips and tricks, and special offers. 6 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can register in one of the following ways: • online — If you are connected to the Internet, you can start online registration when you start the Corel graphics application. You can also register online at a later date by clicking Help Registration. If no Internet connection is detected, a list of options appears in a dialog box. • by phone — You can call the Corel Customer Service Center nearest you. For more information about customer service, see “Corel Support Services” on page 8. Working with trial versions You can download free trial versions of Corel graphics applications from the Corel Web site. Trial versions let you use all the application features and tools for free, for a limited time. After the trial period expires, you can access only limited functionality. For example, you can open and view files, but you cannot save or export them. If you want to purchase the application, you can buy a purchase key online that supplies you with a serial number. You do not need to download another copy of the application. To purchase the full version 1 In the trial message window, click Buy now. If the trial version has not expired, the trial message window appears when you quit the application. If the trial version has expired, the window appears when you start the application. 2 In the Corel store window, choose an option, and follow the directions. You can choose to buy a purchase key, or you can choose to buy a boxed version of the application. If you are not connected to the Internet, the Corel store window is not displayed. Instead, you are prompted to purchase the full version by phone or to purchase it online by first activating your Internet connection. Updating Corel products During product installation, you can choose the option to download product updates and service packs. After installing the product, you can view information about product updates by clicking Help Updates. Welcome 7 By default, you are automatically notified when product updates and news become available. In addition, the application automatically downloads new product updates and asks you for permission to install them. However, you can change the update settings at any time. To change the update settings 1 Click Help Welcome screen. 2 Click Settings at the top of the Update page. 3 In the Update settings window, enable or disable either of the following check boxes: • Notify me of available product updates, news, and tutorials. • Automatically download product updates and ask me before installing. Corel Support Services Corel® Support Services can provide you with prompt and accurate information about product features, specifications, pricing, availability, services, and technical support. For the most current information on support services available for your Corel product, please visit www.corel.com/support. About Corel Corel is one of the world’s top software companies, with more than 100 million active users in over 75 countries. We develop software that helps people express their ideas and share their stories in more exciting, creative, and persuasive ways. Through the years, we’ve built a reputation for delivering innovative, trusted products that are easy to learn and use, helping people achieve new levels of productivity. The industry has responded with hundreds of awards for software innovation, design, and value. Our award-winning product portfolio includes some of the world’s most widely recognized and popular software brands, including CorelDRAW® Graphics Suite, Corel® Painter™, Corel DESIGNER® Technical Suite, Corel® PaintShop Photo® Pro, Corel® VideoStudio®, Corel® WinDVD®, Corel® WordPerfect® Office, WinZip® and the recently released Corel® Digital Studio™ 2010. Our global headquarters are in Ottawa, Canada, with major offices in the United States, United Kingdom, Germany, China, Taiwan, and Japan. 8 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? The new and enhanced features of Corel DESIGNER X5 are described in the following topics: • Connect to technical design assets • Exchange files seamlessly • Create technical illustrations with confidence • Publish to technical communication standards • Use color with certainty • Create graphics for the Web • Learn about Corel DESIGNER Connect to technical design assets Content is central to any project. Whether it’s the perfect font, clipart, photo, a previous project, or a client’s mockup, Corel DESIGNER helps you quickly access content so that you can focus on your design. Corel CONNECT (New and enhanced) Corel® CONNECT™ is a full-screen browser that lets you peruse the suite’s digital content and search your computer or local network to quickly find and incorporate images in your technical drawings. You can browse content by category or search for content by using a keyword. This handy utility is also available as a docker within Corel DESIGNER. What’s more, you can keep a collection of content in the tray, which is synchronized between the browser and the dockers to provide quick access to project content. What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? 9 Corel CONNECT is available as a docker in Corel DESIGNER and as a standalone application. Color Palette Manager docker (Enhanced) The enhanced Color palette manager docker, which includes new and more accurate PANTONE® palettes, makes it easier to create, organize, and show or hide both default and custom color palettes. You can create Web-specific RGB palettes or printspecific CMYK palettes. For optimal color consistency, you can also add third-party color palettes when working with multiple applications. 10 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The enhanced Color palette manager docker lets you create and organize custom palettes. Exchange files seamlessly Corel DESIGNER gives you an integrated solution for working with and saving files to different formats. Adobe product support (Enhanced) With support for multiple artboards, preservation of gradient transparency, blob brush strokes, and a new Preflight section, you can also import files using the Adobe® Illustrator® CS 5 file format and export files to the Adobe Illustrator CS 4 file format. When you import and export PSD files using the Adobe® Photoshop® CS4 file format, Corel DESIGNER preserves the appearance of adjustment layers and Masks palette effects. What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? 11 In addition, you can import and export Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) files, with support for Acrobat® 9 and heightened security encryption. When importing PDF files, the suite also supports Bates numbering, including headers and footers. During PDF export, you can define page size by object. Windows Touch support (New) The suite looks right at home on Windows 7 — you can navigate each application workspace by using finger gestures. Support for taskbar thumbnails lets you switch between open documents quickly. If your computer supports Windows Touch, you can use finger gestures to navigate the application workspace. EPS level 3 support (Enhanced) The encapsulated PostScript® (EPS) filter has been enhanced to support files created with Adobe® PostScript® 3 and to preserve the color integrity of objects that use an RGB color space or a LAB color space. You’ll now find that EPS files export and print with brighter and more vivid colors. VSTA integration (New) For more automation flexibility, you can now use Microsoft® Visual Studio® Tools for Applications to create dynamic add-ins. Multi-core support (New) The suite takes advantage of the multithreading capabilities of modern processors, splitting resource-consuming tasks to improve performance and efficiency. 12 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide File format compatibility (Enhanced) With support for more than 60 file formats, including AutoCAD®, AutoCAD® DWG™, DXF™, PLT, Microsoft® Visio® Filter, DOC, DOCX, RTF, and more, you can confidently exchange files with customers and colleagues. The TIFF filter provides greater compatibility with a variety of standard file compression methods and multipage files. Create technical illustrations with confidence The suite provides significant new and enhanced features to help you create technical drawings. Preserved rectangle corner integrity with true radii (Enhanced) Now you can create chamfered, scalloped, or round corners from the Rectangle tool options property bar. When you stretch or scale a rectangle, the rounded corners are preserved without distortion, and you have the option of maintaining the original corner radius. In addition, corners are now expressed in units of true radii, which makes them easier to work with. You can quickly create rectangles with round, scalloped, and chamfered corners from the Rectangle tool options on the property bar. What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? 13 Document palette (New) With Corel DESIGNER X5, a custom color palette is automatically created on the fly for each design project. The palette is saved with the file, which gives you quick access to this project’s colors in the future. A custom color palette is created on the fly for each design project. Corel PowerTRACE X5 (Enhanced) You can convert bitmaps into editable vector graphics and achieve smoother curves and more accurate results. This version of Corel® PowerTRACE™ produces the best results yet. Corel PowerTRACE X5 provides greatly improved trace results. 14 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Mesh Fill tool (Enhanced) The new Mesh Fill smoothing and transparency controls allow you to reproduce object surfaces with more precision. The new Transparency option lets you reveal objects behind individual nodes. With the new Smooth mesh color option on the property bar, you can achieve more realistic color transitions. Any colors added to the mesh nodes now blend seamlessly with the rest of the object. In addition, the number of nodes per mesh has been greatly reduced to make the objects easier to manipulate. Improved interpolation and new node transparency extend the possibilities of the Mesh fill tool. Join Curves docker (New) Corel DESIGNER now includes a Join Curves docker that lets you quickly transform selected line segments into a closed object. Joining multiple line segments can be the starting point for a more complex drawing. What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? 15 Publish to technical communication standards Corel DESIGNER provides support for industry standard file formats to meet your technical publishing requirements. WebCGM support (Enhanced) The WebCGM file format now supports the 2.0, 2.1 and S1000D profiles — to allow you to create, interchange, and deliver standardized technical graphics. Work with 3D models using Right Hemisphere Deep Exploration 6 CSE (Enhanced) Right Hemisphere® Deep Exploration™ 6 CSE is a 3D-visualization application that lets you access and view existing 3D models. When you open a 3D model in Deep Exploration, you can choose a specific view, such as parallel or perspective projected view, then output the view to Corel DESIGNER as a 2D vector illustration or to Corel® PHOTO-PAINT™ as photo-realistic bitmap rendering. You can also use Deep Exploration to create cross sections and animations for assembly manuals. Output a 3D view to Corel DESIGNER as a 2D vector illustration. Deep Exploration CSE supports DWG, DXF, DWF, 3DS, SKP (SketchUp), VRML and a few additional 3D file formats. Use color with certainty Corel DESIGNER X5 makes it easier than ever to achieve accurate color representation. Whether you’re importing a client’s mockup, working with previous designs, or sending a project to a print shop or manufacturing facility, you can be certain that your colors are true. 16 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Default Color Management Settings dialog box (New) For Corel DESIGNER X5, the color management engine has been completely redesigned. The new Default color management settings dialog box lets you set application color policies to help you achieve accurate color representation while providing greater control for advanced users. Corel DESIGNER X5 features a completely redesigned color management engine. Document Color Settings dialog box (New) The Document color settings dialog box lets you adjust color settings that apply only to the current document. Primary Color Mode setting (New) While continuing to support RGB, CMYK, and grayscale objects within the same document, Corel DESIGNER X5 provides a new Primary color mode setting, which governs the default color mode on export and the default palette colors (RGB or CMYK). Corel DESIGNER X5 provides a new Primary color mode setting. What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? 17 Color Proof Settings docker (New and enhanced) All color proof settings are grouped within a single docker, which lets you save presets and prepare artwork for various output devices more efficiently. The docker helps you save time by providing a list of output devices which you can choose from to preview the output. When seeking approval from clients, you can also easily export soft proofs and print hard proofs from the docker. With the Color proof settings docker, you can proof your document as you go. Color sampling options (New) The addition of the Eyedropper tool to various color dialog boxes lets you conveniently sample and match colors from a document without closing the dialog box. The Eyedropper tool is also available on color palettes, as well as in color pickers on the property bar. You can quickly and easily sample colors from a document. 18 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Application of sampled color (Enhanced) When you sample color with the Eyedropper tool in Corel DESIGNER, the Apply color mode is automatically activated so that you can immediately apply the sampled color to another object. You can also drag a color directly from one object to another. Create graphics for the Web Hex color values (Enhanced) The suite now provides multiple options for viewing hexadecimal (hex) color values and lets you choose colors by using their hex value. Web designers often specify colors in standard hex format, which ensures consistent color representation. With Corel DESIGNER X5, you can view hex values in the Uniform fill dialog box, in the Eyedropper tooltip, in the Color docker, and on the status bar. With Corel DESIGNER X5, you can view hex values. Centralized Web export controls (New) The new Export for Web dialog box provides a single access point for common export controls, eliminating the need to open additional dialog boxes when preparing a file for export. It also lets you compare the results of various filter settings before you commit to an output format, making it easier to achieve optimal results. In addition, you can What’s new in Corel DESIGNER X5? 19 specify object transparencies and matting colors for anti-aliased edges — all with realtime preview. You can also select and edit color palettes for indexed formats. You can fine-tune your Web output while previewing the changes in real time. Improved support for Web formats (Enhanced) The suite now provides optimization filters that produce consistent, high-quality Web output. In addition, more comprehensive transparency controls let you easily manipulate transparency on the fly. Learn about Corel DESIGNER Whether you’re a new or current user, Corel DESIGNER makes it easy to get started. The suite provides many learning aids, including enhanced tooltips to provide assistance while you draw. Tooltips (Enhanced) The formatting and content of tooltips have been enhanced to improve readability and provide more information. When you position the pointer over an icon or a button, a tooltip appears describing the tool and its purpose. Create a New Document/Image dialog boxes (New and enhanced) Corel DESIGNER X5 introduces a Create a new document dialog box, which provides a selection of presets for page size, document resolution, preview mode, color mode, and color profile. For new users, the Description area clarifies the available controls and settings. 20 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Learning resources You can learn to use the product in various ways: by accessing the Help and tooltips; by completing tutorials, and by exploring the resources on the Corel Web site (www.corel.com). On the Web site, you can access tips, additional tutorials, and training and integration resources. You can also check the Readme file (readme.html), which is installed with the software. This section contains the following topics: • Getting help • Using the Help and tooltips • Welcome screen • CorelTUTOR • Tips and tricks • Macro programming guide • Network deployment guide • Web-based resources • Customized training and integration resources Getting help Various learning resources are available. The following table can help you decide what learning resources to consult when you need assistance. You can access more information about some resources by clicking the corresponding links. To See Start learning the applications CorelTUTOR™ Obtain additional information about product tools and features Help Web-based resources Tips and tricks Learning resources 21 To See Learn to automate tasks by using macros Macro programming guide Find information about deploying the suite on a network Network deployment guide Find information about customized training and workflow solutions Customized training and integration resources Find specific information about the latest version of the suite Readme file, which is installed with the software Using the Help and tooltips The Help provides comprehensive information about product features from within the program. You can browse through the entire list of topics, look up tools and topics in the index, or search the Help for a specific word or phrase. You can also access the Corel® Knowledge Base™ on the Corel Web site and other online resources from the Help window. The Help is available as a user guide in PDF format and can be accessed through the Start menu on the Windows taskbar. Tooltips provide helpful information about application controls when you position the pointer over icons, buttons, and other user interface elements. Documentation conventions The following table describes important conventions used in the user guide and Help. Convention Description Examples Menu Menu command A menu item and menu command that you need to click in sequence Click File Open. 22 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Convention Description Examples A note contains important information that is relevant to the preceding steps. It may describe conditions under which the procedure can be performed. A compound blend cannot be copied or cloned. A tip contains suggestions for performing the preceding steps. It may present alternatives to the steps, or other benefits or uses of the procedure. Trimming an object can reduce the drawing file size. If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes. You can change the number of swatches in the color grid by dragging the Size slider. To use the Help 1 Click Help Help topics. 2 Click one of the following tabs: • Contents — lets you browse through topics in the Help. To open a topic, click the topic heading in the left pane. • Index — lets you use the index to find a topic. Use the scroll bar to browse, or type a word or phrase in the search box to find a particular index entry. • Search — lets you search the full text of the Help for a particular word or phrase You can also View context-sensitive Help from within a dialog box Click the Help button in the dialog box. Print a specific Help topic Open a Help topic, click the page that you want to print, and click Print at the top of the Help window. Access the Corel Knowledge Base and other online resources Click Resources at the top of the Help window. To search the Help 1 Click Help Help topics. Learning resources 23 2 Click the Search tab, and type a word or phrase in the search box. For example, if you are looking for information about the RGB color mode, you can type “RGB” to display a list of relevant topics. To search for a phrase, type the phrase, and enclose it in quotation marks (for example, type “dynamic guides” or “color mode”). 3 Click the List topics button. 4 Choose a topic from the list that appears, and press Enter. If your search results do not include any relevant topics, check whether you spelled the search word or phrase correctly. Note that the English Help uses American spelling (for example, “color,” “favorite,” “center,” and “rasterize”), so searching for British spellings (“colour,” “favourite,” “centre,” and “rasterise”) produces no results. You can also Search for a word or phrase in a list of topics generated by the previous search Enable the Search previous results check box. Search for all forms of a word Enable the Match similar words check box. For example, if you type “blend” and enable this check box, the search results will include topics that contain the words “blends” and “blending.” Search only the titles of Help topics Enable the Search titles only check box. Repeat a recently performed search On the search box, click the arrow that points down, and choose a word or phrase. 24 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Search by using the Boolean operators AND, OR, NEAR, or NOT Type a search term in the box, and click the flyout arrow that points to the right. Choose a Boolean operator from the following list, type another search term in the search box, and press Enter. AND — lets you find topics that contain all search terms in the search box OR — lets you find topics that contain at least one of the words in the search box NEAR — lets you find topics in which the search terms appear close to each other. NEAR provides more results than when you use only a phrase search, and more relevant results than when you search for individual words. NOT — lets you find topics that contain the search term you type before NOT and that do not contain the search term you type after NOT. To access the user guide in PDF format • On the Windows Start menu, click Start All Programs Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 Documentation Corel DESIGNER User Guide PDF. Welcome screen The Welcome screen gives you easy access to application resources and lets you quickly complete common tasks, such as opening files and starting files from templates. You can find out about the new features in Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite and view technical illustration samples on the Gallery page. In addition, you can access tutorials and tips, and receive the latest product updates. The Welcome screen appears when you start Corel DESIGNER. You can also access the Welcome screen after starting the application. Learning resources 25 To access the Welcome screen • Click Help Welcome screen. To view and access the available resources, click the tabs. Welcome screen CorelTUTOR CorelTUTOR provides a series of project-based tutorials that introduce you to basic and advanced features of Corel DESIGNER. To access CorelTUTOR • Click Help CorelTUTOR. Tips and tricks Quick tips highlight useful tools and shortcuts, and give you a starting point for exploring some of the Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite features. To access Tips and tricks 1 Click Help Welcome screen. 26 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The Welcome screen appears. 2 Click the Learning tools tab, and click Tips & tricks. Macro programming guide The Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 Macro Programming Guide provides a streamlined instructional approach to programming macros for Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5. You can use either Microsoft® Visual Basic® for Applications (VBA) or Microsoft® Visual Studio® Tools for Applications (VSTA) to create macros that automate tasks and provide customized solutions for Corel DESIGNER, CorelDRAW®, and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. To access the macro programming guide • On the Windows Start menu, click Start All Programs Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 Documentation Macro Programming Guide PDF. Network deployment guide The Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 Deployment Guide is a step-by-step resource for deploying Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 to a network. This guide is provided to customers who purchase a volume (“multi-seat”) license of Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 for their organization. To purchase a volume license of the software and obtain its deployment guide, please contact Corel Support Services. Web-based resources The following Web-based resources can help you get the most out of Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite: • Corel Knowledge Base — articles written by the Corel Technical Support Services Team in response to questions by Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite users • CorelDRAW.com community — an online environment to share your experience with the product, ask questions, and receive help and suggestions from other users • Learning resources — a Web page that contains links to online tutorials, case studies, and more Learning resources 27 An active Internet connection is required to access Web-based resources. Customized training and integration resources Corel Corporation has training partnerships with other firms. Corel customized training Corel Training Specialists can provide you with customized training, tailored to your work environment, to help you get the most out of the Corel software that you’ve installed. These experts will help you develop a curriculum that is practical and relevant to the needs of your organization. For more information, please visit www.corel.com/customizedtraining. Corel Training Partners A Corel® Training Partner (CTP) is an independent, officially accredited local organization that provides training for Corel products. CTPs are located worldwide for your convenience. Please visit www.corel.com/trainingpartners to find a partner near you. Corel Technology Partners Corel Technology Partners are businesses that embed Corel technology in their products, develop plug-in applications for Corel software, or integrate standalone applications into Corel technology solutions. This comprehensive program is designed especially for developers and consultants. It includes the components that are necessary to design, develop, test, and market custom solutions related to Corel products. For more information about Corel Technology Partners, please e-mail Corel Corporation at techpartner@corel.com. 28 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Corel DESIGNER workspace tour Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of Corel DESIGNER will help you easily follow this user guide’s concepts and procedures. This section contains the following topics: • Corel DESIGNER terms and concepts • Corel DESIGNER application window • Corel DESIGNER workspace tools Corel DESIGNER terms and concepts Before you get started with Corel DESIGNER, you should be familiar with the following terms. Term Description object An element in a drawing, such as an image, shape, line, text, curve, or symbol drawing The work you create in Corel DESIGNER: for example, technical drawings, schematics, and diagrams vector graphic An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn bitmap An image composed of grids of pixels or dots artistic text A type of text to which you can apply special effects, such as shadows paragraph text A type of text to which you can apply formatting options, and which can be edited in large blocks Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 29 Corel DESIGNER application window When you launch Corel DESIGNER, the application window opens, containing a drawing window. The rectangle in the center of the drawing window is the drawing page where you create your drawing. Although more than one drawing window can be opened, you can apply commands to the active drawing window only. The Corel DESIGNER application window appears below. A description of its parts follows. Toolbar Title bar Menu bar Property bar Toolbox Ruler Docker Drawing window Drawing page Document navigator Color palette Status bar Navigator Part Description Menu bar The area containing pull-down menu options Property bar A detachable bar that contains properties of the active tool or object. For example, when the text tool is active, the text property bar displays commands that create and edit text. 30 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Part Description Toolbar A detachable bar that contains shortcuts to menu and other commands Title bar The area displaying the title of the currently open drawing Rulers Horizontal and vertical borders that are used to determine the size and position of objects in a drawing Toolbox A floating bar with tools for creating and modifying objects in the drawing Drawing window The area outside the drawing page bordered by the scroll bars and application controls Drawing page The rectangular area inside the drawing window. It is the printable area of your work area. Docker A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task Color palette A dockable bar that contains color swatches Document palette A color palette that helps you keep track of the colors that you use in your document by storing them for future use. Status bar An area at the bottom of the application window that contains information about object properties such as type, size, and resolution. The status bar also shows the current mouse position. Document navigator The area at the bottom left of the drawing window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages Navigator A button at the bottom-right corner of the drawing window that opens a smaller display to help you move around a drawing To toggle between displaying and hiding the status bar, click View Toolbars Status bar. To toggle between displaying and hiding the rulers, see “To hide or display the rulers” on page 512. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 31 Corel DESIGNER workspace tools Application commands are accessible through the menu bar, toolbars, toolbox, property bar, and dockers. The property bar and dockers provide access to commands that relate to the active tool or current task. The property bar, dockers, toolbars, and toolbox can be opened, closed, and moved around your screen at any time. You can customize many of these workspace tools to suit your needs. For more information, see “Customizing Corel DESIGNER” on page 755. Standard toolbar The standard toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts to many of the menu commands. The standard toolbar is displayed by default. For information about customizing the position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see “Customizing toolbars” on page 763. Click this button To Start a new drawing Open a drawing Save a drawing Print a drawing Cut selected objects to the Clipboard Copy selected objects to the Clipboard Paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing Undo an action Restore an action that was undone 32 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Click this button To Import a drawing Export a drawing Set a zoom level Start Corel applications Open the Welcome screen Enable or disable automatic alignment for the grid, guidelines, objects, and dynamic guides Open the Options dialog box More about toolbars In addition to the standard toolbar, Corel DESIGNER has toolbars for specific kinds of tasks. For example, the Text toolbar contains commands relevant to using the Text tool. If you use a toolbar frequently, you can display it in the workspace at all times. The table below describes toolbars other than the standard toolbar. Toolbar Description Text Contains commands for formatting and aligning text Zoom Contains commands for zooming in and out of a drawing page Internet Contains commands for Web-related tools for creating rollovers and publishing to the Internet Print Merge Contains commands for print merge items that combine text with a drawing, such as creating and loading data files, data fields for variable text, and inserting print merge fields Transform Contains commands for skewing, rotating, and mirroring objects Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 33 Toolbar Description Macros Contains commands for editing, testing, and running macros Drawing plane Contains commands for choosing a drawing plane and a drawing profile, and lets you access the Projected axes docker. This toolbar is displayed by default. Exploring the toolbox The Corel DESIGNER toolbox shows the active tool and the available categories of tools in the upper area. The options symbol indicates that there are additional tools or options. When you choose a tool, any additional tools or options appear in the options area at the bottom of the toolbox. When you choose a tool in the options area, it becomes the active tool. For example, if you click the Curve tools button in the upper area, you see its associated tools in the options area. If you click the 2-point line tool in the options area, it 34 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide becomes the active tool, and its icon appears on the Curve tools button in the upper area. You can use flyout menus instead of the options area. Click Tools Options, click Toolbox in the Workspace list of categories, and enable Display tool groups as flyout menus. The following table provides descriptions of the tools in the Corel DESIGNER toolbox. Pick tool The Pick tool lets you select, size, skew, and rotate objects. Shape tools The Shape tool lets you edit a curve object or text character by manipulating nodes. The Free transform tool lets you transform an object by using the Free rotation, Free angle reflection, Free scale, and Free skew controls on the property bar. The Smudge brush tool lets you distort a vector object by dragging along its outline. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 35 The Roughen brush tool lets you distort the edge of a vector object by dragging along its outline. Curve tools The 2-point line tool lets you draw a straight two-point line segment. The Multi-point line tool lets you draw lines and curves one segment at a time, in preview mode. The Freehand tool lets you draw single line segments and curves. The Bézier curve tool lets you draw curves one segment at a time. 36 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The B-spline tool lets you draw curved lines by setting control points that shape the curve without breaking it into segments. The 3-point curve tool lets you draw a curve by defining the starting point, endpoint, and center point. The Pen tool lets you draw curves in segments, and preview each segment as you draw. The Smart drawing tool converts your freehand strokes to basic shapes and smoothed curves. Rectangle tools The 2-point rectangle tool lets you draw a rectangle by dragging diagonally. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 37 The 3-point rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles at an angle. The Graph paper tool lets you draw a grid to simulate graph paper. Circle tools The Center-point circle tool lets you draw a circle by specifying the center point and a point on the circumference. The Center-radius circle tool lets you draw a circle by specifying a value for the radius and then clicking where you want the center to be. The 3-point circle tool lets you draw a circle by specifying three points on the circumference. 38 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Ellipse tools The 2-point ellipse tool lets you draw an ellipse by dragging diagonally. The 3-point ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses at an angle. Center-point polygon tools The Center-point polygon tool lets you draw a polygon by dragging from the center to a point (vertex) on the polygon. The Star tool lets you draw perfect stars. The Complex star tool lets you draw complex stars that have intersecting sides. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 39 Text tool The Text tool lets you add text, create a paragraph text frame and type within it, or type text along a path if a curve is selected. Dimension tools The Parallel dimension tool lets you draw slanted dimension lines. The Horizontal or vertical dimension tool lets you draw horizontal or vertical dimension lines. The Angular dimension tool lets you draw angular dimension lines. The Segment dimension tool lets you display the distance between end nodes in single or multiple segments. 40 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The Radial dimension tool lets you display the radius of a circle or circular arc. The Diametric dimension tool lets you display the diameter of a circle or a circular arc. Callout tools The 1-leg callout tool lets you draw a callout with one leading line. The 2-leg callout tool lets you draw a callout with a two-segment leading line. The 3-leg callout tool lets you draw a callout with a three-segment leading line. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 41 The Text source button lets you enter callout text interactively, from the Clipboard, from object properties, or incrementally. Connector tools The Straight-line connector tool lets you draw a straight connector line. The Right-angle connector tool lets you draw a rightangle connector line. The Round right-angle connector tool lets you draw a right-angle connector line with curved corners. The B-spline connector tool lets you draw a curved connector line by using control points. 42 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The Bézier curve connector tool lets you draw a curved connector line one segment at a time. The Edit anchor tool lets you modify connector line anchor points. Table tool The Table tool lets you draw and edit tables. Perfect Shapes™ tools The Basic shapes tool lets you choose from a full set of shapes, including a hexagram, a smiley, and a right-angle triangle. The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows while choosing the shape, direction, and number of heads. These controls are available on the property bar. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 43 The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw flowchart symbols. These controls are available on the property bar. The Miscellaneous shapes tool lets you draw ribbon objects and explosion shapes. These controls are available on the property bar. The Callout shapes tool lets you draw callouts and labels. These controls are available on the property bar. Linear pattern tools The Linear pattern brush tool lets you apply brush strokes to a curve and create sweep arrows and similar objects. The Linear pattern sprayer tool lets you draw chains, hoses, pipes, and similar objects. 44 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The Linear pattern preset tool lets you draw curves by using preset strokes. The Calligraphic tool lets you draw lines that vary in thickness according to the direction of the line and the angle of the pen nib. The Pressure tool lets you draw lines that vary in thickness according to the pressure of the pen nib. Interactive tools The Extrude tool lets you apply 3D effects to objects to create the illusion of depth. The Blend tool lets you transform one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes and colors. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 45 The Transparency tool lets you apply a transparency to an object to partially reveal image areas underneath. The Envelope tool lets you distort the shape of an object by applying an envelope to it and dragging the nodes of the envelope. The Drop shadow tool lets you create the illusion of lighting in a two-dimensional drawing by adding a shadow to an object. You can adjust properties such as feathering, opacity, edge style, and color. The Contour tool lets you create a series of concentric shapes that radiate into or out of an object. The Distort tool lets you transform objects by applying Push and Pull, Zipper, or Twister effects. 46 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Deletion tools The Virtual segment delete tool lets you delete portions of objects between intersecting lines. The Eraser tool lets you remove unwanted areas in a drawing. The Knife tool lets you slice an object into two separate objects. The Crop tool lets you remove the areas outside a selection. Interactive fill tools The Fountain fill tool lets you fill an object with a gradient of colors or shades. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 47 The Smart fill tool lets you create objects from enclosed areas and then apply a fill to those objects. The Mesh fill tool lets you fill an object by blending multiple colors or shades arranged over a mesh grid. Eyedropper tools The Color eyedropper tool lets you sample a color from an object in the drawing window or on the desktop and apply it to other objects. The Attributes eyedropper tool lets you copy object properties, such as line thickness, size, and effects, from an object in the drawing window and apply them to other objects. Zoom tool The Zoom tool lets you change the magnification level in the drawing window. 48 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Pan tool The Pan tool lets you drag hidden areas of a drawing into view without changing the zoom level. Property bar The property bar displays the most commonly used functions that are relevant to the active tool or to the task you’re performing. Although it looks like a toolbar, the property bar content changes depending on the tool or task. For example, when you click the Text tool in the toolbox, the property bar displays only text-related commands, such as text, formatting, alignment, and editing tools. You can customize the contents and position of the property bar to suit your needs. For more information, see “Customizing the property bar” on page 767. Common property bar buttons The Add preset button lets you save the current settings for reuse. The Delete preset button lets you delete the item selected in the Presets list box. The Fill button lets you open a dialog box where you set up a fill to apply to an object. The Outline pen button opens a dialog box where you set line properties. The Geometric properties button opens the Property manager docker and lets you set coordinates for the selected object. The Keep settings button lets you use the current settings as the defaults for new objects. Corel DESIGNER workspace tour 49 Dockers Dockers display the same type of controls as a dialog box, such as command buttons, options, and list boxes. Unlike most dialog boxes, you can keep dockers open while working on a document, so you can readily access the commands to experiment with different effects. An example is the Property manager docker. When this docker is open, you can click an object in the drawing window and view formatting, dimensions, and other properties of the object. Dockers can be either docked or floating. Docking a docker attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a docker detaches it from other parts of the workspace, so it can be easily moved around. You can also collapse dockers to save screen space. Status bar The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as width and height, cursor position, and relevant commands. While you are drawing a non-freehand line or curve, the segment length and total length for all segments are displayed. It also displays document color information, such as the document color profile and color proofing status. See “Customizing the status bar” on page 769 for information about customizing the contents and appearance of the status bar. The graphic shows some of the information displayed in a status bar. 50 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Corel DESIGNER basics Corel DESIGNER lets you create and edit drawings. In this section, you can find information about commonly performed tasks. This section contains the following topics: • Understanding vector graphics and bitmaps • Starting and opening drawings • Acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras • Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions • Zooming, panning, and scrolling • Previewing drawings • Choosing viewing modes • Working with views • Saving drawings • Backing up and recovering files • Adding and accessing drawing information • Closing drawings and quitting Corel DESIGNER Understanding vector graphics and bitmaps The two main types of computer graphics are vector graphics and bitmaps. Vector graphics are made of lines and curves, and they are generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Bitmaps, also known as raster images, are composed of small squares called pixels; each pixel is mapped to a location in an image and has numerical color values. Vector graphics are ideal for logos and illustrations because they are resolutionindependent and can be scaled to any size, or printed and displayed at any resolution, without losing detail and quality. In addition, you can produce sharp and crisp outlines with vector graphics. Corel DESIGNER basics 51 Bitmaps are excellent for photographs and digital paintings because they reproduce color gradations well. Bitmaps are resolution-dependent — that is, they represent a fixed number of pixels. They look good at their actual size, but they can appear jagged or lose image quality when scaled, or when displayed or printed at a resolution higher than their original resolution. You can create vector graphics in Corel DESIGNER. You can also import bitmaps (such as JPEG and TIFF files) into Corel DESIGNER and add them to your drawings. For information about working with bitmaps, see “Working with bitmaps” on page 541. Top: A vector graphic consists of lines and fills. Bottom: A bitmap is made up of pixels. Starting and opening drawings When you start Corel DESIGNER, you can choose the workspace with which you feel the most comfortable. For example, you can choose a workspace that has the look and feel of CorelDRAW. If you are new to Corel DESIGNER, it is best to choose the default workspace, on which all procedures in the Help and user guide are based. Corel DESIGNER lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, a template, or an existing drawing. A blank page gives you the freedom to specify every aspect of a drawing. A template provides you with a starting point and leaves the amount of 52 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide customization up to you. The templates included with the application are available under the following categories: • ANSI (American National Standards Institute) • Architectural • DIN (Deutsches Institut für Normung) • Engineering • ISO (International Organization for Standardization®) For more information about creating and using templates, see “Working with templates” on page 115. Notes for starting new drawings When starting a new drawing, Corel DESIGNER lets you specify page, document, and color management settings. You can choose from a list of preset settings, which are based on how you intend to use the drawing. For example, you can choose the Web option if you are creating a drawing for the Internet, or the Default CMYK option if you are creating a document destined for commercial printing. However, if the preset settings are not suitable for the drawing that you want to create, you can also customize the settings and save them for future use. Notes for opening existing drawings Basing a new drawing on an existing drawing lets you reuse objects and page settings. Corel DESIGNER lets you open existing drawings saved to the Corel DESIGNER (DSF or DES) format as well as drawings and projects saved to various other file formats, such as CorelDRAW (CDR), Adobe Illustrator (AI), Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF), Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), and Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM). However, you may not be able to open certain files, depending on their file type and contents. In such cases, you can try importing the files as objects in an open drawing. For information about the file formats that you can import into Corel DESIGNER, see “Supported file formats” on page 685. If the drawing you are opening is from an earlier version of Corel DESIGNER and contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, you can choose code page settings to ensure that text is properly converted according to the Unicode® Standard. Code page settings help you correctly display text such as keywords, file names, and text entries outside the drawing window — for example, in the Object manager and Object data manager dockers. To display text correctly in the drawing window, you must use encoding settings. For more information, see “Encoding text” on page 433. Corel DESIGNER basics 53 If the drawing you are opening contains an embedded International Color Consortium® (ICC) profile, the embedded color profile remains the document’s color profile. For more information, see “Understanding color management” on page 363. If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista, you can search for drawings by different criteria, such as filename, title, subject, author, keyword, comment, text within the file, and other properties attached to the file. For more information about searching for files with Windows 7 or Windows Vista, see the Windows Help. If your operating system is Windows XP, you can use Windows Desktop Search to find files. For more information about browsing and searching for content, see “Browsing and searching for content” on page 82. You can also display previous versions of a drawing. To start Corel DESIGNER 1 Click Start All programs Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 Corel DESIGNER X5. 2 In the Select workspace dialog box, choose a workspace from the list box. If you do not want the Select workspace dialog box to appear each time you start Corel DESIGNER, enable the Do not show this dialog box on startup check box. Procedures in the Help are based on the default workspace. To restore the Select workspace dialog box, click Tools Customization, click Workspace, and enable the Select workspace at startup check box. To start a drawing 1 Do one of the following: • On the Welcome screen, click Quick start New blank document. • In the application window, click File New. 2 Type a filename in the Name text box. 3 54 From the Preset destination list box, choose an output destination for the drawing: • Default CMYK — applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for commercial printing Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Corel DESIGNER Default — applies the Corel DESIGNER default settings for creating graphics that are destined for printing • Default RGB — applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for printing to a high-fidelity printer • Web — applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for the Internet • Custom — lets you customize destination settings for a document You can also Change the unit of measurement for the page Choose a unit of measurement from the Drawing units list box. Change the page size Choose a page size for the drawing from the Size list box or type values in the Width and Height boxes. Change the page orientation Click one of the following page orientation buttons: •Portrait •Landscape Set the default color mode for the document to RGB or CMYK Choose a color mode from the Primary color mode list box. Set the resolution for effects that will likely be rasterized, such as transparency, drop shadow, and bevel effects Choose a rendering resolution from the Rendering resolution list box. Choose the preview mode for the drawing Choose a preview mode from the Preview mode list box. Choose an RGB profile for the drawing Choose a default RGB profile from the RGB profile list box. Choose a CMYK profile for the drawing Choose a default CMYK profile from the CMYK profile list box. Choose a Grayscale profile for the drawing Choose a default Grayscale profile from the Grayscale profile list box. When you choose a color mode from the Primary color mode list box, the color mode that you choose becomes the default color mode for the document. The default color mode affects how colors work together in effects such as Corel DESIGNER basics 55 blends and transparencies. It does not restrict the type of colors that you can apply to a drawing. For example, if you set the color mode to RGB, you can still apply colors from a CMYK color palette to the document. The primary color mode also specifies the default color mode for exporting documents. For example, if you choose the RGB color mode and export a document as a JPEG, the color mode is automatically set to RGB. The selections that display in the Color settings area of the Create a new document dialog box are based on the selections that are specified in the Default color management settings dialog box. If you do not want to show the Create a new drawing dialog box and prefer to use the default settings to create new documents, enable the Do not show this dialog again check box. You can restore the Create a new drawing dialog box when starting drawings by clicking Tools Options, clicking General in the Workspace list of categories, and enabling the Show new document dialog box check box. To create a custom preset 1 In the application window, click File New. 2 From the Create a new drawing dialog box, choose the settings that you want to save as a preset destination. 3 Click the Add preset button. 4 In the Add preset dialog box, type a name for the new destination preset in the text box. You can delete a destination preset by choosing the preset name from the Preset destination list box, and clicking the Remove preset button. To start a drawing from a template 1 Click File New from template. 2 Choose a template from the Templates list. 3 Click Open. 56 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To open a drawing 1 Click File Open. 2 Locate the folder where the drawing is stored. 3 Click a filename. 4 Click Open. You can also Extract an embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder in which the application is installed Enable the Extract embedded ICC profile check box. Maintain layers and pages when you open files Enable the Maintain layers and pages check box. This option is not available for all file formats. If you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer. This option is not available for all file formats. View thumbnail of a drawing (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Click the arrow button next to the Views button, and click Extra large icons, Large icons, Medium icons, or Small icons. (Windows XP) Do one of the following: •Enable the Preview check box. •Click the View menu button, and select Thumbnails. Choose a code page (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose a code page from the Select code page list box. This option is not available for all file formats. (Windows XP) Choose a code page from the Code page list box. Corel DESIGNER basics 57 You can also Search for a drawing (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Type a word or phrase in the search box. Access a previous version of a file (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Right-click a file, and click Restore previous versions. The search box looks for files only in the current folder and subfolders. To search for a drawing in another location, you must first navigate to the folder where the drawing is stored. You can access a previous version of a file only if System Protection is turned on. For detailed information about accessing previous versions of files, see the Windows Help. To open a file you have recently worked on, click File Open recent, and click the filename. If you have multiple files open, you can navigate between them by clicking Window Document and then clicking the name of the file that you want to display in the drawing window. Acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras You can load photos from digital cameras and scan images in Corel DESIGNER. Corel DESIGNER supports scanners that use Microsoft Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), which provides a standard interface for loading images. If your scanner or digital camera does not support WIA, you can use the TWAIN driver of your scanner or digital camera for loading images. The software interfaces and options vary. For information about using the software associated with your scanner or digital camera, see the manufacturer’s documentation. To load photos from a digital camera 1 Connect a digital camera to your computer. 2 Click File Acquire image Select source. 58 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Choose a digital camera from the Sources box. A digital camera may have both a WIA and a TWAIN driver source. 4 Click File Acquire image Acquire. 5 Choose the images you want to load from the dialog box that appears. If your digital camera does not support WIA, you are presented with the digital camera’s TWAIN driver interface for loading images. Options vary, depending on the digital camera. 6 Click Get pictures. On your digital camera’s interface, this button may have a different name. To load additional photos during the same session, click File Acquire image Acquire. If your digital camera does not support WIA or does not have a TWAIN driver, you can still open photos in Corel DESIGNER by clicking File Import, browsing to the digital camera directory, and selecting the photos that you want to open. To scan images 1 Click File Acquire image Select source. 2 Choose a scanner from the Sources list. A scanner may have both a WIA and a TWAIN driver source. If you are scanning 48-bit color images, you must select the TWAIN driver. 3 Click Select. 4 Click File Acquire image Acquire. If your scanner does not support WIA, you are presented with the scanner’s TWAIN driver interface for loading images. Options vary, depending on the scanner. 5 Preview the image, and select the area that you want to scan. 6 Click Scan. On your scanner’s interface, this button may have a different name, such as OK or Send. The WIA interface is available only for the Windows XP operating system. Corel DESIGNER basics 59 To scan additional images during the same session, click File Acquire image Acquire. Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions You can undo the actions you perform in a drawing, starting with the most recent action. If you don’t like the result of undoing an action, you can redo it. Reverting to the last saved version of a drawing also lets you remove one or more actions. Certain actions applied to objects, such as stretching, filling, moving, and rotating, can be repeated to create a stronger visual effect. Undo docker Customizing the Undo settings lets you increase or decrease the number of actions that you can undo or redo. To undo, redo, and repeat actions To Do the following Undo an action Click Edit Undo. 60 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Redo an action Click Edit Redo. Undo or redo a series of actions Click Tools Undo. In the Undo docker, choose the action that precedes all the actions that you want to undo, or choose the last undone action that you want to redo. Revert to the last saved version of a drawing Click File Revert. Repeat an action Click Edit Repeat. When you undo a series of actions in the Undo docker, all actions listed below the action you choose are undone. When you redo a series of actions in the Undo docker, the action you choose and all preceding undone actions are redone. You can repeat an action on another object or group of objects by selecting the object or objects and clicking Edit Repeat. You can also undo or redo a series of actions by clicking the arrow button next to the Undo button or Redo button on the Standard toolbar and choosing an action from the list. To specify the Undo settings 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click General. 3 Type a value in one or both of the following boxes: • Regular — specifies the number of actions that can be reversed when you use the Undo command with vector objects • Bitmap effects — specifies the number of actions that can be reversed when you work with bitmap effects The value that you specify is limited only by your computer’s memory resources. The higher the value you specify, the greater the demand on memory resources. Corel DESIGNER basics 61 Zooming, panning, and scrolling You can change the view of a drawing by zooming in to get a closer look or by zooming out to see more of the drawing. You can experiment with a variety of zoom options to determine the amount of detail you want. Panning and scrolling are two additional ways to view specific areas of a drawing. When you work at high magnification levels or with large drawings, you may not be able to see the whole drawing. Panning and scrolling let you move the page around in the drawing window to view previously hidden areas. You can zoom in and out while you are panning, and you can pan while you are zooming. In this way, you can avoid having to alternate between the two tools. By specifying default zooming and panning settings, you can zoom in quickly to detailed parts of a drawing and zoom out to the larger context. If you use a mouse wheel, the wheel zooms in and zooms out by default. You can also use the mouse wheel to scroll. To zoom 1 In the toolbox, click the Zoom tool . 2 On the property bar, click one of the following: • Zoom in • Zoom out • Zoom to selected • Zoom to all objects • Zoom to page • Zoom to page width • Zoom to page height If you choose the Zoom in option, move the pointer to the drawing window, and click to zoom in, or right-click to zoom out. To zoom in on or out of an area, marquee-select the area by holding down the left or right mouse button. The Zoom to selected button is available only if one or more objects are selected before you click the Zoom tool. When you are not editing text, you can also access the Zoom tool by pressing the Z key. 62 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To zoom in, use the Pan tool , and double-click or drag anywhere in the drawing window. To zoom out, right-click in the drawing window. Use the following keyboard shortcuts to zoom during any task, such as when you are drawing an object: • F2 — zoom in around the pointer • F3 — zoom out around the pointer • F4 — zoom to all objects • F5 — refresh the drawing window • F6 — zoom to selected objects • F7 — zoom to the page The F2 and F3 shortcut keys let you zoom in and out around the pointer. To pan in the drawing window 1 In the toolbox, click the Pan tool . 2 Drag in the drawing window until the area you want to view appears. To pan in the drawing window while zoomed in on the drawing, click the Navigator button in the lower-right corner of the drawing window. Alternatively, you can press the N key and drag the crosshair pointer around in the Navigator pop-up window. You can quickly center the page in the drawing window by double-clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox. Corel DESIGNER basics 63 Using the Navigator (lower-right), you can display any part of a drawing without having to zoom out. To scroll by using a mouse wheel • Do one of the following: • To scroll vertically, press Alt while you move the wheel. • To scroll horizontally, press Ctrl while you move the wheel. To specify default settings for the Zoom tool and Pan tool 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, Pan tool. 3 To specify the action of the Zoom or Pan tool when you right-click in the drawing window, enable one of the following options: • Zoom out — zooms out by a factor of 2 • Context menu — displays a menu of commands that let you zoom to a specific level To establish default setting for the mouse wheel 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace, and click Display. 3 To specify the default action of the mouse wheel, choose Zoom or Scroll from the Default action for mouse wheel list box. 64 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Previewing drawings You can preview a drawing to see how it will look when printed or exported. When you preview a drawing, only the objects on the drawing page and in the immediate area of the drawing window are displayed, and you can see all layers that are set to print in the Object manager docker. If you want a closer look at specific objects in a drawing, you can select and preview them. When you preview selected objects, the rest of the drawing is hidden. Before you preview a drawing, you can specify the preview mode. The preview mode affects the speed with which your preview appears as well as the amount of detail displayed in the drawing window. By default, the borders of a page are displayed in the drawing window, but you can hide them at any time. If a drawing is intended for print, you can display the area that will actually print as well as the bleed, the part of the drawing that extends beyond the page border. Bleeds are useful when a drawing contains a color page background or objects that are positioned on the page border. Bleeds ensure that no white space appears between the edges of a drawing and the edge of the paper after the printer cuts, binds, and trims the document. To preview a drawing • Click View Full-screen preview. Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window. You can press Page up and Page down to preview pages in a multipage drawing. To preview selected objects 1 Select the objects. 2 Click View Preview selected only. Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window. If Preview selected only mode is enabled and no objects are selected, Fullscreen preview displays a blank screen. Corel DESIGNER basics 65 After you return to the application window, you can disable Preview selected only mode by clicking View Preview selected only. To choose a full-screen preview mode 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Display. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Use draft view — Drawings appear without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps, and no anti-aliasing is used. • Use enhanced view — Drawings appear with or without PostScript fills, and anti-aliasing is used to sharpen the display of the drawings. You can display PostScript fills when you preview a drawing in Enhanced mode by enabling the Show PostScript fills in enhanced view check box. To set the page display 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Page. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Show page border — displays page borders • Show printable area — usually displays two dotted lines inside or around the page, depending on the current printer settings. One outline indicates the area that can be printed on the current printer; the other outline indicates the paper size that your printer is set to use. • Show bleed area — displays the area of the drawing extending beyond the page border. To change the bleed area, click Size in the list of categories, and type a value in the Bleed box. When preparing a drawing for commercial printing, you may also need to set a bleed limit. For more information, see “To set a bleed limit” on page 631. 66 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Choosing viewing modes As you work, Corel DESIGNER lets you display a drawing in any of the following modes: • Simple wireframe — displays an outline of the drawing by hiding fills, extrusions, contours, drop shadows, and intermediate blend shapes; also displays the bitmaps in monochrome. This mode lets you quickly preview basic elements in a drawing. • Wireframe — displays a drawing in simple wireframe mode plus intermediate blend shapes • Draft — displays fills and bitmaps with a low resolution. This mode eliminates some detail to allow you to focus on the color balances in a drawing. • Normal — displays a drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps. This mode refreshes and opens slightly faster than the Enhanced mode. • Enhanced — displays a drawing with PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics. • Pixels — displays a pixel-based rendition of the drawing, which allows you to zoom in on an area of an object, and then position and size the object more precisely. This view also lets you see what the drawing will look like when it is exported to a bitmap file format. • Simulate overprints — simulates the color of areas where overlapping objects were set to overprint and displays PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics. For information about overprinting objects, see “To overprint selected objects” on page 637. • Rasterize complex effects — rasterizes the display of complex effects, such as transparencies, bevels, and drop shadows when in Enhanced view. This option is useful for previewing how the complex effects will be printed. To ensure the successful printing of complex effects, most printers require complex effects to be rasterized. The viewing mode you choose affects the amount of time it takes for a drawing to open or be displayed on the monitor. For example, a drawing displayed in Simple wireframe view takes less time to refresh or open than does a drawing displayed in Simulate overprints view. Corel DESIGNER basics 67 Left to right: Simple wireframe, Draft, and Enhanced views To choose a viewing mode • Click View, and click one of the following modes: • Simple wireframe • Wireframe • Draft • Normal • Enhanced • Pixels • Simulate overprints • Rasterize complex effects If you are overprinting, it is important to preview the objects in the Simulate overprints mode before printing. The type of objects you are overprinting and the type of colors you are mixing determine how overprinted colors are combined. For more information about overprinting, see “Working with color trapping and overprinting” on page 635. You can set the default viewing mode by clicking Tools Options, clicking General in the Document list of categories, and choosing an option from the View mode list box. You can quickly switch between the selected viewing mode and the previous viewing mode by pressing Shift + F9. 68 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with views You can save a view of any part of a drawing. For example, you can save a view of an object at 230% magnification and then return to this specific view at any time. If a document contains multiple pages, you can view them all at once by using the Page Sorter view. You can also display consecutive left-hand and right-hand pages on the screen at the same time (facing pages) and create objects that span two pages. To save a view 1 Click Window View manager. 2 Use the Zoom tools in the View manager docker to set up a view. 3 Click Add current view . You can also Rename a view Double-click a view name, and type a new name. Delete a saved view Click a view, and click Delete current view . If you disable the page icon next to a saved view in the docker, Corel DESIGNER switches to the magnification level only, not the page, when you switch to that view. Similarly, if you disable the magnifying glass icon , Corel DESIGNER switches to the page only, not the magnification level. You can also save the current view by clicking the Zoom or Pan tool in the toolbox, clicking in the Zoom level list box on the standard toolbar, typing a name, and pressing Enter. To switch to a saved view 1 Click Window View manager. 2 Click a view in the View manager docker. Corel DESIGNER basics 69 You can also switch to a saved view by selecting it from the Zoom level list box on the standard toolbar. To view all pages in a multipage document • Click View Page sorter view. To view facing pages 1 Click Layout Page setup. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Layout. 3 Enable the Facing pages check box. 4 Choose one of the following settings from the Start on list box: • Left side — starts the document on a left-hand page • Right side — starts the document on a right-hand page You cannot view facing pages if the document uses a Tent Card or Top-fold Card layout style, or if it contains multiple page orientations. The Left side option is available only for the Full Page and Book layout styles. When you enable the Facing pages check box, the content on the facing pages is merged on one page. The layer structure for the merged page is based on the left-hand page. The layers from the right-hand page are inserted above the layers on the left-hand page. This rule also applies if you reorder the pages. If you disable the Facing pages check box, the layers and content are redistributed across separate pages. Objects that cross both pages are assigned to a page according to where the center of the object is found. Saving drawings By default, drawings are saved to the Corel DESIGNER file format (DES). You can save a drawing to other vector file formats as well. If you want to use a drawing in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported by that application. For information about saving files to other formats, see “Exporting files” on page 652. When you save a drawing, Corel DESIGNER lets you add reference information so that you can easily find and organize drawings later on. On Windows 7 and Windows Vista, 70 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide you can attach tags (also known as properties) such as title, subject, and rating. On Windows XP, you can assign notes and keywords to a drawing. You can also save selected objects in a drawing. For large drawings, saving only the selected objects reduces the file size, which can decrease the time it takes to load the drawing. When saving a file, you can use advanced options to control how bitmaps, textures, and vector effects, such as blends and extrusions, are saved with the drawing. You can also save a drawing as a template, which lets you create other drawings with the same properties. For information about saving a drawing as a template, see “Working with templates” on page 115. To save a drawing 1 Click File Save as. 2 Type a filename in the File name list box. 3 Locate the folder where you want to save the file. If you want the drawing to be compatible with a previous version of Corel DESIGNER, choose a version from the Version list box. If you want to save the drawing to a vector file format other than Corel DESIGNER (DES), choose a file format from the Save as type list box. You can also Save only selected objects With objects selected, click File Save as, and enable the Selected only check box. Locate the folder where you want to save the file, type a filename in the File name list box, and click Save. Add reference information (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Do any the following: • Type a title, subject, tag, comment, author, or revision number in the corresponding box. • Assign a rating to the file. • Add copyright information. Save notes or keywords with the file (Windows XP) Type notes or keywords in the corresponding box. Corel DESIGNER basics 71 If you are using an expired trial version of Corel DESIGNER, you will not be able to save drawings. For more information about trial versions, see “Working with trial versions” on page 7. Saving a drawing to a previous version of Corel DESIGNER may result in loss of certain effects that were not available in the previous version of the application. When you save to a previous version of Corel DESIGNER, the content and appearance of the document is maintained, but layers are affected in the following ways: • Layer names are reset to Corel DESIGNER default names. • The number of layers per page is set according to the page with the most layers. • Master layers are converted to local layers, with the exception of the default master layers (Guides, Grid, Desktop). • Local Guides layers are converted to regular layers. For more information about layers, see “Working with layers” on page 277. You can also save a drawing by clicking File Save. You can also save a drawing by clicking the Save button toolbar. on the Standard To use advanced options when saving 1 Click File Save as. 2 Click Advanced. 3 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Save presentation exchange — saves a drawing as a Corel® Presentations™ Exchange (CMX) file so that you can open and edit it in other Corel applications, such as WordPerfect • Use bitmap compression — reduces the file size by compressing bitmap effects, such as bitmap extrusions, transparencies, and drop shadows • Use graphic object compression — reduces the file size by compressing vector objects, such as polygons, rectangles, ellipses, and perfect shapes Using compression increases the time required for opening and saving a drawing. 72 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 4 If a drawing contains texture fills, enable one of the following options: • Save textures with the file — saves custom texture fills with the file • Rebuild textures when opening a file — re-creates texture fills when you open the saved drawing 5 If a drawing contains blends and extrusions, enable one of the following options: • Save blends and extrudes with the file — saves all blends and extrusions included in a drawing • Rebuild blends and extrudes when opening the file — re-creates blends and extrusions when you open the saved drawing Choosing to save textures, blends, and extrusions with the file increases the file size but lets you open and save a drawing more quickly. Conversely, choosing to rebuild textures, blends, and extrusions when a saved drawing is opened decreases the file size but increases the time required for saving or opening a drawing. Backing up and recovering files Corel DESIGNER can automatically save backup copies of drawings and prompt you to recover them in the event of a system error. The auto-backup feature saves drawings that you have opened and modified. During any working session with Corel DESIGNER, you can set the time interval for automatically backing up files and specify whether you want the files to be saved in your temporary folder (the default location) or in a specified folder. You can recover the backup files from the temporary or specified folder when you restart Corel DESIGNER after a system error. If you choose not to recover the backup file, it is automatically erased when you quit the application. To specify auto-backup settings 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Save. 3 Enable the Auto-backup every check box, and choose a value from the Minutes list box. Corel DESIGNER basics 73 4 In the Always back up to area, enable one of the following options: • Users temporary folder — lets you save an auto-backup file in the temporary folder • Specific folder — lets you specify the folder for an auto-backup file You can also Create a backup file every time you save Enable the Make backup on save check box. Disable the auto-backup feature Choose Never from the Minutes list box. Auto-backup files are named auto_backup_of_filename and can be saved in any folder you specify. Backup files are created when you save a drawing. They are named backup_of_filename and are always stored in the same folder as the original drawing. All open or modified files that are not in Corel DESIGNER (DES) file format are backed up as Corel DESIGNER files. You can cancel the creation of an auto-backup file by pressing Esc while a file is being saved. To recover a backup file 1 Restart Corel DESIGNER. 2 Click OK in the File recovery dialog box. The File recovery dialog box appears upon startup after a system error. 3 Save and rename the file in the specified folder. Recovered files are named GraphicsX.des, where X is the numbered increment. If you click Cancel, Corel DESIGNER ignores the backup file and deletes it when you quit the application. 74 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Adding and accessing drawing information Corel DESIGNER lets you add reference information, such as title, author, subject, keywords, rating, and other notes to a drawing. Although adding document information is optional, doing so makes it easier to organize and locate drawings later on. The application also lets you access other important document information, such as the number of pages and layers, fonts, object and text statistics, and the types of objects the drawing contains. You can also view color information such as the color profiles that are used to define document colors as well as the primary color mode and rendering intent. To add drawing information 1 Click File Document properties. 2 In the Document properties dialog box, type text in any of the following boxes: • Title • Subject • Author • Copyright • Keywords • Notes 3 To specify a rating, choose a rating from the Rating list box. 4 Click OK. You can modify the drawing information at any time. To access drawing information • Click File Document properties. Closing drawings and quitting Corel DESIGNER You can close one drawing, or multiple drawings, at any time before quitting Corel DESIGNER. Corel DESIGNER basics 75 To close drawings To Do the following Close one drawing Click File Close. Close all drawings Click File Close all. If you are unable to close a document, you may have a task, such as printing or saving, in progress or a task that has failed. Please refer to the status bar to view the status of a task. To quit Corel DESIGNER • Click File Exit. You can also quit Corel DESIGNER by pressing Alt + F4. 76 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Finding and managing content Corel DESIGNER lets you find content on your computer, local network, the Corel content DVD, or online. You can browse or search for clipart, photos, fonts, symbols, objects, and even file formats that are not supported by the applications included in the suite. When you find the content that you need, you can import it into your document, open it in its associated application, or collect it in a tray for future reference. Corel DESIGNER is fully integrated with the search capabilities that are offered by Windows 7 and Windows Vista. On Windows XP, you must have Windows Desktop Search installed and running to search for content by using keywords. By default, the application searches all locations that Windows Desktop Search is configured to index. For information about modifying indexing options in Windows Desktop Search, see the Windows Help. Windows Desktop Search is available as a free download from the Microsoft Download Center. For more information, visit http://www.microsoft.com/ windows/desktopsearch/downloads/default.mspx. If you are using another third-party computer indexing and search tool (for example, Google Desktop) or you don’t have Windows Desktop Search installed, the application has limited search capabilities and lets you search only by filename. This section contains the following topics: • Exploring Corel CONNECT • Browsing and searching for content • Viewing content • Using and managing content Exploring Corel CONNECT You can browse and search for content by using Corel CONNECT. Corel CONNECT is available both as a standalone utility and as a docker. You can choose whichever mode better suits your workflow. Finding and managing content 77 The image below shows the main components of the Corel CONNECT utility: 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6 2 3 5 4 Part Description 1. Libraries pane Lets you access online content as well as content that is included with the latest version or previous versions of the suite 2. Favorite folders pane Provides quick access to frequently used folders 3. Folders pane Displays a representation of the file structure available on your computer 78 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Part Description 4. Tray pane Lets you collect files from one or more folders 5. Zoom slider Lets you adjust the size of thumbnails in the viewing pane 6. Viewing pane Lets you view thumbnails of content files 7. Help button Lets you launch the Help system 8. Search box Lets you search for files by using search terms 9. Filter toolbar Lets you choose which type of content to display in the viewing area: folders, vector images, bitmap images, fonts, or files saved to file formats that are not supported by the suite 10. Go to parent folder button Lets you go one level up from the current folder 11. Refresh/Cancel button Reloads the results from your last search or initiates a new search based on the criteria that you have specified. When a search is in progress, the button changes to the Cancel mode , which allows you to stop a search at any time. 12. Address bar Shows the full path to the current location 13. Navigate forward button Takes you to the next page of content 14. Navigate back button Takes you to the previous page of content In docker mode, the search utility has two components: Connect docker and Tray docker. The Connect docker has two viewing modes: single pane and full view. In full view, all panes are displayed. In single pane view, either the viewing pane or the Libraries, Favorite folders, and Folders panes are displayed. You can resize the docker to display all panes or toggle between the viewing pane and the Libraries, Favorite folders, and Folders panes. Finding and managing content 79 1 The Connect docker with the viewing pane hidden (left) and the navigation pane hidden (right). Click the toggle arrow (1) to display or hide panes. Resize the docker to display both panes. 80 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also customize the size and display of individual panes. 1 2 3 The grab area (1, 2, 3) lets you resize a pane. You can use the Favorite folders pane to create shortcuts to folders that you visit frequently. You can add locations to and remove locations from the Favorite folders pane. To start Corel CONNECT To Do the following Start the standalone utility On the Windows taskbar, click Start All Programs Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 Corel CONNECT. Finding and managing content 81 To Do the following Access the Connect docker In Corel DESIGNER, click Window Connect. Display or hide the Tray docker In Corel DESIGNER, click Window Tray. You can also display or hide the Tray docker by clicking the Show/Hide the tray button in the Connect docker. To resize a pane • Point to the pane’s grab area, and when the cursor changes to a two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the pane. To display or hide a pane • Click the arrow to toggle between displaying and hiding the pane. To add a location to the Favorite Folders pane • Drag a folder from the Libraries or Folders pane to the Favorite folders pane. You can also add locations to the Favorite folders pane by right-clicking a folder in the Libraries or Folders pane, and clicking Add to favorites. To remove a location from the Favorite Folders pane • Right-click a location in the Favorite folders pane, and click Remove from favorites. Browsing and searching for content With the Corel CONNECT docker, you can browse for content, or you can search for content by using keywords. You can browse and search for content in one or multiple locations on your computer or local network as well as online. You can also navigate to previously viewed content. 82 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Activating access to online content You can browse or search for images the Web sites of online content providers such as Flickr, Fotolia, and iStockphoto. To activate access to online content, you must first agree to the terms and conditions of the online content providers. You can disable access to an online content provider, and you can restore access at any time. The images that you find online are often subject to usage restrictions and may be watermarked or low-resolution. For information about using such images, see “Using and managing content” on page 87. Searching for content You can search by the name, category (for example, clipart, photo images, or fonts), or reference information (for example, tags or notes) associated with a file. When you type a term in the search box and initiate a search, all matching files are displayed as thumbnail images in the viewing pane. For example, if you type “flower” in the search box, the application automatically filters out all files that do not match, and you see only the files that have the word “flower” in the filename, category, or tags assigned to the file. Narrowing and expanding search results By default, your search results include all relevant content such as vector graphics, bitmaps, fonts, and file formats that are not supported by the suite. You can narrow your search results by excluding some content. For example, if you are searching for graphics, you can display only vector graphics or bitmaps. If you need to choose a font for your project, you can display only fonts. You can expand your search results, and you can cancel a search at any time. To activate access to online content • In the Libraries pane, click one of the following: • Flickr • Fotolia • iStockphoto If you don’t see the Activate button, click the name of the content provider. Finding and managing content 83 You can also Disable access to a content provider Disable the I have read and agree to the terms of the use of any content sourced from this third party provider check box. The name of the content provider disappears from the Libraries pane. To browse for content • Click a location in one of the following panes: • Libraries — lets you browse for content that’s included with the latest version and previous versions of the suite • Favorite folders — lets you browse your favorite locations • Folders — lets you browse the folder structure available on your computer You can also Specify the location where you want to browse for content Type a path in the Address box, and press Enter. The Address bar keeps track only of the locations that you enter manually. To delete all locations, click the Address bar dropdown arrow, and click Clear list. You can browse the contents of only one folder at a time. To search for content 1 Click a location in any of the following panes: • Libraries — lets you search for content online as well as content that is included with the latest version and previous versions of the suite • Favorite folders — lets you search for content in your favorite locations • Folders — lets you search for content in the folder structure available on your computer 2 Enter a word in the search box, and press Enter. Files that match the search term appear in the viewing pane. 84 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Search for content in multiple locations Enable the check boxes for the Web sites and folders that you want to search, and click the Refresh button . Show or hide search results for a location In the viewing pane, click the Show/Hide arrow to the right of the location. Specify how many online search results to display Click an online content provider in the Libraries pane, and type a number in the Search results box in the viewing pane. This number determines how many search results are displayed initially, and how many additional search results are displayed each time you click More from in the viewing pane. 1 Clicking a Show/Hide arrow (1) lets you hide or show the search results in a specific location. When you search for online content, video and sound files are not included in the search results. If you want to browse the folder where a file is stored or access the source Web page of an image, right-click the file, and click Open source location. Finding and managing content 85 To narrow or expand search results • On the Filter toolbar, click one of the following buttons: • Folders — to hide or display subfolders in selected folders • Vectors — to hide or display vector graphics that are supported by the suite • Bitmaps — to hide or display bitmaps that are supported by the suite • Fonts — to hide or display TrueType (TTF), OpenType (OTF), and PostScript fonts (PFB and PFM) • Other — to hide or display file formats that are not supported by the suite A category is included in the search results if the button appears pressed. To navigate to previously viewed content • Click the Navigate back or Navigate forward button. You can also go back to the previous search results by pressing Backspace. You can also navigate to previously viewed content by clicking the Address bar drop-down arrow and choosing a location from the list. Please note that the Address bar keeps track only of the locations that you enter manually. To stop a search • Click the Cancel search button . Viewing content Clipart, photos, and fonts appear in the viewing pane as thumbnail images. You can select individual, multiple, or all thumbnails. By positioning your pointer over a thumbnail, you can display a larger preview. You can also display file information such as filename, file size, dpi, and color mode for content that was not provided by an online content provider. Thumbnail zooming makes recognizing a particular file easier and faster. To select a thumbnail • Click a thumbnail. 86 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Select multiple thumbnails Do one of the following: •Drag around the thumbnails that you want to select. •Hold down Ctrl, and in the viewing pane click the thumbnails that you want to select. •Click a thumbnail, and holding down Shift, click the last thumbnail in the range that you want to select. Select all thumbnails Press Ctrl + A. To view file information • Hover over a thumbnail. To adjust the size of thumbnails • Drag the Zoom slider to the left to decrease the size of the thumbnails or drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the thumbnails. Using and managing content If you want to view or edit a file before you incorporate it into your project, you can open it in CorelDRAW, Corel DESIGNER, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or its associated application. You can also insert content into your document. Images that are obtained from online sources such as iStockphoto and Fotolia may be subject to copyright and usage restrictions. Such images, also referred to as “comp images,” are often low-resolution or watermarked. To use comp images, you must first purchase them or check with the owner if you have rights to use them. Then, you can replace the comp images in your document with the purchased images. You can also view a list of all the comp images that a document contains. The tray is useful for gathering content from various folders. While the files are referenced in the tray, they actually remain in their original location. You can add and Finding and managing content 87 remove content from the tray. The tray is shared among CorelDRAW, Corel DESIGNER, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, and Corel CONNECT. You can also open files from the tray. To open a file • Select a thumbnail, and choose an action from the following table. To Do the following Open a file by using the Corel CONNECT utility Click one of the following buttons: •Open — lets you open a file in the application it is associated with or navigate to the source Web page of an online image •Open in CorelDRAW or Import in CorelDRAW — lets you open or import a file in CorelDRAW •Open in Corel DESIGNER or Import in Corel DESIGNER •Open in Corel PHOTO-PAINT — lets you open a file in Corel PHOTO-PAINT Open a file by using the Connect docker Do one of the following: •In full view, click the Open button . •In single pane view, click the File commands button , and click Open. Open a file by using the Tray docker Click the Open button . You can also open a file by right-clicking it and choosing the option you want. To insert a file into an active document To Do the following Insert a file into an active document by using the Corel CONNECT utility Drag a file from the Tray or viewing pane to the active document. 88 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Insert a file into an active document by using the Connect docker Do one of the following: •Drag a file from the viewing pane of the Connect docker to the active document. •In single pane view, select a file in the viewing pane, click the File commands button , click Import, and click in your document. •In full view, select a file in the viewing pane, click the Import button , and click in your document. Insert a file into an active document by using the Tray docker Select the file and click one of the following buttons in the Tray docker: •Import — lets you insert a file as an embedded object •Import and link — lets you insert a file as a linked object Note that the Import and Import and link buttons are not available in the standalone utility. You can also insert a file into an active document by dragging the file from the viewing pane or the Tray docker to the active document. To check, purchase, and replace a comp image 1 Click a comp image, and click Bitmaps Open comp source. 2 On the Web site of the online content provider, check the copyright and usage restrictions for the comp image, and purchase the actual image if necessary. 3 Click the comp image, and click Bitmaps Replace comp. 4 Navigate to the purchased image, and click OK. Transformations such as scaling, rotating, and resizing that were applied to the comp image are preserved in the final image. Finding and managing content 89 To view a list of all comp images in a document • In Corel DESIGNER, CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT, do one of the following: • Click File Print, click the Preflight (Issues) tab, and click Some images may be subject to copyright and usage restrictions. • Click File Document properties. When you export a document to the Adobe Illustrator (AI), Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG), HTML, or PDF file format, you can view a list of all comp images in the preflight summaries. To add content to the tray • Select one or more thumbnails in the viewing area, and drag them to the tray. To remove content from the tray • Select one or more thumbnails in the tray, and click the Remove button 90 . Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with precision Precision is essential when you work with technical graphics. With Corel DESIGNER, you can create precise objects and position them accurately by using gravity snapping, constrain keys, dynamic guides, and object coordinates. When you draw or modify objects, gravity snapping lets you specify the exact placement of a point. If you want to constrain an object to a particular shape as you draw, or control the angle of lines, you can use constrain keys. For example, when drawing a rectangle, you can use constrain keys so that the rectangle is drawn as a square. You can use these features for all drawing and editing operations. For example, before rotating an object, you can snap the center point to the corner of another object and then rotate the object around that point. Dynamic guides, which are temporary guidelines that you can display from eligible snap points in objects, help you draw and position objects with precision. In addition, you can draw and modify objects by specifying object coordinates. This section contains the following topics: • Using gravity snapping • Using dynamic guides • Using constrain keys • Using object coordinates Using gravity snapping Gravity snapping is the attraction of the pointer to a snap point. Snap points are precise mathematical drawing coordinates. When the pointer approaches a snap point, the gravity source of the snap point is highlighted. The highlighting identifies the snap point as the target that the pointer will snap to. Snap points are also known as “gravitysnapping candidates.” Working with precision 91 The gravity field of each snap point has a radius of 10 pixels by default. When the pointer enters a gravity field, a gravity source indicator appears around the point, and the name of the gravity source appears on the screen. You can turn gravity snapping on and off. Gravity shortcut keys let you activate a single type of gravity snap. By default, gravity shortcut keys are the first letters in the names of gravity-snapping candidates. When you hold down a gravity shortcut key, all other gravity snap points become inactive. For example, if you hold down the M key, only the Midpoint gravity snap point is active. If the pointer is within the gravity fields of two or more gravity-snapping candidates, the gravity-snapping candidate closest to the pointer has priority. If the gravitysnapping candidates are the same distance from the pointer, the pointer snaps to the gravity-snapping candidate with the higher priority, as listed in the following table. Gravity source indicator Gravity shortcut key Gravity-snapping candidate Description Pixel Point on the pixel grid S Node Node on an object N Intersection Geometric intersection of line segments, arcs, or guidelines I Midpoint Midpoint of line segment M Quadrant Points that are at 0°, 90°, 180°, and 270° on a circle, ellipse, or arc Q Tangent Point on the outside edge of an arc, circle, or ellipse where a line will touch but not intersect the object T Perpendicular Point on the outside edge of a segment where a line will be perpendicular to the object P Edge Point that touches the nearest perpendicular edge (shortest perpendicular distance from the pointer to the edge) E 92 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Gravity-snapping candidate Description Gravity source indicator Gravity shortcut key Center Center of the closest object (arc, regular polygon, or curve centroid) C Grid Visible or invisible grid point G Text baseline Point in the baseline of artistic or paragraph text B Absolute Pointer location; temporarily suspends all gravity snaps A You can make gravity-snapping candidates active or inactive and set other options to customize snapping. Corel DESIGNER lets you control how gravity snapping works. Working with precision 93 To turn gravity snapping on or off 1 Click Tools Gravity. 2 Enable or disable the Gravity on check box. You can also toggle gravity snapping on and off by pressing Alt + Z. To use gravity snapping 1 Move the pointer close to where you want to snap. 2 Click when the gravity source becomes highlighted. If you are dragging to draw a line or select an object, release the mouse button. You can also Snap an object to another object Drag an object close to where you want to snap. When the gravity source becomes highlighted, release the mouse button. Snap to guidelines Move the pointer to the edge of a guideline or to the intersection of two guidelines. To turn off snapping to guidelines, click Tools Gravity, and disable the Edge mode on the Gravity snapping page of the Options dialog box. The gravity source name and its coordinates are displayed on the status bar. To set gravity options 1 Click Tools Gravity. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Activate snapping objects to page elements (edges, edge midpoints, and page center) Enable the Snap to page check box. Activate a gravity-snapping candidate In the Modes area, enable the corresponding check box. 94 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Activate all gravity-snapping candidates Click Select all. Disable all gravity-snapping candidates without turning off gravity snapping Click Deselect all. Display gravity source indicators Enable the Show gravity location marks check box. Display the name of the gravity source Enable the Screen tip check box. Change the size of the gravity field around gravity-snapping candidates Type a value in the Gravity radius box. Using dynamic guides You can display dynamic guides to help you move, align, and draw objects in precise relation to other objects. Dynamic guides are temporary guidelines that you can display from the following snap points in objects: center, node, quadrant, and text-baseline end nodes. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see “Using gravity snapping” on page 91. You can also display dynamic guides that are tangent, perpendicular, or parallel to objects, as well as dynamic guides that are extensions of line segments. Left to right: The 2-point rectangle tool is used to display dynamic guides from a center snap point, a quadrant snap point, and a tangent snap point. Working with precision 95 Perpendicular dynamic guide (left) and parallel dynamic guide (right) As you drag an object along a dynamic guide, you can view the distance between the object and the snap point that was used to create the dynamic guide. You can then position the object precisely. Dynamic guides can also help you draw parallel lines and draw objects in relation to other objects. In addition, you can display intersecting dynamic guides and place an object at the intersection point. Angle screen tip Distance screen tip A dynamic guide was displayed from a node in the bolt on the left. The screen tip next to the node displays the angle of the dynamic guide(0º) and the distance between the node and the pointer (1.5 inches). The bolt on the right was dragged along the dynamic guide and positioned precisely 1.5 inches away from the node that was used to generate the dynamic guide. 96 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Dynamic guides contain invisible divisions, called ticks, to which your pointer gravitates. Ticks let you move objects along a dynamic guide with precision. You can adjust tick spacing to suit your needs, and you can disable snapping to ticks. You can set other options for dynamic guides. For example, you can choose to display dynamic guides at one or more preset angles or at custom angles that you specify. A preview of the angle settings you choose is available. When you no longer need a dynamic guide at a certain angle, you can delete the angle settings. Line segment This dynamic guide is an extension of a line segment. You can turn off dynamic guides at any time. To enable or disable dynamic guides 1 Click Tools Dynamic guides setup. 2 Enable the Dynamic guides on check box. You can toggle dynamic guides on and off by pressing Shift + Alt +D. To display dynamic guides 1 With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool. 2 Move the pointer over and then off a node, center, quadrant, or text-baseline snap point of an object. 3 Repeat step 2 with other objects to display other dynamic guides. The snap points you point to are registered in a queue and used to create dynamic guides. Working with precision 97 You can also Do the following Display a dynamic guide that is a tangent to the edge of an object Move the pointer over the edge of an object. When an edge snap point becomes highlighted, press H. Then, display the dynamic guide by moving the pointer off the snap point as if to draw a tangent. Display a dynamic guide that is perpendicular to an object Move the pointer over the edge of an object. When a snap point becomes highlighted, press U. Then, display the dynamic guide by moving the pointer off the snap point as if to draw a perpendicular line. Display a dynamic guide that is parallel to a line segment Click Tools Dynamic guides setup, and ensure that the Generate parallel guides check box is enabled. Start to draw a straight line, and then move the pointer over the edge of an existing line segment to register the angle. Then, display the dynamic guide by moving the pointer back as if to draw a line parallel to the line segment you just pointed to. You can use the 2-point line tool , Multipoint line tool , or 3-point rectangle tool to display parallel dynamic guides. Display a dynamic guide that is an extension of a line segment Click Tools Dynamic guides setup, and ensure that the Extend along segment check box is enabled. Move the pointer over an end node in the line segment until the snap point becomes highlighted. Then, display the dynamic guide by moving the pointer as if to extend the line segment. The node, center, quadrant, and text-baseline snap points appear only when the corresponding gravity modes are activated. For more information about snap points and gravity modes, see “Using gravity snapping” on page 91. 98 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can avoid displaying too many dynamic guides by clicking in the drawing window or by pressing Esc. Either of these actions clears the queue of points. You can use the snap points you registered to display intersecting dynamic guides. First, display a dynamic guide, and then move the pointer along it to where an intersecting dynamic guide would be displayed from a registered snap point. To position an object in relation to another object 1 With dynamic guides enabled, select an object. 2 Drag the object to a node, center, quadrant, or text-baseline snap point of the target object. 3 When the snap point of the target object becomes highlighted, drag the object along the dynamic guide to position it. The node, center, quadrant, and text-baseline snap points are displayed only when the corresponding gravity modes are activated. For more information about snap points and gravity modes, see “Using gravity snapping” on page 91. To draw an object in relation to another object 1 With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool. 2 Move the pointer over a node, center, quadrant, or text-baseline end-node snap point of an object. 3 When the snap point becomes highlighted, move the pointer to display a dynamic guide. 4 Move the pointer along the dynamic guide to the point where you want to draw, and drag to draw an object. To draw parallel lines 1 Click Tools Dynamic guides setup. 2 Ensure that the Generate parallel guides check box is enabled. 3 Draw a straight line or an object that contains straight line segments. Working with precision 99 4 Using the 2-point line tool or Multi-point line tool , start to draw another straight line, and then move the pointer over the edge of an existing straight line segment. 5 Move the pointer back to where you want to draw the parallel line. 6 When a parallel dynamic guide appears, continue to drag along the guide until the line is the length you want. To draw a parallel line, start drawing a straight line (left). Next, move the pointer over the edge of a straight line segment (middle). Finally, move the pointer back until a parallel dynamic guide appears, and drag along the guide until the parallel line is the length you want (right). With the help of parallel dynamic guides, you can use the 3-point rectangle tool to draw rectangles that are parallel to straight line segments. To position an object at the intersection of dynamic guides 1 With dynamic guides enabled, select an object. If you want to move the object by a specific snap point, move the pointer over the snap point until the point becomes highlighted. 2 Drag the object to an eligible snap point on another object, and continue to drag until a dynamic guide appears. Don’t release the mouse button. 100 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Drag the object to another eligible snap point, and don’t release the mouse button. 4 When the snap point becomes highlighted, continue to drag until another dynamic guide appears where the two dynamic guides would intersect. 5 When the intersection point appears, release the mouse button. To set options for dynamic guides 1 Click Tools Dynamic guides setup. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Display or hide the angle of dynamic guides Enable the Angle screen tip check box. Working with precision 101 To Do the following Display or hide the distance from the snap point used to create the dynamic guide Enable the Distance screen tip check box. Change the distance between the invisible divisions on the dynamic guides Type a value in the Tick spacing box. Choose the angles at which to display the dynamic guides In the Guides area, enable or disable the angle check boxes. When you enable an angle check box, a preview of the dynamic guide appears in the Guides preview window. Display dynamic guides that are extensions of line segments Enable the Extend along segment check box. Display dynamic guides that are parallel to line segments Enable the Generate parallel guides check box. Disable snapping to ticks Disable the Snap to ticks check box. Display a custom dynamic guide by specifying its angle In the Guides area, type a value in the Degrees box, and click Add. Delete angle settings Click an angle check box in the list box, and click Delete. Display dynamic guides at all available angles Click Select all. Using constrain keys Constrain keys let you restrict how objects are drawn or edited. For example, when drawing a line, you can constrain it to be perfectly horizontal or vertical. You can also change which key is used as the constrain key. You can change the constrain key from Ctrl to Shift, which is the Windows standard. To constrain an object while drawing or editing • Start drawing or editing, and hold down the Ctrl key. 102 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you are drawing or editing a line, the pointer movement is restricted to the specified constrain angle. If you are drawing or editing an object, the shape of the object is restricted. A rectangle is constrained to a square, an ellipse to a circle, and a polygon to a shape that has sides of equal length. To change the direction of a line that you’re drawing, release Ctrl, and move the pointer in the direction you want. Then, hold down Ctrl again to restrict movement of the pointer to the constrain angle. To change the constrain angle, click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Edit, and type a value in the Constrain angle box. To change the constrain key 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace, Toolbox list of categories, click Pick tool. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Traditional Corel DESIGNER: Ctrl = Constrain, Shift = Transform from center — sets the Ctrl key as the constrain key • Windows standard: Ctrl = Duplicate/Leave original, Shift = Constrain — sets the Shift key as the constrain key Using object coordinates You can use the Object coordinates docker to draw and modify shapes and lines with precision. The live preview in the drawing window lets you see the effects of your adjustments. You can type coordinate values to specify the exact position, dimensions, and angle of rotation of an object. You can also set object attributes interactively by dragging in the drawing window. Drawing rectangles and squares To draw a rectangle with precision, you can specify an origin point, which is one of nine points in the rectangle (four corner points, four midpoints, and one center point). If you Working with precision 103 rotate the rectangle, the origin point is used as the center of rotation. You can also specify the angle of rotation, and the width and height of a rectangle. If the angle of rotation is 0, you can specify the position of the lower-left and upperright corners of the rectangle. To draw a square, you can specify the origin point, the length of a side, and an angle of rotation. Left: The origin point of a rectangle appears as a blue node in the live preview. You can select the center point, or any corner or midpoint, as the origin point. Drawing ellipses and circles To draw an ellipse with precision, you can specify an origin point, which is one of nine points in the bounding box that can be drawn around the ellipse. The origin point is used as the center of rotation. You can also specify the ellipse diameters, which are the width and height of the bounding box around the ellipse, and the angle of rotation. If the angle of rotation is 0, you can specify the exact position of the lower-left and upper-right corners of the bounding box around the ellipse. To draw a circle, you can specify the origin point, diameter, and angle of rotation. You can specify the width and height of the bounding box that can be drawn around an ellipse. 104 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Drawing polygons To draw a polygon, you can specify the number of sides, the angle of rotation, or the center and diameters of the bounding ellipse that can be drawn around the polygon. The center of the bounding ellipse, also known as the “polygon center,” is used as the center of rotation. You can also draw regular polygons with precision. All sides of a regular polygon are of equal length. You can specify the side length and angle of rotation, or the center and diameter of the bounding circle that can be drawn around the regular polygon. You can specify the diameters of the bounding ellipse that can be drawn around the polygon. Drawing lines You can draw a straight line by using one of two methods. With the first method, you specify the start point and endpoint of the line. With the second method, you specify the start point and length of the line, plus an angle of rotation. You can create complex lines by specifying the coordinates of multiple points. You can delete points, and you can modify the coordinates of existing points. After adding all the points you want, you can close the curved line by connecting its start point to its endpoint. Straight and multipoint lines Working with precision 105 Modifying existing objects You can use the Object coordinates docker to modify existing objects with precision. Note that when you modify an existing object, it is replaced with a new object. As a result, the following transformations and effects applied to the original objects are lost: envelope effects, rotations, and skew effects. In addition, any changes that were previously applied to the nodes on a polygon are lost. To draw or modify a rectangle by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to modify an existing rectangle, select the rectangle. 2 Click the Rectangle button . 3 Make any of the following adjustments: • To set the origin point of the rectangle, click a point in the Origin area. • To specify the exact position of the origin point, type values in the x and y boxes. • To specify the width and height of the rectangle, type values in the Object size boxes. • To specify only the height or width of the rectangle and have the other dimensions automatically adjusted in proportion, enable the Proportional check box. • To rotate the rectangle at a specified angle, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. The origin point of the rectangle is used as the center of rotation. 4 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds a new rectangle to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces the selected rectangle with a new one You can also Draw a rectangle by specifying the exact position of its lower-left and upper-right corners In the Bounding box area, type values in the x and y boxes. The first pair of boxes controls the position of the lower-left corner. The second pair of boxes controls the position of the upper-right corner. This method for drawing rectangles is available only when no rotation is applied. 106 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Set the lower-left and upper-right corners of a rectangle directly in the drawing window In the Bounding box area, click the Set lower-left corner interactively button or Set upper-right corner interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Set the origin point directly in the drawing window Click the Set origin point interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Specify the dimensions of the rectangle directly in the drawing window Click either of the Set dimensions interactively buttons , and drag in the drawing window. Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window Click the Set angle interactively button and drag in the drawing window. , To draw or modify a square by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to replace an existing square, select the square. 2 Click the Rectangle flyout, and click the Square button . 3 Make any of the following adjustments: • To set the origin point of the square, click a point in the Origin area. • To specify the exact position of the origin point, type values in the x and y boxes. • To specify the length of a side, type a value in the Object size box. • To rotate the square at a specified angle, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. The origin point of the rectangle is used as the center of rotation. 4 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds a new square to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces the selected square with a new one You can also Set the origin point directly in the drawing window Click the Set origin point interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Specify the length of a square side directly in the drawing window Click the Set dimensions interactively button , and drag in the drawing window. Working with precision 107 You can also Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window Click the Set angle interactively button and drag in the drawing window. , To draw or modify an ellipse by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to modify an existing ellipse, select the ellipse. 2 Click the Ellipse button . 3 Make any of the following adjustments: • To set the origin point of the ellipse, click a point in the Origin area. • To specify the exact position of the origin point, type values in the x and y boxes. • To specify the diameters (width and height) of the ellipse, type values in the Object size boxes. • To specify only one of the diameters and have the other diameter automatically adjusted in proportion, enable the Proportional check box. • To rotate the ellipse at a specified angle, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. The origin point of the ellipse is used as the center of rotation. 4 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds an ellipse to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces a selected ellipse with a new one You can also Draw an ellipse by specifying the lower-left and upper-right corners of the bounding box around an ellipse In the Bounding box area, type values in the x and y boxes. The first pair of boxes controls the position of the lower-left corner of the bounding box. The second pair of boxes controls the position of the upper-right corner of the bounding box. This method for drawing ellipses is available only when no rotation is applied to the ellipse. 108 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Set the lower-left and upper-right corners of an ellipse’s bounding box directly in the drawing window In the Bounding box area, click the Set lower-left corner interactively or Set upper-right corner interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Set the origin point directly in the drawing window Click the Set origin point interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Specify the dimensions of the ellipse directly in the drawing window Click either of the Set diameter interactively buttons , and drag in the drawing window. Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window Click the Set angle interactively button and drag in the drawing window. , To draw or modify a circle by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to replace an existing circle, select the circle. 2 Click the Ellipse flyout, and click the Circle button . 3 Make any of the following adjustments: • To set the origin point of the square, click a point in the Origin area. • To specify the exact position of the origin point, type values in the x and y boxes. • To specify the diameter of a circle, type a value in the Object size box. • To rotate the circle at a specified angle, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. The origin point of the circle is used as the center of rotation. 4 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds the circle to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces the selected circle with a modified one You can also Set the origin point directly in the drawing window Click the Set origin point interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Specify the diameter of a circle directly in the drawing window Click the Set diameter interactively button , and drag in the drawing window. Working with precision 109 You can also Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window Click the Set angle interactively button and drag in the drawing window. , To draw or modify a polygon by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to modify an existing polygon, select the polygon. 2 Click the Polygon flyout, and click the Polygon button . 3 In the Object size area, type a value in the Points or sides box. 4 Make any of the following adjustments: • To rotate the polygon at a specified angle, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. • To specify the polygon center, type values in the x and y boxes in the Bounding ellipse area. The polygon center is the center of the bounding ellipse that can be drawn around the polygon. The polygon center is used as the center of rotation. • To specify the diameters of the bounding ellipse around the polygon, type values in the Object size boxes in the Bounding ellipse area. • To specify only one diameter and have the other diameter automatically adjusted in proportion, enable the Proportional check box. 5 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds the polygon to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces the selected polygon with a new one You can also Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window Click the Set angle interactively button and drag in the drawing window. Set the polygon center directly in the drawing window Click the Set polygon center interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Specify the diameters of the bounding ellipse directly in the drawing window Click either of the Set diameter interactively buttons , and drag in the drawing window. 110 , Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To draw or modify a regular polygon by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to modify an existing polygon, select the polygon. 2 Click the Polygon flyout, and click the Regular polygon button . 3 In the Object size area, type a value in the Number of sides box. 4 Type a value in the Side length box. 5 Make any of the following adjustments: • To rotate the polygon at a specified angle, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. • To specify the polygon center, type values in the x and y boxes in the Bounding circle area. • To specify the diameter of the bounding circle around the polygon, type a value in the Object size box. 6 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds the polygon to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces the selected polygon with a new one You can also Set the side length directly in the drawing window Click the Set dimensions interactively button , and drag in the drawing window. Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window Click the Set angle interactively button and drag in the drawing window. Set the polygon center directly in the drawing window Click the Set polygon center interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Specify the diameter of the bounding circle directly in the drawing window Click the Set diameter interactively button , and drag in the drawing window. , To draw or modify a straight line by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to modify an existing line, select the line. 2 Click the 2-point line button Working with precision . 111 3 To specify the start point and endpoint along the x and y rulers, type values in the x and y boxes in the Points area. In the live preview, the start point is highlighted. 4 Click one of the following: • Create object — adds the line to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces a selected line with a new one You can also Draw a straight line by specifying its start point, length, and angle of rotation In the Points area, type values in the Start point x and y boxes. In the Object size area, type a value in the Line length box. Then, type a value in the Angle of rotation box. Set the start point or endpoint of a line directly in the drawing window In the Points area, click one of the Set point interactively buttons , and click in the drawing window. Set the line length directly in the drawing window In the Object size area, click the Set line length interactively button , and drag in the drawing window. Set the angle of rotation directly in the drawing window In the Object size area, click the Set angle interactively button , and drag in the drawing window. To draw or modify a multi-point line by using object coordinates 1 Click Window Object coordinates. If you want to replace an existing line with a new one, select the line. 2 Click the Multi-point line button . 3 Click the Add point button at the bottom of the Object coordinates docker. 4 Make either of the following adjustments: • To specify the exact position of the point along the x and y rulers, type values in the X and Y boxes. • To add another point, click the Add point button , and type values in the X and Y boxes. 112 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 5 After specifying all the points you need, click one of the following: • Create object — adds the line to the drawing window • Replace object — replaces the selected line with a new one You can also Specify the position of a point directly in the drawing window Click a point in the Object coordinates docker. Click the Set point interactively button , and click in the drawing window. Delete a point In the Points box, click a point, and then click the Delete point button . Connect the start point with the endpoint of a line Click the Auto-close/open curve button . Use the following keyboard shortcuts to create a multi-point line quickly: • To add a point, click in the Points area, and press Insert. • To delete a selected point, press Delete. • To activate the X or Y box of a selected point, press F2. • To navigate through the x and y boxes of the available points, press Tab repeatedly. • To navigate backward through the X or Y boxes of the available points, press Shift + Tab repeatedly. • To activate the Set point interactively button, double-click a point in the docker. Working with precision 113 Working with templates A template is a collection of styles and page layout settings that govern the layout and appearance of a drawing. Templates are sometimes referred to as “templets.” Use a template for drawing elements that you want to reuse. You can use the default template or choose one from a wide variety of preset templates available in the application. This section includes the following topics: • Searching for templates • Creating templates • Using saved templates to create files • Editing templates • Loading styles from other templates Working with templates 115 Searching for templates Corel DESIGNER provides an easy way of finding templates on your computer. You can search by the name, category, or reference information associated with a template. When you type a term in the text field and initiate a search, all matching templates are displayed as thumbnail images in the thumbnail viewing area. For example, if you type “contemporary” in the text field, the application automatically filters out all files that do not match, and you see only the files that have the word “contemporary” in the template name, category, or designer notes attached to the file. Thumbnail zooming makes recognizing a particular template easier and faster. You can narrow the search results by using different criteria, such as document type (for example, brochure, flyer, newsletter, poster, or card) and industry (for example, hospitality, retail, or services). You can choose to view only templates that you have created or all templates (the templates included with Corel DESIGNER and provided by third-party designers, as well as templates that you have created). When you select a template in the viewing area, additional information is displayed about the template’s category, style, pagination, and fold options, as well as any designer notes related to its intended use. By default, the application searches all locations that Instant Search (on Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or Windows® Desktop Search (on Windows XP) are configured to index. You can also browse for templates in other locations, which Instant Search and Windows Desktop Search are not configured to index. For more information about configuring Instant Search on Windows 7 and Windows Vista, see the Windows Help. For more information about Windows Desktop Search, visit the Microsoft® Web site. You can cancel a search at any time. To search for templates 1 Click File New from template. 2 In the New from template dialog box, do one of the following: • Type a word in the search text box. • If you are using Windows XP without Windows Desktop Search, type a word in the search text box, and press Enter. Thumbnails that match the search term appear in the Templates pane. 3 From the View by list box in the Filter pane, choose one of the following categories: 116 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Type — sorts templates by document type, such as brochure, flyer, poster, or newsletter • Industry — sorts templates by the industry that the template was designed for (for example, hospitality, retail, or services) 4 In the category list, click a category. To view all templates (that is, templates included with Corel DESIGNER, created by third-party designers, or created by you or others), click All. To view only templates that you have created, click My templates. You can also View template details Click a thumbnail in the Templates pane. The template details are displayed in the Template details pane. If the Template details pane is hidden, click the Show/Hide template details button to display it. View designer notes Click a thumbnail in the Templates pane. The designer notes are displayed in the Designer notes pane. Print designer notes Click the Print designer notes button in the lower-left corner of the Designer notes pane. If there are no designer notes associated with a template, the Print designer notes button is disabled. Search for templates in other locations on your computer Click Browse. Locate the folder where the template is stored. Double-click a template filename. Stop a search Do one of the following: • Click the Cancel button next to the Search text field. • Delete the search term from the Search text field (and press Enter if you are using Windows XP and have not installed Windows Desktop Search). Working with templates 117 Templates that do not contain any category information are grouped in a category called Not specified. If the Corel DESIGNER shell integration components are not installed (that is, if you have disabled the Windows Shell Extension option under Utilities in the Setup wizard during a custom installation), you can search for templates only by filename, not by name, keywords, or other reference information. If you are using Windows XP, and if Windows Desktop Search is not installed, the application searches by filename only in the following folders and subfolders: • X:\Program Files\Corel\Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5\Languages\EN\Designer\Templates, where X is the drive where Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 is installed • template folders associated with Corel DESIGNER • My Documents folder • Desktop If you are using Windows XP and install Windows Desktop Search after installing Corel DESIGNER, you must add the location of the Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 installation to the indexed locations of Windows Desktop Search. For more information about modifying search options in Windows Desktop Search, see “Set search locations” in the Windows Desktop Search Help. Windows Desktop Search is available as a free download from the Microsoft Download Center. For more information, visit http://www.microsoft.com/ windows/desktopsearch/downloads/default.mspx. To zoom in or out when you view thumbnails, drag the Zoom slider to the right or left. If you are using Windows XP, you can also start a search by entering a search term in the search text box and clicking the Start search button. Creating templates If the preset templates do not meet your requirements, you can create a template based on styles that you create, or styles taken from other templates. For example, if you 118 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide regularly put together a newsletter, you can save the page layout settings and styles to a template. When you save a template, Corel DESIGNER allows you to add reference information, such as pagination, folds, category, industry, and other important notes. Although adding template information is optional, doing so makes it easier to organize and locate templates later on. For example, adding descriptive notes to a template lets you subsequently search for that template by entering text from the notes. To create a template 1 Click File Save as template. 2 Type a name in the File name list box. 3 Locate the folder where you want to save the template. 4 Click Save. 5 In the Template properties dialog box, specify the options you want: • Name — Assign a name to your template. This name will appear with the thumbnail in the Templates pane. • Sided — Choose a pagination option. • Folds — Choose a fold from the list, or choose Other and type the fold type in the text box next to the Folds list box. • Type — Choose an option from the list, or choose Other and type the template type in the text box next to the Type list box. • Industry — Choose an option from the list, or choose Other and type the industry for which the template is designed. • Designer notes — Type important information about the intended use of the template. If you click Cancel, you close the Template properties dialog box without saving the template. If you save a template to a previous version of Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite (12.5 or earlier), you cannot add reference information. The Designer notes text box supports HTML markup, so you can paste such content as graphics and hyperlinks. Graphics pasted from an HTML file are referenced from their original location and are not embedded in the Corel DESIGNER document. Therefore, if you plan to share a template with Working with templates 119 others, make sure that they have access to the location of the graphics. If you paste formatted text (also known as “rich text”) from a Rich Text Format (RTF) or HTML file, the formatting properties of the text are preserved. If you don’t want to add reference information, click OK without specifying any of the options. You can also enter designer notes by copying content from another document and pasting it into the Designer notes text box. To format text in the Designer notes text box, use the following shortcut keys: • Ctrl + B — applies bold formatting to selected text • Ctrl + I — italicizes selected text • Ctrl + U — underlines selected text • Ctrl + K — assigns a hyperlink to selected text Using saved templates to create files When you create a new drawing based on a template, Corel DESIGNER formats the page according to the page layout settings in the template and then loads the template’s styles into the new file. To create a new file based on a saved template 1 Click File Open. If you are using Windows XP, choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Files of type list box. 2 Locate the folder where the template is stored. 3 Double-click a template filename. 4 Enable the New from template check box in the Open dialog box. If you want to load page settings and objects in addition to loading the template’s styles, enable the With contents check box. Editing templates You can edit a template by making changes to the styles, page layout settings, or objects. For example, if you like a template but want to make it more versatile, you can 120 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide add styles that you’ve created or that you’ve taken from another template. For information about setting page layout options, see “Specifying the page layout” on page 503. To edit a template 1 Click File Open. If you are using Windows XP, choose CDT - Corel DESIGNER template from the Files of type list box. 2 Locate the folder where the template is stored. If you are using Windows XP, you can preview the contents of a template by enabling the Preview check box. 3 Double-click a template filename. 4 In the Open dialog box, enable the Open for editing check box. Loading styles from other templates After you have started a drawing with a template, you can load a different template. When you load a template, you can choose to load just the styles or to load styles, page layout settings, and objects. To load styles from another template 1 Click Window Graphic and text styles. 2 In the Graphic and text styles docker, click the flyout button Template Load. , and click 3 Locate the folder where the template is stored. 4 Click the template that contains the styles that you want to load. 5 Click Open. When you use the Load command, only the styles are loaded. Corel DESIGNER does not use the page layout settings in the template and does not add to the page any objects saved with the template. The attributes of existing objects are maintained. Working with templates 121 Collaborating You can share designs and ideas with clients and co-workers in a Web-based environment by using CorelDRAW ConceptShare™. You can create multiple workspaces, upload your designs, and invite others to post comments. This section includes the topic “Using CorelDRAW ConceptShare” on page 123. Using CorelDRAW ConceptShare You can access CorelDRAW ConceptShare from Corel DESIGNER by opening a CorelDRAW ConceptShare account. After you log into your account and create one or more workspaces, you can upload your document to one of the workspaces you have created. Each workspace can contain multiple documents or designs. You can then invite others to one or more of your workspaces. Each workspace has separate user permissions, and the people who have access to a workspace have access to all documents within that workspace. Each person who has permission to enter your workspace can view and mark up elements of the design you have posted. Users can also write comments, or respond to previous comments posted by others. If multiple users are logged in at the same time, they can interact in real time, providing instant feedback. For more information, visit the CorelDRAW ConceptShare Web site. To open a CorelDRAW ConceptShare account 1 Click Window ConceptShare. The ConceptShare docker opens. 2 Click the Sign up now button. 3 Follow the instructions. Collaborating 123 The CorelDRAW ConceptShare online content may not be available in all languages. Some languages that are currently unavailable may become available in the future. To log in CorelDRAW ConceptShare 1 Click Window ConceptShare. The ConceptShare docker opens. 2 Type your e-mail and password in the text boxes. 3 Click the Submit button. The CorelDRAW ConceptShare online content may not be available in all languages. Some languages that are currently unavailable may become available in the future. You can also access your CorelDRAW ConceptShare account online at the CorelDRAW ConceptShare Web site. To publish the current page to a CorelDRAW ConceptShare workspace 1 Make sure you are logged into your CorelDRAW ConceptShare account. If you have logged in from a browser and you want to publish a document from Corel DESIGNER, you must log in again from Corel DESIGNER. 2 Click Window ConceptShare. The ConceptShare docker opens. 3 Choose a workspace, and click the Publish page link. You can also publish the current page to a workspace by clicking File Publish page to ConceptShare, right-clicking the page tab at the bottom of the screen and choosing Publish page to ConceptShare, or right-clicking the page in the Object manager docker and choosing Publish page to ConceptShare. 124 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Lines, shapes, and outlines Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Drawing shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Shaping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 125 Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes Corel DESIGNER lets you add lines and brushstrokes by using a variety of techniques and tools. After you draw lines or apply brushstrokes to lines, you can format them. You can also format the outlines that surround objects. The program provides you with preset objects that you can spray along a line. You can create connector and dimension lines and callouts in drawings. This section contains the following topics: • Setting the default property values • Drawing lines • Closing multiple line segments • Drawing callouts • Drawing connector lines • Drawing dimension lines • Formatting lines and outlines • Adding arrowheads to lines and curves • Drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines • Applying linear-pattern brushstrokes • Spraying linear patterns along a line Setting the default property values All objects that you create are based on the default property values, which include outline style and fill color. You can change the properties for a selected object, but the default property values are applied automatically when you draw a new object. There are several ways to change the default property values. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 127 To change the default property values To Do the following Set the default property values to be the same as the selected object Click the Keep settings property bar. Set the default property values when nothing is selected Change a property on a property bar, color palette, dialog box, or docker. For example, on the Property manager docker, click the Fountain fill button to have all future objects have the fountain fill you created. You can also click a color on the color palette to change the default fill color, or right-click a color to change the default outline color. Set the default fill color by dragging Drag a color from the color palette, and drop it on a blank area in the drawing window. button on the You can also click Tools Save settings as default to save the current settings, or you can access the Options dialog box to set specific settings. See “Saving defaults” on page 755 for more information. Drawing lines You can draw many different kinds of lines, including straight lines, curved lines, lines that contain both straight and curved segments, and straight lines that are perpendicular or tangent to objects. In addition, you can draw straight or curved segments and then add one node at a time. You can also draw curved segments by specifying the width and height. By using control points, you can easily shape a curved line and draw B-splines, which are typically smooth, continuous curved lines. B-splines touch the first and last control points and are pulled by the points in between. However, unlike the nodes on Bézier curves, control points don’t let you specify the points through which a curve passes when you want to align a curve with other drawing elements. The control points that touch the line are referred to as “clamped”. Clamped control points function as anchors. The control points that pull the line but do not touch it are referred to as “floating”. The first and last control points are always clamped on open-ended B-splines. The points in between float by default, but you can clamp points 128 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide if you want to create cusps or straight lines within the B-spline. You can edit completed B-splines by using the control points. The path of a B-spline curve is determined by the control points you set. Some lines have nodes and control points that you can manipulate to shape lines as you draw. For information about node types, see “Working with curve objects” on page 177. Corel DESIGNER provides preset lines that let you create thick strokes in a variety of shapes. After you draw a preset line, you can apply a fill to it. For information about applying fills, see “Filling objects” on page 333. When drawing lines using the curve tools, you can hide the bounding box that displays around the lines once they are drawn. The curve tools include: the Linear pattern tools, the Freehand, the 2-point line tool, the Bezier curve tool, the Pen tool, Multi-point line tool, the B-Spline tool, and the 3-point curve tool. You can hide the bounding box to enhance the fluidity of drawing lines in quick succession. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 129 To draw a straight line 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the 2-point line tool . 2 Point to where you want to start the line, and drag to draw the line. As you drag, the length and angle of the segment appear in the status bar. If you’re adding to a line, the total length for all segments also appears. You can also Draw a line by using the Multi-point line tool Click the Multi-point line tool . Click where you want to start the line, and click where you want to end the first line segment. Click to add additional segments. Double-click to end the line. Draw a line by using the Pen tool Click the Pen tool . Click where you want to start the line segment, and click where you want to end it. Add a line segment to a selected line With the 2-point line tool, point to the end node of a selected line, and drag to draw the line. You can constrain a two-point line to a straight vertical or horizontal line by holding down Ctrl while you drag. You can change the angle of this line by clicking Tools Options, clicking Edit in the Workspace list of categories, and changing the value in the Constrain angle box. You can use snapping to specify the starting points and endpoints of lines. For information, see “Working with precision” on page 91. To draw a perpendicular line 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the 2-point line tool 2 On the property bar, click the Perpendicular 2-point line . button. 3 Click the edge of an object, and drag to where you want the line to end. If you want to draw a line that is perpendicular to two objects, drag to the edge of the second object, and release the mouse button when the perpendicular snap point appears. To extend the line beyond the second object, hold down Ctrl when the perpendicular snap point appears, and drag to where you want the line to end. 130 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Drawing a perpendicular line This procedure cannot be used for drawing a line that is perpendicular to the baseline of a text object. You can also drag from an existing curve to draw a perpendicular line. To draw a tangent line 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the 2-point line tool 2 On the property bar, click the Tangential 2-point line . button. 3 Click the edge of a curved segment in an object, and drag to where you want the tangent line to end. If you want to draw a line that is tangent to two objects, drag to the edge of the second object, and release the mouse button when the tangent snap point appears. When the quadrant snap point coincides with tangent snap point, the quadrant snap point appears. To extend the line beyond the second object, hold down Ctrl when the tangent snap point appears, and drag to where you want the line to end. Drawing tangent lines Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 131 The Tangential 2-point line mode can be used for drawing the sides of the cylinder. To draw a curved line 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the Freehand tool . 2 Point to where you want to start the curve, and drag to draw the line. You can also Draw a curved line by using the Multi-point line tool Click the Multi-point line tool . Point to where you want to start the curve, and drag across the drawing page. Double-click to finish the curve. Draw a curved line by using the Bézier curve tool Click the Bézier curve tool . Click where you want to place the first node, and drag the control point in the direction you want the curve to bend. Release the mouse button. Point to where you want to place the next node, and drag the control point to create the curve you want. Double-click to finish the curve. The length of the line appears in the status bar as you drag. Draw a curved line by using the Pen tool Click the Pen tool . Click where you want to place the first node, and drag the control handle to where you want to place the next node. Release the mouse button, and drag the control handle to create the curve you want. You can erase a portion of a curved freehand curve by holding down Shift and dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse button. You can close an open curve object by clicking Arrange Join curves. 132 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To draw a curved line by specifying width and height 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the 3-point curve tool . 2 Click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to end. The starting and end positions appear in the status bar. 3 Release the mouse button, and click where you want the apex of the curve to be. As you position the apex, the length of the segment appears in the status bar. If you’re adding to a line, the total length for all segments also appears. To draw a B-spline 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the B-Spline tool . 2 Click where you want to start the line. 3 Click to set as many control points as you need to shape your line. Control points float by default, but you can clamp control points to the line by pressing V while clicking. 4 Double-click to finish the line. Pressing Esc cancels the line instead of finishing it. You can also Reshape the line by using control points Select the line by using the Shape tool , and reposition the control points to reshape the line. Float a control point Select the line by using the Shape tool , click a clamped control point, and click the Float control point button on the property bar. Clamp a control point Select the line by using the Shape tool , click a floating control point, and click the Clamp control point button on the property bar. Add a control point Select the line by using the Shape tool and double-click along a control line. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes , 133 You can also Delete a control point Select the line by using the Shape tool , and double-click the control point that you want to delete. Select multiple control points Select the line by using the Shape tool , and hold down Shift while you click on the control points that you want to select. If you add to a B-spline by selecting the first or last control point, the clamped control point automatically changes to a floating control point as you draw the new portion of the line. You can change whether a control point is floating or clamped by holding down V and clicking a control point. You can also add control points while you draw a B-spline by pressing Spacebar instead of clicking. By choosing Arrange Convert to curves, you can convert a B-spline line to curves and then reshape it by using nodes. After a line has been converted, you can no longer edit it by using B-spline control points. To draw a preset line 1 Click the Linear pattern tools button, and click the Linear pattern preset tool . 2 Choose a preset line shape from the Preset stroke list box. 3 Drag until the line is the shape you want. If you want to set the line width, type a value in the Stroke width box on the property bar. To hide the bounding box when using curve tools 1 In the toolbox, click one of the following curve tools: • Linear pattern tools • Freehand • 2-point line 134 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Bézier curve • Pen • B-Spline • Multi-point line • 3-point curve 2 Click the Bounding box button on the property bar. When you hide the bounding box while working with one curve tool, the bounding box remains hidden for all curve tools. For example, if you hide the bounding box when using the Freehand tool, it remains hidden when you switch to the Bézier tool. You can also hide the bounding box when drawing with the curve tools by clicking Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, clicking Display, and then enabling the Hide bounding box for curve tools check box. Closing multiple line segments The Arrange Join curves command lets you create a closed object from line segments by selecting which lines you want to connect and the shape of the connecting line. You can connect lines by using the closest nodes between lines. The connecting line can be either straight or curved. You can also connect lines by using their starting nodes and end nodes. The end node of the first selected line connects directly with the starting node of the closest selected line. The connected lines will have the properties of the first line selected. For more information about closing multiple line segments, see “To join curves” on page 179. Drawing callouts You can draw callouts, which are lines that point to and identify objects in a drawing. You can choose from a variety of line ends, including arrowheads and other styles, to point to objects. Callouts can have one, two, or three line segments, or “legs,” that precede the text. You can use more than one style for callout text within a drawing. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 135 Callout style Example Line Box Side-bar Box-bar Circle Box-balloon Boxed circle Triangle You can enhance callouts in several ways. For instance, you can change the line width and color, and you can adjust the gap between the line and the text. In addition to typing text, you can insert text from the Clipboard or from object properties, or you can add a value and increment it as you add more callouts. You can also add a halo behind the leader lines. A halo is a mask behind the leader line that makes it easier to see when the line is on top of another object. Usually, the halo is the same color as the page. 136 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide White halos are applied to the callouts to help them stand out against the underlying objects. Callouts are added as linked groups. You can break the callout apart if necessary. To draw a callout 1 Click the Callout tools button, and click one of the following callout tools: • 1-leg callout • 2-leg callout • 3-leg callout 2 Click where you want to place the arrowhead. 3 Click to end each line segment. 4 Add the callout text. You can also Change the callout style Choose a style from the Callout style box. Change the distance between the leader line and the callout text Type a value in the Callout gap box. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 137 To add text to a callout 1 Click the Callout tools button, and click the Text source tool . 2 Enable one of the following options: • Interactive — lets you type the text at the end of the callout line • Clipboard — pastes text from the Clipboard to the callout • Object property — adds an object property that you choose, such as the object name, to the callout • Increment — adds a numeric value to the callout. The value is incremented as you continue to add callouts, and you can specify the start value and amount to increment by for each addition. The increment values you set apply only to the active drawing. If properties are associated with an object, you can show them in callouts. To add a halo to a callout 1 Click the Halo button on the property bar. 2 Enable the Halo options check box. 3 Adjust any of the following controls: • Width — lets you specify the width of the halo on each side of the line • Color — lets you access a color palette to change the color of the page or other element • Opacity — lets you control the visibility of objects under the halo by specifying a percentage value (with values less than 100 allowing visibility) • Justification — lets you specify the side or sides to which the halo is applied 138 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can apply halos only to solid lines. The default width for a halo is double the line width, and the default color for the halo is the page color. This default halo is applied to each side of the line. To remove a halo from an object, select it, click the Halo button, and disable the Halo options check box. To break a callout apart • Right-click the callout, and click Break callout apart. Drawing connector lines You can draw connector lines, also known as “flow lines,” in flowcharts and wiring diagrams to link shapes and demonstrate how different elements in the drawing are connected. After you attach a connector line to an object, it remains attached to the object even when you move it. You can also leave an end of a connector line unattached to any object, and you can add arrowheads to connector lines to demonstrate the flow direction. For information about drawing flowchart shapes, see “Drawing predefined shapes” on page 173. There are several types of connector lines that you can draw. In addition to drawing straight lines, you can draw right-angle connector lines and automatically create right angles as you draw. You can choose between the Right-angle connector line tool, which draws a right angle with a sharp corner, and the Round right-angle connector line tool, which draws a rounded corner. You can also draw curved connector lines by using either the B-spline connector line tool or the Bézier curve connector tool. Right-angle connector line Straight connector line Examples of connector lines Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 139 Connector lines attach to objects by anchor points. By default, each object has four anchor points, located on the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the object. Each anchor point appears as a small red diamond on the object. You can move an anchor point along the edge of an object, or you can move an anchor point to any area inside or outside the object. You can also add an anchor point to an object. Anchor points appear as small red diamonds. When you move an object in a drawing, the connector line will snap to the nearest available anchor point. When you add an anchor point to an object, it is not available as a snapping point for connector lines. However, you can set a property on the anchor point to make it available as a snapping point. You can set an object to repel right-angle, right-angle round, and B-spline connector lines. If the object is in a connector line route, then the connector line flows around it. If there is no route for the connector line to follow without intersecting the object, then it will flow through the object. Straight-line and Bézier-curve connector lines cannot flow around objects. You can add halos to connector lines. A halo is a mask behind the connector line that makes the line easier to see when it is on top of another object. Usually, the halo is the same color as the page, although you can choose any color that you like. Halos also let you modify a connector line without requiring extra node editing. You can also convert connector lines to curves. When you convert a connector line to a curve, any attached text label changes to an artistic text object. 140 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To draw a straight connector line 1 Click the Connector tool button, and click the Straight line connector tool . 2 Click where you want to start the line and drag to where you want to end the line. You can also Draw a right-angle connector line Click the Connector tool button, and click the Right-angle connector tool or the Right-angle round connector tool . Click where you want to start the line and drag to where you want to end the line. Draw a curved connector line Click the Connector tool button, and click the B-spline connector tool or the Bézier curve connector tool . Click where you want to start the line and drag to where you want to end the line. To change the shape of the line, reposition the control points as needed. After you snap a connector line to an anchor point on an object, the connector line always snaps to that anchor point, even if you move the object around in the drawing. To ensure that the line connects to the closest available anchor when you move the object, release the mouse button to end the connector line inside the object. To change the direction of a connection line 1 Click the Connector tool button, and click the Edit anchor tool . 2 Click the anchor point from which you want to change the connector line direction. 3 On the property bar, click the Adjust anchor direction button . 4 In the Anchor direction box, type one of the following values: • 0 — directs the connector line to the right • 90 — directs the connector line straight up • 180 — directs the connector line to the left • 270 — directs the connector line straight down You can change the direction of only right-angle and Bézier-curve connector lines. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 141 To add an anchor point to an object 1 Click the Connector tool button, and click the Edit anchor tool . 2 Double-click anywhere on an object to add the anchor point. By default, anchor points that you add to an object are not available as snap points for a connector line when the object is moved around in the drawing. To make an anchor point available as a snap point, select it with the Edit anchor tool, and click the Auto anchor button on the property bar. By default, the position of the anchor point is calculated relative to its position on the page. You can set the anchor point position relative to the object that it is attached to, which is useful if you want to set anchor points in the same relative position in multiple objects. To set the anchor point position relative to the object, select the anchor point with the Edit anchor tool . On the property bar, click the Relative to object button , and type the coordinates in the Anchor position box. To move or delete an anchor point To Do the following Move the anchor anywhere along the perimeter of an object Drag the anchor point to another point on the perimeter. Move the anchor to the middle of an object Drag the anchor point to any point inside the object. Delete an anchor On the property bar, click the Delete anchor button . To set a connector line to flow around objects 1 Using the Pick tool , select the object to which the connector line is attached. 2 Click Window Property manager. 3 In the Property Manager docker, click the General tab. 4 Enable the Wrap connector line check box. To flow around an object, a connector line must be attached to the object by at least one end. 142 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To convert a connector line to a curve • Right-click the connector line, and click Convert to curves. If the connector line is attached to an object, you must first right-click the connector line, and click Break apart. You can also convert a curve or a shape, such as a rectangle or an ellipse, to a connector line by clicking Arrange Convert to connector. To add a text label to a connector line 1 Select the Connector tool button. 2 Double-click the connector line. A text cursor appears. 3 Type the text. As you move the connector line, the text label remains attached to it. To add a halo to a connector line 1 Using the Pick tool , select the connector line. 2 On the property bar, open the Halo properties flyout . 3 Enable the Halo options check box. 4 Modify any of the following settings: • Width — lets you specify the width of the halo on each side of the line • Color — lets you access a color palette to change the color of the page or other element • Opacity — lets you control the visibility of objects under the halo by specifying a percentage value (with values less than 100 allowing visibility) The default width for a halo is double the line width. This is applied to each side of the line. The default color for a halo is the page color. To remove a halo from a line, select it, open the Halo properties flyout and disable the Halo options check box. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes , 143 Drawing dimension lines You can draw dimension lines to indicate the measurements of objects in a drawing, such as length, width, height, depth, and distance. Dimension lines can indicate the measurements of objects in a drawing. You can add several types of dimension lines: • Vertical or horizontal dimension lines measure the vertical (y-axis) or horizontal (x-axis) distance between any two nodes. • Parallel dimension lines measure the actual distance between two nodes. • Angular dimension lines measure angles. • Segment dimension lines measure the linear distance between the end nodes of a segment, or the linear distance between the two most distant nodes in multiple segments. Segment dimension lines can also measure selected successive segments. • Radial or diametric dimension lines measure the radius or diameter of a circle or a partial circle. You can measure the distance between the end nodes of a segment (left) or between the two most distant nodes in multiple segments (right). 144 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can set how dimension text and lines are displayed. For example, you can choose the unit of measurement, specify the position and font of the dimension units, and add a prefix or suffix to dimension text. You can also customize the extension lines on which dimension lines rest. You can specify the distance between the extension lines and the object that is measured, and the length of the extension overhang. Extension overhang is the portion of the extension line that falls beyond the dimension arrows. Extension overhang Extension line Distance from object By default, dimension text is dynamic. If you resize the object to which a dimension line is attached, the dimension text is updated automatically to display the new size. You can make the dimension text static, however, if necessary. When a dimension line is so small that its arrowheads overlap, the application automatically places them outside the leader lines. Arrowheads are reversed when a dimension line is too small. For more information about formatting lines, see “Formatting lines and outlines” on page 149. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 145 To draw a vertical, horizontal, or parallel dimension line 1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Horizontal or vertical dimension tool or the Parallel dimension tool . 2 Click to place the starting point, and drag to where you want to place the endpoint of the dimension line. 3 Move the pointer to position the dimension line, and click to place the dimension text. By default, dimension text is centered on the dimension line. To draw an angular dimension line 1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Angular dimension tool . 2 Click where you want the two lines that measure the angle to intersect, and drag to where you want the first line to end. 3 Click where you want the second line to end. 4 Click where you want the angle label to appear. To draw a segment dimension line 1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Segment dimension tool . 2 Click the segment that you want to measure. 3 Move the pointer to where you want to position the dimension line, and click where you want to place the dimension text. You can also Measure the distance between the two most distant nodes in multiple segments Using the Segment dimension tool , marquee select the segments, drag to position the dimension line, and click where you want to place the dimension text. Measure successive segments automatically Click the Automatic successive dimensioning button on the property bar, and marquee select the segments that you want to measure. Drag to position the dimension line, and click where you want to place the dimension text. 146 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Segment dimension lines can be applied automatically to selected successive segments. To draw a radial or diametric dimension line 1 Click the Dimension tools button, and click the Radial dimension tool. or Diametric 2 Click a circle or a circular arc, and drag to where you want the line to change direction. You can hold down the constrain key while dragging to constrain the leader line angle to the current constrain angle. 3 Move the pointer, and then click to place the dimension text. If you want to add a symbol to the dimension text, choose a symbol from the Dimension symbol list box on the property bar. If you transform a circle to an ellipse after applying a radial or diametric dimension line, the dimension measurement does not appear. When you transform the ellipse back to a circle, the correct measurement is displayed. Examples of radial and diametric dimension lines Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 147 To set the display of dimension units 1 Select a dimension line. 2 On the property bar, choose options from the following list boxes: • Dimension style — lets you choose fractional, decimal or standard dimension units • Dimension precision — lets you choose a level of precision for the measurements • Dimension units — lets you choose the unit of measurement You can also Hide dimension units Click the Display units button Specify the position of dimension units on the Click the Text position button property bar, and click a text position. Change the point size and font of dimension units Select the dimension text by using the Pick tool . On the property bar, choose a font style from the Font list box, and type a value in the Font size box. Specify a prefix or suffix for dimension text Type a prefix or suffix in the Prefix or Suffix box on the property bar. Hide or show a leading zero with a dimension value Click the Show leading zero button on the property bar. (The leading zero appears in dimension lines by default.) Make dimension text static Click the Dynamic dimensioning button . . Most dimension line controls on the property bar become unavailable. If you change the size of the object to which the b line is attached, the dimension line text is not updated. To customize extension lines 1 Select a dimension line. 2 On the property bar, click the Extension line options button 148 . Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 To specify the distance between the extension lines and the object, enable the Distance from object check box, and type a value in the Distance box. 4 To specify the length of the extension overhang, enable the Extension overhang check box, and type a value in the Distance box. Formatting lines and outlines You can change the appearance of both lines and outlines. For example, you can specify their color, width, style, corner shape, and cap style. You can also remove a line or outline, and you can create your own line or outline style. The program also lets you copy the color of an outline to other objects and convert outlines to objects so that you can fill them. For more information about filling objects, see “Filling objects” on page 333. Setting the miter limit for outlines lets you specify at what angle a sharp corner is either mitered (pointed) or beveled (squared off). Line styles You can choose from a variety of line styles. Line styles are organized into two categories: standard and enhanced. Standard line styles consist exclusively of dashes and spaces. The dashes and spaces vary to create different patterns. You can use a preset pattern or create a custom pattern. Each line style pattern is defined by units. There are fifty units — each of which can be “on” (filled in) or “off ” (blank) to define a pattern that contains a maximum of ten dashes or spaces. You can also set the pattern length. When you increase or decrease the pattern length, the dashes and spaces appear longer or shorter because you are changing the size of the units to fit the specified pattern length. The line width is not affected if you change the pattern length. In the Edit line style dialog box, each box represents a unit that can be filled in to create a dash, or left blank to create a space. You can move the white slider to the right to increase the number of units in your pattern. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 149 Enhanced line styles consist of shapes, zigzags, or multiple lines to create diverse patterns. You can edit an enhanced line style by changing the width of the lines or the width of the overall pattern. When you apply an enhanced line style to a filled object, the fill is contained within the path of the object, not the outline. For example, if you have a circular object with a zigzag line style, the fill does not extend into the points of the zigzag. These pocket drawings use a standard line style (left), an enhanced line style with low pattern-width settings (center), and an enhanced line style with higher pattern-width settings (right). The fill is always contained within the object’s path, not the object’s outline. The outline created by a standard or enhanced line style can appear in front of or behind a fill. For example, you may want an outline to appear behind a fill to line up the outline with the outer edge of the fill. In the drawing on the left, the outline is in front of the fill. Because the outline width is centered on the object’s path, the outline covers part of the object’s fill. In the drawing on the right, the outline width is the same, but the outline has been moved behind the fill and therefore lines up with the outer edge of the object. 150 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To specify line and outline settings 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen button . 3 In the Style area of the Outline pen dialog box, enable the Standard or Enhanced option. 4 Choose a line style from the Pattern picker. 5 Specify the settings you want. To Do the following Change the line or outline color In the Outline area, choose a color from the color picker. Change the line or outline width In the Outline area, type a value in the Width box. Change the pattern length of a standard pattern In the Pattern style area, type a value in the Length box. Change the width of an enhanced pattern In the Pattern style area, type a value in the Width box. The pattern width value must be higher than the outline width value. Automatically scale the line or outline if an object is resized Enable the Scale with image check box. Position the outline beneath the fill Enable the Behind fill check box. Set the miter limit Type a value in the Miter limit box If the pattern Width value is too low, the pattern might not appear as expected. To view the pattern on your object, try increasing the pattern Width value and decreasing the outline Width value. You can also specify line settings from the property bar or the Outline page of the Property manager docker. You can also change the color of a line or outline by right-clicking a color swatch on the color palette. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 151 To edit a standard line style 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen button . 3 In the Pattern style area, enable the Standard option. 4 Choose a line style from the Pattern list box. 5 Click Edit style. 6 Follow the instructions in the Edit line style dialog box to edit the pattern. 7 Click Replace. To create a standard line style 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen button . 3 In the Pattern style area, enable the Standard option. 4 Click Edit style. 5 Follow the instructions in the Edit line style dialog box to create a new pattern. 6 Click Add to save your new pattern in the Pattern picker. To copy an outline to another object 1 Using the Pick tool , select the object that has the outline to be copied. 2 Right-click the object, and drag to the second object. A blue outline of the first object follows the pointer to the second object. 3 Release the mouse button over the second object, and choose Copy outline here. For more information about copying object properties, see “Copying object properties, transformations, and effects” on page 226. To convert an outline to an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Convert outline to object. 152 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The gear drawing on the left has a gray fill and a blue outline. By converting the outline to an object, you can separate the new object (center) from the old filled shape (right). To remove an outline from an object 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, choose None from the Outline width list box. You can also remove an object’s outline by selecting the object and right-clicking No Color on the color palette. Adding arrowheads to lines and curves Arrowheads let you enhance the starting points and endpoints of lines and curves. You can specify the attributes of an arrowhead with precision. For example, you can define the exact size of an arrowhead as well as offset or rotate the arrowhead by a precise amount. You can also flip arrowheads vertically and horizontally. You can save your specified attributes as arrowhead presets for later use. 1 2 3 4 5 Arrowhead in its original form (1), resized (2), with offset of 60% along the x-axis (3), flipped horizontally (4), and rotated at 90 degrees (5). Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 153 You can edit existing arrowhead presets, and you can create an arrowhead preset based on an existing one. You can also create an arrowhead preset based on an object such as a curve or a closed shape. When you no longer need an arrowhead preset, you can delete it. To add an arrowhead 1 Select a line or curve. 2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen button . 3 In the Arrowheads area of the dialog box, open the Start arrowhead or End arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape. You can also Switch arrowheads from one end of a line or curve to another Click Options Swap. Remove an arrowhead from a line or curve Click Options None. You can also add an arrowhead by using the Start arrowhead or End arrowhead selector on the property bar. To specify the arrowhead attributes of a line or curve 1 Using the Pick tool , select a line or curve that has an arrowhead. 2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen button . If you want starting and ending arrowheads to have the same size, offset, rotation angle, and orientation, enable the Share attributes check box in the Arrowheads area of the Outline pen dialog box. 3 In the Arrowheads area of the Outline pen dialog box, click Options Attributes below the Start arrowhead or End arrowhead picker. 4 In the Arrowhead attributes dialog box, perform any of the tasks in the following table. 154 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Specify the size of an arrowhead In the Size area, type a value in the Length or Width box. If you want to create a nonproportional arrowhead, disable the Proportional check box. Offset an arrowhead In the Offset area, type values in the X and Y boxes. Mirror an arrowhead In the Mirror area, enable the Horizontally or Vertically check box. Rotate an arrowhead Specify an angle in the Rotation box. Save custom arrowhead attributes as an arrowhead preset Enable the Save as arrowhead preset check box. You can access the new arrowhead preset from the Start arrowhead and End arrowhead selectors on the property bar. Specifying the attributes of an arrowhead changes the outline properties of an object but does not change the arrowhead preset that was applied. To edit an arrowhead preset 1 Using the Pick tool , select an object that has an arrowhead. 2 On the property bar, click the Outline pen button . 3 In the Arrowheads area of the Outline pen dialog box, click Options Edit. 4 In the Arrowhead attributes dialog box, specify the attributes you want. For information about the attributes you can specify, see “To specify the arrowhead attributes of a line or curve” on page 154. You can create an arrowhead preset that is based on an existing preset. In the Arrowheads area of the Outline pen dialog box, click Options New. Then, specify the attributes you want in the Arrowhead attributes dialog box, and type a preset name in the Save arrowhead area. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 155 To delete an arrowhead preset, select the preset from the Start or End arrowhead picker in the Outline pen dialog box, and click Options Delete. To create an arrowhead preset from an object 1 Select an object to use as an arrowhead. 2 Click Tools Create Arrowhead. 3 In the Create arrowhead dialog box, type a value in the Length box or Width box. If you want to create a nonproportional arrowhead, disable the Proportional check box, and type values in both the Length and Width boxes. Drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines Corel DESIGNER lets you simulate the effect of a calligraphic pen when you draw lines. Calligraphic lines vary in thickness according to the direction of the line and the angle of the pen nib. By default, calligraphic lines appear as closed shapes drawn with a pencil. You can control the thickness of a calligraphic line by changing the angle of the line that you draw in relation to a specified calligraphic angle. For example, when the line that you draw is perpendicular to the calligraphic angle, the line is at the maximum thickness specified by the pen width. Lines drawn at the calligraphic angle, however, have little or no thickness. By using either a mouse or a pressure-sensitive pen and graphics tablet, you can create pressure-sensitive lines that vary in thickness. Both methods result in lines with curved edges and varying widths along a path. For information about using a pressure-sensitive pen on a graphics tablet, see the manufacturer’s instructions. An image drawn by using two different linear pattern lines: calligraphic lines (left), and flat preset lines (right). 156 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can use preset lines to create thick strokes of various shapes.After you draw a calligraphic or preset line, you can apply a fill to it. For information about applying fills, see “Filling objects” on page 333. To draw a calligraphic line 1 In the toolbox, click the Linear pattern tools button, and then click the Calligraphic tool . 2 Type a value in the Calligraphic angle box on the property bar. 3 Drag until the line is the shape you want. You can also Set the width of the line Type a value in the Stroke width box on the property bar. Smooth the edges of the line Type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. Apply transformations to line thickness when scaling Click the Scale stroke with object button on the property bar. Hide the bounding box for drawing Click the Bounding box button property bar. on the The width you set is the maximum line width. The angle of the line you draw in relation to the calligraphic angle determines the line’s actual width. You can also access calligraphic lines by clicking Effects Linear patterns and specifying the settings that you want in the Linear patterns docker. To draw a pressure-sensitive line 1 In the toolbox, click the Linear pattern tools button, and then click the Pressure tool . If you are using the mouse, press the Up arrow or Down arrow to simulate changes in pen pressure, which change the width of the line. 2 Drag until the line is the shape you want. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 157 You can also Set the width of the line Type a value in the Stroke width box on the property bar. Smooth the edges of the line Type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. Apply transformations to line thickness when scaling Click the Scale stroke with object button on the property bar. Hide the bounding box for drawing Click the Bounding box button property bar. on the The width you set represents the line’s maximum width. The amount of pressure that you apply determines the line’s actual width. To draw a preset line 1 In the toolbox, click the Linear pattern tools button, and then click the Linear pattern preset tool . 2 Choose a preset line shape from the Linear pattern preset list box on the property bar. 3 Drag until the line is the shape you want. You can also Set the width of the line Type a value in the Stroke width box on the property bar. Smooth the edges of the line Type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. Apply transformations to line thickness when scaling Click the Scale stroke with object button on the property bar. Hide the bounding box for drawing Click the Bounding box button property bar. 158 on the Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Applying linear-pattern brushstrokes Corel DESIGNER lets you apply a variety of preset brushstrokes, ranging from brushstrokes with arrowheads to brushstrokes that are filled with patterns. When you draw a preset brushstroke, you can specify some of its attributes. For example, you can change the width of a brushstroke and specify its smoothness. You can also create custom brushstrokes by using an object or a group of vector objects. When you create a custom brushstroke, you can save it as a preset. To apply a preset brushstroke 1 Click the Linear pattern tools button, and click the Linear pattern brush tool . 2 Choose a brush category from the Category list box. 3 Choose a brushstroke from the Brushstroke list box. 4 Drag until the stroke is the shape you want. You can also Set the width of the stroke Type a value in the Stroke width box on the property bar. Smooth the edges of the stroke Type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. Apply transformations to stroke thickness when scaling Click the Scale stroke with object button on the property bar. Hide the bounding box for drawing Click the Bounding box button property bar. on the If you have access to a brushstroke that is not listed in the Brushstroke list box, you can apply it by clicking the Browse button on the property bar, and locating the brushstroke file. To create a custom brushstroke 1 Select an object or a set of grouped objects. 2 Click the Linear pattern tools button, and click the Linear pattern brush tool . Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 159 3 Click the object or grouped objects. 4 Click the Save linear pattern stroke button on the property bar. 5 Type a filename for the brushstroke. 6 Click Save. Example of a custom linear pattern brushstroke You can create custom brushstrokes by clicking Window Linear patterns and specifying the settings that you want in the Linear patterns docker. Spraying linear patterns along a line Corel DESIGNER lets you spray a series of objects along a line. You can spray graphics, text, or imported bitmaps or symbols. You can control how a sprayed line appears by adjusting the spacing between objects, so that they are closer or farther apart from each other. You can also vary the order of objects in the line. For example, if you are spraying a series of objects that includes a star, a triangle, and a square, you can change the spray order so that the square appears first, followed by the triangle second, and the star third. The program also lets you shift the position of objects in a sprayed line by rotating them along the path, or by offsetting them in one of four different directions: alternating, left, random, or right. For instance, you can choose a left offset direction to align the sprayed objects to the left of the path. You can also create a new spraylist with objects of your own. 160 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The Linear pattern sprayer tool lets you repeat objects along a line. To spray a line 1 Click the Linear pattern tools button, and click the Linear pattern sprayer tool . 2 Choose a spray pattern category from the Category list box on the property bar. 3 Choose a spray pattern from the Spray pattern list box on the property bar. If the spraylist that you want is not listed, click the Browse button on the property bar to select the folder where the file is located. 4 Drag to draw the line. You can also Adjust the number of objects sprayed at each spacing point Type a number in the top box of the Images per dab and image spacing box on the property bar. Adjust the spacing between dabs Type a number in the bottom box of the Images per dab and image spacing box on the property bar. Set the spray order Choose a spray order from the Spray order list box on the property bar. Adjust the size of spray objects Type a number in the top box of the Size of sprayed objects box on the property bar. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 161 You can also Increase or decrease the size of the objects to be sprayed as they progress along the line Type a number in the bottom box of the Size of sprayed objects box on the property bar. Reset a spraylist to its saved settings Click the Reset values button property bar. Apply transformations to stroke thickness when scaling Click the Scale stroke with object button on the property bar. Hide the bounding box for drawing Click the Bounding box button property bar. on the on the Increasing the value for the size of the objects to be sprayed along the line causes objects to become larger as they are distributed along the path. Spraylists that have more complex objects use more system resources. Lines that contain complex objects take longer to produce, and these objects increase the file size. Using symbols for each group in the list can help reduce file size and the demands on your system. For more information about creating symbols, see “Working with symbols” on page 249. To rotate the objects to be sprayed 1 Select the spraylist that you want to adjust. 2 Click the Rotation button on the property bar. 3 Type a value between zero and 360 in the Angle of rotation box. If you want each object in the spray to rotate incrementally, enable the Use increment check box, and type a value in the Increment box. 4 Enable one of the following options: • Relative to path — rotates objects in relation to the line • Relative to page — rotates objects in relation to the page 5 Press Enter. To offset the objects to be sprayed 1 Select a spraylist. 2 Click the Offset button 162 on the property bar. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Enable the Use offset check box to offset objects from the path of the line sprayed. If you want to adjust the offset distance, type a new value in the Offset box. 4 Choose an offset direction from the Direction list box. If you want to alternate between the left and right of the line, choose Alternating. To create a new spraylist 1 Click Effects Linear patterns. 2 Select an object, a set of grouped objects, or a symbol. 3 Click the Save button on the Linear patterns docker. 4 In the Create a new stroke dialog box, enable Object sprayer. 5 Click OK. 6 Type a filename in the File name box. 7 Click Save. Working with lines, outlines, and brushstrokes 163 Drawing shapes Corel DESIGNER lets you draw basic shapes, which you can modify using special effects and reshaping tools. This section contains the following topics: • Drawing rectangles and squares • Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges • Drawing polygons and stars • Drawing grids • Drawing predefined shapes • Drawing by using shape recognition Drawing rectangles and squares Corel DESIGNER lets you draw rectangles and squares. You can draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally with the Rectangle tool or by specifying the width and height with the 3-point rectangle tool. The 3-point rectangle tool lets you quickly draw rectangles at an angle. You can create a 3-point rectangle by first drawing its baseline and then drawing its height. The resulting rectangle is angled. You can also draw a rectangle or square with rounded, scalloped or chamfered corners. You can modify each corner individually or apply the changes to all corners. In addition, Drawing shapes 165 you can specify that all corners scale relative to the object. You can also specify the default corner size for drawing rectangles and squares. Understanding rounded, scalloped, and chamfered corners Rounding produces a curved corner, scalloping replaces the corner with an edge that has a curved notch, and chamfering replaces the corner with a straight edge, also known as a bevel. The cabinet doors have different styles applied to the corners. From left to right you can see standard corners with no changes, filleted corners, scalloped corners, and chamfered corners. To draw rectangles or squares with rounded, scalloped, or chamfered corners, you need to specify the corner size. For rounding or scalloping a corner, the corner size determines the corner radius. The radius is measured from the curve’s center to its perimeter. Higher corner size values produce more rounded corners or deep scalloped corners. Center Perimeter Radius Center Perimeter From left to right, you can see the radius of a rounded corner and the radius of a scalloped corner. The size value for chamfering a corner represents the distance to set where the chamfer will begin in relation to the original corner. Higher corner size values produce a longer chamfered edge. 166 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Distance For more information about modifying the corners of curve objects, such as lines, text, or bitmaps, see “Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners of curve objects” on page 192. To draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally To Do the following Draw a rectangle In the toolbox, click the 2-point rectangle tool . Drag in the drawing window until the rectangle is the size you want. Draw a square In the toolbox, click the 2-point rectangle tool . Hold down Ctrl, and drag in the drawing window until the square is the size you want. You can draw a rectangle from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. You can also draw a square from its center outward by holding down Shift + Ctrl as you drag. You can draw a rectangle that covers the drawing page by double-clicking the 2-point rectangle tool . To draw a 3-point rectangle 1 In the toolbox, click the 3-point rectangle tool . 2 In the drawing window, point to where you want to start the rectangle, drag to draw the width, and release the mouse button. 3 Move the pointer to draw the height, and click. To adjust the size of the rectangle, type values in the Object size boxes on the property bar. Drawing shapes 167 To constrain the angle of the baseline to a preset increment, known as constrain angle, hold down Ctrl as you drag. For information about changing the constrain angle, see “To constrain an object while drawing or editing” on page 102. To draw a rectangle or square with rounded, scalloped, or chamfered corners 1 Click a rectangle or square. 2 Click one of the following buttons on the property bar: • Round corner — produces a curved corner • Scalloped corner — replaces a corner with an edge that has a curved notch • Chamfered corner — replaces a corner with a flat edge 3 Type values in the Corner radius areas on the property bar. 4 Press Enter. You can also Apply the same changes to all corners Click the Edit corners together on the property bar. Disable the scaling of corners relative to the object Click the Relative corner scaling button on the property bar. button If you modify the corners of a rectangle or square and save it to a previous version of Corel DESIGNER the shape may be converted to curves. You can also modify the corners of a selected rectangle or square by clicking the Shape tool , clicking a corner option button on the property bar, then dragging a corner node toward the shape’s center. If you prefer to modify only one corner, hold down Ctrl, then drag a corner node toward the shape’s center. To specify the default corner size for drawing rectangles and squares 1 Click Tools Options. 2 Double-click Toolbox from the Workspace list of categories. 168 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Click Rectangle tool. 4 In the Rectangle corners area, type values in the boxes. You can also Apply the same changes to all corners Click the Edit corners together Disable the scaling of corners relative to the object Click the Relative corner scaling button. button. Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges You can draw an ellipse by dragging diagonally or by specifying three points. You can also draw a circle by specifying three points, or you can specify the center and a point on the radius. Another way to create an ellipse is to convert a curve object. The object to be converted must have a recognizable elliptical shape to be eligible. For instructions, see “To convert a curve to an ellipse” on page 180. Drawing an arc or wedge (pie shape) is similar to drawing a circle or an ellipse, except that you move the line end points around to create the shape. To draw an ellipse or a circle • Click the Circle tools or Ellipse tools button, and click the tool you want to use. To draw a Do the following 3-point circle Click the 3-point circle tool . Drag to specify the centerline of the circle, move the pointer, and click to specify the third point. Center-point circle Click the Center-point circle tool . Click where you want to place the center, drag until the circle is the size you want, and release the mouse button. Center-radius circle Click the Center-radius circle tool . In the Circle dialog box, type a value for the radius, and click where you want to place the center point. Drawing shapes 169 To draw a Do the following 2-point ellipse Click the 2-point ellipse tool . Drag diagonally until the ellipse is the size you want, and release the mouse button. 3-point ellipse Click the 3-point ellipse tool . Drag to specify the centerline of the ellipse, and release the mouse button. Move the pointer until the ellipse is the size and shape you want, and click. When drawing a circle, holding down the constrain key when dragging constrains you to the current constrain angle. See “Using constrain keys” on page 102 for more information. Holding down the constrain key when drawing an ellipse constrains the shape to a circle. You can draw a two-point or three-point ellipse from its center outward by holding down the Shift key as you drag (if the constrain key is Ctrl). To draw an arc or a wedge • Click the Circle tools or Ellipse tools button, and click the tool you want to use. To draw Do the following An arc Click the Arc button on the property bar. Drag in the drawing window until the arc is the shape you want. A wedge Click the Pie button on the property bar. Drag in the drawing window until the wedge is the shape you want. To draw an arc, the ellipse or circle must have an outline. You can change the direction of a selected arc or a wedge by clicking the Geometric properties button on the property bar and clicking Complement. You can constrain the movement of the node to the current constrain angle by holding down Ctrl as you drag. 170 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Drawing polygons and stars Corel DESIGNER lets you draw polygons and two types of stars: perfect and complex. You can draw polygons and stars and then reshape them. For example, you can convert a polygon to a star by dragging its nodes, and you can change the number of sides on a polygon. Perfect stars are traditional-looking stars and can have a fill applied to the entire star shape. Complex stars have intersecting sides and produce original results with a fill applied. You can also draw a predefined star shape. For more information, see “To draw a predefined shape” on page 173. To draw a polygon 1 Click the Center-point polygon tool . 2 Point to where you want the center, and drag in the drawing window until the polygon is the size you want. Example of using a polygon to create a nut You can change a polygon to a star by selecting the polygon, clicking a node on one of the sides, and dragging toward the center of the polygon. To draw a star To Do the following Draw a perfect star In the toolbox, click the Star tool , and drag in the drawing window until the star is the size you want. Drawing shapes 171 To Do the following Draw a complex star In the toolbox, click the Complex star tool , and drag in the drawing window until the star is the size you want. To reshape a polygon To Do the following Reshape a polygon Click the Shape tool and click a node on the object. Drag the node to change the object’s shape. Change the number of sides of a polygon Select a polygon. Type a value in the Points or sides box on the property bar. To modify a star To Do the following Change the number of points on a star Select a star, type a value in the Points or sides box on the property bar, and press Enter. Reshape a star Select a star, click the Shape tool drag a node on the star. , and When you use the Shape tool to reshape a perfect star, the node movement is constrained. Also, on perfect stars, you cannot add or delete nodes, nor can you convert line segments to curves. Drawing grids You can draw a grid and set the number of rows and columns. A grid is a grouped set of rectangles that you can break apart. 172 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To draw a grid 1 In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tools button, and click the Graph paper tool . 2 Type values in the top and bottom portions of the Columns and rows box on the property bar. 3 Drag diagonally to draw the grid. If you want to draw the grid from its center point outward, hold down Shift as you drag; if you want to draw a grid with square cells, hold down Ctrl as you drag. To ungroup a grid 1 Select a grid by using the Pick tool . 2 Click Arrange Ungroup. Drawing predefined shapes You can draw predefined shapes, such as basic shapes, arrows, and stars using the Perfect Shapes collection. Basic shapes, arrow shapes, and star shapes have glyphs which let you modify their appearance. You can add text to the inside or outside of the shape. For example, you might want to put a label inside a flowchart symbol. To draw a predefined shape 1 Click the Perfect Shapes tools button, and click one of the following tools: • Basic shapes • Arrow shapes • Flowchart shapes • Miscellaneous shapes • Callout shapes 2 Open the Perfect shapes picker on the property bar, and click a shape. 3 Drag in the drawing window until the shape is the size you want. Perfect Shapes can be modified like any other shapes. Drawing shapes 173 To modify a predefined shape 1 Select a shape with a glyph. 2 Drag a glyph until the shape is the form you want. The right-angle, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not have glyphs. To add text to a predefined shape 1 Click the Text tool . 2 Position the cursor inside the shape’s outline until it changes to a Text cursor box , and then click. 3 Type and format the font inside the shape. Drawing by using shape recognition You can use the Smart drawing tool to draw freehand strokes that can be recognized and converted to basic shapes. Rectangles and ellipses are translated to native Corel DESIGNER objects; trapezoids and parallelograms are translated to Perfect Shapes objects; lines, triangles, squares, diamonds, circles, and arrows are translated to curve objects. If an object is not converted to a shape, it is smoothed. Objects and curves drawn with shape recognition are editable. You can set the level at which Corel DESIGNER recognizes shapes and converts them to objects. You can also specify the amount of smoothing applied to curves. You can set the amount of time to elapse between making a pen stroke and the implementation of shape recognition. For example, if the timer is set to one second and you draw a circle, shape recognition takes effect one second after you draw the circle. You can make corrections as you draw. You can also change the thickness and line style of a shape that was drawn by using shape recognition. Shapes created with the Smart drawing tool are recognized and smoothed. 174 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To draw a shape or line by using shape recognition 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the Smart drawing tool . 2 Choose a recognition level from the Shape recognition level list box on the property bar. 3 Choose a smoothing level from the Smart smoothing level list box on the property bar. 4 Draw a shape or line in the drawing window. The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart drawing tool is selected. To set shape recognition delay 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Toolbox. 3 Click Smart drawing tool. 4 Move the Drawing assistance delay slider. The minimum delay is 10 milliseconds; the maximum is 2 seconds. To make a correction while using shape recognition • Before the delay recognition period has elapsed, hold down Shift, and drag over the area you want to correct. You must start erasing the shape or line from the last point drawn. If you are drawing a freehand shape consisting of several curves, you can delete the last curve drawn by pressing Esc. To change the outline thickness of an object drawn with shape recognition 1 Click the Curve tools button, and click the Smart drawing tool . 2 Click the shape. 3 From the Outline width list box on the property bar, choose an outline thickness. Drawing shapes 175 The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart drawing tool is selected. When you overlap lines drawn with the Smart drawing tool, the outline thickness is determined by the average. You can change the line style of a shape drawn with shape recognition. For more information, see “To specify line and outline settings” on page 151. 176 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Shaping objects You can shape objects in various ways. This section contains the following topics: • Working with curve objects • Shaping curve objects by using Reflect Nodes mode • Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects • Trimming objects • Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners of curve objects • Welding and intersecting objects • Creating new objects from boundaries • Creating PowerClip objects • Smudging objects • Roughening objects • Applying distortion effects • Shaping objects by using envelopes For more information about working with paths and subpaths, see “Reference: Shaping objects” on page 208. Working with curve objects Objects can be shaped by manipulating their nodes and segments. An object’s nodes are the tiny squares that appear along the object’s outline. The line between two nodes is called a segment. Moving an object’s segments lets you make coarse adjustments to the object’s shape, while changing the position of its nodes lets you fine-tune the shape of the object. Most objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of freehand and Bézier curves. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape of an object, it is recommended that you convert that object to a curve object. By converting objects Shaping objects 177 to curves, you can shape them by adding, removing, positioning, aligning, or transforming their nodes. You can join two or more open curves or arcs to make a single curve object, and you can convert curve objects to ellipses, if they have a basic ellipse shape to begin with. Joining multiple line segments can be the starting point for a more complex drawing. Before you can manipulate an object’s nodes, you must select them. When working with curve objects, you can select individual, multiple, or all of the object’s nodes. Selecting multiple nodes lets you shape different parts of an object simultaneously. When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments, and therefore the amount of control you have over the shape of the object. You can also remove nodes to simplify an object’s shape. When you create an object, it is made up of one or multiple paths. If you are working on an open object, such as a freehand curve, you can join its start and end nodes. When you join the start and end nodes, the two nodes are pulled together to create a closed object. You can add color to the inside of closed paths that you create. For information on applying fills, see “Filling objects” on page 333. If the paths consist of multiple subpaths, you can break paths apart to extract a subpath. For information on breaking paths apart, see “Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects” on page 184. After you create a curve object, you can align its nodes horizontally or vertically. You can change the nodes on a curve object to one of four types: cusp, smooth, symmetrical, or line. Cusp nodes make the node’s intersecting line take on the shape of a corner or point when you adjust the position of the node’s control points. Smooth nodes make the node’s intersecting line take on the shape of a curve. Each control point 178 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide can be shortened or lengthened independently, giving you smaller or larger angles to work with. Symmetrical nodes make the node’s intersecting line take on the shape of a curve as well as intersect the node at exactly the same angle. Line nodes let you shape objects by changing the shape of their segments. You can make a curve segment straight or a straight segment curved. You can also change the direction of a segment by reversing the position of its start and end nodes. The effect is visible only when the ends of a segment are different. You can also shape objects by stretching, scaling, rotating, and skewing their nodes. For example, you can scale the corner nodes of a curve object to enlarge the curve object proportionally. Stretching, on the other hand, elongates a curve object so that its shape is distorted. All or parts of a curve object can be rotated in a counterclockwise or clockwise direction. You can also skew nodes to shape a curve object. To convert objects to curve objects 1 Select the object. 2 Click Arrange Convert to curves. You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual characters. To join curves 1 Using the Pick tool , hold down Shift, and select each object. 2 Click Arrange Join curves. 3 In the Join curves docker, choose one of the following options: • Extend • Chamfer • Fillet • Bézier curve 4 Click Apply. You can also Specify the maximum distance between endpoints Type a value in the Gap tolerance box. Specify the radius Type a value in the Radius box. Shaping objects 179 You cannot join interior points, only endpoints. Endpoints must be within the specified tolerance to be joined. If endpoints to be joined do not share coordinates, the endpoints are extended to their intersection. You can also connect the subpaths in a group of objects. You can also select curves by marquee selecting. If the curves are marquee selected, the properties from the top object on a layer are used. You can verify which object is the top one by clicking Window Object manager, which opens the Object manager docker. To convert a curve to an ellipse 1 Select the curve object to convert. 2 Click Arrange Convert to ellipse. To select a node 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select a curve object. 3 Click a node. You can also Marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Rectangular from the Shape tool selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes that you want to select. Freehand marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Freehand from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Select multiple nodes Press Shift, and click each node. Select all nodes on a selected curve Click Edit Select all Nodes. Deselect a node Press Shift, and click a selected node. 180 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Deselect multiple nodes Press Shift, and click each selected node. Deselect all nodes Click a blank space in the drawing window. When a curve is selected by using the Shape tool, you can select the first node in a curve object by pressing Home, or the last node by pressing End. To add or remove a node To Do the following Add a node Click the Shape tool , select a curve object, and double-click where you want to add a node. Delete a node Click the Shape tool, select a curve object, and double-click a node. To reduce the number of nodes in a curve object 1 In the toolbox, click the Shape tool . 2 Click a curve object, and do one of the following: • To reduce the number of nodes in the entire object, click the Select all nodes button on the property bar. • To reduce the number of nodes in a part of a curve object, marquee select the part you want to change. 3 Do one of the following: • Click Reduce nodes on the property bar to have overlapping and redundant nodes automatically removed. • Move the Curve smoothness slider to control the number of nodes that are removed. Removing many nodes can reshape the curve object. Shaping objects 181 To join the end nodes of a single subpath 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Click a subpath. 3 Click the Close curve button on the property bar. You can close multiple subpaths by clicking Arrange Join curves. To join the nodes of multiple subpaths 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Press Shift, and click a node from each subpath. 3 Click the Extend curve to close button on the property bar. If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine them into a single curve object, and then join the end nodes of the new subpaths. For information about combining objects, see “Combining objects” on page 244. To align nodes 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select a curve object. 3 Press Shift, and select the nodes that you want to align. 4 Click the Align nodes button on the property bar. 5 In the Node align dialog box, enable the alignment options you want. To make a node cusp, smooth, or symmetrical 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Click a node. 3 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Cusp node • Smooth node • Symmetrical node 182 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also change an existing node from one type to another using shortcut keys. To change a smooth node to a cusp node or a cusp node to a smooth node, click the node using the Shape tool, and press C. To change a symmetrical node to a smooth node or a smooth node to a symmetrical node, click the node using the Shape tool, and press S. To manipulate a curve object’s segments 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select a curve object. 3 Drag a segment until it’s the shape you want. You can also Straighten a curve segment Click a curve segment, and click the Convert to line button on the property bar. Curve a straight segment Click a straight segment, and click the Convert to curve button on the property bar. Change the direction of the curve Click a segment, and click the Reverse direction button on the property bar. To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select a curve object. 3 Select the nodes along the curve that you want to transform. 4 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Stretch or scale nodes • Rotate or skew nodes 5 Drag a set of handles to transform the nodes. Shaping objects 183 Shaping curve objects by using Reflect Nodes mode Reflect Nodes mode lets you edit nodes and have the same edits take place in reverse on corresponding nodes. For example, you can move a node to the right and have its corresponding node move the same distance to the left. This is useful when you want to shape curve objects and have the changes mirrored across their left and right or top and bottom. Usually, you will start with one curve object that is more or less symmetrical, or two curve objects, where the second was created by mirroring the first. To shape a curve object by using Reflect Nodes mode 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select corresponding nodes on the left and right or top and bottom. To select multiple nodes, drag to select the nodes, or click a node, hold down Shift, and click each additional node. 3 On the property bar, click one of the following: • Reflect nodes vertically button • Reflect nodes horizontally button 4 Edit the nodes on one side. The changes occur in reverse on corresponding nodes on the other side. To shape multiple objects by using Reflect Nodes mode, click the first object, and drag to select nodes; or hold down Shift, and click each node on the first object. Then hold down Shift, click the second object, and drag to select nodes, or hold down Shift and click each node on the second object. Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects You can crop, split, and erase portions of objects. Cropping objects Cropping lets you quickly remove unwanted areas in objects and imported graphics, eliminating the need to ungroup objects, break linked groups apart, or convert objects to curves. You can crop vector objects and bitmaps. 184 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Cropping objects When cropping objects, you define a rectangular area (cropping area) that you want to keep. Object portions outside the cropping area are removed. You can specify the exact position and size of the cropping area, and you can rotate and resize it. You can also remove the cropping area. You can crop only selected objects without affecting other objects in a drawing, or you can crop all objects on the drawing page. In either case, the affected text and shape objects are automatically converted to curves. Splitting objects You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You can split a closed object along a straight or jagged line. Corel DESIGNER lets you choose between splitting an object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two or more subpaths. You can specify whether you want to close paths automatically or keep them open. The Knife tool creates two separate objects by cutting the ellipse in half. The two objects are separated and used to form the top of the screw. Shaping objects 185 Erasing portions of objects You can erase unwanted portions of bitmaps and vector objects. Erasing automatically closes any affected paths and converts the object to curves. If you erase connecting lines, you create subpaths rather than individual objects. You can also delete portions of objects, called virtual line segments, that are between intersections. For example, you can delete loops from a curved line, or you can delete interior lines from overlapping shapes. To crop objects 1 Select the objects that you want to crop. If no objects on the drawing page are selected, all objects will be cropped. 2 In the toolbox, click the Deletion tools button, and click the Crop tool . 3 Drag to define a cropping area. 4 Double-click inside the cropping area. You can also Specify the exact position of the cropping area Type values in the Crop position boxes on the property bar, and press Enter. Specify the exact size of the cropping area Type values in the Crop size boxes on the property bar, and press Enter. Rotate the cropping area Type values in the Angle of rotation box. Remove the cropping area Click the Clear crop marquee button. Objects on locked, hidden, Grid, or Guides layers cannot be cropped. Also, you cannot crop OLE and Internet objects, rollovers, or the content of PowerClip™ objects. During cropping, affected linked groups, such as contours, blends, and extrusions, are automatically broken apart. You can move, rotate, and size the cropping area interactively as you would any object. To move the cropping area, drag it to a new position. To size the cropping area, drag any of its handles . To rotate the cropping area, click inside, and drag a rotation handle . You can remove the cropping area by pressing Esc. 186 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To split an object 1 Click the Deletion tools button, and click the Knife tool . 2 Position the Knife tool over the object’s outline where you want to start cutting. The Knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly. 3 Click the outline to start cutting. 4 Position the Knife tool where you want to stop cutting, and click again. You can also Split an object along a freehand curve Point to where you want to start the cut, and drag to where you want it to end. Split an object along a Bézier curve Hold down Shift, click where you want to start cutting an object, drag the control handle to where you want to position the next node, and click. Continue clicking to add more straight segments to the line. If you want to add a curved segment, point to where you want to place the node and drag to shape the curve. If you want to constrain the line by 15degree increments, hold down Shift + Ctrl. Split an object into two subpaths Click the Keep as one object button the property bar. Split an object while keeping only one of its parts Click the object’s outline where you want to start the cut, and point to where you want the cut to end. Press Tab once or twice until only the part of the object that you want to keep is selected, and then click. on By default, objects are split into two objects and paths are automatically closed. When you use the Knife tool on a selected object, the object becomes a curve object. Shaping objects 187 To divide an object into equal segments 1 Select the object you want to divide. 2 Click Arrange Shaping Equal divide. 3 In the Shaping docker, specify the following: • Divisions — number of segments to divide the object into • Gap — amount of space between segments If you want to group the segments after the divide, enable the Group divisions check box. If you want the segments to be combined as one object, enable the Combine divisions check box. Disable the check box if you want the segments to be individual objects. If you do not want to delete the original object, disable the Delete selected objects check box. 4 Click Apply. This feature creates a copy of the object and applies the divisions to the new object. If you do not delete the original object, you will have two objects, and it will look as though there are no changes. The resulting object inherits the original object’s edge and fill properties. You can divide curves, arcs, rectangles, and polygons. To divide other objects, you must first convert them to curves. You cannot divide images. You can select multiple objects to divide at one time. If you also enable the Group divisions check box, all the objects that you divide are grouped into a single group. To break a path To Do the following Break a path Click the Shape tool . Select a node, and click the Break curve button on the property bar. 188 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Extract a broken path from an object Click the Shape tool . Right-click a path, and click Break apart. Select a segment, node, or group of nodes that represents the portion of the path you want to extract, and click the Extract subpath button on the property bar. To erase portions of an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Deletion tools button, and click the Eraser tool . 3 Drag over the object. You can also Change the size of the eraser nib Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on the property bar, and press Enter. Change the shape of the eraser nib Click the Eraser shape button property bar. Maintain all the nodes of the area that is being erased Disable the Reduce nodes button property bar. on the on the When you erase portions of objects, any affected paths are automatically closed. You can erase in straight lines by clicking where you want to start erasing, and then clicking where you want to finish erasing. Press Ctrl if you want to constrain the line’s angle. You can also erase an area of a selected object by double-clicking the area with the Eraser tool. Shaping objects 189 To delete a virtual line segment 1 Click the Deletion tools button, and click the Virtual segment delete tool . 2 Move the pointer to the line segment you want to delete. The Virtual segment delete tool snaps upright when positioned properly. 3 Click the line segment. You can also Delete multiple line segments at one time Drag the pointer to enclose or intersect all target segments. Delete a virtual line segment that Hold down Alt and drag to draw a curve. intersects with a curve Weld line segments Hold down Shift, click the two overlapping end points. You can also hold down Alt + Shift, and drag to marquee select the overlapping nodes. The Virtual segment delete tool does not work on linked groups (like drop shadows), text, or images. Trimming objects Trimming creates irregularly shaped objects by removing object areas that overlap. You can trim almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot trim paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones. Before you trim objects, you must decide which object you want to trim (the target object) and which object you want to use to perform the trimming (the source object). For example, if you want to create a star-shaped cut out of a square object, the star is the source object because you are using it to trim the square. The square is the target object because it’s the object you want to trim. The source object trims the part of the target object it overlaps. For example, if you trim a rectangle by using a circle, the area of the rectangle that was covered by the circle is removed, creating an irregular shape. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes. 190 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Corel DESIGNER lets you trim objects in different ways. You can use a front object as the source object to trim an object behind it, or use the back object to trim a front object. You can also remove hidden areas of overlapping objects, so that only the visible areas remain in the drawing. Removing the hidden areas can reduce file size when you convert vector graphics to bitmaps. To trim an object 1 Select the source and target objects. 2 Click Arrange Shaping Trim. 3 Click Indicate target. 4 Click the object to trim. If you marquee select the objects, Corel DESIGNER trims the bottom-most selected object. If you select multiple objects individually, the last object selected is trimmed. If you want to delete objects during the trim, enable the Selected object[s] or Target object[s] check box. To trim front and back objects 1 Marquee select the source and target objects. 2 Click Arrange Shaping, and click one of the following: • Back minus front — removes the front object from the back one • Front minus back — removes the back object from the front one 3 Click Apply. You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object so that the object inside the PowerClip object will assume the new shape of the PowerClip container. For information about PowerClip objects, see “Creating PowerClip objects” on page 197. Text on a path is converted to a curve object before it is trimmed. Shaping objects 191 To trim overlapping areas among objects 1 Marquee select the objects that you want to trim. 2 Click Arrange Shaping Simplify. 3 Click Apply. You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object, so that the object inside the PowerClip object assumes the new shape. Text on a path is converted to a curve object before it is trimmed. Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners of curve objects You can fillet, scallop, or chamfer the corners of any curve object, whether it originates from a shape, lines, text, or a bitmap. Filleting produces a rounded corner, scalloping rounds and inverts the corner to create a notch, and chamfering bevels a corner so that it appears flat. Corel DESIGNER also lets you preview the corners before you apply the changes to them. For information about modifying the corners of squares and rectangles, see “Drawing rectangles and squares” on page 165. The cabinet doors have different styles applied to the corners. From left to right you can see standard corners with no changes, filleted corners, scalloped corners, and chamfered corners. You can fillet, scallop, or chamfer the corners of any curve object — whether it originates from a shape, lines, text, or bitmap. When you fillet, scallop, or chamfer noncurve shapes, they are automatically converted to curves. Text objects must be converted to curves manually by using the Convert to curves command. Changes apply to all corners unless you select individual nodes. You cannot fillet, scallop, or chamfer a smooth or symmetrical curve; the corner must be created by two lines that intersect at an angle of less than 180 degrees. 192 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If a fillet, scallop, or chamfer value is too high, the operation is not applied to some or all of the corners. This occurs when line segments aren’t long enough to apply the radius or chamfer distance. Even if the line segments appear long enough at the beginning of the operation, you must consider that the line segments shorten as the radius or chamfer values are applied across the object. In the example above, the circles represent fillet radius settings. The upper lines show the proposed fillets on the left and the successful results on the right. The lower lines also show the proposed fillets on the left, but the results on the right show that not all corners are filleted. After the first fillet is applied, the next corner can’t be filleted because the line segment isn’t long enough. This corner is skipped, and the final corner is filleted. To round object corners by filleting 1 Do one of the following: • Select a curve object using the Pick tool . • Select individual nodes on a curve object using the Shape tool . 2 Click Window Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer. 3 In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, enable the Fillet option. 4 Type a value in the Radius box. The radius is used to create a circular arc whose center is equidistant from either side of a corner. Higher values produce more rounded corners. 5 Click Apply. Shaping objects 193 The Apply button is disabled if no valid objects or nodes are selected. If you have a square or rectangle, you can also round all the corners at once by dragging a corner node toward the center of the object while the 2-point rectangle tool or 3-point rectangle tool is active. The shape is not converted to curves if you use this method. To scallop object corners 1 Do one of the following: • Select a curve object by using the Pick tool . • Select individual nodes on a curve object by using the Shape tool . 2 Click Window Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer. 3 In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, enable the Scallop option. 4 Type a value in the Radius box. The radius value is measured from the original corner point to create a scalloping arc. 5 Click Apply. The Apply button is disabled if no valid objects or nodes are selected. To bevel object corners by chamfering 1 Do one of the following: • Select a curve object by using the Pick tool . • Select individual nodes on a curve object by using the Shape tool . 2 Click Window Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer. 3 In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, enable the Chamfer option. 4 In the Chamfer distance area, type a value in the A box to set where the chamfer will begin in relation to the original corner. 194 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you do not want the chamfer to be equidistant from the original corner, click the Lock button , and enter a different value in the B box. A and B values are applied according to the direction in which the line is drawn. 5 Click Apply. Welding and intersecting objects You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or intersect almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones. You can weld objects to create one object with a single outline. The new object uses the welded objects’ perimeter as its outline and adopts the fill and outline properties of the target object. All intersecting lines disappear. You can weld objects regardless of whether they overlap each other. If you weld objects that do not overlap, they form a weld group that acts as a single object. In both cases, the welded object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object. You can weld single objects with intersecting lines so that the object breaks into several subpaths, but its appearance remains the same. Intersecting creates an object from the area where two or more objects overlap. The shape of this new object can be simple or complex, depending on the shapes you intersect. The new object’s fill and outline attributes depend on the object you define as the target object. To weld an object 1 Select the source object or objects and the target object. 2 Click Arrange Shaping Weld. 3 Click Indicate target. 4 Click the object to weld. Shaping objects 195 If you want to delete objects during the weld, enable the Selected object[s] or Target object[s] check box. To intersect an object 1 Select the source object or objects and the object to intersect with. 2 Click Arrange Shaping Intersect. 3 Click Indicate target. 4 Click the object to intersect with. If you want to delete objects, enable the Selected object[s] or Target object[s] check box. To intersect multiple objects, marquee select the source objects. Creating new objects from boundaries You can draw a boundary around the outer or inner edges of complex shapes to create a new closed curve object with the current properties (line weight, fill color, and so on). During this process, if you specify a point outside the selected objects, an outline is wrapped around the outside edge. If you specify a point on the inside of selected objects, an outline is drawn around the inner edges. If the objects do not overlap, each object is outlined separately. Error messages appear if you click directly on a line or if there is not sufficient space to create the boundary. Boundaries cannot be drawn around text, bitmaps, or open line endings. To create a new object from a boundary 1 Select the objects for the boundary. 2 Click Arrange Shaping Boundary. If you want the boundary object to be placed behind the current objects, enable Place behind selected. 3 Click Indicate boundary. 4 Click a point outside or inside the selected objects. 196 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you want to delete the original objects, enable Delete selected objects. Creating PowerClip objects Corel DESIGNER lets you place vector objects and bitmaps, such as photos, inside other objects, or containers. A container can be any object, for example artistic text or a rectangle. When you place an object into a container that is larger than the container, the object, called the content, is cropped to fit the form of the container. This creates a PowerClip object. You can create more complex PowerClip objects by placing one PowerClip object inside another PowerClip object to produce a nested PowerClip object. You can also copy the contents of one PowerClip object to another PowerClip object. After you create a PowerClip object, you can modify the content and the container. For example, you can lock the content, so that when you move the container, the content moves with it. Corel DESIGNER also lets you extract the content from a PowerClip object, so that you can delete the content or modify it without affecting the container. To create a PowerClip object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Effects PowerClip Place inside container. 3 Click the object you want to use as the container. If you want to create a nested PowerClip object, hold down the right mouse button, drag the PowerClip object inside a container, and click PowerClip inside. To copy the content of a PowerClip object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Effects Copy effect PowerClip from. 3 Click a PowerClip object. To edit the content of a PowerClip object 1 Select a PowerClip object. 2 Click Effects PowerClip Edit contents. Shaping objects 197 3 Edit the contents of the PowerClip object. 4 Click Effects PowerClip Finish editing this level. While you edit, the container is displayed in Wireframe mode and cannot be selected. To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object • Right-click a PowerClip object, and click Lock contents to PowerClip. If you move the container while the content is unlocked, the content remains stationary and is not visible until you move the container over it. To extract the content of a PowerClip object 1 Select a PowerClip object. 2 Click Effects PowerClip Extract contents. You must extract the contents of each level in a nested PowerClip separately. Smudging objects Smudging lets you distort an object by dragging its outline. When applying smudging to an object, you can control the extent and shape of the distortion, whether you use a pen tablet or a mouse. The smudging effect responds to both the angle of rotation — or bearing — and the tilt angle of the stylus (also known as a pressure-sensitive pen). Rotating the stylus changes the angle of the smudging effect and tilting the stylus flattens the brush tip and changes the shape of the smudging. If you are using a mouse, you can simulate the bearing and tilt of the stylus by specifying values. Increasing the bearing angle from 0 to 359° changes the angle of the brushstroke. As you decrease the tilt angle from 90° to 15°, you change the smudging shape by flattening the brush tip. Smudging can respond to the pressure of a stylus on a pen tablet where the smudging widens with more pressure and narrows with less. If you are using a mouse or want to override stylus pressure, you can enter real values to simulate the pressure of a stylus on 198 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide a pen tablet. Negative values to -10 create a narrowing distortion, 0 maintains an even stroke width, and positive values to 10 create an expanding distortion. Whether you are using a pen tablet or a mouse, you must specify the nib size. The nib size determines the width of the smudging applied to an object. You can apply the smudging effect to the inside and outside of an object. Objects placed in the foreground and background have been shaped by outside smudging (sun’s rays and blades of grass) and inside smudging (clouds). To smudge an object 1 Select a curve object using the Pick tool 2 Click the Shape tool . , and click the Smudge brush tool . 3 Drag around the outline to distort it. You can also Change the size of the brush nib Type a value in the Nib size box on the property bar. Change the size of the brush nib when using a pen tablet Click the Pen pressure button on the property bar, and apply pressure to the pen. Widen or narrow the smudging Type a value between -10 and 10 in the Dryout box on the property bar. Shaping objects 199 You can also Specify the shape of the smudging Type a value between 15 and 90 in the Tilt box on the property bar. Change the shape of the smudging when using a pen tablet Click the Pen tilt button bar. Specify the angle of the nib shape for smudging Type a value between 0 and 359 in the Bearing box on the property bar. Change the angle of the nib shape for smudging when using a pen tablet Click the Pen bearing button property bar. Smudge the inside of an object Click the outside of an object and drag inwards. Smudge the outside of an object Click the inside of an object an drag outwards. on the property on the You cannot apply smudging to Internet or embedded objects, linked images, grids, masks, mesh-filled objects, or objects with blend and contour effects. To get the minimum and maximum values for the smudging controls, rightclick the control on the property bar and click Settings. Roughening objects The roughening effect lets you apply a jagged or spiked edge to objects, including lines, curves, and text. You can control the size, angle, direction, and number of the indentations, whether you use a pen tablet or a mouse. The roughening effect is determined by the movements of the stylus (or pressuresensitive pen), by fixed settings, or by automatically applying perpendicular spikes to the line. Tilting the stylus toward and away from the tablet’s surface increases and decreases the size of the spikes. If you are using a mouse, you can specify a tilt angle between 0 and 90°. You can determine the direction of the spikes by changing the angle of rotation (or bearing) of the stylus as you apply the roughening effect to an object. When you are using a mouse, you can set the bearing angle from 0 to 359°. You can also increase or decrease the number of spikes that are applied as you drag. 200 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The roughening effect also responds to the pressure of the stylus on the tablet. The more pressure you apply, the more spikes are created in the roughened area. If you are using a mouse, you can specify values to simulate the stylus pressure. You can also change the brush nib size. RoughenRoughening allows you to apply jags or spikes to part of an outline or path. To roughen an object 1 Select a curve object by using the Pick tool . 2 Click the Shape tools button, and click the Roughen brush tool . 3 Point to the area on the outline you want to roughen, and drag the outline to distort it. You can also Specify the size of the roughening spikes Type a value between 0.01 and 2.0 in the Nib size box on the property bar. Change the number of spikes in a roughened area Type a value between 1 and 10 in the Frequency of spikes box on the property bar. Change the number of spikes in a roughened area when using a pen tablet Click the Pen pressure button property bar. Specify the height of the roughening spikes Type a value between 0 and 90 in the Tilt box on the property bar. Shaping objects on the 201 You can also Increase the number of roughening spikes as you drag Type a value between -10 and 10 in the Dryout box on the property bar. Change the height of the roughening spikes when using a pen tablet Click the Pen tilt button bar. Specify the direction of the roughening spikes Choose Fixed direction from the Spike direction list box. Type a value between 0 and 359 in the Pen bearing box on the property bar. Change the direction of the roughening spikes when using a pen tablet Choose Stylus setting from the Spike direction list box on the property bar. Create roughening spikes perpendicular to the path or outline Choose Auto from the Spike direction list box on the property bar. on the property Objects with distortions, envelopes, and perspective applied to them are converted to curve objects before the roughening effect is applied. To make the tilt angle and bearing responsive to the stylus, right-click the roughened object, and select a command from the submenu. To get the minimum and maximum values for the roughening controls, rightclick the control on the property bar, and click Settings. Applying distortion effects You can apply three types of distortion effects to shape objects. Distortion effect Description Push and pull Lets you push the edges of an object in or pull the edges of an object out Zipper Lets you apply a sawtooth effect to the edges of the object. You can adjust the amplitude and frequency of the effect. 202 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Distortion effect Description Twister Lets you rotate an object to create a swirl effect. You can choose the direction of the swirl, as well as the origin, degree, and amount of rotation. After you distort an object, you can change the effect by altering the center of distortion. This point is identified by a diamond-shaped handle, around which a distortion appears. It is similar to a mathematical compass, where the pencil moves around a stationary point. You can place the center of distortion anywhere in the drawing window, or choose to center it in the middle of an object so that the distortion is distributed evenly and the shape of the object changes in relation to its center. You can create an even more dramatic effect by applying a new distortion to an already distorted object. You don’t lose the effect of the original distortion if, for example, you apply a zipper distortion on top of a twister distortion. Corel DESIGNER also lets you remove and copy distortion effects. To distort an object 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Distort tool . 2 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons, and specify the settings you want: • Push and pull distortion • Zipper distortion • Twister distortion 3 Point to where you want to place the center of distortion, and drag until the object is the shape you want. You can also Change the center of distortion Drag the diamond-shaped position handle to a new location. Adjust the number of points on a zipper distortion Move the slider on the center of the distortion handle. Apply a preset distortion Choose a distortion preset from the Preset list box on the property bar. Shaping objects 203 You can also Apply more than one distortion to an object Click another distortion type on the property bar, click an object, and drag. You can reapply the effects to distorted objects. You can center a distortion by clicking the Center distortion button property bar. on the To remove a distortion 1 Select a distorted object. 2 Click Effects Clear distortion. Removing a distortion this way clears the most recent distortion you’ve applied. You can also remove a distortion from a selected object by clicking the Clear distortion button on the property bar. To copy a distortion 1 Select the object to which you want to copy a distortion. 2 Click Effects Copy effect Distortion from. 3 Click a distorted object. You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy the effect. For more information, see “To copy object properties from one object to another” on page 226. Shaping objects by using envelopes Corel DESIGNER lets you shape objects, including lines, artistic text, and paragraph text frames by applying envelopes to them. Envelopes are made of multiple nodes that 204 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide you can move to shape the envelope and, as a result, change the shape of the object. You can apply a basic envelope that conforms to the shape of an object, or you can apply a preset envelope. After you apply an envelope, you can edit it, or add a new envelope to continue changing the object’s shape. Corel DESIGNER also lets you copy and remove envelopes. You can edit an envelope by adding and positioning its nodes. Adding nodes gives you more control over the shape of the object contained in the envelope. Corel DESIGNER also lets you delete nodes, move multiple nodes simultaneously, change nodes from one type to another, and change a segment of an envelope to a line or curve. For more information about the different types of nodes, see “Working with curve objects” on page 177. You can also change the mapping mode of an envelope to specify how the object fits to the envelope. For example, you can stretch an object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then apply the horizontal mapping mode to compress it horizontally so that it fits the shape of the envelope. To apply an envelope 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Envelope tool . 3 On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Straight line mode — creates envelopes based on straight lines, adding perspective to objects • Single-arc mode — creates envelopes with an arc shape on one side, giving objects a concave or convex appearance • Double-arc mode — creates envelopes with an S shape on one or more sides • Unconstrained mode — creates freeform envelopes that let you change the properties of the nodes, and add or delete nodes 4 Click the object. 5 Drag the nodes to shape the envelope. If you want to reset the envelope, press Esc before releasing the mouse. You can also Apply a preset envelope Shaping objects Click the Add preset button on the property bar, and click an envelope shape in the list. 205 You can also Apply an envelope to an object with an envelope Click the Add new envelope button on the property bar, and drag the nodes to change the shape of the envelope. Remove an envelope Click Effects Clear envelope. You can prevent the object’s straight lines from being converted to curves by enabling the Keep lines button on the property bar. To copy an envelope 1 Select an object to which you want to copy an envelope. 2 Click Effects Copy effect Envelope from. 3 Select the object from which you want to copy the envelope. You can also copy an envelope by selecting an object with the envelope you want to copy, clicking the Copy envelope properties button on the property bar, and selecting an object. To edit an envelope’s nodes and segments 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Envelope tool . 2 Select an object with an envelope. 3 Double-click the envelope to add a node, or double-click a node to delete it. You can also Move several envelope nodes at once Click the Unconstrained mode button on the property bar, marquee select the nodes you want to move, and drag any node to a new position. Marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Rectangular from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes that you want to select. 206 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Freehand marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Freehand from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Move opposing nodes an equal distance in the same direction Press Shift, select two opposing nodes, and drag them to a new position. Move opposing nodes an equal distance in the opposite direction Click the Single-arc mode or Doublearc mode button on the property bar so that it appears raised, press Shift, and drag one of the nodes to a new position. Change an envelope node type Click the Unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears pressed, and click the Cusp node , the Smooth node , or the Symmetrical node button. Change an envelope segment to a straight line or curve Click the Unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears pressed, click a line segment, and click the Convert to line button or the Convert to curve button . To change the mapping mode 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Envelope tool . 2 Click an object with an envelope. 3 On the property bar, choose one of the following from the Mapping mode list box: • Horizontal — stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope and then compresses the object horizontally to fit the shape of the envelope • Original — maps the corner handles of the object’s selection box to the envelope’s corner nodes. The other nodes are mapped linearly along the edge of the object’s selection box. • Putty — maps the corner handles of the object’s selection box to the envelope’s corner nodes • Vertical — stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope and then compresses the object vertically to fit the shape of the envelope Shaping objects 207 4 Drag the nodes or the nodes’ control points. You can’t change the mapping mode of paragraph text frames to which you’ve applied an envelope. Reference: Shaping objects Objects created in Corel DESIGNER follow a path that gives them their defining shape. When this path is broken or cut, subpaths remain. Paths and subpaths Paths outline an object’s shape and are often visible as one or more line or curve segments. You can disconnect line segments from one another to create subpaths. Even though they are not connected, subpaths are still part of the defining path of the original object; however, you can extract a subpath to create two separate objects: the extracted subpath and the object it was extracted from. Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is constructed. For example, a single curve object with subpaths is often created when text is converted to curves. The letter “O,” for instance, is composed of two ellipses: the outside ellipse that defines the letter’s shape and the inside ellipse that defines the “hole.” The ellipses are subpaths that compose the single curve object, “O”. One of the basic reasons for creating an object with subpaths is that you can produce objects with holes in them. 1 2 3 1) The letter “O” is converted to curves. 2) The resulting subpaths are the outside ellipse that defines the shape of the letter and the inside ellipse (tinted gray) that defines the hole. 3) In comparison, the black ellipse consists of a single path and cannot contain a “hole.” 208 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Projecting objects The Corel DESIGNER application lets you work in projected drawing modes. You can use drawing profiles to project objects onto drawing planes and create the illusion of a three-dimensional image. This section contains the following topics: • Understanding projected drawing modes • Using projected drawing modes • Customizing drawing profiles Understanding projected drawing modes Corel DESIGNER provides preset drawing profiles for working in projected drawing modes. After choosing a drawing profile, you then draw or project objects onto its three drawing planes (top, front, and right) to create the illusion of a three-dimensional image. When you close your drawing, the last drawing profile you used is saved along with it; this drawing profile is automatically activated the next time you open the file. Corel DESIGNER provides 11 preset drawing profiles: • one isometric (default) • four dimetric • four trimetric • one cavalier oblique • one cabinet oblique You can choose a different drawing profile at any time; however, if you change drawing profiles after you have begun a project, the geometry of your existing objects will not change. If the preset drawing profiles do not meet your needs, you can create new ones or edit existing ones. For more information, see “Customizing drawing profiles” on page 214. Projecting objects 209 Each default drawing profile is associated with a set of three numbers, which correspond to the x, y, and z axes, respectively. The x-axis is measured in degrees, clockwise from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. The y-axis is measured in degrees, counterclockwise from the true horizontal, which is 0° east. The z-axis is measured in degrees, counterclockwise from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. The isometric drawing profile, for example, has measurements of (30,90,30) while the cavalier oblique drawing profile has measurements of (0,90,45). This image depicts a cube displayed by using eight different drawing profiles. Top row, left to right: Dimetric (37,90,37); Dimetric (16,90,37); Dimetric (7,90,42); Dimetric (15,90,15). Bottom row, left to right: Trimetric (12,90,23); Trimetric (5,90,30); Trimetric (45,90,7); Trimetric (54,90,17) You can choose to work from one of four drawing planes: • orthographic — draws on a flat plane, such as the top, front, or right drawing plane • top — draws onto a projected plane bounded by the x and z axes defined in the drawing profile • front — draws onto a projected plane bounded by the x and y axes defined in the drawing profile • right — draws onto a projected plane bounded by the y and z axes defined in the drawing profile The default drawing plane is orthographic. Although you can change drawing planes at any time, only one drawing plane can be active at a time. 210 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide In this example, a drawing profile is depicted. The x-axis is 37° clockwise from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. The y-axis is 105° counterclockwise from the true horizontal. The z-axis is 37° counterclockwise from a line perpendicular to the y-axis. Therefore, the drawing profile has a value of (37,105, 37). Using projected drawing modes You can specify a projected drawing mode by choosing drawing profiles and drawing planes from the Drawing plane toolbar. However, you can have only one drawing profile and one drawing plane active at a time. You can draw an object in a projected drawing mode, or you can project an object onto a drawing plane. You can also unproject an object from a drawing plane; this reconstructs the object as it would appear in an orthographic view. To display or hide the Drawing Plane toolbar • Click View Toolbars Drawing plane to display it. A check mark beside the Drawing plane command indicates that the Drawing plane toolbar is displayed. Projecting objects 211 To choose a preset drawing profile • From the Drawing profiles list box on the Drawing plane toolbar, choose one of the following preset drawing profiles: • Cabinet oblique (0, 90, 60) • Cavalier oblique (0,90,45) • Dimetric (37,90,37) • Dimetric (16,90,37) • Dimetric (7,90,42) • Dimetric (15,90,15) • Isometric (30,90,30) • Trimetric (12,90,23) • Trimetric (5,90,30) • Trimetric (45,90,7) • Trimetric (54,90,17) To choose a drawing plane • On the Drawing plane toolbar, choose one of the following drawing planes: • Orthographic • Top • Front • Right To draw an object in a projected drawing mode 1 From the Drawing profiles list box on the Drawing plane toolbar, choose a drawing profile. 2 On the Drawing plane toolbar, choose the Top, Front, or Right drawing plane. 3 Draw an object. To project an object onto a drawing plane 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Transformations Project. 3 In the Transformations docker, choose Project from the list box. 4 Enable one of the following options: • Top — projects the object onto the top plane • Front — projects the object onto the front plane 212 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Right — projects the object onto the right plane 5 To specify an origin point on the drawing around which to project the selected object, do one of the following: • Enable the first option under the Origin area, and type coordinates in the X and Y boxes. • Enable the first option under the Origin area, click the Set origin point interactively button next to the X and Y boxes, and click a point on the drawing. • Enable the second option under the Origin area, and enable the point relative to the selected object’s bounding box. 6 If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to a copy, type 1 in the Copies box. 7 Click Apply. Applying a contour to a projected object may not produce the desired results. It is recommended that you apply a contour to the object in its unprojected state and then project the object. Contour groups can be unlinked by clicking Arrange Break contour group apart. To unproject an object from a drawing plane 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Transformations Project. 3 In the Transformations docker, choose Unproject from the list box. 4 Enable one of the following options: • Top — unprojects the object from the top plane • Front — unprojects the object from the front plane • Right — unprojects the object from the right plane 5 To specify an origin point in the drawing around which to project the selected object, do one of the following: • Enable the first option under the Origin area, and type coordinates in the X and Y boxes. • Enable the first option under the Origin area, click the Set origin point interactively button next to the X and Y boxes, and click a point on the drawing. Projecting objects 213 • Enable the second option under the Origin area, and enable the point relative to the selected object’s bounding box. 6 If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to a copy, type 1 in the Copies box. 7 Click Apply. Customizing drawing profiles You can use the Projected axes docker to create and edit drawing profiles. The Projected axes docker features a real-time preview of a cube, which represents the projected axes and scales for the chosen drawing profile. When you change drawing profiles, or when you modify the projected axes or scales, the preview is automatically updated. The Projected axes docker allows you to set the degree offsets for the x, y, and z axes. For information on how these offsets are calculated, see “Understanding projected drawing modes” on page 209. The Projected axes docker also allows you to set a scale factor for each axis. For example, if you use a drawing profile with a scale of 50% on the x-axis, projected objects will display at half their original size along their x-axis. You can create a customized drawing profile from an existing one. You can also edit preset and custom drawing profiles, or you can delete them altogether. To display or hide the Projected Axes docker • Click Window Projected axes. A check mark beside the Projected axes command indicates that the Projected axes docker is displayed. To create or edit a drawing profile 1 If the Projected axes docker is hidden, click Window Projected axes to display it. If you want to edit a drawing profile, choose a profile from the list. 2 In the Projected axes docker, do one of the following: • Enter a value between -360 and 360 in the X axis angle box. Repeat for the y and z axes. • Click the User specified angle button next to the Angle box, and drag the pointer in the drawing window. 214 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Enter a value between 10 and 500 in the X axis scale box. Repeat for the y and z axes. 4 Click the Save button . 5 Choose where you want to save the file, and type a filename in the Filename box. 6 Click Save. You can create a custom axonometric drawing profile by having the application calculate the scale values automatically. To do this, type values in the X axis angle, Y axis angle, and Z axis angle boxes, and enable the Auto axonometric check box. Note that the Auto axonometric check box may be disabled for some angle values. In such cases, you first need to adjust the angle values so that the option becomes available. To delete a drawing profile 1 In the Projected axes docker, choose a drawing profile from the list box. 2 Click the Delete button Projecting objects . 215 Objects, symbols, and layers Working with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Working with symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Creating objects for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Working with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Object linking and embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Working with object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 217 Working with objects Working with objects is an essential part of creating drawings. This section contains the following topics: • Selecting objects • Changing object properties • Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects • Copying object properties, transformations, and effects • Cloning objects • Moving objects • Sizing and scaling objects • Rotating objects • Flipping objects • Skewing objects • Aligning and distributing objects • Changing the order of objects • Grouping objects • Combining objects • Locking objects • Finding and replacing objects • Accessing and displaying geometric information about objects • Inserting bar codes Selecting objects Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects, hidden objects, and a single object in a group or a nested group, and each object in the order in which it is created. You can also select all objects simultaneously and deselect objects. Working with objects 219 A selection box appears around a selected object, and an “X” appears at its center. You can select a single object in a group. You can select all objects using the Pick tool. However, some tools allow you to only select objects that are appropriate to the active tool. For example, if a curve tool is active, you can select any curve object, but you cannot select other object types. When you select an object, either a selection box, rotation and skew handles, or the object’s nodes appear. Clicking a selected object changes its selection mode. The selection modes are • Drag and scale — a selection box appears around the object. 220 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Rotate and skew — rotation and skew handles appear around the object. • Shape/Edit — the object’s nodes appear. You can drag, rotate, or shape the object by its snap points, depending on which selection mode is active. See “Using gravity snapping” on page 91 for a list of snap points. To select objects To select Do the following An object Click an object using the Pick tool Multiple objects Hold down Shift, and click each object you want to select. An object, starting with the first object created and moving toward the last object created Press Shift + Tab until a selection box appears around the object you want to select. An object, starting with the last object created and moving toward the first object created Press Tab until a selection box appears around the object you want to select. All objects Press Ctrl + A. Or click Edit Select all Objects. An object in a group Hold down Ctrl, and click an object in a group. An object in a nested group Hold down Ctrl, and click an object you want to select until a selection box appears around it. A hidden object Hold down Alt, and click the topmost object until a selection box appears around the hidden object you want to select. Multiple hidden objects Hold down Shift + Alt, and click the topmost object until a selection box appears around the hidden objects you want to select. Working with objects . 221 To select Do the following A hidden object in a group Hold down Ctrl + Alt, and click the topmost object until a selection box appears around the hidden object you want to select. The status bar displays a description of each hidden object as you select it. You can also select one or more objects by dragging around the object or objects using the Pick tool. This method is called “marquee select.” If you hold the Alt key while dragging, any objects you intersect are also selected. To deselect objects To deselect Do the following All objects Press Esc. Or click the Pick tool , and click a blank space in the drawing window. A single object in multiple selected objects Hold down Shift, and click the object using the Pick tool. Changing object properties Once you’ve created an object, you can change its properties. There are several ways to do this, including using the property bar, color palette, and dialog boxes. For more information about changing the default property values for new objects, see “Setting the default property values” on page 127. In addition, you can copy object properties such as outline, fill, and text properties from one object to another. For more information, see “Copying object properties, transformations, and effects” on page 226. 222 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects Corel DESIGNER provides you with several ways to copy objects. When you no longer need an object, you can delete it. Cutting, copying, and pasting You can cut or copy an object to place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing or another application. Cutting an object places it on the Clipboard and removes it from the drawing. Copying an object places it on the Clipboard but keeps the original in the drawing. Duplicating Duplicating an object places a copy directly in the drawing window and does not use the Clipboard. Duplicating is faster than copying and pasting. Also, when duplicating an object, you can specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object along the x and y axes. This distance is known as the offset. Duplicate offset Copying objects at a specified position You can create multiple copies of objects simultaneously, while specifying their position, without using the Clipboard. For example, you can distribute object copies horizontally, to the left or right of the original object; or you can distribute copies of objects vertically, below or above the original object. You can specify the spacing between copies of objects, or you can specify the offset at which copies of objects are created in relation to each other. Working with objects 223 To cut or copy an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit, and click one of the following: • Cut • Copy You can also cut or copy an object by right-clicking the object, and clicking Cut or Copy. To paste an object into a drawing • Click Edit Paste. To duplicate an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit Duplicate. The duplicate is placed at an offset from the original object. When you duplicate objects for the first time, the Duplicate offset dialog box appears. To specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object along the x and y axes, type values in the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset boxes. • Offset values of 0 place the duplicate on top of the original. • Positive offset values place the duplicate up and to the right of the original. • Negative offset values place the duplicate down and to the left of the original. If you’ve set the Ctrl and Shift keys to the Windows standard (Ctrl=Duplicate/Leave original, Shift=Constrain), you can duplicate an object as you place the duplicate where you want in the drawing window. To do this, first select the object using the Pick tool . Holding down Ctrl, drag the object to where you want to create a duplicate, and release the mouse button. For information about setting the Ctrl and Shift keys to the Windows standard, see “To change the constrain key” on page 103. You can also duplicate a selected object by pressing Ctrl+D. You can change the offset at which duplicates are created. Click Tools Options and in the Document list of categories, click General, and type values in the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset boxes. 224 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To delete an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit Delete. You can also delete an object by clicking the object and pressing Delete. To create copies of an object at a specified position 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit Step and repeat. 3 In the Step and repeat docker, type a value in the Number of copies box. To Do the following Distribute copies of objects horizontally In the Vertical settings area, choose No offset from the Mode list box. In the Horizontal offset area, choose Spacing between objects from the Mode list box. To specify the spacing between object copies, type a value in the Distance box. To place the object copies to the right or left of the original, choose Right or Left from the Direction list box. Distribute copies of objects vertically In the Horizontal settings area, choose No offset from the Mode list box. In the Vertical offset area, choose Spacing between objects from the Mode list box. To specify the spacing between copies of objects, type a value in the Distance box. To place the copies above or below the original, choose Up or Down from the Direction list box. Offset all copies of objects by a specified distance In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset areas, choose Offset from the Mode list box, and type values in the Distance boxes. Working with objects 225 Multiple copies of an object are offset by a specified distance. Copying object properties, transformations, and effects You can copy object properties such as outline, fill, and text properties from one object to another. You can copy object transformations such as sizing, rotating, and positioning as well as effects applied to an object. To copy object properties from one object to another 1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Attributes eyedropper tool . 2 Click the Properties flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Outline • Fill • Text 3 Click the edge of the object whose properties you want to copy. The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode. 4 Click the edge of the object to which you want to apply the copied properties. Options that are enabled in the Transformations and Effects flyouts on the property bar are also applied when you copy properties. 226 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also copy fill or outline properties, or both, by right-clicking an object with the Pick tool , dragging over another object, and choosing Copy fill here, Copy outline here, or Copy all properties. You can also copy object properties to a selected object by clicking Edit Copy properties from and clicking the object whose properties you want to copy. To copy size, position, or rotation from one object to another 1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Attributes eyedropper tool . 2 Click the Transformations flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Size • Rotation • Position 3 Click the edge of the object whose transformations you want to copy. The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode. 4 Click the edge of the object to which you want to apply the copied transformations. Options that are enabled in the Properties and Effects flyouts on the property bar are also applied when you copy properties. To copy effects from one object to another 1 Click the Eyedropper tools button, and click the Attributes eyedropper tool . 2 Click the Effects flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Perspective • Envelope • Blend • Extrude • Contour • Lens • PowerClip • Drop shadow Working with objects 227 • Distortion 3 Click the edge of the object whose effects you want to copy. The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode. 4 Click the edge of the object to which you want to apply the copied effects. Options that are enabled in the Properties and Transformations flyouts on the property bar are also applied when you copy properties. Cloning objects When you clone an object, you create a copy of an object that is linked to the original. Any changes you make to the original object are reflected automatically in the clone. Changes you make to the clone are not automatically reflected in the original, however. You can remove changes made to the clone by reverting to the original. Cloning lets you modify multiple copies of an object simultaneously by changing the master object. This type of modification is especially useful if you want the clone and master objects to differ by certain properties, such as fill and outline color, but the master object to control other properties, such as shape. If you simply want to use the same object in a drawing multiple times, consider using symbols, instead of clones, to keep the file size manageable. For more information about symbols, see “Working with symbols” on page 249. To clone an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit Clone. You can also Select the master object of a clone Right-click the clone, and click Select master. Select the clone objects of a master Right-click the master, and click Select clones. You can clone a master object multiple times, but you cannot clone a clone. 228 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To revert to the master object of a clone 1 Right-click a modified clone, and click Revert to master. 2 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Clone fill — restores the master fill attributes • Clone outline — restores the master outline attributes • Clone path shape — restores the master shape attributes • Clone transformations — restores the master shape and size attributes • Clone bitmap color mask — restores the master color settings Only the clone properties that are different from the master object are available in the Revert to master dialog box. Moving objects You can move objects by dragging, by specifying distance and direction, or by nudging. You can also move an object while you are drawing it. Super nudging and micro nudging let you move objects into place by increments. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.01-inch increments, but you can change the nudge values to suit your needs. To move an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Transformations Move. The Transformation docker appears. 3 Use one of the following methods: • Horizontal and vertical — type the horizontal and vertical values to move the object • Length and angle — type the distance and angle to move the object • Set distance interactively — click the Set distance interactively button , and drag the pointer in the drawing window to specify the distance and angle to move the object • Gap and direction — enable the second option in the docker, type a value for the gap, and choose the direction to move the object. This option moves the object in the selected direction at a distance equal to the height or width of its bounding box plus the specified gap. Working with objects 229 If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to copies that are created, type a number in the Copies box. You can also move a selected object by dragging it to another position in the drawing. You can set a precise location for the object by clicking the Geometric properties button in the property bar and typing values in the Property manager docker. You can use snapping to precisely specify an object’s position. For more information, see “Working with precision” on page 91. To move an object while drawing 1 Start drawing an object. 2 Hold down the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button, and drag the unfinished object to its new position. 3 Release the right mouse button, and continue drawing. Moving an object while drawing To nudge an object To Do the following Nudge a selected object by the nudge distance Press an Arrow key. 230 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Nudge a selected object by a fraction of the nudge distance (Micro nudge) Hold down Ctrl, and press an Arrow key. Nudge a selected object by a multiple of the nudge distance (Super nudge) Hold down Shift, and press an Arrow key. To set nudge distances 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3 Type a value in the Nudge box. 4 Type a value in one of the following boxes: • Super nudge • Micro nudge You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a value in the Nudge offset box on the property bar. To save the new nudge distances to use in new drawings, click Tools Save settings as default. Sizing and scaling objects Corel DESIGNER lets you size and scale objects. In both cases, you can change the dimensions of an object proportionally by preserving its aspect ratio. You can size an object’s dimensions by specifying values or changing the object directly. Scaling changes an object’s dimensions by a specified percentage. You can change an object’s origin for sizing or scaling purposes from its center to any of its eight selection handles. You can also specify a rectangular area for selected objects to scale into. Working with objects 231 To size an object To Do the following Size a selected object Drag any of the corner selection handles. Size a selected object from its center Hold down Shift, and drag one of the selection handles. Size a selected object to a multiple of its original size Hold down Ctrl, and drag one of the selection handles. Stretch a selected object as you size it Hold down Alt, and drag one of the selection handles. You can set a precise size for the object by clicking the Geometric properties button on the property bar and typing values in the Property manager docker. To scale an object 1 Select an object. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the Shape tools button in the toolbox, and click the Free transform tool . • Click View Toolbars Transform. 3 Click the Free scale button on the property bar. If you want to change the object’s reference point to use when scaling the object, locate the Object origin icon on the property bar and click the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. 4 On the property bar, type values in the horizontal or vertical Scale factor boxes to specify a percentage by which you want to scale the object horizontally or vertically. If you want to maintain the aspect ratio, click the Lock ratio button on the property bar. You can also Apply the scaling according to the object’s position rather than the x and y coordinates 232 Click the Relative to object button the property bar. on Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Scale an object using the Transformation docker Click Window Transformation Scale. Leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to copies that are created In the Transformation docker, type a number in the Copies box. Specify a rectangular area into which to scale the object In the Transformation docker, enable the Fit to box option. With this option, the number in the Copies box cannot be more than one. You can also scale an object by dragging a selection handle. Rotating objects You can rotate an object in a drawing by specifying an angle of rotation. You can also specify a point on the drawing around which to rotate, or rotate around a point on the selected object. To rotate an object 1 Select an object. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the Shape tools button in the toolbox, and click the Free transform tool . • Click View Toolbars Transform. 3 Click the Free rotation button on the property bar. If you want to change the object’s reference point to use when rotating the object, locate the Object origin icon on the property bar and click the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. 4 Type a value in the Angle of rotation box on the property bar. To specify a point on the drawing to rotate around, type coordinates in the Center of rotation X and Y boxes on the property bar. Working with objects 233 You can also Apply the rotation according to the object’s position rather than the x and y coordinates Click the Relative to object button the property bar. Rotate an object using the Transformation docker Click Window Transformation Rotate. Specify two points for the angle by dragging In the Transformations docker, click the Set angle interactively button next to the Angle box, and drag in the drawing window. Specify a point on the drawing to rotate around by clicking In the Transformations docker, click the Set center of rotation interactively button next to the X and Y origin boxes, and click a point on the drawing. Rotate around a point on the selected object In the Origin area of the Transformation docker, enable the option next to origin locator . Click the box that corresponds on to the reference point you want to set. Adjust the object orientation when rotating In the Transformations docker, enable the Rotate orientation option . Keep the object orientation when rotating In the Transformations docker, enable the Retain orientation option . Leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to a copy In the Transformations docker, type a number in the Copies box. You can also rotate a selected object by dragging a rotation handle clockwise or counterclockwise. Flipping objects With Corel DESIGNER, you can create mirror images of objects. Flipping an object mirrors it from left to right or top to bottom. By default, the anchor point is in the center of the object. 234 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To flip an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Transformations Flip. 3 In the Transformations docker, enable the Horizontal flip option flip option . or Vertical 4 Enable the Origin point about which to flip the object. If you want to leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to a copy, type 1 in the Copies box. (One is the maximum number of copies.) You can also mirror a selected object by holding down Ctrl and dragging a selection handle to the opposite side of the object. Skewing objects When you skew an object, you slant it horizontally, vertically, or both. You can specify the degree by which you want to slant the object. You can also change the skew and sizing anchor point of an object from its default center position. To skew an object 1 Select an object. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the Shape tools button in the toolbox, and click the Free transform tool . • Click View Toolbars Transform. 3 Click the Free skew button on the property bar. If you want to change the object’s reference point to use when skewing the object, locate the Object origin icon on the property bar and click the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. 4 Type values in the Skew angle boxes on the property bar. You can also Apply the skewing according to the object’s position rather than the x and y coordinates Working with objects Click the Relative to object button the property bar. on 235 You can also Skew an object using the Transformation docker Click Window Transformation Skew. Change the origin point about which to skew the object In the Origin area of the Transformation docker , click the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. Leave the original object unchanged and apply the transformation to a copy In the Transformation docker, type a number in the Copies box. If you move the skew anchor point, you can reset it to the center again by clicking Arrange Clear transformations. You can also skew an object interactively by dragging one of its skew handles. Aligning and distributing objects Corel DESIGNER lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing. You can align objects to each other or to parts of the drawing page such as the center, edges, and grid. When you align objects to objects, you can line them up by their centers or by their edges. Corel DESIGNER lets you align multiple objects to the center of the drawing page horizontally or vertically. Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge of the page or to the nearest point on a grid. You can also align a single object, or multiple objects, to a precise point you specify. You can distribute objects at equal intervals in a specified area. 236 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Example of aligning objects to each one’s center To align an object with another object 1 Select the objects. 2 Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3 Click the Align tab. 4 Specify vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, or both: • To align objects along the vertical axis, enable the Left, Center, or Right check box. • To align objects along the horizontal axis, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom check box. 5 From the Align objects to list box, choose Active objects. If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box: • First line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference point • Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point • Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a text object as a reference point The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edges is determined by the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the last object created will be used. If you select the objects one at a time, the last object selected will be the reference point for aligning the others. Working with objects 237 You can also align objects with another object quickly, without using the Align and distribute dialog box, by clicking Arrange Align and distribute and clicking any of the first six alignment commands. The letter next to a command name indicates the keyboard shortcut that you can use to align objects. For example, the letter L next to the Align left command shows that you can press L to align objects with the leftmost point of the object that is used as a reference point. To align an object with the page center 1 Select an object. If you want to align multiple objects, marquee select the objects. 2 Click Arrange Align and distribute, and then click one of the following: • Center to page — aligns all objects with the page center, both vertically and horizontally • Center to page vertically — aligns objects with the page center along a vertical axis • Center to page horizontally — aligns objects with the page center along a horizontal axis To align an object with the page edge 1 Select an object. If you want to align an object group, select the group. 2 Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3 Click the Align tab. 4 Specify vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, or both: • To align objects along the vertical axis, enable the Left, Center, or Right check box. • To align objects along the horizontal axis, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom check box. 5 Choose Edge of page from the Align objects to list box. If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box: • First line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference point 238 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point • Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a text object as a reference point You can align an object to the grid by choosing Grid from the Align to objects list box. To align an object with a specified point 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3 Click the Align tab. 4 Specify vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, or both: • To align objects along the vertical axis, enable the Left, Center, or Right check box. • To align objects along the horizontal axis, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom check box. 5 From the Align objects to list box, choose Specified point. If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box: • First line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference point • Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point • Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a text object as a reference point 6 Click Apply. 7 Click where you want to align the object. You can use snapping to precisely specify the alignment point. For more information, see “Working with precision” on page 91. To distribute objects 1 Select the objects. 2 Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3 Click the Distribute tab. Working with objects 239 4 To distribute the objects horizontally, enable one of the following options from the upper-right row: • Left — evenly spaces the left edges of the objects • Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects • Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects • Right — evenly spaces the right edges of the objects 5 To distribute the objects vertically, enable one of the following options from the column on the left: • Top — evenly spaces the top edges of the objects • Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects • Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects • Bottom — evenly spaces the bottom edges of the objects 6 To indicate the area over which the objects are distributed, enable one of the following options: • Extent of selection — distributes the objects over the area of the bounding box surrounding them • Extent of page — distributes the objects over the drawing page Changing the order of objects You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer by sending objects to the front or back, or behind or in front of other objects. You can also position objects precisely in the stacking order, as well as reverse the stacking order of multiple objects. Changing the stacking order corrects the appearance of this graphic by bringing the object to the front. (Tip: Hold the Alt key and drag the pointer to select any object you intersect.) 240 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change the order of objects 1 Select an object. 2 Click Arrange Order, and click one of the following: • To front of page — moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the page • To back of page — moves the selected object behind all other objects on the page • To front of layer — moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the active layer • To back of layer — moves the selected object behind all other objects on the active layer • Forward one — moves the selected object forward one position. If the selected object is in front of all other objects on the active layer, it is moved to the layer above. • Back one — moves the selected object behind one position. If the selected object is behind all other objects on the selected layer, it is moved to the layer below. • In front of — moves the selected object in front of the object that you click in the drawing window • Behind — moves the selected object behind the object that you click in the drawing window An object cannot be moved to a locked (non-editable) layer; instead, it is moved to the closest editable layer. For example, if you apply the To front of page command, and the topmost layer is locked, the object is moved to the topmost editable layer. Any objects on the locked layer remain in front of the object. By default, all objects on the master page appear on top of the objects on other pages. For information about reordering content on master page layers, see “To move a layer” on page 284. An Order command is unavailable if the selected object is already positioned in the specified stacking order. For example, the To front of page command is unavailable if the object is already in front of all the other objects on the page. To reverse the order of multiple objects 1 Select the objects. 2 Click Arrange Order Reverse order. Working with objects 241 Grouping objects When you group two or more objects, they are treated as a single unit. This feature lets you apply the same formatting and other properties to all objects within the group at the same time. In addition, grouping helps prevent accidental changes to the position of an object in relation to other objects. You can also create nested groups by grouping together existing groups. Single objects retain their attributes when they are grouped. You can add objects to or remove objects from a group, and you can delete objects that are members of a group. You can also edit a single object in a group without ungrouping the objects. If you want to edit multiple objects in a group at the same time, you must first ungroup the objects. If a group contains nested groups, you can ungroup all objects in the nested groups simultaneously. To group objects 1 Select the objects. 2 Click Arrange Group. You can create a nested group by selecting two or more groups of objects and clicking Arrange Group. The status bar indicates that a group of objects is selected. You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, once grouped, the objects will reside on the same layer, based on the last selected object. 242 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also group objects by clicking Window Object manager, and dragging an object’s name in the Object manager docker over the name of another object. To add an object to a group 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the Object manager docker, drag the name of the object to the name of the group you want to add it to. To remove an object from a group 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Double-click the name of the group in the Object manager docker. To remove an object from a group, drag it out of the group in the object list. To delete an object that’s in a group, select the object in the object list and click Edit Delete. You can select an object within a group by holding Ctrl and clicking the object. You can then press Delete to delete the object from the drawing. To edit a single object in a group 1 Click the Pick tool . 2 While holding down Ctrl, click an object in a group. 3 Edit the object. You can also select a single object in a group by clicking the name of an object in the Object manager docker. To access the Object manager docker, click Window Object manager. To ungroup objects 1 Select one or more groups. 2 Click Arrange, and click one of the following commands: • Ungroup — ungroups single objects but leaves nested groups intact • Ungroup all — ungroups all objects, including objects in nested groups Working with objects 243 Combining objects Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common fill and outline attributes. This feature is used often to create objects with holes. Combining objects You can combine rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text so that they are converted to a single curve object. If you need to modify the attributes of an object that has been combined from separate objects, you can break apart the combined object. You can extract a subpath from a combined object to create two separate objects. You can also weld two or more objects to create a single object. For information about welding objects, see “Welding and intersecting objects” on page 195. To combine objects 1 Select the objects. 2 Click Arrange Combine. Combined text objects become larger blocks of text. To break apart a combined object 1 Select a combined object. 2 Click Arrange Break curve apart. If you break apart a combined object that contains artistic text, the text breaks apart into lines first, then into words. Paragraph text breaks into separate paragraphs. 244 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To extract a subpath from a combined object 1 Select a segment, node, or group of nodes on a combined object using the Shape tool . 2 Click the Extract subpath button on the property bar. The Extract subpath button is available only if you select the nodes from a single subpath. If you select nodes from more than one subpath, the tool is disabled. After you have extracted the subpath, the path’s fill and outline properties are removed from the combined object. Locking objects Locking an object prevents you from accidentally moving, sizing, transforming, filling, or otherwise changing it. You can lock single, multiple, or grouped objects. To change a locked object, you need to unlock it first. You can unlock one object at a time, or all locked objects at the same time. To lock an object • Select an object, and click Arrange Lock object. You can also lock an object by right-clicking it and then clicking Lock object. To unlock objects 1 Select a locked object or group of objects. 2 Click Arrange, and then click one of the following: • Unlock object • Unlock all objects You can also unlock an object by right-clicking it and then clicking Unlock object. Working with objects 245 Finding and replacing objects You can use the Find and Replace wizards to locate and edit objects in a large drawing. Using search criteria that you specify, the Find wizard guides you step-by-step when you need to find and select objects in a drawing. The search criteria can include object type and its related properties, fill and outline properties, vector effects applied to objects, or the name of an object or style. For example, you can search for and select all rectangles with rounded corners and without fill, or all text on a path. You can also search for objects that contain the same properties as a selected object. You can change the search criteria in the middle of a search. You can also save search criteria for later use. The Replace wizard guides you through the process of finding objects that contain the properties you specify and then replacing those properties with others. For example, you can replace all object fills of a certain color with fills of a different color. You can also replace color models and palettes, outline properties, and text attributes, such as font and font size. You can also search for specific words and replace them with other words. For more information, see “Finding, editing, and converting text” on page 438. To find and select objects 1 Click Edit Find and replace Find objects. 2 Follow the instructions in the Find wizard. If you save an object search, you can reactivate the last search you performed by clicking Edit Find and replace Recent search. You can also reactivate an older search, if it was saved, by clicking Edit Find and replace Find objects, enabling the Load a search from disk option in the Find wizard, and following the instructions in the wizard. To replace object properties 1 Click Edit Find and replace Replace objects. 2 Follow the instructions in the Replace wizard. 246 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Accessing and displaying geometric information about objects You can access geometric information, such as the length, perimeter, and area of objects. You can also calculate the volume of an object by specifying a desired depth. Object geometric information can be copied to the Clipboard and displayed in the drawing window. To access geometric information 1 Select an object. 2 Click Tools Geometric information. 3 To calculate the volume of the selected object, enter a value in the Depth box. To access geometric information about another object, select the object, and click Refresh in the Geometric information dialog box. To display geometric information in the drawing window 1 Select an object. 2 Click Tools Geometric information. 3 In the Geometric information dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes: • Perimeter • Area 4 Click Create text to display the copied value below the selected object in the drawing window. You can also Display volume information In the Volume area, enter a value in the Depth box, enable the Volume check box, and click the Create text check box. Reset the depth values to zero In the Volume area, click Reset. Change the unit of measurement of the values Choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box. Change the number of decimal places in a value Enter the number of decimal places in the Precision box. (minimum 0, maximum 5) Working with objects 247 You can copy the geometric information and display it in a new location in the drawing window by clicking Copy in the Geometric information dialog box and clicking Edit Paste. Inserting bar codes The Barcode wizard in Corel DESIGNER lets you add bar codes to drawings. A bar code is a group of bars, spaces, and sometimes numbers that is designed to be scanned and read into computer memory. Bar codes are most commonly used to identify merchandise, inventory, and documents. The Barcode wizard guides you through the process of inserting a bar code. If you need additional information at any step, you can consult the Help in the Barcode wizard. To insert a bar code 1 Click Edit Insert Barcode. 2 Follow the instructions in the Barcode wizard. A bar code is inserted into a drawing as an object. 248 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with symbols Symbols are graphics that are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. Using symbols for objects that appear many times in a drawing helps to reduce file size. With this application, you can link to symbols that have already been created, or you can create objects and save them as internal symbols within a document. Symbols that you can link to are stored in library files, which have a .csl filename extension. Each time you insert a symbol into a drawing, you create an instance of the symbol. You can have multiple instances of a symbol in a drawing with little impact on file size. Editing a drawing is quicker and easier, as changes made to a symbol are automatically inherited by all instances. Symbol definitions, as well as information about instances, are stored in the Corel DESIGNER (DES) file. This section contains the following topics: • Using symbols in drawings • Managing collections and libraries • Creating, editing, and deleting symbols • Sharing symbols between drawings For information about modifying symbol instances and about unsupported object types, see “Reference: Working with symbols” on page 258. Using symbols in drawings You can insert a symbol into a drawing, which creates a symbol instance. A symbol instance can be modified in ways which do not affect the symbol definition in the library. For example, you can modify the size and position of a symbol instance, without affecting the symbol definition. You can also have the symbol instance scaled automatically to match the current drawing scale. For a list of object properties that can be modified in a symbol instance, see “Modifying symbol instances” on page 259. Working with symbols 249 If a symbol stored in a library is changed, you can update the link to refresh the symbol instances. Also, if a link is broken, you can fix the link. A link can become broken when the file containing the symbol is moved or renamed. To fix the link, you can reference any library file that contains the symbol. You can revert a symbol instance to an object or objects while preserving its properties. You can also delete a symbol instance, and purge unused symbol definitions. Purging removes all symbol definitions that are not instanced in a drawing. You use the Symbol manager docker to work with symbols. Symbol manager docker The preview area shows a symbol and information about it, including • name • number of instances in the active document • type of link: linked or internal 250 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • type of symbol: nested or un-nested Just below the preview area, a tree view lets you see all linked and internal symbol definitions in the active document, including symbols that are not instanced. You can also navigate to symbol libraries. Examples of symbols To locate a symbol 1 Click Edit Symbol Symbol manager. 2 Click the active document at the top of the tree view to see symbols in the current document. Click a folder to choose a collection, and click a symbol library symbols in a file. to see To insert a symbol instance 1 Click Edit Symbol Symbol manager. 2 Choose a symbol library in the tree view. 3 Choose a symbol from the Symbols list. If you want the symbol scaled automatically to match the current drawing scale, ensure that the Scale to world units button is enabled. 4 Click the Insert symbol button. You can also insert a symbol instance by dragging a symbol from the Symbol manager docker to the drawing window. Working with symbols 251 To modify a symbol instance 1 Select a symbol instance. 2 Make any changes. If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated as if they were a group. You cannot modify individual objects in a symbol instance. Not all properties of a symbol instance can be modified. For a list of properties that can be modified, see “Modifying symbol instances” on page 259. To update a link 1 Select a symbol in the active document. 2 Click Edit Symbol Update from link. You can also click Window Link manager and use the Link manager docker to update links to symbols. An exclamation mark appears next to objects that need to be updated. To fix a broken link 1 Click Window Link manager. 2 Select a symbol with a broken link. 3 Click the Fix broken link button . 4 Choose the drive and folder where the library folder that contains the symbol is stored. 5 Click the library file name. 6 Click Open. In the Link manager docker, an X icon appears next to objects with broken links. To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects 1 Select a symbol instance. 252 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 2 Click Edit Symbol Revert to objects. The symbol definition remains in the active document. You can also revert a symbol instance to an object by right-clicking the symbol instance and clicking Revert to objects. To delete a symbol instance 1 Select a symbol instance. 2 Press Delete. The symbol definition remains in the active document. To purge unused symbol definitions 1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document. 2 Click the Purge unused definitions button . Managing collections and libraries Most of the symbols you will use have already been created and are stored in library files that are grouped into collections. The Symbol manager docker always displays libraries and collections that are in your local Symbols folder. You can add collections and libraries to your Symbols folder from elsewhere on the network. When you insert a local or external symbol into a drawing, a copy of the symbol definition is added to the document but it remains linked to the source symbol. To add a collection or library 1 Click Window Symbol manager. 2 In the tree, click Local symbols or Network symbols. 3 Click the Add library button . 4 Locate and choose a collection or library. Working with symbols 253 5 Click OK. By default, library files are referenced from their original location. If you want to copy a library to your User symbols folder (under Application data for your user name), enable the Copy libraries locally check box. If you are adding a collection, you can enable the Recursive check box to include subfolders. To delete a collection or library 1 In the Symbol manager docker, click a collection or library. 2 Press Delete. The collection or library is removed from the tree in the Symbol manager docker but files are not deleted. Creating, editing, and deleting symbols Internal symbols can be created in three ways: by creating one on a blank drawing page, by converting an existing object or objects to a symbol, or by making a linked symbol an internal one by breaking its link. You can edit an internal symbol; any changes you make affect all instances in a drawing. Linked symbols cannot be edited within the drawing, but can be edited directly in the library file where they are stored. You can tell whether a symbol is linked or not by looking in the preview area of the Symbol manager docker. If a nested symbol contains an internal definition, you can edit the internal symbol within the drawing. External symbols in nested symbols can also be edited, but you must first convert the external symbols to internal. For information about converting symbols from external to internal, see “To make a linked symbol internal” on page 255. You can also delete a symbol from the drawing and remove all instances. To convert an object to a symbol 1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 Click Edit Symbol New symbol. 254 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Type a name for the symbol. Symbols cannot span layers. If you convert objects on different layers to a symbol, the objects are combined on the topmost object’s layer. For more information about layers, see “Working with layers” on page 277. You can also convert an existing object or objects to a symbol by dragging the object or objects to the Symbol manager docker. The symbol name is automatically added. To make a linked symbol internal 1 Select a symbol. 2 Click Edit Symbol Break link. If other instances of the symbol are in the drawing, you are given the choice to break links to all instances. If you do, the internal symbol will then apply to all instances. You can also make a linked symbol internal by right-clicking the symbol and choosing Break link. To edit an internal symbol 1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol from the Symbols list. If you want to name or rename the symbol, double-click the symbol’s name box, and type a name. 2 Click the Edit symbol button . 3 Modify the objects on the drawing page. 4 Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing window. Changes made to a symbol are automatically made to all instances in the active drawing. You cannot add layers while in symbol edit mode. Working with symbols 255 While editing a symbol, you can insert an instance of another symbol, which creates a nested symbol. You cannot, however, insert an instance of the same symbol. To edit a linked symbol 1 Click File Open. 2 Choose the drive and folder where the library is stored. 3 Click a library filename. Library files have a .csl filename extension. 4 Click Open. 5 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol from the Symbols list. If you want to rename the symbol, click the name again, and type a new name. 6 Click the Edit symbol button . 7 Modify the objects on the drawing page. 8 Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the lower-left corner of the drawing window. 9 Click File Save. You may need permission to change files on the network. To edit a nested symbol 1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose the nested symbol from the Symbols list. 2 Click the Edit symbol button . 3 Modify the editable objects on the drawing page. 4 Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the lower-left corner of the drawing window. While you are editing a nested symbol, linked symbols cannot be edited. 256 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To delete a symbol from a document 1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol from the Symbols list. 2 Click the Delete symbol button . When you delete a symbol, it is removed from the active drawing, and all instances of the symbol are removed from the drawing. If the symbol is linked, its symbol definition is removed from the active document but remains in the library file. Sharing symbols between drawings Symbols can be stored within a drawing or in library files. You can share symbols between drawings by copying and pasting. Copying symbols to the Clipboard leaves the originals in the drawing or library file. You can also copy and paste instances of a symbol to and from the Clipboard. Pasting a symbol instance places the symbol in the active document and also places an instance of the symbol in the drawing. Subsequent pasting will place another instance of the symbol in the drawing without adding to the document. Symbol instances are copied, cut, and pasted in the same way other objects are. For more information, see “Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects” on page 223. You can export symbols from a document and create a new library file, or you can create a symbol library from any drawing file. You can create a new library by exporting the symbol library from a document or by saving the symbols in a drawing as a new library. If you put the new file in a shared folder, other users will be able to use the symbols. To copy, paste, or duplicate symbols To Do the following Copy symbols to the Clipboard In the Symbol manager docker, select the symbol or symbols from the Symbols list, right-click, and click Copy. Paste symbols from the Clipboard In the Symbol manager docker, right-click, and click Paste. Working with symbols 257 To Do the following Duplicate symbols In the Symbol manager docker, right-click the symbol, and click Duplicate. To export a symbol library 1 In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document. 2 Click the Export library button . 3 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the library file. 4 Type a filename in the Filename box. 5 Click Save. To create a new library 1 Click File Save. 2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the library. 3 Type a filename in the Filename box. 4 Choose CSL - Corel Symbol Library from the Save as type list box. 5 Click Save. To add a symbol to an existing library 1 Click File Open. 2 Choose the drive and folder where the library is stored. 3 Choose CSL - Corel Symbol Library from the Files of type list box. 4 Choose the library file where you want to add a symbol. 5 Paste a symbol to the document. 6 Save the library file. Reference: Working with symbols This reference section contains additional information about working with symbols. 258 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Modifying symbol instances The following object properties can be modified for symbol instances. If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated collectively as a single object, just as if they were grouped. Property Notes Position Type values in the Object(s) position boxes on the Transform toolbar. For more information, see “Moving objects” on page 229. Size Type width and height values in the Object(s) size boxes on the Transform toolbar. For more information, see “Sizing and scaling objects” on page 231. Skew See “Skewing objects” on page 235. Rotation angle Type a value in the Angle of rotation box on the Transform toolbar. For more information, see “Rotating objects” on page 233. Transparency Uniform transparency only. Click the Symbol tab in the Property manager docker, and move the Transparency slider. For more information, see “Applying transparencies” on page 417. Mirroring See “Flipping objects” on page 234. Wrap paragraph text On the General tab in the Property manager docker, choose a wrapping option from the list box. See “Wrapping paragraph text around objects, artistic text, and text frames” on page 461. Order See “Changing the order of objects” on page 240. Name The name of an instance is displayed in the Object manager docker. Click twice to change it. Working with symbols 259 Unsupported object types Most objects in Corel DESIGNER can be converted to symbols, with the following exceptions. Unsupported object type Notes Linked or embedded objects Objects with lenses that are not frozen Lenses must be frozen. Callouts Control objects in link groups All related objects in the link group must be included in the symbol. For example, if an object has a drop shadow, you cannot convert the object without the drop shadow. Linked bitmaps Placed PDF or EPS files Locked object Object must be unlocked. Paragraph text Connector and dimension lines Must be broken apart or included with the linked object or objects Guidelines Rollovers 260 You cannot convert a rollover to a symbol; however, you can include a symbol instance in a rollover state. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Creating objects for the Web Corel DESIGNER lets you export objects that are optimized for viewing in a Web browser. You can also create interactive rollovers from Corel DESIGNER objects. In addition, you can add hyperlinks and bookmarks to a drawing. After creating the Web-compatible object in Corel DESIGNER, you can add the object to a design using a Web-authoring tool. You can also export the object to HTML. For more information, see “Exporting to HTML” on page 681. This section contains the following topics: • Exporting bitmaps for the Web • Saving and applying Web presets • Exporting objects with transparent colors and backgrounds • Creating rollovers • Adding bookmarks and hyperlinks to documents • Adding hotspots and alternate text to objects Exporting bitmaps for the Web Corel DESIGNER lets you export the following Web-compatible file formats: GIF, PNG, and JPEG. While specifying exporting options, you can preview an image with up to four different configurations of settings. You can compare file formats, preset settings, download speeds, compression, file size, image quality, and color range. You can also examine previews by zooming and panning within the preview windows. Creating objects for the Web 261 2 4 3 5 1 6 7 8 9 Component Description 1. Preview window Displays a preview of the document. 2. Preview modes Lets you preview the adjustments in a single or split frame. 3. Zooming and panning tools Lets you zoom in and out of a document displayed in the preview window, pan an image displayed at zoom level higher than 100%, and fit an image in the preview window. 4. Eyedropper tool and sampled color swatch Lets you sample a color and display the sampled color. 262 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Component Description 5. Preset list box Lets you choose preset settings for a file format. 6. Export settings Lets you customize export setting, such as color, display options, and size. 7. Format information Lets you view file-format information, which is available for each preview frame. 8. Color information Displays the color values for a selected color. 9. Speed list box Lets you choose an Internet speed for saving the file. You can export Web-compatible files using preset settings. This allows you to optimize the file, without the need to modify individual settings. You can also customize the settings to produce a specific result. For example, you can adjust its color, display quality, and file size. Choosing a Web-compatible file format This table is a quick reference for choosing a Web-compatible file format. File format Ideal for GIF Line drawings, text, images with few colors, or images with sharp edges, such as scanned black-and-white images or logos. GIF offers several advanced graphic options, including transparent backgrounds, interlaced images, and animation. It also lets you create custom palettes for the image. PNG Various image types, including photos and line drawings. The PNG file format (unlike the GIF and JPEG formats) supports the alpha channel. This allows you to save transparent images with superior results. Creating objects for the Web 263 File format Ideal for JPEG Photos and scanned images. JPEG files use file compression to store an approximation of an image, which results in some loss of image data, but does not compromise the quality of most photographs. You can choose the image quality when you save an image — the higher the image quality, the larger the file size. Exporting palette-based documents Palette-based documents, such as paletted GIF and 8-bit PNG, allow individual pixels to retain their exact color value. This lets you control the display of colors in the file when exporting. Palette-based documents also allow you to introduce transparency to a file by choosing a color in the image and making it transparent. For information, see “Exporting objects with transparent colors and backgrounds” on page 269. To adjust the object-export preview 1 Click File Export for Web. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following View the bitmap in a single preview frame Click the Full preview button View toolbar. View two versions of the bitmap in side-byside frames Click the Two vertical previews button View the two versions of the bitmap with one frame placed above the other Click the Two horizontal previews button . View four versions of the bitmap in separate frames Click the Four previews button Fit a bitmap in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit button Display each pixel in the image data to a single pixel on-screen Click the Zoom 1:1 pixel button Display a bitmap at its actual size Click the Zoom to actual size button 264 on the . . . . . Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Pan to another area of the bitmap Using the Pan tool , drag the image until the area you want to see is visible. Zoom in and out Using the Zoom in tool or Zoom out tool , click in the preview window. Change the display options for the object in a preview frame Click a frame, then choose different export settings from the export settings area. To export a Web-compatible bitmap 1 Click File Export for Web. 2 In the Export for Web dialog box, choose preset settings from the Preset list box in the upper-right corner of the dialog box. If you want modify the preset settings, you can change the exporting options in the dialog box. 3 Click Save as. 4 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file. 5 Type a name in the File name box. 6 Click Save. You can also Choose a color mode In the Settings area, choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. This option is unavailable for the GIF file format. Embed the color profile In the Advanced area, enable the Embed color profile check box. You can also export to a Web-compatible format by clicking File Export, and choosing a file format from the Save as type list box. You can choose an Internet connection speed from the Speed list box at the bottom of the dialog box. Creating objects for the Web 265 To resize an object when exporting a Web-compatible bitmap • From the Export for Web dialog box, perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Choose a unit of measurement for the bitmap In the Transformation area, choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box. Specify the bitmap dimensions In the Transformation area, type values in the Width and Height boxes. Resize the bitmap to a percentage of its original size In the Transformation area, type values in the Width % and Height % boxes. Avoid distortion by maintaining the widthto-height ratio of the bitmap In the Transformation area, enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. Specify the bitmap resolution In the Transformation area, type a value in the Resolution box. Maintain the size of the file on your hard disk when you change the resolution of the bitmap In the Transformation area, enable the Maintain size check box. To customize options for exporting a JPEG bitmap 1 From the Export for Web dialog box, choose JPEG from the Format list box. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Control document quality In the Settings area, choose a quality option from the Quality list box, or type a percentage value. Choose an encoding setting In the Settings area, choose an option from the Sub-format list box. Blur the transition between adjacent pixels of different colors In the Settings area, type a value in the Blur box. 266 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Load the JPEG file gradually in certain Web browsers to display only portions of the image before it finishes loading In the Advanced area, enable the Progressive check box. Use the optimal encoding method to produce the smallest JPEG file size In the Advanced area, enable the Optimize check box. You can also Apply the document-color settings In the Advanced area, enable the Use document color settings option. Apply the color-proof settings to the document In the Advanced area, enable the Use color proof settings option. Enable the overprinting of black when exporting to CMYK In the Settings area, enable the Overprint black check box. Apply a matte color to the object’s background to help blend the edges of antialiased objects In the Settings area, open the Matte color picker, and click a color. To specify display-quality options for exporting Web-compatible bitmaps • From the Export for Web dialog box, perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Apply a matte color to the object’s background to help blend the edges of antialiased objects In the Settings area, open the Matte color picker, and click a color. Smooth the edges of the object In the Advanced area, enable the Antialiased check box. Load the file gradually in certain Web browsers to display only portions of the image before it finishes loading In the Advanced area, enable the Interlaced check box. Creating objects for the Web 267 To specify color settings for exporting palette-based Web-compatible bitmap • From the Export for Web dialog box, perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Choose a color mode In the Settings area, choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. This option is unavailable for the GIF file format. Choose a color palette In the Settings area, choose a palette from the Color palette list box. Specify a dithering setting and amount In the Settings area, choose a dithering option from the Dithering list box, and type a value in the box. Embed the color profile In the Advanced area, enable the Embed color profile check box. You can also Load a color palette In the Settings area, click the arrow next to Color palette list box, and click Load palette. Sample a color and add it to a color palette Click the Eyedropper on the toolbar, and then click in the drawing window to choose a color. In the Settings area, click the Add the sampled color to palette button . Add or modify colors Double-click a color swatch on the color palette. Choose the number of colors that you want to display In the Settings area, choose a value from the Number of colors list box. Delete a color from the color palette In the Settings area, click a color on the color palette, and then click the Delete the selected color button. 268 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also add transparency to a palette-based document by choosing a color in the image and making it transparent. For information, see “Exporting objects with transparent colors and backgrounds” on page 269. Saving and applying Web presets Web presets allow you to save custom settings for exporting Web-compatible file formats. To save a preset for exporting Web-compatible images 1 From the Export for Web dialog box, choose a file format from the Format list box. 2 Choose the settings that you want to store as a preset. 3 Click the arrow next to the Preset list box, and click Save preset. 4 Type the name of the preset in the File name box. 5 Click Save. You can delete a saved preset by choosing a preset from the Preset list box, clicking the arrow next to the Preset list box, and clicking Delete preset. To apply a preset for exporting Web-compatible images 1 From the Export for Web dialog box, click the arrow next to the Preset list box, and click Load preset. 2 Click the name of the file. 3 Click Open. Exporting objects with transparent colors and backgrounds Corel DESIGNER lets you export palette-based bitmaps, such as paletted GIF or 8-bit PNG, with transparent colors and backgrounds. These bitmaps can contain objects, such as buttons and logos, which are commonly used on Web pages with colored or patterned backgrounds. Creating objects for the Web 269 If you place an object with an opaque background onto a Web page, the object background color appears as a rectangle on the page. By making an object background transparent, the object background blends in with the page. Transparent object backgrounds also let you change the color or pattern of a Web page background without having to change the backgrounds of the objects to match. You can create a GIF with a transparent background to use on a Web page. To save a bitmap with a transparent background 1 From the Export for Web dialog box, choose a paletted file format, such as GIF or 8-bit PNG, from the Format list box. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Make the background of the object transparent In the Settings area, enable the Transparency check box. Make a selected color transparent Click the Eyedropper on the toolbar, and then click the image to choose a color. In the Settings area, click the Make the selected color transparent button . Apply a matte color to the object’s background to help blend the edges of antialiased objects In the Settings area, open the Matte color picker, and click a color. For best results, choose None from the Dithering list box in the Settings area. 270 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Creating rollovers Rollovers are interactive objects that change in appearance when you click or point to them. You can create rollovers using objects. To create a rollover, you add the following rollover states: • Normal — the default state of a button when no mouse activity is associated with the button • Over — the state of a button when the pointer passes over it • Down — the state of a clicked button You can apply different object properties to each of the rollover states. You can also preview the rollover states. Rollovers showing Normal (left), Over (center), and Down (right) states To add the rollover object to a web design, you must first save it to Macromedia® Flash® (SWF) format. For more information about creating and editing objects such as rollovers, see “Working with objects” on page 219. To create a rollover object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Effects Rollover Create rollover. To modify an object’s rollover state 1 Click View Toolbars Internet. The Internet toolbar appears. Creating objects for the Web 271 2 Click the rollover object to select it. 3 On the Internet toolbar, click the Edit rollover button . 4 From the Active rollover state list box, choose a state: • Normal • Over • Down 5 Modify the object properties, such as the color. 6 Click the Finish editing rollover button . You can also Delete a rollover state On the Internet toolbar, click the Delete rollover states button . Duplicate a rollover state On the Internet toolbar, click the Duplicate states button . Undo a rollover On the Internet toolbar, click the Extract all objects from rollover button . Specify what frame appears when the rollover is clicked On the Internet toolbar, choose a target frame from the Target frame list box. You cannot close a drawing in which you are editing a rollover. You must finish editing first. To view rollover properties 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Click the page and layer where the rollover resides. 3 Click the rollover name, and expand the Normal, Over, and Down states. You can preview a rollover object’s states in the drawing page by clicking the Live preview of rollovers button on the Internet toolbar. To quit previewing the rollover so that you can edit it, click the Live preview of rollovers button . You cannot undo while previewing a rollover. 272 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Adding bookmarks and hyperlinks to documents Corel DESIGNER lets you add bookmarks and hyperlinks to your document. You can apply these to objects, including text objects, rollovers, and bitmaps. For information, see “Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files” on page 663. Bookmarks To create an internal link within a file, you can assign a bookmark to text or to an object. You can then assign a link to an object so that, when it’s clicked, it opens the bookmark. Hyperlinks You can also assign a hyperlink to an object. You can link to a Web address, FTP server, e-mail address, bookmark, or file. When the object is clicked, it opens to the assigned location in a appropriate application. After you create hyperlinks, you can display and verify them. You can also delete links and bookmarks. When working with text, you can assign a hyperlink to both artistic and paragraph text. Hyperlinks are maintained when you export files to CGM Version 4 profiles. For information about exporting CGM files, see “Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)” on page 693. To assign a bookmark 1 Click Window Links and bookmarks. 2 In the workspace, click the object that you want to bookmark. 3 Click the New bookmark button . 4 Type the name of the bookmark in the name box. To assign a hyperlink to an object 1 Click Window Links and bookmarks. 2 In the workspace, click the object to which you want to apply a hyperlink. 3 Click the New link button . 4 From the Link type list box, choose one of the following link types: Link types http:// Creating objects for the Web Type a Web address, or URL, for a Web page that opens when you click the link. 273 Link types ftp:// Type a Web address, or URL, to the FTP server that opens when you click the link. mailto: Type an e-mail address. file:// Click the browse button and navigate to the file that you want to open when you click the link. bookmark Choose a previously created bookmark from the list. To assign a hyperlink to text 1 Click Window Links and bookmarks. 2 Using the Text tool hyperlink. , select the text characters to which you want to assign a 3 Click the New link button . 4 From the Link type list box, choose one of the following link types: You can also assign a hyperlink from the Internet toolbar by clicking View Toolbars Internet to display the toolbar. To verify a link 1 Click Window Links and bookmarks. 2 Choose the link that you want to open. 3 Click the Open link button . To delete a bookmark or link 1 Click Window Links and bookmarks. 2 Choose the link or bookmark that you want to delete. 3 Click the Delete button 274 . Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Adding hotspots and alternate text to objects You can also set a hotspot that follows the outline of the object, or fills the object’s bounding box. Corel DESIGNER applies a crosshatch pattern to an object containing a link. You can change the color of the crosshatch pattern as well as its background fill. In addition, you can add alternate text to objects for text-only browsers or screen readers. To set a hotspot 1 Click Window Property manager. 2 Click the Internet tab . 3 Choose Link from the Behavior list box, and type a Web address in the URL box. 4 From the Define hotspot using list box, choose one of the following: • Object’s shape • Object’s bounding box 5 Open the Cross-hatch color picker , and click a color. 6 Open the Background color picker , and click a color. If you choose a hyperlinked object first and then change the crosshatch and background hotspot colors, the change applies to the selected object only. To add alternate text to an object 1 Click Window Property manager. 2 Click the Internet tab . 3 Type the alternate text in the ALT comments text box. Creating objects for the Web 275 Working with layers You can work with layers to help you organize and arrange objects in complex illustrations. This section contains the following topics: • Creating layers • Changing layer properties • Moving and copying layers and objects Creating layers All Corel DESIGNER drawings consist of stacked objects. The vertical order of these objects — the stacking order — contributes to the appearance of the drawing. An effective way to organize these objects is by using invisible planes called layers. Drawings can be assembled by placing objects on various levels or layers. Layering gives you added flexibility when you organize and edit the objects in complex drawings. You can divide a drawing into multiple layers, each containing a portion of the drawing’s contents. For example, you can use layers to organize an architectural plan for a building. You can organize the building’s various components (for example, plumbing, electrical, structural) by placing them on separate layers. Working with layers 277 Local layers and master layers By default, all content is placed on a layer. Content that applies to a specific page is placed on a local layer. Content that applies to all pages in a document can be placed on a global layer called a master layer. Master layers are stored on a virtual page called the Master Page. The Object manager docker displays the default layer structure. Each new file is created with a default page (Page 1) and a Master Page. The default page contains a Guides layer and Layer 1. The Guides layer stores page-specific (local) guidelines. Layer 1 is the default local layer. When you draw objects on the page, the objects are added to this layer unless you choose a different layer. The Master Page is a virtual page that contains the information that applies to all pages in a document. You can add one or more layers to a master page to hold content such as headers, footers, or a static background. By default, a master page contains the following layers: • Guides — contains the guidelines that are used for all pages of the document • Desktop — contains objects that are outside the borders of the drawing page. This layer lets you store objects that you may want to include in the drawing at a later time. • Grid — contains the grid that is used for all pages of the document. The grid is always the bottom layer. The default layers on the master page cannot be deleted or copied. Layers that you add to the master page appear at the top of the stacking order unless the stacking order is changed in the Layer manager view in the Object manager docker. To add content to a layer, you must first select the layer so that it becomes the active layer. 278 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Viewing layers, pages, and objects You can choose different views that let you display pages, layers, or all the objects in your document. The view you choose depends on the complexity of your document and the task you are performing. For example, in a long multipage document, you can choose a pages-only view so that you can navigate the document more easily and view only one page at a time. The Layer manager view lets you view and reorder all the layers that affect the current page, including the master layers. To create a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Create a layer In the upper-right corner of the Object manager docker, click the flyout button and click New layer. Create a master layer , Click the flyout button, and click New master layer. To use a layer in the drawing, you must first make the layer active by clicking the layer name in the Object manager docker. The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that it is the active layer. When you start a drawing, the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer. Master layers are always added to the master page. Content added to these layers is visible on all pages of the document. You can also add a layer by clicking the New layer button manager docker. in the Object You can make any layer a master layer by right-clicking the layer name, and clicking Master. To make a layer active 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the Object manager docker, click the layer name. The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that it is the active layer. Working with layers 279 By default, the active layer is Layer 1. The name of the active layer, as well as the currently selected object, appears in the status bar at the bottom of the application window. To display pages, layers, and objects in the Object Manager docker 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Display pages Click the flyout button Show pages. Display all layers for a page Click the name of a page, and click the Layer manager view button . , and then click To turn the Layer manager view off, click the button again. Display objects Click the flyout button , and then click Expand to show selection. The name of the active layer, as well as the currently selected object, appears in the status bar at the bottom of the application window. To delete a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Click the name of a layer. 3 Click the flyout button , and click Delete layer. When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on it. To preserve an object, move it to a different layer before you delete the current layer. You can delete any unlocked layer except the following default layers: Grid, Desktop, and Guides. For more information about locking and unlocking layers, see “To set the editing properties of a layer” on page 283. 280 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also delete a layer by right-clicking the layer name in the Object manager docker and choosing Delete. To specify settings for a layer on the master page 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Right-click the layer, and click Properties. Changing layer properties For each new layer that you create, the display, editing, and printing and exporting properties are enabled by default. You can change these properties at any time. You can also enable or disable the master layer setting for a layer. For information about master layers, see “Creating layers” on page 277. Displays or hides the layer Enables or disables printing and exporting for a layer Makes a layer editable or locks it to prevent changes The icons to the left of a layer’s name let you change the layer’s properties. Showing and hiding layers You can choose to show or hide layers in a drawing. Hiding a layer lets you identify and edit the objects on other layers. It also reduces the time required for your drawing to refresh when you edit it. Printing and exporting layers You can set printing and exporting properties for a layer to control whether a layer is displayed in the printed or exported drawing. Note that hidden layers are displayed in the final output if the printing and exporting properties are enabled. The Grid layer cannot be printed or exported. Working with layers 281 Setting a layer’s editing properties You can allow editing of the objects on all layers or restrict editing so that you can only edit objects on the active layer. You can also lock a layer to prevent accidental changes to the objects it contains. When you lock a layer, you cannot select or edit the objects on that layer. Renaming layers You can rename layers to indicate their contents, their position in the stacking order, or their relationship with other layers. Using layer color to view objects You can change the layer color so that objects on the layer are displayed with the layer color when you use Wireframe view. For example, if you place various components of an architectural plan (plumbing, electrical, structural) on separate layers, you can use layer color to quickly identify to which component the objects belong. To show or hide a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Click the Show or hide icon beside the layer name. The layer is hidden when the Show or hide icon is grayed out. Objects on a hidden layer are displayed in the printed or exported drawing unless the layer’s printing and exporting properties are disabled. You can also show or hide a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and then clicking Visible. To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Click the Enable or disable printing and exporting icon name. beside the layer Disabling the printing and exporting of a layer prevents its contents from appearing in the printed or exported drawing, or in full-screen previews. For 282 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide information about full-screen previews, see “To establish default setting for the mouse wheel” on page 64. You can also enable or disable the printing and exporting of a layer by rightclicking the layer in the Object manager docker and clicking Printable. To set the editing properties of a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the Object manager docker, click the name of the layer that you want to edit. The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that the layer is active. 3 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Lock or unlock a layer Click the Lock or unlock icon layer name. Allow editing on all layers Click the flyout button across layers. , and click Edit Allow editing on the active layer only Click the flyout button across layers. , and disable Edit beside the If you disable the Edit across layers button , you can work only on the active layer and the Desktop layer. You cannot select or edit objects on inactive layers. For example, if you use the Pick tool to marquee-select multiple objects on the drawing page, only the objects on the active layer are selected. You cannot lock or unlock the Grid layer. You can also allow editing on all layers by clicking the Edit across layers button in the Object manager docker. Editing across layers is enabled when the button appears pressed. Clicking the button again restricts editing to the active layer. You can also lock or unlock a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and then clicking Editable. Working with layers 283 To rename a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Right-click the layer name, and click Rename. You can also rename a layer by clicking the layer name and typing a new name. To change the layer color • In the Object manager docker, double-click the color swatch that appears to the left of the layer name, and choose a color. Objects on the layer are displayed with the layer color when you use Wireframe view (View Wireframe). You can also choose to display only the objects on a specific layer in Wireframe view by right-clicking the layer name, choosing Properties, and enabling the Override full color view check box in the layer properties dialog box. Moving and copying layers and objects You can move or copy layers on a single page or between pages. You can also move or copy selected objects to new layers, including layers on the master page. Moving and copying layers affects the stacking order. Moving or copying an object to a layer below its current layer causes the object to become the top object on its new layer. Similarly, moving or copying an object to a layer above its current layer causes the object to become the bottom object on its new layer. To move a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the layers list, drag a layer name to a new position. By default, the master layers are applied above local layers. You can change the order of the master layers relative to local layers by clicking a page name, enabling the Layer manager view button at the top of the Object manager docker, and dragging a layer name to a new position in the layers list. 284 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To copy a layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the layers list, right-click the layer that you want to copy. 3 From the context menu, choose Copy. 4 Right-click the layer above which you want to place the copied layer. 5 From the context menu, choose Paste. The layer and the objects it contains are pasted above the selected layer. To move or copy an object to another layer 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 Click an object in the Object manager docker. 3 Click the flyout button • Move to layer • Copy to layer , and click one of the following: 4 Click the destination layer. When you move objects to or from a layer, the layer must be unlocked. You can move and copy an object to another layer by dragging the object to a new layer in the Object manager docker. Working with layers 285 Object linking and embedding Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a method of exchanging information between applications. Using OLE, you can take selected objects or entire files from one application, called the source application, and place them into another application, called the destination application. Objects that are placed into an application using OLE are called OLE objects. You can freely move objects and files between applications as long as all the applications involved support OLE. Corel DESIGNER lets you create and edit OLE objects, as well as insert objects and files created in other applications. Linking results in a larger file size but is useful when you want to use an object or file in multiple files. To change every instance of the object or the file, you only need to change the object in the source application. Linking is also useful when the destination application does not directly support files created in the source application. Embedding is useful when you want to include all objects in one file. This section contains the following topics: • Inserting linked or embedded objects • Editing linked or embedded objects Inserting linked or embedded objects You can insert a linked or embedded object. A linked object remains connected to its source file; whereas an embedded object is not linked to its source file but is integrated into the new file. You can insert an embedded object or create an embedded object. You can also insert a linked or embedded object by copying it from the source application and pasting it to the destination application. To insert a linked object 1 In the source application, select an object. 2 Click Edit Copy. Object linking and embedding 287 3 In Corel DESIGNER, click Edit Paste special. 4 Enable the Paste link option. The file from which you copy the object in the source application must be saved before you insert the object in Corel DESIGNER. To insert an embedded object 1 Click Edit Insert new object. 2 Enable the Create from file option. 3 Click the Browse button. 4 Click a filename. You can also create an embedded object by enabling the Create new option in the Insert new object dialog box, and choosing the application in which you want to create the object from the Object type list box. You can also insert an embedded object by selecting an object in the source application, and dragging it to the application window of Corel DESIGNER. Editing linked or embedded objects You can edit a linked or embedded object. You can edit a linked object by editing its source file. Any changes you make to the source file are automatically applied to the linked object. You can also modify a linked object; for example, you can update a linked object, substitute the source file of a linked object for another, or break a link between a linked object and its source file. To edit a linked or embedded object 1 Double-click the linked or embedded object to start the source application. 2 Edit the object in the source application. 3 Save the changes in the source application. 4 Close the source application. 5 Return to the active application window to review the edits. 288 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide In most cases, you can edit OLE objects only in the source application. If you try to change an OLE object using Corel DESIGNER, note the following limitations. Depending on the source of the OLE object, you might not be able to rotate, skew, clone, trim, weld, intersect, use as symbols, or combine OLE objects. Also, you might not be able to apply any of the effects in the Effects menu to OLE objects, except for PowerClip objects. You can only size, move, and copy OLE objects and place them into PowerClip containers. You can also edit linked or embedded objects by starting the source application and opening the file directly. To modify a linked object 1 Select a linked object using the Pick tool . 2 Click Edit Links. 3 Click one of the following buttons: • Update now — updates the linked object to reflect changes made in the source file • Open source — opens the object in the source application • Change source — redirects the link to another file • Break link — disconnects the link so that the object is embedded in the file Object linking and embedding 289 Working with object data The Object Data Manager is an advanced hotspotting feature that is particularly useful as a project management tool when you create or supervise a large project. You can enter many types of project data about individual objects or groups of objects. This section contains the following topics: • Setting up the project database • Managing object data • Applying CGM data to objects Setting up the project database Before you assign project data to objects in a drawing, you need to know what information you want to display. By default, Corel DESIGNER creates multiple data fields including: Name, Cost, and Comments. These fields can be edited or deleted as required. Corel DESIGNER also provides common ActiveCGM, WebCGM, and WebCGM S1000D fields. When you import or export CGM files, the object data is maintained. For more information on importing and exporting CGM files, see “Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)” on page 693. Object data is also maintained when you import or export SVG files. For more information on importing and exporting SVG files, see “Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)” on page 733. You can create and assign as many data fields as you want, as long as they use permitted format variables. For more information about assigning data fields, see “Managing object data” on page 293. In addition, you can add a child field to an existing field to create a hierarchical structure. However, the field you choose must support the creation of a child field. At any time, you can change the setting, such as the name or format, of a data field. Working with object data 291 If you require custom fields, you can define their formats using four basic field formats: General, Date/time, Linear/angular, and Numeric. Each of these formats provides a series of common settings. If the preset formats in Corel DESIGNER don’t provide the information you want in your data summary, you can create your own custom formats using the variables available for the format type you’re using. The field format you select is used for all objects in the active drawing. When you delete a field, you also delete all data entered for that field in the active document and any children that are associated with the field. To add a data field 1 Click Window Object data manager. 2 In the Object data docker, click the Open field editor button . 3 In the Object data field editor dialog box, click New field. 4 Double-click the Element name cell in the new field. Choose an element type from the list box, and press Enter. 5 Double-click the Name cell in the new field. Type a name for the field, and press Enter. If you want to change the field’s value, double-click the Default value cell, type a new value, and press Enter. If you want to change the field’s constraint, double-click the Constraint cell, type a constraint, and press Enter. 6 Double-click the Type cell in the new field, and choose one of the following format types from the list box: • String • Number • Event • Action 7 Double-click the Target cell in the new field, and choose one of the following targets from the list box: • General • ActiveCGM • WebCGM 8 In the Add field to area, enable one or both of the following check boxes: • Application defaults — stores the new field in the application • Document defaults — stores the new field in the current document 292 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also use this procedure to change the settings of an existing data field. You can also Add a child data field to an existing field Select the data field to which you want to add a child, and click New child field. The field you choose as a parent field must support the creation of a child field. Change the format of a data field Select the data field, and click Change in the Format area. In the Format definition dialog box, enable the option beside the format type you want to use, and choose a format from the Format type list. Create a custom format for a data field Select the data field, and click Change in the Format area. In the Format definition dialog box, enable the option beside the format type you want to create. Type the format in the Create box, and press Enter. Delete a data field Choose the name of the data field from the list. To choose multiple fields, hold down Ctrl, and click the names in the list. Click Delete field(s). Managing object data After creating all the data fields you want for a drawing, you can create a database from a template. The database stores all the data you apply to the objects in your drawing. You can choose from three different templates; because each template saves to an external, tagged XML file, you can store the data for different workflows simultaneously. The Object Data Manager provides all the commands and features you need to add, edit, and delete object data — even behaviors that were applied using the Internet toolbar. Working with object data 293 You can use one object’s data entries to update another object’s data entries. This function does not replace an object’s data entries; rather, it appends fields and data where appropriate. Corel DESIGNER also provides common ActiveCGM, WebCGM, and WebCGM S1000D fields. When you import or export CGM files, the object data is maintained. For more information on importing and exporting CGM files, see “Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)” on page 693. Object data is also maintained when you import or export SVG files. For more information about importing and exporting SVG files, see “Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)” on page 733. To choose a database template 1 Click Window Object data manager. 2 From the list box, choose one of the following templates: • General • ActiveCGM • WebCGM • WebCGM S1000D You can also view all existing database entries by choosing All from the list box. To add or edit data for an object 1 Select the object using the Pick tool . 2 Click Window Object data manager. 3 Select a data field. A check mark indicates whether that field is applied to the selected object. An icon indicates the field type: • Text • Number • Action • Event 4 Type text in the Value column for the field, and press Enter. 294 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 5 Double-click in the Constraint column for the field, and specify a constraint value in the Object data field editor dialog box. 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to add data to other fields. You can also Display or hide behaviors Click the Show/hide behaviors button Display or hide data Click the Show/hide data button Display active fields only Click the Show active fields only button . Copy data from another object to the selected object Click the Copy data from button , and click the object from which you want to copy data. Clear all fields Click the Clear all fields button . . . Applying CGM data to objects This section provides a sample of the CGM data that you can apply to objects. It is divided into three parts: • WebCGM commands • ActiveCGM commands • WebCGM S1000D commands When you choose an action as the type, any of the following can function as the value: • one or more ActiveCGM commands • BasicScript® subroutine name • operating system command • external application When you choose an event as the type, only one or more Active CGM commands can function as the value. Working with object data 295 Sample of WebCGM commands button1press • • • • Type: event Description: Triggers when you click any of the members of the group. Value: WebCGM_button1press, or any of the WebCGM actions Constraint: none content • Type: text • Description: Allows you to declare the first priority when searching the text content of a ‘para’ APS. • Value: none • Constraint: none cursorenter • Type: event • Description: Triggers when the pointer moves within two pixels of any of the members of the group. • Value: WebCGM_cursorenter, or any of the WebCGM actions • Constraint: none cursorexit • • • • Type: event Description: Triggers when the pointer moves off all members of the group. Value: WebCGM_cursorexit, or any of the WebCGM actions. Constraint: none hover • • • • Type: event Description: Triggers when the pointer moves over any member of the group. Value: any of the WebCGM actions Constraint: none linkuri • Type: action • Description: Loads a file in the target window as specified by the URI. • Value: either one or three strings entered by user input • If it is one string, it will represent the URI. Example: “http://www.corel.com” 296 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • If it is three strings, the first string is the URI, the second is the empty string, and the third is the target frame. Example: “http://www.corel.com” “” “_blank” The target frames are as follows: • _blank — viewer loads the content in a new window • _self — viewer loads the content in the same window • _parent — viewer loads the content in the immediate frameset parent of the active window • _top — viewer loads the content in the full original window • Constraint: none name • Type: text • Description: Names the group. • Value: entered by user input Example: “Corel Designer Group” • Constraint: none region • Type: text • Description: Provides an optional spatial region, associated with a graphic object, allowing the user to pick operations for the object. Simple regions of type rectangle, ellipse, polygon, and continuous polybezier can be defined. • For a rectangle, two corner points of the viewport are provided, as in (x1,y1) (x2,y2). Example: -820084 215104 342822 867138 • For an ellipse, three points are provided. The first point specifies the center of the ellipse, while the remaining two points specify the CDP points, as in (x1,y1) (x2,y2) (x3,y3). Example: -275602 514233 -786474 514233 -275602 282324 • For a polygon, points are provided where n is the number of vertices in the polygon using the formula n*(x.y). • For a polybezier, points are provided where n is the number of contiguous cubic segments using the formula 3n+1(x,y). Example (polybezier with three vertices): 235270 712532 -235270 712532 87386 235270 342822 87386 342822 87386 -235270 87386 -235270 712532 342822 87386 -235270 87386 -235270 712532 - • Value: none Working with object data 297 • Constraint: none screentip • Type: text • Description: Causes the value to be displayed as a screen-tip when the pointer is positioned over the group. • Value: entered by user input as a single string that is associated with a graphic object or a group Example: “This is a screentip” • Constraint: none viewcontext • Type: number • Description: Lets you specify the initial view of an object when you position the pointer over the graphic object that contains this attribute. The value of the viewcontext specifies the two corner points of the viewport rectangle as (x1,y1) (x2,y2), where x1, y1 is the top-right point of the viewport rectangle and x2, y2 is the bottom-left point of the viewport rectangle. Example: -925688030 586990613 -799207691 509452731 • Value: entered by user input • Constraint: none WebCGM_button1press • Type: action • Description: Erases all usertip message boxes in the target window. Example: ‘eraseusertip;execute -extension “linkuri”’ • Value: eraseusertip;execute -ext • Constraint: none WebCGM_cursorenter • Type: action • Description: Displays the specified usertip. Example: ‘displayusertip -tip “”’ • Value: displayusertip -tip • Constraint: none WebCGM_cursorexit • Type: action • Description: Erases all usertip message boxes in the target window. • Value: eraseusertip 298 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Constraint: none Sample of ActiveCGM commands @ML_button1press • • • • Type: event Description: Makes the group visible. Value: @ML_ToVisible Constraint: none @ML_button1release • • • • Type: event Description: Makes the group invisible. Value: @ML_ToInvisible Constraint: none @ML_cursorenter • • • • Type: event Description: Changes the group color to red. Value: @ML_ToRed Constraint: none @ML_cursorexit • • • • Type: event Description: Changes the group color to its original color. Value: @ML_ToNative Constraint: none @ML_ToInvisible • • • • Type: action Description: Makes the group invisible. Value: changegroup -vis off Constraint: fixed @ML_ToNative • • • • Type: action Description: Changes the group color to its original color. Value: changegroup -co native Constraint: fixed @ML_ToRed Working with object data 299 • • • • Type: action Description: Changes the group color to red. Value: changegroup -co red Constraint: fixed @ML_ToVisible • • • • Type: action Description: Makes the group visible. Value: changegroup -vis on Constraint: fixed button1press • • • • Type: event Description: Triggers when you click any of the members of the group. Value: PressButton1, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions Constraint: none button1release • Type: event • Description: Triggers when you release the left mouse button while the pointer is positioned over any of the members of the group. • Value: ReleaseButton1, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions • Constraint: none cursorenter • Type: event • Description: Triggers when the pointer moves within two pixels of any of the members of the group. • Value: ToRed, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions • Constraint: none cursorexit • • • • Type: event Description: Triggers when the pointer moves off all members of the group. Value: ToNative, or any of the WebCGM or ActiveCGM actions Constraint: none description • Type: text • Description: This behavior is undefined. 300 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Value: entered by user input Example: “product description” • Constraint: fixed Sample of WebCGM S1000D commands desc • Type: text • Description: This behavior is undefined. • Value: entered by user input Example: “product description” • Constraint: fixed linkuri • Type: action • Description: Loads a file in the target window as specified by the URI. • Value: either one or three strings entered by user input • If it is one string, it will represent the URI. Example: “http://www.corel.com” • If it is three strings, the first string is the URI, the second is the empty string, and the third is the target frame. Example: “http://www.corel.com” “” “_blank” The target frames are as follows: • _blank — viewer loads the content in a new window • _self — viewer loads the content in the same window • _parent — viewer loads the content in the immediate frameset parent of the active window • _top — viewer loads the content in the full original window • Constraint: none region • Type: text • Description: Provides an optional spatial region, associated with a graphic object, allowing the user to pick operations for the object. Simple regions of type rectangle, ellipse, polygon, and continuous polybezier can be defined. • For a rectangle, two corner points of the viewport are provided, as in (x1,y1) (x2,y2). Example: -820084 215104 342822 867138 Working with object data 301 • For an ellipse, three points are provided. The first point specifies the center of the ellipse, while the remaining two points specify the CDP points, as in (x1,y1) (x2,y2) (x3,y3). Example: -275602 514233 -786474 514233 -275602 282324 • For a polygon, points are provided where n is the number of vertices in the polygon using the formula n*(x.y). • For a polybezier, points are provided where n is the number of contiguous cubic segments using the formula 3n+1(x,y). Example (polybezier with three vertices): 235270 712532 -235270 712532 87386 235270 342822 87386 342822 87386 -235270 87386 -235270 712532 342822 87386 -235270 87386 -235270 712532 - screentip • Type: text • Description: Causes the value to be displayed as a screen-tip when the pointer is positioned over the group. • Value: entered by user input as a single string that is associated with a graphic object or a group Example: “This is a screentip” • Constraint: none viewcontext • Type: number • Description: Lets you specify the initial view of an object when you position the pointer over the graphic object that contains this attribute. The value of the viewcontext specifies the two corner points of the viewport rectangle as (x1,y1) (x2,y2), where x1, y1 is the top-right point of the viewport rectangle and x2, y2 is the bottom-left point of the viewport rectangle. Example: -925688030 586990613 -799207691 509452731 • Value: entered by user input • Constraint: none 302 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Color and fills Working with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Filling objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Working with graphics, text, and color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Using color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 303 Working with color Corel DESIGNER lets you choose and create colors by using a wide variety of industry-standard color palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can store frequently used colors for future use by using the Document palette or creating and editing custom color palettes. You can customize how a color palette appears on your screen by changing the size of swatches, the number of rows, and other properties. This section contains the following topics: • Understanding color models • Understanding color depth • Choosing colors • Using the Document palette • Creating and editing custom color palettes • Organizing and displaying color palettes • Displaying or hiding color palettes in the Palette libraries • Setting the properties of color palettes Understanding color models You need a precise method to define colors. Color models provide various methods to define colors, each model defining colors through the use of specific color components. There is a range of color models to choose from when creating graphics. CMYK color model The CMYK color model, which is used in printing, uses the components cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) to define color. Values for these components range from 0 to 100 and represent percentages. In subtractive color models, such as CMYK, color (that is, ink) is added to a surface, such as white paper. The color then “subtracts” brightness from the surface. When the Working with color 305 value of each color component (C,M,Y) is 100, the resulting color is black. When the value of each component is 0, no color is added to the surface, so the surface itself is revealed —in this case, the white paper. Black (K) is included in the color model for printing purposes because black ink is more neutral and darker than blending equal amounts of C, M, and Y. Black ink produces sharper results, especially for printed text. In addition, black ink is usually less expensive than using colored ink. Black is the result of combining the three CMY colors at their highest intensities. RGB color model The RGB color model uses the components red (R), green (G), and blue (B) to define the amounts of red, green, and blue light in a given color. In a 24-bit image, each component is expressed as a number from 0 to 255. In an image with a higher bit rate, such as a 48-bit image, the value range is greater. The combination of these components defines a single color. In additive color models, such as RGB, color is produced from transmitted light. RGB is therefore used on monitors, where red, blue, and green lights are blended in various ways to reproduce a wide range of colors. When red, blue, and green lights are combined at their maximum intensities, the eye perceives the resulting color as white. In theory, the colors are still red, green and blue, but the pixels on a monitor are too close together for the eye to differentiate the three colors. When the value of each component is 0, signifies there is an absence of light, the eye perceives the color as black. 306 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide White is the result of combining the three RGB colors at their maximum intensities. RGB is the most commonly used color model, because it allows a broad range of colors to be stored and displayed. HSB color model The HSB color model uses hue (H), saturation (S), and brightness (B) as components for defining color. HSB is also known as HSV (with the components hue, saturation, and value). Hue describes the pigment of a color and is expressed in degrees to represent the location on the standard color wheel. For example, red is 0 degrees, yellow is 60 degrees, green is 120 degrees, cyan is 180 degrees, blue is 240 degrees, and magenta is 300 degrees. Saturation describes the vividness or dullness of a color. Values of saturation range from 0 to 100 and represent percentages (the higher the value, the more vivid the color). Brightness describes the amount of white in the color. Like saturation values, brightness values range from 0 to 100 and represent percentages (the higher the value, the brighter the color). Working with color 307 HSB color model Grayscale color model The grayscale color model defines color by using only one component, lightness, which is measured in values ranging from 0 to 255. Each grayscale color has equal values of the red, green, and blue components of the RGB color model. Changing a color photo to grayscale creates a black-and-white photo. Grayscale color model Understanding color depth Color depth refers to the maximum number of colors an image can contain. Color depth is determined by the bit depth of an image (the number of binary bits that define the 308 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap). For example, a pixel with a bit depth of 1 can have two values: black and white. The greater the bit depth, the more colors an image can contain, and the more accurate the color representation is. For example, an 8-bit GIF image can contain up to 256 colors, but a 24-bit JPEG image can contain approximately 16 million colors. Usually, RGB, grayscale, and CMYK images contain 8 bits of data per color channel. That is why an RGB image is often referred to as 24-bit RGB (8 bits x 3 channels), a grayscale image is referred to as 8-bit grayscale (8 bits x channel), and a CMYK image is referred to as 32-bit CMYK (8 bits x 4 channels). Regardless of how many colors an image contains, the image display is limited to the highest number of colors supported by the monitor on which it is viewed. For example, an 8-bit monitor can display only up to 256 colors in a 24-bit image. Choosing colors You can choose fill and outline colors by selecting a color from the Document palette, custom color palettes, palettes from the Palette libraries, color viewers, color harmonies, or color blends. When you want to use a color that already exists in an object or document, you can sample the color by using the Color eyedropper tool to achieve an exact match. For information about applying the colors you choose, see “Applying uniform fills” on page 333 and “Formatting lines and outlines” on page 149. Default color palette A color palette is a collection of color swatches. In some programs, color palettes are known as “swatch palettes.” Corel DESIGNER the default color palette is based on the primary color mode of the document. For example, if the document primary color model is RGB, the default color palette is also RGB. For more information, “Understanding color models” on page 305. You choose the default color model when you create a new drawing. You can open and use additional color palettes at any time. You can choose both fill and outline colors by using the default color palette. The selected fill and outline colors appear in the color swatches on the status bar. Working with color 309 Document palette When you create a new drawing, the application automatically generates an empty palette, called the Document palette. It helps you keep track of the colors that you use by storing them for future use. For more information, see “Using the Document palette” on page 319. Palette libraries and custom color palettes The color palettes that are found in the Palette libraries cannot be edited directly. Some of them are provided by third-party manufacturers, for example PANTONE, HKS® Colors, and TRUMATCH®. It may be useful to have on hand a manufacturer’s swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows exactly what each color looks like when printed. The PANTONE solid coated palette is an example of a Color Palette libraries’ palette. Some palettes found in the Palette libraries — PANTONE, HKS Colors, TOYO®, DIC®, Focoltone, and SpectraMaster® — are collections of spot colors. If you create color separations when you print, each spot color requires a separate printing plate, which can significantly affect the cost of the printing job. If you want to use color separations, but would like to avoid using spot colors, you can convert them to process 310 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide colors when printing. For more information, see “Printing color separations” on page 633. Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model, including palettes from the Palette libraries, such as a spot color palette. You can save a custom color palette for future use. For more information about working with custom color palettes, see “Creating and editing custom color palettes” on page 322 and “Organizing and displaying color palettes” on page 326. Sampling colors When you want to use a color that already exists in a drawing, palette, or on your desktop, you can sample the color to achieve an exact match. By default, you sample a single pixel from the drawing window. Color viewers Color viewers provide a representation of a range of colors by using either onedimensional or three-dimensional shapes. The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model, but you can use this viewer to choose CMYK, CMY, or RGB colors. For information about color models, see “Understanding color models” on page 305. An example of a color viewer Working with color 311 Color harmonies Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape, such as a rectangle or a triangle, over a color wheel. Each vertical row in the color grid begins with the color located at one of the points on the superimposed shape. The colors at each corner of the shape are always complementary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you choose. The color harmonies let you choose a color model, and they are most useful when you need to choose several colors for a project. An example of color harmonies Color blends When you choose a color by using color blends, you combine base colors to produce the color you want. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from the four base colors you choose. 312 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide An example of color blends Choosing Web colors You can use Web colors when you design documents that will be published to the Web. With Corel DESIGNER, you can define Web colors by using RGB hexadecimal values (for example, #aa003f). To choose a color by using the default color palette To Do the following Choose a fill color for a selected object Click a color swatch. Choose an outline color for a selected object Right-click a color swatch. Choose from different shades of a color Click and hold a color swatch to display a pop-up color picker, and then click a color. View more colors on the default color palette Click the scroll arrows at the top and bottom of the color palette. You can display color names by pointing to a swatch. Working with color 313 An example of a pop-up color palette To choose a color by using a color palette 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill tool , and click Fill color dialog. 3 Click the Palettes tab. 4 Choose a color palette from the Palette list box. 5 Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area. 6 Click a color in the color selection area. Each spot color swatch on a color palette is marked with a small white square. You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. For more information about reproducing colors accurately, see “Using color management” on page 363. You can display or hide the names of colors in the fill dialog boxes by clicking Options Show color names. You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors. You can also access color palettes in the Color docker by clicking the Shows color palettes button, and choosing a palette from the list box. If the Color docker is not open, click Window Color. 314 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To choose a color by using a color viewer 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill tool , and click Fill color dialog. 3 On the Models page, choose a color model from the Model list box. 4 Click Options Color viewers, and click a color viewer. 5 Move the color slider. 6 Click a color in the color selection area. You can also Choose an outline color On the property bar, click the Outline pen tool . In the Outline area, choose a color from the color picker. If you want to view more color options, click Other to open the Select color dialog box. Sample a color from the drawing Click the Eyedropper tool, and click the drawing or desktop. Swap colors Click Options Swap colors. This swaps the Old color (the current foreground or background color) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area). If you choose a color that is out of the printer’s gamut, Corel DESIGNER allows you to replace it with a similar color that is in the printer’s gamut. To replace the color, click the Bring color into gamut swatch, which displays to the left of the New color swatch. For information about color correction, see “Using color management” on page 363. You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output. You can also access color models in the Color docker by clicking the Shows color viewers button and choosing a color model from the list box. If the Color docker is not open, click Window Dockers Color. Working with color 315 To choose a color by using color harmonies 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill tool , and click Fill color dialog. 3 Click the Mixers tab. 4 Click Options Mixers Color harmonies. 5 Choose a shape from the Hues list box. 6 Choose an option from the Variation list box. 7 Drag the black dot on the color wheel. 8 Click a color swatch on the color palette below the color wheel. You can also Choose an outline color On the property bar, click the Outline pen tool . In the Outline area, choose a color from the color picker. If you want to view more color options, click Other to open the Select color dialog box. Sample a color from the drawing Click the Eyedropper tool, and click the drawing or desktop. If you choose a color that is out of the printer’s gamut, Corel DESIGNER displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Bring color into gamut swatch, which displays to the left of the New color swatch. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-ofgamut color by clicking the Bring color into gamut swatch. For information about color correction, see “Using color management” on page 363. You can change the number of swatches in the color grid by dragging the Size slider. You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors. 316 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To choose a color by using color blends 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill tool , and click Fill color dialog. 3 Click the Mixers tab. 4 Click Options Mixers Color blend. 5 Open each color picker, and click a color. 6 Click a color in the color selection area. You can also Choose an outline color On the property bar, click the Outline pen tool . In the Outline area, choose a color from the color picker. If you want to view more color options, click Other to open the Select color dialog box. Sample a color from the drawing Click the Eyedropper tool, and click the drawing or desktop. Only colors that are on the default color palette can be blended. To blend other colors, you must change the default color palette. For more information, see “To display a custom color palette” on page 327. You can change the cell size of the color grid by moving the Size slider. You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors. To sample a color 1 In the toolbox, click the Color eyedropper tool . 2 Click the Sample size flyout on the property bar, and enable one of the following options: • 1×1 — lets you choose the color of the pixel you click • 2×2 — lets you choose the average color in a sample area of 2 × 2 pixels. The pixel you click is in the middle of the sample area. • 5×5 — lets you choose the average color in a sample area of 5 × 5 pixels Working with color 317 If you want to sample a color outside the drawing window, click the Select from desktop button on the property bar, and click a color on the desktop. 3 Click the color you that you want to sample. The Color eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply color mode. 4 Perform a task from the following table. You can also Drag a sampled color from one object to another Drag the color to another object. Apply a sampled color from the Selected color swatch Drag the sampled color from the Selected color swatch to the object. The Selected color swatch is located on the property bar. Apply a sampled color from the Uniform Fill swatch Drag a color from the Uniform Fill swatch to the object. The Uniform Fill swatch is located in the lower-right corner of the drawing window. Add the sampled color to the Document Palette by dragging Drag the sampled color from the Selected color swatch to the Document Palette. The Selected color swatch is located on the property bar. In some cases, the sampled color may be an RGB or CMYK color that is the closest equivalent to the original color, instead of being a complete match. To choose a Web color 1 Select an object. 2 Click Window Color. 3 In the Color docker, choose RGB from the list box. 4 Type or paste a value in the Hex value box, and press Tab. Whether you use a three-digit (#fff) or six-digit format (#ffffff), the final value is presented in the six-digit format. 5 Click one of the following buttons: 318 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Fill — fills the selected object with the new color • Outline — applies the color to the outline of the object You can specify hexadecimal color values only when working with RGB colors. If you type an invalid hexadecimal value, the color does not change. The last valid hexadecimal value is displayed when you press Tab. You can view hexadecimal color values on the status bar. You can also choose Web colors from the Outline color dialog box (in the Toolbox, click the Outline pen tool) and the Uniform fill dialog box (in the Toolbox, click the Uniform fill tool), which let you view and copy the hexadecimal equivalents of non-RGB colors. Using the Document palette When you start a new drawing, an empty color palette, named the Document palette, appears in the drawing window. Every time you use a color in your drawing, it’s automatically added to the Document palette. However, if you prefer to control which colors are added to the Document palette, you can disable the automatic updates and add colors manually. An example of the Document palette before (above) and after (below) colors are added to a document. Working with color 319 You can add colors from a color palette, an external image, a color picker, or a colorrelated dialog box, such as the Uniform fill color dialog boxes. In addition, you can add colors from an imported image or object. Drag a bitmap to the Document palette to add colors. When you open documents that were created in a previous version of Corel DESIGNER, only color styles and spot colors are added to the Document palette. However, you can add all colors from an existing drawing to the Document palette. You can clear the Document palette of any unwanted or unused colors by removing colors individually or resetting the palette to remove all unused colors at once. You can also hide the Document palette. To disable the automatic adding of color to the Document palette • In the top left corner of the Document palette, click the flyout Automatically update. button, and click You can also disable the automatic adding of color by clicking Tools Customization, clicking Color palette in the Customization list of categories, and disabling the Automatically update the document palette check box. 320 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To manually add colors to the Document palette To Do the following Add a color from another color palette by dragging Drag a color from an open color palette to the Document palette. Add a color from a bitmap image In the Document palette, click the Eyedropper tool, and click the color in an image. Add multiple colors from an image In the Document palette, click the Eyedropper tool, hold down Ctrl, and then click the image until you add the colors that you want. Add multiple colors from an image or object by dragging Drag an image or object from the drawing window to the Document palette. Add colors from a selection Select an object or multiple objects. In the top left corner of the Document palette, click the flyout button, and click Add from selection. Add a color from a color-related dialog box In the dialog box, click a color swatch, then click Add to palette Document palette. Move a color swatch Drag a color swatch to a new position. When dragging most vector objects, all object colors are added to the palette. However, when dragging a bitmap, only the five most dominant colors are added. If an object includes a fountain fill, texture fill, or pattern fill, only colors that are defined during the fill creation are supported. Colors from PostScript fills are not supported. To add colors from an existing drawing to the Document palette 1 Open a drawing. 2 In the top left corner of the Document palette, click the flyout Add from document. button, and click If the drawing was created in a previous version of Corel DESIGNER and it includes custom spot colors, they display in the Document palette. Working with color 321 To remove a color from the Document palette 1 Click a color swatch on the Document palette. 2 In the top left corner of the Document palette, click the flyout Delete color. button, and click You can also remove all of the colors that are no longer used from the Document palette by clicking the flyout button in the top left corner of the Document palette, and clicking Palette Reset palette. To reset the Document palette • In the top left corner of the Document palette, click the flyout Palette Reset palette. button, and click To hide the Document palette • Click Window Color palette Document palette. Hiding the Document palette does not disable the automatic adding of color. Creating and editing custom color palettes Custom color palettes are collections of colors that you save. They can include colors from any color model, including spot colors, or color palette found in the Palette libraries. You can create a custom palette to store all of the colors that you need in a current, or future, project. This makes it easy for you to share the color palettes with others. The custom palettes are accessible from the My palettes folder in the Color Palette Manager. You can create a custom color palette by choosing individual colors or by using the colors in a selected object or an entire document. You can also edit, rename, and delete custom color palettes. Custom color palettes are saved as .XML files and are stored in the x:\Documents and Settings\your name\My Documents folder. 322 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To create a custom color palette from scratch 1 Click Window Color palette manager. 2 Click the Creates a new empty color palette button. 3 Type a filename in the File name box. 4 Click Save. 5 In the Color palette manager, choose the custom palette that you created. 6 Click the Opens the Palette editor button. 7 In the Palette editor dialog box, click Add color. 8 In the Select color dialog box, choose a color, and click Add to palette. You can also Treat the color as a spot color In the Selected color area, choose Spot from the Treat as box. Treat the color as a process color In the Selected color area, choose Process from the Treat as box. Rename a color Click a color in the color selection area, and type a color name in the Name box. To add a color to a custom color palette 1 Open a custom color palette. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Add a color from another color palette Drag a color from an open color palette to the custom palette. Add a color from an image In the custom palette, click the Eyedropper tool at the top of the palette, and click the color that you want to add. Add multiple colors from an image In the custom palette, click the Eyedropper tool at the top of the palette, hold down Ctrl, and click the image until you add the colors that you want. Working with color 323 To Do the following Add multiple colors from an image or object Drag an image or object from the drawing window to the custom palette. Add a color from a color-related dialog box In the dialog box, click a color swatch, click Add to palette, and choose the name of the custom palette from the list. Add colors from a selection Select an object or multiple objects. In the top left corner of the custom palette, click the flyout button, and click Add from selection. Move a color swatch Drag a color swatch to a new position. When dragging most vector objects, all object colors are added to the palette. However, when dragging a bitmap, only the five most dominant colors are added. If an object includes a fountain fill, texture fill, or pattern fill, only colors that are defined during the fill creation are supported. Colors from PostScript fills are not supported. To create a color palette from an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click Window Color palettes Create palette from selection. 3 Type a filename in the File name box. 4 Click Save. To create a color palette from a document 1 Click Window Color palettes Create palette from document. 2 Type a filename in the File name box. 3 Click Save. To edit a custom color palette 1 Click Window Color palettes Palette editor. 2 Choose a palette from the list box. 3 Perform a task from the following table. 324 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Add a color Click Add color. Click a color in the color selection area, and click Add to palette. Treat a color as a spot color In the Selected color area, choose Spot from the Treat as box. Treat a color as a process color In the Selected color area, choose Process from the Treat as box. Change a color In the color selection area, click a color, click Edit color, and click a new color in the color selection area. Delete a color In the color selection area, click a color, and click Delete color. Sort colors Click Sort colors, and choose a color sorting method. Move a color Drag a color swatch to a new position. Rename a color Click a color in the color selection area, and type a color name in the Name box. You can delete multiple colors by holding down Shift or Ctrl, clicking the colors that you want to delete, and clicking Delete color. If you add a process color to the palette, but treat it as a spot color, the color is changed to spot and the color name is preserved. However, if you choose a spot color with a trademarked name, for example a PANTONE color, and convert it to a process color, the trademarked name is substituted with the color components for that color. To rename a custom color palette 1 Click Window Color palette manager. 2 From the My Palettes folder, right-click a custom palette, and click Rename. 3 Type a new name, and press Enter. Working with color 325 To delete a custom color palette 1 Click Window Color palette manager. 2 From the My Palettes folder, right-click a custom palette, and click Delete. Organizing and displaying color palettes The Color palette manager is a docker that lets you quickly access the available color palettes, including the Document palette and create custom color palettes. The color palettes in the Color palette manager are divided into two main folders: My palettes and Palette libraries. Color palette manager You can use the My palettes folder to store all the custom color palettes that you create. You can add folders to store and organize your color palettes for different projects. You can also copy a color palette or move the palette to a different folder. You can open and control the display of all color palettes. The Palette libraries folder of the Color palette manager contains contain collections of preset color palettes from which you can choose colors. You cannot edit any of the color palettes that are found in the Palette libraries. However, you can create a custom color palette by copying a Palette libraries color palette. For more information, see “Displaying or hiding color palettes in the Palette libraries” on page 328. 326 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To open the Color palette manager • Click Window Color palette manager. To display a custom color palette 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 From the My Palettes folder, click the Show or hide icon beside the custom palette name. If you want to set a custom color palette as the default palette, click the custom palette flyout button at the top of the docked palette, and click Set as default. To open a custom color palette 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 Click the Opens a palette button. 3 Choose the drive and folder where the custom color palette is stored. If you want to open a color palette (.cpl file) that was created in a previous version of Corel DESIGNER, select Legacy custom palette (.cpl) from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the custom palette. 5 Click Open. If the custom color palette (.xml) was saved to the My Palettes folder, you can open it by clicking Window Color palettes, and choosing the custom palette from the list. When you open a legacy custom palette (.cpl) file, it is automatically converted to the .xml format. The .XML version is stored in the x:\Documents and Settings\your name\My Documents folder, and also appears in the My Palettes folder in the Color palette manager. To create a folder for storing custom color palettes 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 Click the Create a new folder button. 3 Type a new name, and press Enter. If you want to move a custom color palette, drag it to the new folder. Working with color 327 To cut or copy a custom color palette 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 From the My Palettes folder, right-click a custom palette, and click one of the following: • Cut • Copy If you want to paste the custom palette to a different folder, right-click the folder, and click Paste. To copy a palette from the Palette libraries for editing 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 Drag a palette from the Palette libraries to the My Palettes folder. An editable copy of the color palette appears in the My Palettes folder. Displaying or hiding color palettes in the Palette libraries The Palette libraries contain a collection of color palettes. You can control the display of the default color palettes, such as Default RGB and Default CMYK color palettes. The main Palette libraries that are included are: Process color and Spot color. The Process color library contains the default RGB, CMYK, Grayscale color palettes. In addition, you can find preset color palettes that have a specific theme, such as nature. The Spot color library contains color palettes that are provided by third-party manufacturers, such as HKS Colors, PANTONE, Focoltone, and TOYO. These color palettes can be very useful when you need to use specific company-approved colors for your printed projects. The color palette libraries are locked, which means you cannot edit them. 328 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Palette libraries To display a color palette in the Palette libraries 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 From the Palette libraries folder, click the Show or hide icon palette name. beside the color To display spot or process color palettes 1 Open the Color palette manager. 2 From the Palette libraries folder, double-click one of the following folders: • Spot • Process 3 Click the Show or hide icon Working with color beside the color palette name. 329 Setting the properties of color palettes Your application offers you the option of customizing color palettes. Color palettes can be either docked or floating. Docking a color palette attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a color palette pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around. With color swatches, you can set the right mouse button either to display a context menu or set the outline color. You can also adjust the color swatch border and size, and you can hide or display the No color well. To dock or undock a color palette To Do the following Dock a color palette Click the top of the color palette border, and drag the color palette to any edge of the application window until a thin black toolbar outline appears. Undock a color palette Click the color palette border, and drag the color palette away from the edge of the application window. Change the number of rows on a docked color palette In the top left corner of the Document palette, click the flyout button, click Rows, and choose an option from the list. You can also change the number of rows on a docked color palette by clicking Tools Customization, clicking Color palette in the Customization list of categories, and then typing a value in the Maximum palette rows when docked box. You can set a maximum of seven rows on a color palette. To set the action of the right mouse button for color swatches 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. 3 Enable one of the following check boxes: • Context menu • Set outline color 330 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you enable Set outline color, you can still display the context menu by right-clicking and holding anywhere on the border of a color palette. To customize color swatches 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. 3 Enable or disable any of the following check boxes: • Wide borders • Large swatches • Show no color well You can also display color names in the color swatches by clicking the Options flyout button at the top of a color palette and clicking Show color names. Working with color 331 Filling objects You can add colored, patterned, textured, and other fills to the inside of objects. You can customize a fill and set it as a default, so that each object you draw has the same fill. This section contains the following topics: • Applying uniform fills • Applying fountain fills • Applying hatch fills • Applying pattern fills • Applying texture fills • Applying PostScript texture fills • Applying mesh fills • Applying fills to areas • Working with fills Applying uniform fills You can apply a uniform fill to objects. Uniform fills are solid colors you can choose or create using color models and color palettes. For information about creating colors, see “Working with color” on page 305. To apply a uniform fill 1 Select an object. 2 In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Fountain fill tool . 3 Choose Uniform fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4 Specify the settings you want on the property bar, and press Enter. Filling objects 333 You can also fill a selected object by clicking a color on the color palette. You can mix colors in a uniform fill by selecting a filled object, pressing Ctrl, and clicking another color on the color palette. Applying fountain fills A fountain fill is a smooth progression of two or more colors that adds depth to an object. There are four types of fountain fills: linear, radial, conical, and square. A linear fountain fill flows in a straight line across the object, a conical fountain fill creates the illusion of light hitting a cone, a radial fountain fill radiates from the center of the object, and a square fountain fill is dispersed in concentric squares from the center of the object. You can apply preset fountain fills, two-color fountain fills, and custom fountain fills to objects. Custom fountain fills can contain two or more colors, which you can position anywhere in the fill’s progression. After you create a custom fountain fill, you can save it as a preset. When you apply a fountain fill, you can specify attributes for the fill type you choose; for example, the direction of a fill’s color blend, the fill’s angle, center point, midpoint, and edge pad. You can also adjust the print and display quality of the fountain fill by specifying the number of fountain steps. By default, the fountain step setting is locked so that the print quality of the fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the print settings and the display quality is determined by the default value you set. However, you can unlock the fountain steps setting when you apply a fountain fill and specify a value that applies to both the print and view quality of the fill. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see “Fine-tuning print jobs” on page 610. To apply a preset fountain fill 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Fountain fill dialog . 3 Choose a fill from the Type list box. 4 Specify the settings you want. 334 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To apply a two-color fountain fill 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Fountain fill dialog . 3 In the Fountain fill dialog box, choose a fill from the Type list box. 4 In the Color blend area, enable the Two color option. 5 In the Color blend area, open the From color picker, and click a color. 6 In the Color blend area, open the To color picker, and click a color. 7 Specify the settings you want. You can mix colors in a two-color fountain fill by selecting one of the interactive vector handles, pressing Ctrl, and clicking a color on the color palette. You can add a color to a fountain fill by dragging a color from the color palette to an object’s interactive vector handle. To apply a custom fountain fill 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Fountain fill dialog . 3 Choose a fountain fill from the Type list box. 4 Enable the Custom option. 5 Click the box at one end of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette. 6 Click the box at the opposite end of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette. 7 Specify the attributes you want. You can also Add an intermediate color Double-click between the two ends of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette. Change a color Click the vector just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette. Filling objects 335 You can also Delete a color Double-click the vector just above the color you want to delete. Change the position of a color Drag the vector just above the color to a new location. Save the fill as a preset Type a name in the Presets box, and click the Add preset button . You can also create a custom fountain fill by dragging colors from the color palette in the drawing window onto the object’s interactive vector handles. To change the fountain fill print and display quality 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Fountain fill tool . 3 From the Fill type list box on the property bar, choose one of the following fountain fills: • Linear • Radial • Conical • Square 4 Click the Lock fountain steps button Fountain steps box, and press Enter. on the property bar, type a value in the When the Fountain steps box is locked, the number of steps in the printed fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the Print dialog box. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see “Fine-tuning print jobs” on page 610. To set the display quality for fountain fills 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Display. 3 Type a value in the Preview fountain steps box. 336 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Applying hatch fills You can fill objects with hatch patterns to clearly distinguish materials or object relationships in a drawing. For example, a drawing of a floor plan may use hatching to indicate different flooring materials, or to indicate where two floors overlap. Hatch fills can be used to indicate different materials. Hatch fills are composed of vector-based lines. You can use preset hatch fills or edit fills by setting different line patterns and colors for the foreground, or by changing the color of the background. When you edit hatch fills in the Hatch fill dialog box, the changes apply only to the currently selected object. You can also create new hatch fills and add them to a library. When you create new hatch fills, the currently selected fill is used as a starting point. If no fill is selected, the default fill is used. You can add new lines, specify line style attributes, set the position and angle for the lines, and control the spacing and offset for each instance of a line. You can use hatch fills on projected objects to create the illusion of a three-dimensional image. Hatch fills use the active drawing plane. Transforming and scaling hatch fills Hatch fills can retain their properties independently of changes made to the object, or they can be transformed and scaled with the object. If you choose to transform the hatch fill with the object, only the transformations you apply from that point forward are applied — previous object transformations are not applied to the hatch fill. Filling objects 337 The original hatch fill (left) isn’t scaled with the object in the first example (center) and is scaled with the object in the second example (right). Aligning hatch fills When you apply the same hatch fill to more than one object, you can retain the fill alignment for the individual objects, or you can align the fills. The hatch fills are aligned in the drawing on the right. To apply a hatch fill 1 Select an object for which you want to apply or edit a hatch fill. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Hatch fill dialog. 3 In the Hatch fill dialog box, choose a hatch fill library from the Library list box. 4 Choose a hatch fill from the Fill picker located below the Library list box. 338 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If a hatch fill is already applied to the selected object, it appears in the Fill picker. 5 Specify the attributes you want. If you want to preview the fill on the object, click Preview. To Do the following Change the line color Choose a color from the Front color picker. Change the background color Choose a color from the Back color picker. Change line spacing In the Fill area, type a value in the Spacing box. Larger numbers increase the distance between lines; smaller numbers decrease the distance. Change line width In the Fill area, type a value in the Thickness box. Larger numbers increase the line width; smaller numbers decrease the line width. For example, typing 200% doubles the existing line width. Skew lines Type a value in the Skew box to set the degrees by which the lines are skewed. Rotate lines Type a value in the Rotate box to set the degrees by which the lines are rotated. When you edit a hatch fill in the Hatch fill dialog box, the changes are applied only to the object selected in the drawing window. Only custom hatches created in the New hatch from selected dialog box can be added to a library. You can also apply a hatch fill by clicking the Fill tab of the Property manager docker, choosing Hatch fill from the Fill type list box, and specifying the properties you want. Filling objects 339 To create a custom hatch fill 1 In the Hatch fill dialog box, click New hatch. The new hatch fill is based on the current fill. 2 In the New hatch from selected dialog box, click a line to edit from the Hatch lines list. The selected line displays in red in the Hatch preview window. Unselected lines display in their applied color. 3 In the Line style area, specify the attributes you want. 4 In the Line origin area, specify the following: • y-Origin — lets you set the y-origin for the line. This setting is important if you have more than one line in the hatch fill. The y-Origin value can be used to set the spacing between different lines. For example, to ensure that a new line isn’t positioned directly over an existing line, type a new value in the y-Origin box. • x-Origin — lets you set the x-origin for the line. This setting is effective when you have more than one dashed line and you want to offset the patterns of the different lines. It has no visible effect on standard solid lines. 5 In the Line angle box, type a value to set the angle of the line. 6 Type a value in the Shift box to offset each instance of a line. This setting is effective when you have one dashed line and you want to stagger the pattern. It has no visible effect on standard solid lines. 7 Type a value in the Spacing box to set the distance between each instance of the lines. The distance between lines is set from the path for the line, not the edge of the outline. If the Outline width value is high and the Spacing value is low, the lines might overlap. 8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 for each line you want to edit. 9 Click OK to return to the Hatch fill dialog box, choose a library from the Library list box, and click Add to library. You can also Add lines 340 Click the Add button . When you add a new line, it is created directly over the previous line. Change the y-Origin value to view the new line. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Delete lines In the Hatch lines list, choose a line, and click the Delete button . Hide or show lines in the Hatch preview window In the Hatch lines list, click the Eye icon to the left of the line name. When the eye appears closed, the line is hidden. When the eye appears open, the line is displayed. To scale or transform a hatch fill with an object 1 Select an object. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Hatch fill dialog. 3 In the Hatch fill dialog box, enable the following options: • Transform fill with object — automatically transforms the hatch fill to reflect all future transformations applied to the object • Scale line width with object — automatically scales hatch lines when the object is resized To align hatch fills across multiple objects 1 Select one or more objects that have the same hatch fill. 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Hatch fill dialog. 3 Enable the Use world coordinates option. Applying pattern fills You can fill objects with two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills. A two-color pattern fill is composed of only the two colors that you choose. A full-color pattern fill is a more complex vector graphic that can be composed of lines and fills. A bitmap pattern fill is a bitmap image whose complexity is determined by its size, image resolution, and bit depth. Corel DESIGNER provides preset pattern fills that you can apply to objects; however, you can also create your own pattern fills. For example, you can create pattern fills from objects that you draw or images that you import. Filling objects 341 You can change the tile size of pattern fills. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. Corel DESIGNER also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first pattern, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill. You can choose how the pattern fill appears by specifying whether to mirror the fill so that alternating tiles are the reflections of one another. If you want a pattern fill to change according to actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you want it to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a pattern that transforms, the pattern becomes larger while the number of tiles is not increased. To apply a two-color pattern fill 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Fountain fill tool . 3 Choose Two color pattern from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4 Open the First fill color or pattern picker, and click a pattern. 5 Open the Front color picker, and click a color. 6 Open the Back color picker, and click a color. You can also mix colors in a two-color pattern fill by pressing Ctrl and clicking a color on the color palette. You can mix a color with only one of the colors in the fill by pressing Ctrl and dragging a color to the interactive handle. To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Interactive fountain fill tool . 3 Choose one of the following from the Fill type list box on the property bar: • Full-color pattern • Bitmap pattern 4 Open the First fill color or pattern picker, and click a pattern. 342 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To create a two-color pattern fill 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Pattern fill dialog . 3 Enable the 2-color option. 4 Open the following color pickers, and click a color: • Front — to choose a foreground color • Back — to choose a background color 5 Click Create. 6 In the Two-color pattern editor dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Bitmap size area: • 16 X 16 — changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 16 x 16 squares • 32 X 32 — changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 32 x 32 squares • 64 X 64 — changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 64 x 64 squares 7 In the Pen size area, enable one of the following options: • 1 X 1 — changes the pen size to a 1-grid square • 2 X 2 — changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square • 4 X 4 — changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square • 8 X 8 — changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square 8 Click in the grid to enable a square. If you want to disable a square, right-click the square. Squares that are enabled form the foreground, and squares that are disabled form the background. You can also create a foreground pattern by dragging in the grid. To create a two-color pattern fill from an image 1 Click Tools Create Pattern fill. 2 Enable the Two-color option. 3 In the Resolution area, enable one of the following options: • Low — creates a low-resolution, two-color pattern • Medium — creates a medium-resolution, two-color pattern • High — creates a high-resolution, two-color pattern 4 Click OK. 5 Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern. Filling objects 343 To create a full-color pattern from an image 1 Click Tools Create Pattern fill. 2 Enable the Full color option. 3 Click OK. 4 Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern. 5 In the Create pattern dialog box, click OK. 6 Type a filename for the pattern in the File name box. To create a pattern fill from an imported image 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Pattern fill dialog . 3 Enable one of the following options: • 2-color • Full-color • Bitmap 4 Click Load. 5 In the Import dialog box, locate the image you want to use, and double-click the filename. To change the size of pattern tiles 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Pattern fill dialog . 3 Enable one of the following options: • 2-color • Full-color • Bitmap 4 Type a value in any of the following boxes: • Width — lets you change the width of a pattern tile • Height — lets you change the height of a pattern tile You can also Set the tile origin of a pattern fill 344 Type values in the X and Y boxes in the Origin area. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Offset the tile origin of a pattern fill Enable the Row or Column option, and type a value in the % of tile size box. Rotate a pattern fill Type a value in the Rotate box. Skew a pattern fill Type a value in the Skew box. Mirror a pattern fill Enable the Mirror fill check box. Transform a pattern fill with the object Enable the Transform fill with object check box. You can also change the size of pattern tiles by clicking the Interactive fill tools button, clicking the Interactive fountain fill tool , selecting an object, and clicking the Small tile for pattern, Medium tile for pattern, or Large tile for pattern button on the property bar. You can skew or rotate tiles by clicking the Interactive fill tools button, clicking the Interactive fountain fill tool , selecting an object, and dragging the skewing or rotation handles to change the appearance of the pattern. Applying texture fills A texture fill is a randomly generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Corel DESIGNER provides preset textures, and each texture has a set of options that you can change. You can use colors from any color model or palette to customize texture fills. Texture fills can hold only RGB colors; however, other color models and palettes can be used as a reference to select colors. For information about color models, see “Understanding color models” on page 305. You can change the tile size of texture fills. Increasing the resolution of a texture tile increases the accuracy of the fill. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. Tiles in a fill can also be offset. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first tile, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill. You can rotate, skew, adjust the tile size, and change the center of the texture to create a custom fill. Filling objects 345 If you want a texture fill to change according to the actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you want the fill to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a texture that transforms, the texture becomes larger while the number of tiles is not increased. Texture fills are powerful features that can enhance a drawing. However, they also increase the size of a file and the time it takes to print, so you may want to use them in moderation. To apply a texture fill 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Texture fill dialog . 3 Choose a texture library from the Texture library list box. 4 Choose a texture from the Texture list. You can also Create a custom texture fill Specify the settings you want in the Style name area. Change the size of texture tiles Click Tiling, and type values in the Width and Height boxes. Set the tile origin of a texture fill Click Tiling, and type values in the X and Y boxes in the Origin area. Offset the tile origin of a texture fill Click Tiling, and enable the Row or Column option. Type an amount of offset in the % of tile size box. Rotate a texture fill Click Tiling, and type a value in the Rotate box. Skew a texture fill Click Tiling, and type a value in the Skew box. Mirror a texture fill Click Tiling, and enable the Mirror fill check box. 346 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can modify the texture you choose from the texture library and save it to another library, but you cannot save textures to or overwrite textures in the texture library. You can save a custom texture fill by clicking the plus sign (+) in the Texture fill dialog box, and typing a name in the Texture name box. Applying PostScript texture fills You can apply PostScript texture fills to objects. A PostScript texture fill is created using the PostScript language. Some textures are very complex, and large objects that contain PostScript texture fills may take time to print or to update on the screen. Depending on the view mode you are using, the letters “PS” — rather than the fill — may appear. For more information about displaying PostScript fills, see “Working with views” on page 69. When you apply a PostScript texture fill, you can change several parameters, such as the size, line width, and the amount of gray that appears in the texture’s foreground and background. To apply a PostScript texture fill 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Fountain fill tool . 3 Choose PostScript fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4 Choose a PostScript fill from the PostScript fill textures list box. If you want to change the fill’s parameters, click the Edit fill button property bar, and specify the settings you want. on the Applying mesh fills When you fill an object with a mesh fill, you can create unique effects. For example, you can create smooth color transitions in any direction without having to create blends or contours. Filling objects 347 When you apply a mesh fill, you specify the number of columns and rows in the grid, and you specify the grid’s intersecting points. After you have created a mesh object, you can edit the mesh fill grid by adding and removing nodes or intersections. You can also remove the mesh. A mesh fill can be applied only to closed objects or a single path. If you want to apply a mesh fill to a complex object, you must first create a mesh-filled object and combine it with the complex object to form a PowerClip object. For more information about working with PowerClip objects, see “Creating PowerClip objects” on page 197. You can add color to a patch of a mesh fill and to the individual intersection nodes. You can also choose to mix colors for a more blended appearance. In addition, you can smooth the color in a mesh fill to reduce the appearance of hard edges. You can also reveal objects underneath a selected area by applying transparency to the mesh fill. To apply a mesh fill to an object 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Mesh fill tool . 3 Type the number of columns in the top portion of the Grid size box on the property bar. 4 Type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the Grid size box on the property bar, and press Enter. 5 Adjust the grid nodes on the object. You can also Add an intersection Click once within a grid, and click the Add intersection button on the property bar. Add a node Double-click where you want to add the node. Remove a node or an intersection Click a node, and click the Delete node(s) button on the property bar. Shape the mesh fill Drag a node to a new location. Remove the mesh fill Click the Clear mesh button property bar. 348 on the Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If the mesh object contains color, adjusting the intersection nodes of the mesh affects how the colors blend together. You can also marquee select or freehand marquee select nodes to shape an entire area of the mesh. To marquee select nodes, choose Rectangular from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. To freehand select nodes, choose Freehand from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Holding down Alt while dragging lets you toggle between the Rectangular and Freehand selection mode. You can add an intersection by double-clicking in a space, or you can add a single line by double-clicking a line. To add color to a patch in a mesh fill 1 Select a mesh-filled object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Mesh fill tool . 3 Open the Mesh fill color picker on the property bar, and click a color. You can also Apply a color by dragging it from the color palette Drag a color from the color palette to a patch in the object. Color a mesh fill intersection node Click an intersection node, and click a color on the color palette. Fill the selected mesh fill node with a sampled color Click the Sample mesh color button on the property bar, and click a color on the desktop. Mix a color in a mesh fill Select part of the mesh, press Ctrl, and click a color on the color palette. You can also drag a color from the color palette to an intersection node. You can also freehand marquee select nodes to apply a color to an entire area of the mesh. To marquee select nodes, choose Rectangular from the Selection mode list box on the property bar, and drag around the nodes you want to select. To freehand select nodes, choose Freehand from the Selection mode Filling objects 349 list box on the property bar, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Holding down Alt while dragging lets you toggle between the Rectangular and Freehand selection mode. To smooth the appearance of color in a mesh fill 1 Select a mesh-filled object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Mesh fill tool 3 Click the Smooth mesh color button . on the property bar. To apply transparency to a mesh fill 1 Select a mesh-filled object. 2 Click the Interactive fill tools button, and click the Mesh fill tool . 3 Click a node to select part of the mesh. 4 On the property bar, move the Transparency slider to the right to increase the color transparency. Applying fills to areas You can apply fills to any enclosed area by using the Smart fill tool. Unlike other fill tools, which fill only objects, the Smart fill tool detects the edges of an area and creates a closed path so that the area can be filled. For example, if you draw a freehand line that crosses over itself to create loops, the Smart fill tool can detect the edges of the loops and fill them. As long as the paths of one or more objects completely enclose an area, it can be filled. In the example above, the original spiral object is duplicated and offset, resulting in enclosed areas that can be filled by using the Smart fill tool. 350 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Because the Smart fill tool creates a path around the area, it essentially creates a new object that can be filled, moved, copied, or edited. This means that the tool can be used in one of two ways: to fill an area or to create a new object from an area. Although primarily used to fill areas, the Smart fill tool can also be used to create new objects. In the example above, the original objects — the two spirals (left) — are deleted (right), but the fill remains because each filled area is actually an object. You can apply the default fill and outline to the area, use the property bar to specify a specific fill color and outline, or create an outline with no fill. When you use the Smart fill tool on areas that already have fills applied to them, remember the following: • An object with transparency applied to it is considered completely transparent — paths under any area of the object are detected, regardless of whether the specific area appears opaque. • PostScript fills are considered transparent — paths under any area of a PostScript fill are detected. • All fills other than PostScript fills are considered opaque — paths under these fills are not detected. To apply a fill to any enclosed area 1 Click the Interactive fills tool button, and click the Smart fill tool . 2 On the property bar, choose one of the following options from the Fill options list box: • Specify — lets you fill the area with a solid color by choosing a color from the Fill color picker on the property bar • Use default — lets you fill the area with the Fill tool default setting • No fill — applies no fill to the area 3 From the Outline options box, choose one of the following options: • Use default — lets you apply the default outline setting Filling objects 351 • Specify — lets you choose a line width from the Outline width box and a line color from the Outline color color picker • No outline — applies no outline to the area 4 Click inside the enclosed area that you want to fill. A new object is created from the enclosed area, and the current fill and outline styles are applied to it. The new object appears on top of the existing objects in the layer. If you click outside an enclosed area, a new object is created from all objects on the page, and the fill and outline properties are applied to the new object. The outline width is centered on an object’s path. Because the Smart fill tool detects paths, not outlines, thick outlines appear partially covered by the new object. You can uncover the original outlines by changing the stacking order of the objects. For information about changing the stacking order of objects, see “To change the order of objects” on page 241. Working with fills There are a number of tasks that are common to all types of fills. You can choose a default fill color so that every object you add to a drawing has the same fill. You can also remove any fill, copy it to another object, or use it to fill an area surrounded by an open curve. To choose a default fill color 1 Click a blank area on the drawing page to deselect all objects. 2 Click any rectangle or circle tool. 3 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose Fill color dialog . 4 Specify any fill settings. You can also choose a default fill color by dragging a color from the color palette to a blank area in the drawing window. 352 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To remove a fill 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Fill flyout , and choose No fill . To copy a fill to another object 1 Using the Pick tool , select the object that has the fill you want to copy. 2 Right-click the object, and drag over the object you want to fill. A blue outline of the original object follows the pointer to the new object. 3 Release the mouse button, and choose Copy fill here from the context menu. For more information about copying object properties, see “Copying object properties, transformations, and effects” on page 226. You can also sample the color of an existing object and apply the sampled color to another object as a uniform fill. For more information, see “To sample a color” on page 317. To show fills in open curves 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click General. 3 Enable the Fill open curves check box. Filling objects 353 Working with graphics, text, and color styles Corel DESIGNER has three types of styles you can create and apply in drawings: graphics, text, and color. After you create a style, you can edit it and apply it to any number of graphics and text objects. When you edit a style, all the unlocked objects using that style are automatically updated, letting you make design changes to many objects in one step. You can save all styles in the active drawing and use them for all new drawings you create. For more information, see “Saving defaults” on page 755. This section includes the following topics: • Creating, applying, and editing graphics styles or text styles • Customizing the Graphic and Text Styles docker • Creating and applying color styles • Editing and sorting color styles • Moving and copying color styles Creating, applying, and editing graphics styles or text styles A style is a set of formatting attributes. When you apply a style to an object, all the attributes of the style are applied to that object in one step. Styles can save you considerable time if you must apply the same formatting to several objects. There are graphics styles and text styles. A graphics style consists of fill and outline settings that you can apply to graphics objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and curves. For example, if you have a group of objects in a drawing that use one graphics style, you can simultaneously change their fill by editing the graphics style. For more information about applying fills, see “Filling objects” on page 333. For more information about changing the appearance of outlines, see “Formatting lines and outlines” on page 149. A text style is a set of text settings such as font type and size. Text styles can also include fill and outline attributes. For example, you can create a style that applies a 72 point Working with graphics, text, and color styles 355 AvantGarde font with a texture fill. There are two types of text styles: artistic and paragraph. You can also change the properties of default artistic and paragraph text. For example, you can change the properties of default artistic text, so that every artistic text object you create has the same formatting. For information about default text, see “Changing the basic properties of text” on page 434. You can create a graphics or text style from the properties of an existing object or from scratch. When you apply a style to an object, the application overrides the existing text or graphics properties with the properties of the current style. To use the style in another drawing, you can copy the style to the new drawing or save the style in a template. For more information about templates, see “Working with templates” on page 115. If you copy or import a style with the same name as an existing style, the application renames the style by adding a number to the style name. At any point, you can rename a style, unless it is a default style. You can also change the properties of an object back to its previous style if you made a mistake or decide that the previous style was better suited to that object. After you create a style, you can edit its properties and find any object that uses a given style. For example, you can find all objects that use the default graphics style. You can also make any custom graphics or text style the default style for new objects. To create a graphics or text style from an object 1 Right-click an object whose style properties you want to save. 2 Click Styles Save style properties. 3 Enable one or more of the following check boxes: • Text • Fill • Outline 4 In the Save style as dialog box, type a name for the style in the Name box. When you create a style from an existing object, Corel DESIGNER does not automatically apply the style to an object. If you want an object to use the style, you must apply the style. For information about applying a style, see “To apply a graphics or text style” on page 357. You can also create a graphics or text style from an object by dragging the object to the Graphic and text styles docker. 356 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To create or edit a graphics or text style 1 Click Window Graphic and text styles. 2 In the Graphic and text styles docker, click the flyout button . 3 Click New, and click one of the following style types: • Graphic style • Artistic text style • Paragraph text style 4 Choose a style from the list. 5 Click the flyout button, and click Properties. 6 Click Edit beside a property. 7 Modify any text, fill, or outline properties. You can also Copy object properties Choose a style, click the flyout button , click Copy properties from, and click the object. Delete a style Right-click a style, and click Delete. Rename a style Right-click a style, click Rename, type a new name, and press Enter. Revert to an object’s style Right-click an object by using the Pick tool , and click Styles Revert to style. To apply a graphics or text style 1 Select an object. 2 Click Window Graphic and text styles. 3 In the Graphic and text styles docker, double-click a style. To find objects assigned a specific graphics or text style 1 Click Window Graphic and text styles. 2 Choose a style from the list in the Graphic and text styles docker. 3 Click the flyout button , and click Find. Working with graphics, text, and color styles 357 Customizing the Graphic and Text Styles docker You can specify what types of styles — graphics, artistic text, or paragraph text — are displayed in the Graphic and text styles docker. You can also specify that only the styles available to selected objects will display. For example, when you select artistic text, only artistic text styles appear in the Graphic and text styles docker. If you are using several styles to format a drawing, displaying only the styles applicable to the selected object makes it easier to find the style you want. As you select graphics objects and text objects, Corel DESIGNER automatically refreshes the docker and displays only the relevant styles. To specify which styles display in the Graphic and Text Styles docker 1 Click Window Graphic and text styles. 2 Click the flyout button in the Graphic and text styles docker. 3 Click Show and click any of the following options: • Graphic styles — to display graphics styles • Artistic text styles — to display artistic text styles • Paragraph text styles — to display paragraph text styles • Auto-view — to display only those styles available to a selected object Creating and applying color styles A color style is a color you save and apply to objects in a drawing. Since an infinite number of colors are available in Corel DESIGNER, color styles can make it easier to apply the exact color you want. When you create a color style, the new style is saved to the active drawing. After you create a color style, you can apply it to objects in the drawing. You can also delete color styles if you no longer require them. One powerful feature of color styles is that you can create a shade or series of shades based on a color style. The original color style is referred to as the “parent” color, and the shades are referred to as “child” colors. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent color but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM®, and Custom spot color palettes, child and parents are linked to one another but have different tint levels. The Auto-create feature lets you create color styles from selected objects. For example, you can import a drawing and auto-create color styles from an object in the drawing. 358 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide When you create color styles from an object, the color style is automatically applied to that object so that if you decide to change a color style, the object’s related color will also be updated. For more information about importing files, see “Importing files” on page 647. When you use the Auto-create feature, you can choose to create few or many parent color styles. After you have converted all colors to color styles, you can, for example, use one parent color to control all red objects, or many parents, one for each shade of red in the drawing. When you create child colors, colors added from a color-matching system are converted to the parent color’s color model so that they can be grouped into appropriate parentchild groups automatically. To create a color style 1 Click Window Color styles. 2 In the Color styles docker, click the New color style button . 3 Select a color from the New color style dialog box. You can also Apply a color style Select an object, and double-click the name of the style you want to apply in the Color styles docker. Delete a color style Right-click the color style in the Color styles docker, and click Delete. You can also create a color style from an object or the color palette by dragging a color to the Color styles docker. You can also apply a color style to an object by dragging a color from the Color styles docker. To create a child color 1 Click Window Color styles. 2 In the Color styles docker, choose the color style to which you want to link a child color. 3 Click the New child color(s) button Working with graphics, text, and color styles . 359 4 In the Create a new child color dialog box, specify the settings you want. 5 Type a name in the Color name box. You can also create a child color by typing values in the Saturation and Brightness boxes. To create a series of child colors 1 Click Window Color styles. 2 In the Color styles docker, choose the color style to which you want to link a child color. 3 Click the New child color(s) button . 4 In the Number of shades area, type a value in the Create box. 5 Enable one of the following options: • Lighter shades — creates child colors that are lighter than the parent • Darker shades — creates child colors that are darker than the parent • Both — creates an equal number of light and dark child colors 6 Adjust the Shade similarity slider. Move the slider to the left to create very different shades; move the slider to the right to create very similar shades. You can also create a series of child colors by right-clicking a color style and clicking Create a child color. To create parent and child colors from an object 1 Click Window Color styles. 2 Select an object or a group of objects. 3 In the Color styles docker, click the Auto create color styles button . 4 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Use fill colors • Use outline colors 5 Enable the Automatically link similar colors together check box to link similar colors together under their appropriate parent colors. 6 Click the Convert child palette colors to CMYK check box. 360 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you want to convert colors added from a color-matching system to CMYK so that they can be grouped under an appropriate parent color, enable this check box. If you want these colors to represent separate color styles, disable the check box. If you enable the Automatically link similar colors check box, move the Parent creation index slider to determine the number of parent colors created. To test different slider values, click Preview. Editing and sorting color styles You can edit both parent and child colors in Corel DESIGNER. When you change the hue of a parent color, all of its child colors are updated, based on the new hue and the original saturation and brightness values. For color styles using the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, and Custom spot color palettes, if you change the color of a parent, all child colors are updated, based on the new color and the original tint. If you want to change the color of the object later, you can edit the parent color, and Corel DESIGNER will automatically adjust the child colors. For example, if you change a parent color from red to yellow, Corel DESIGNER converts the child colors to shades of yellow. Sorting color styles allows you to locate a style in less time. Instead of having color styles appearing randomly in a list, you can sort color styles alphabetically by name, or you can have all parent colors with child colors listed first. To edit a parent or child color 1 Click Window Color styles. 2 In the Color styles docker, choose the parent or child color you want to edit. 3 Click the Edit color style button . 4 Select a color from either of the following dialog boxes: • Edit color style — for parent colors • Edit child color — for child colors You can also edit a parent or child color by right-clicking the color and clicking Edit color. You can also rename a color style by clicking the color style twice, typing the new name, and pressing Enter. Working with graphics, text, and color styles 361 Moving and copying color styles You can move a child color from one parent to another. The child color will change color based on the new hue and the original saturation, brightness, or tint levels. You can also copy color styles from one drawing to another. To move a child color 1 Click Window Color styles. 2 In the Color styles docker, drag the child color under another parent color using the Pick tool . To copy a color style from one drawing to another 1 Open the drawing with the color style you want to copy. 2 Open the drawing to which you want to copy the style. 3 Click Window Color styles. 4 In the Color styles docker, drag the color style to another drawing folder. 362 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Using color management Color management helps ensure colors appear consistent when you work with files from various sources and output these files on different devices. This section contains the following topics: • Understanding color management • Getting started with color management in Corel DESIGNER • Installing, loading, and embedding color profiles • Assigning color profiles • Converting colors to other color profiles • Choosing color-conversion settings • Soft proofing • Working with color management presets • Working with color management policies • Managing colors when opening documents • Managing colors when importing and pasting files • Managing colors for print • Using a safe CMYK workflow • Managing colors for online viewing Understanding color management This section provides answers to the following commonly asked questions about color management: • Why don’t colors match? • What is color management? • Why do I need color management? • How do I get started with color management? • Is my monitor displaying the correct colors? • Should I assign a color profile or convert colors to a color profile? • What is a rendering intent? Using color management 363 Why don’t colors match? Different tools are used during the process of creating and sharing a document. For example, you may start with a file that was created in another application or import an image that was captured by a digital camera or scanner. After completing the document, you may print it or e-mail it to a colleague for review. Each of the tools that you use in your workflow has a different way of interpreting color. In addition, each tool has its own range of available colors, called a color space, which is a set of numbers that define how each color is represented. Example of a document workflow In other words, when defining and interpreting color, each tool speaks a unique language. Consider a color in the color space of your digital camera: a vivid blue RGB color with the values Red = 0, Green = 0, and Blue =255. This color may appear as a different color in the color space of your monitor. In addition, the color space of your printer may not contain a match for this color. As a result, when your document moves through the workflow, this vivid blue color gets lost in the translation and is not accurately reproduced. A color management system is designed to improve the communication of color in the workflow so that the color of the output matches your intended color. 1 3 2 4 Colors are defined by their color space. 1. Lab color space. 2. sRGB color space, displayed against the Lab color space. 3. U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2 color space. 4. ProPhoto RGB color space. 364 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide What is color management? Color management is a process that lets you predict and control color reproduction, regardless of the source or destination of the document. It ensures a more accurate color representation when a document is viewed, modified, shared, exported to another format, or printed. A color management system, also known as a color engine, uses color profiles to translate the color values from one source to another. For example, it translates the colors that are displayed on the monitor into the colors that a printer can reproduce. Color profiles define the color space of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, printers, and the applications that you use to create or edit documents. Why do I need color management? If your document requires accurate color representation, you may want to learn more about color management. The complexity of your workflow and the ultimate destination of your documents are also important considerations. If your documents are destined only for online viewing, color management may not be as important. However, if you plan to open documents in another application or if you are creating documents for print or multiple types of output, then proper color management is essential. Color management lets you do the following: • reproduce colors consistently across your workflow, especially when opening documents that were created in other applications • reproduce colors consistently when sharing files with others • preview (or “soft-proof ”) colors before they are sent to their final destination, such as a printing press, a desktop printer, or the Web • reduce the need to adjust and correct documents when sending them to different destinations A color management system does not offer identical color matching, but it greatly improves color accuracy. How do I get started with color management? Here are some suggestions for adding color management to your workflow: • Make sure that your monitor is displaying the correct colors. For more information, see “Is my monitor displaying the correct colors?” on page 366. • Install color profiles for any input or output devices that you are planning to use. For more information, see “Installing, loading, and embedding color profiles” on page 373. Using color management 365 • Become familiar with the color management features of Corel DESIGNER. The default settings for color management produce good color results, but you can change these default settings so that they suit your specific workflow. For more information, see “Getting started with color management in Corel DESIGNER” on page 369. • Soft-proof documents to preview final results on-screen. For more information, see “Soft proofing” on page 378. • Embed color profiles when saving and exporting files. In this way, you help ensure color consistency when the files are viewed, modified, or reproduced. For more information, see “Installing, loading, and embedding color profiles” on page 373. Is my monitor displaying the correct colors? Calibrating and profiling the monitor are essential steps for ensuring color accuracy. When you calibrate a monitor, you set it to display colors according to an established standard of accuracy. After calibration, you can create a color profile of the monitor, which describes how the monitor interprets colors. This custom color profile is usually installed in your operating system by the profiling software, so it can be shared with other devices and applications. Calibration and profiling work together to achieve color accuracy: If a monitor is incorrectly calibrated, its color profile is not useful. Calibration and profiling are complex and usually require third-party calibration devices, such as colorimeters and specialized software. Furthermore, improper calibration may do more harm than good. You can learn more about monitor calibration and custom color profiles by researching color management techniques and products. You can also refer to the documentation that was provided with your operating system or monitor. How you perceive the color that your monitor displays is also important for managing color consistency. Your perception is influenced by the environment in which you are viewing the documents. Here are some ways to create a suitable viewing environment: • Ensure that your room has a consistent flow of light. For example, if the room is filled with sunlight, use a shade, or if possible, work in a room without windows. • Set the monitor background to a neutral color, such as gray, or apply a grayscale image. Avoid using colorful wallpapers and screensavers. • Don’t wear bright clothing that can clash with the display of colors on the monitor. For example, wearing a white shirt reflects onto the monitor and alters your perception of color. 366 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Should I assign a color profile or convert colors to a color profile? When you assign a color profile, the color values, or numbers, in the document do not change. Instead, the application uses the color profile to interpret the document colors. However, when you convert colors to another color profile, the color values in the document change. The best practice is to choose a suitable color space when you create a document and to use the same color profile throughout your workflow. You should avoid assigning color profiles and converting colors to other color profiles while working on a document. For more information, see “Assigning color profiles” on page 375 and “Converting colors to other color profiles” on page 376. What is a rendering intent? A color management system can perform effective translation of document colors to multiple devices. However, when converting colors from one color space to another, a color management system may be unable to match certain colors. This translation failure occurs because some colors in the source may not fit within the range (or gamut) of the destination color space. For example, the bright red and blue colors that you see on your monitor are often outside the gamut of colors that your printer can produce. These “out-of-gamut” colors can dramatically change the look of the document, depending on how they are interpreted by the color management system. Each color management system has four methods of interpreting out-of-gamut colors and mapping them into the gamut of the destination color space. These methods are known as “rendering intents.” The choice of a rendering intent depends on the graphical content of the document. sRGB color space Using color management U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2 color space 367 Out-of-gamut colors Many colors in an sRGB document may be out of gamut for the U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2 color space. The out-of-gamut colors are mapped into gamut according to the rendering intent. The following rendering intents are available: • The Relative colorimetric rendering intent is suitable for logos or other graphics that contain only a few out-of-gamut colors. It matches the out-of-gamut source colors with the closest in-gamut colors at the destination. This rendering intent causes the white point to shift. If you print on white paper, the whiteness of the paper is used to reproduce the white areas of the document. Therefore, this rendering intent is a good option if your document will be printed. • The Absolute colorimetric rendering intent is suitable for logos, or other graphics, that require very precise colors. If no match is found for the source colors, then the closest possible match is used. The Absolute colorimetric and Relative colorimetric rendering intents are similar, but the Absolute colorimetric rendering intent preserves the white point through the conversion and does not adjust for the whiteness of the paper. This rendering intent is used mainly for proofing. • The Perceptual rendering intent is suitable for photographs and bitmaps that contain many out-of-gamut colors. The overall color appearance is preserved by changing all the colors, including the in-gamut colors, to fit within the range of colors at the destination. This rendering intent maintains the relationships between colors to produce the best results. 368 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • The Saturation rendering intent produces more concentrated solid colors in business graphics, such as charts and graphs. Colors may be less accurate than those produced by other rendering intents. The number of out-of-gamut colors (indicated by the green overlay) may influence your choice of a rendering intent. Left: The Relative colorimetric rendering intent is suitable for this photo, which contains only a few out-of-gamut colors. Right: The Perceptual rendering intent is a good choice for this photo, which contains many out-of-gamut colors. Getting started with color management in Corel DESIGNER Corel DESIGNER has two types of color management settings: default settings for color management and document color settings. The default settings for color management control the colors of new documents and any documents that do not contain color profiles (also known as “untagged documents”). Documents that were created in earlier versions of Corel DESIGNER are treated as untagged. Document color settings affect only the colors of the active document. Default settings for color management The default settings for color management are essential for producing consistent colors. • Presets — If you are new to color management and create designs for a specific output, you can choose a preset to help you get started with the right color management settings such as default color profiles and color-conversion settings. Examples are the North America Prepress preset, which is suitable for projects to be printed by North American print service providers, and the Europe Web preset, which is suitable for Web projects that are created in Europe. For more information Using color management 369 • • • • • • 370 about color management presets, see “Working with color management presets” on page 382. Default color profiles — define the RGB, CMYK, and grayscale colors in new and untagged documents. You can change these settings so that all new documents use the color profiles that you specify. In some applications, default color profiles are called “working space profiles.” Primary color mode — determines the document color palette that is displayed when you open or start a document as well as the default color mode of a document that is exported as a bitmap. The primary color mode is set for all new and untagged documents, but you can change this setting for the active document in the Document color settings dialog box. Note that the primary color mode does not limit colors in a Corel DESIGNER document to a single color mode. Rendering intent — lets you choose a method for mapping out-of-gamut colors in new and untagged documents. If the default rendering intent is not suitable for the active document, you can change it in the Document color settings dialog box. For information about choosing the right rendering intent for your projects, see “What is a rendering intent?” on page 367. Color conversion settings — control how colors are matched when you are converting colors from one color profile to another. For example, you can change the color engine or specify options for converting pure black colors in RGB, CMYK, Lab, or Grayscale documents. For more information, see “Choosing colorconversion settings” on page 377. Spot color definition — lets you display spot colors by using their Lab, CMYK, or RGB color values. These alternative color values are also used when spot colors are converted to process colors. Color management policies — manage colors in files that you open, or import or paste in an active document. For more information about color management policies, see “Working with color management policies” on page 383. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Default color management settings dialog box Document color settings You can view and edit the color settings of the active document, without affecting new and untagged documents. You can see what color profiles are assigned to the document as well as what are the default color profiles of the application. The color profiles that are assigned to an active document determine the document color space for RGB, CMYK, and grayscale colors. You can also assign different color profiles to the active document or convert its colors to specific color profiles. For information about assigning color profiles, see “Assigning color profiles” on page 375. For information about converting document colors to other color profiles, see “Converting colors to other color profiles” on page 376. Using color management 371 Document color settings dialog box In addition, you can change the primary color mode and rendering intent for the active document. Getting help You can find information about each control available in the Default color settings and Document color settings dialog boxes by pointing to the control and viewing the description in the Description area. To access default settings for color management • Click Tools Color management Default settings. 372 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change the default color profiles 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 In the Default color settings area, choose a color profile from the following list boxes: • RGB — describes RGB colors in new and untagged documents • CMYK — describes CMYK colors in new and untagged documents • Grayscale — describes grayscale colors in new and untagged documents To access document color settings • Click Tools Color management Document settings. You can also view the document color settings in the Document properties dialog box by clicking File Document properties. The status bar displays the color profiles that are used in the active document. Installing, loading, and embedding color profiles To ensure color accuracy, a color management system needs ICC-compliant profiles for monitors, input devices, external monitors, output devices, and documents. • Monitor color profiles — define the color space that is used by your monitor to display document colors. Corel DESIGNER uses the primary monitor profile that is assigned by the operating system. The monitor profile is very important for color accuracy. For more information, see “Is my monitor displaying the correct colors?” on page 366. • Input device color profiles — used by input devices such as scanners and digital cameras. These color profiles define which colors can be captured by specific input devices. • Display color profiles — include monitor profiles that are not associated with your monitor in the operating system. These color profiles are especially useful for softproofing documents for monitors that are not connected to your computer. • Output device color profiles — define the color space of output devices such as desktop printers and printing presses. The color management system uses these profiles to map accurately document colors to the colors of the output device. • Document color profiles — define the RGB, CMYK, and grayscale colors of a document. Documents that contain color profiles are known as “tagged.” Using color management 373 Finding color profiles Many color profiles are installed with your application or can be generated with profiling software. Manufacturers of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, and printers also provide color profiles. In addition, you can access color profiles from Web sites such as: • http://www.color.org/findprofile.xalter — This Web site of the International Color Consortium (ICC) can help you find commonly used standard color profiles. • http://www.eci.org/doku.php?id=en:downloads — This Web site of the European Color Initiative (ECI) provides standard ISO profiles as well as profiles that are specific to Europe • http://www.tftcentral.co.uk/articles/icc_profiles.htm — This Web site provides ICC profiles for many different types of LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitors to help you display consistent colors. However, if color accuracy is essential for your workflow, you should calibrate and profile your monitor instead of relying on readily available monitor profiles. For more information, see “Is my monitor displaying the correct colors?” on page 366. Installing and loading color profiles If you don’t have the necessary color profile, you can install it, or you can load it within the application. Installing a color profile adds it to the Color folder of the operating system; loading a color profile adds it to the Color folder of the application. CorelDRAW Graphics Suite can access color profiles from both Color folders. Embedding color profiles When you save or export a document to a file format that supports color profiles, the color profiles are embedded in the file by default. Embedding a color profile attaches the color profile to the document to ensure that the same colors you used are shared with anyone who views or prints the document. To install a color profile • In Windows Explorer, right-click a color profile, and click Install profile. To load a color profile 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 In the Default color setting area, choose Load color profiles from the RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale list boxes. 374 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the color profile. After you load a color profile, you can also access it from the Color proof settings docker, Print dialog box, and Document color setting dialog box. Note that you can load a color profile of any color mode from any list box: RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale. However, after you load the profile, you can access it only from the list box of the respective color mode. For example, you can load an RGB color profile from the CMYK list box, but you can access the profile only from the RGB list box. You can also load a color profile from the Document color settings dialog box. To embed a color profile 1 Click File, and then click one of the following commands: • Save as • Export • Export for Web 2 In the dialog box that appears, enable the Embed color profiles check box. When you save or export a file to the Corel DESIGNER (DES) or Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) file format, you can embed up to three color profiles. Embedding a color profile increases the file size of a document. To avoid increasing the file size unnecessarily, Corel DESIGNER embeds only color profiles for colors that are used in the document. For example, if your document contains only RGB objects, only the RGB color profile will be embedded. Assigning color profiles When you open or import a document that is missing a color profile, by default the application automatically assigns a color profile to the document. If the document has a color profile that is not suitable for the required destination, you can assign a different color profile to the document. For example, if the document is intended to be displayed on the Web or to be printed on a desktop printer, you should make sure that sRGB is Using color management 375 the document RGB profile. If the document is destined for print production, the Adobe RGB (1998) profile is a better choice, because it has a larger gamut and produces good results when RGB colors are converted to a CMYK color space. When you assign a different color profile to a document, the colors may appear different, although the color values do not change. Left: The SWOP 2006_Coated3v2.icc color profile is assigned to the active document. Right: When the Japan Color 2002 Newspaper color profile is assigned to the document, the colors appear much less saturated. To assign color profiles to a document 1 Click Tools Color management Document settings. 2 In the Edit document color settings area, enable the Assign different color profiles option. 3 Choose color profiles from the RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale list boxes. Converting colors to other color profiles When you convert document colors from one color profile to another, the color values in the document are changed according to the rendering intent, but the appearance of colors is preserved. The main purpose of converting colors is to match the appearance of colors in the source color space as closely as possible to colors in the destination color space. Because multiple color conversions deteriorate accuracy, it is recommended that you convert colors only once. Wait until the document is ready and you are sure of the color profile that will be used for the final output. For example, if you designed a document in the Adobe® RGB (1998) color space, and the document will be posted on the Web, you can convert document colors to the sRGB color space. 376 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can choose the color management engine that is used for converting colors. For more information, see “Choosing color-conversion settings” on page 377. To convert colors to other color profiles 1 Click Tools Color management Document settings. 2 In the Edit document color settings area, enable the Convert document colors to new color profiles option. 3 Choose a color profile from the RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale list box. 4 Choose a suitable rendering intent from the Rendering intent list box. For information about the available rendering intents, see “What is a rendering intent?” on page 367. Choosing color-conversion settings When you choose color profiles, colors are matched between devices as closely as possible by the color management module (CMM) of the Microsoft® Image Color Management (ICM), which is the default CMM. Color management modules are also known as “color engines.” On Windows Vista, you can also use the Windows Color System (WCS) color management module. In addition, you can use the Adobe® CMM if it is installed on your computer. To download and install the Adobe CMM, visit the Adobe Web site. Handling pure black and grayscale colors You can preserve pure black color in the destination color space during color conversion. For example, if you are converting an RGB document to a CMYK color space, pure RGB black (R=0, G=0, B=0) can be mapped to pure black CMYK colors (K=100). This option is recommended for grayscale documents or documents that contain mostly text. Note that preserving pure black during color conversion may create solid edges of black in effects and gradient fills that contain black. By default, grayscale colors are converted to the CMYK black (K) channel. This process ensures that all grayscale colors print as shades of black, and no cyan, magenta, and yellow inks are wasted during printing. Using color management 377 To choose color-conversion settings 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 In the Color conversion settings area, choose a color engine from the Color engine list box. You can also Do the following Keep pure black in the source color space as pure black in the destination color space Enable the Preserve pure black check box. Map grayscale colors to CMYK black during conversion Enable the Map gray to CMYK black check box. Soft proofing Soft proofing provides an on-screen preview of a document as it will appear when it is reproduced by a specific printer or displayed on a specific monitor. Unlike the “hardproofing” technique that is used in a traditional printing workflow, soft proofing lets you look at the final result without committing ink to paper. You can verify whether the color profile of the document is suitable for a specific printer or monitor and avoid unwanted results. Top left: An RGB color profile is assigned to the document. Middle and right: Assigning a specific CMYK profile allows an on-screen simulation of the printed output. To simulate the output colors that are produced by a device, you need to choose the color profile of the device. Because the color spaces of the document and device are 378 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide different, some document colors may not have matches in the gamut of the device color space. You can enable the gamut warning, which lets you preview the on-screen colors that cannot be reproduced accurately by the device. When the gamut warning is enabled, an overlay highlights all the out-of-gamut colors for the device that you are simulating. You can change the color of the out-of-gamut overlay, and you can also make it more transparent to see the underlying colors. The gamut warning highlights colors that a printer or monitor cannot reproduce accurately. You can change how out-of-gamut colors are brought into the gamut of the proof profile by changing the rendering intent. For more information, see “What is a rendering intent?” on page 367. You can preserve the RGB, CMYK, or grayscale color values of the document when soft-proofing. For example, if you are soft-proofing a document to be printed to a printing press, you can keep the original document CMYK color values in the soft proof. In this case, all colors will be updated on-screen, but only the RGB and grayscale color values of the document will be changed in the soft proof. Preserving the CMYK color values can help you prevent unwanted color conversions in the final output. If you often need to soft-proof documents for a specific output, you can create and save custom proof presets. You can delete the presets that you no longer need at any time. You can save soft proofs by exporting them to the JPEG, TIFF, Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF), or Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format. You can also print proofs. Using color management 379 By default, soft proofing is disabled when you start a new document or when you open a document. However, you can make sure that soft proofing is turned on by default at all times. To turn soft proofing on or off • Click Tools Proof colors. When you turn soft proofing on, colors in the document window, color palettes, and preview windows of dialog boxes appear different. Simulating printer output may cause on-screen colors to appear dull because all colors are brought into a CMYK color space, which has a smaller gamut than an RGB color space. You can also enable or disable soft proofing by clicking the Proof colors button on the status bar. To specify soft-proof settings 1 Click Tools Color proof settings. 2 Perform any of the following tasks. To Do the following Simulate the output of a specific device From the Simulate environment list box, choose the color profile of the device. Keep specific color values unchanged Enable the Preserve {} numbers check box. Depending on the color profile in the Simulate environment box, the check box lets you preserve CMYK, RGB, or grayscale color values. Change the rendering intent Choose a rendering intent from the Rendering intent list box. Enable the gamut warning In the Gamut warning area, enable the Out-of-gamut colors check box. 380 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Change the color of the out-of-gamut overlay In the Gamut warning area, choose a color from the color picker. Change the transparency of the out-ofgamut overlay In the Gamut warning area, type a value in the Transparency box. The value should be between 1 and 100. Save a custom proof preset Choose the settings that you want, click the Save button , and then type a name in the Save preset as dialog box. Out-of-gamut settings are not included in the proof preset. Choose a proof preset From the Proof preset list box, choose a preset. Delete a proof preset Click the Delete button . The accuracy of the simulation depends on factors such as the quality of your monitor, the color profile of the monitor and the output device, and the ambient lighting in your work area. To export a soft proof 1 Click Tools Color proof settings. 2 In the Color proof settings docker, click the Export soft proof button. 3 Type a filename in the File name box. 4 From the Save as type list box, choose one of the following options: • JPG - JPEG Bitmaps • PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format • TIF - TIFF Bitmap • CPT - Corel PHOTO-PAINT image 5 Choose any settings in the dialog box that appears. Using color management 381 To print a proof 1 Click Tools Color proof settings. 2 In the Color proof settings docker, click the Print proof button. To turn soft proofing on by default 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Display. 3 Enable the Proof colors by default check box. Working with color management presets The application provides color management presets, which are default color settings that are applied to new and untagged documents. You can choose a color management preset that is suitable for the geographic region where a document is created or for the location of its final output. You can also create your own presets, which allows you to retain your selections in the Default color management settings dialog box and reuse them in other documents. If you no longer need a preset, you can delete it. To choose a color management preset for new documents 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 Choose one of the following color management presets from the Presets list box: • North America General Purpose — suitable for designs that will be used in multiple types of output in North America • Europe General Purpose — suitable for designs that will be used in multiple types of output in Europe • Europe Prepress — suitable for designs that will be printed by print service providers in Europe • Europe Web — suitable for Web designs that are created in Europe • Japan General Purpose — suitable for designs that will be used in multiple types of output in Japan • Japan Prepress — suitable for designs that will be printed by print service providers in Japan • Japan Web — suitable for Web designs that are created in Japan 382 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Minimal Color Management — preserves the original RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale color values when opening, importing, or pasting documents • North America Prepress — suitable for designs that will be printed by print service providers in North America • North America Web — suitable for Web designs that are created in North America • Simulate Color Management Off — produces the color-conversion results of the Color Management Off preset that is available in earlier versions of Corel DESIGNER • Simulate Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X4 — displays colors as they appear in Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X4 To add a color management preset 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 Change any default color settings. 3 Click the Save button next to the Presets list box. 4 In the Save color management style dialog box, type a name in the Save style as box. To delete a color management preset 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 Choose a preset from the Presets list box. 3 Click the Delete button . Working with color management policies Color management policies determine how colors are managed in documents that you open and work with in an application. In Corel DESIGNER, you can set one colormanagement policy for opening documents and another for importing and pasting files and objects in the active document. The color management policy for opening files determines what RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale color profiles are used in each file you want to open. By default, the application uses the color profiles embedded in the file. You can also choose to assign the default color profiles to the file or convert colors in the file to the default color profiles. Using color management 383 By default, the color management policy for importing and pasting files converts the RGB and Grayscale colors of the files to the document color profiles, and assigns the document CMYK color profile to files in the CMYK mode. You can also choose to assign the document color profiles to the file, or convert the colors of the active document to the color profiles that are embedded in the file. The files that you are opening or importing may be missing color profiles, or may contain color profiles that do not match the default color profiles. By default, the application does not warn you about missing or mismatched color profiles but makes color management choices that produce good results. However, you can activate warning messages if you want to have full control over the colors in your documents. To set a color management policy for opening documents 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 In the Open section of the Color management policies area, choose one of the following options from the RGB list box: • Use embedded color profile — preserves the RGB color profile that is embedded in the file. This option is recommended, because it preserves the original RGB color appearance and RGB color values of the document. • Assign default color profile — uses the default RGB color profile to define document colors. RGB color values are preserved, but the appearance of RGB colors may change. • Convert to default color profile — converts colors to the default RGB color profile. The appearance of RGB colors in documents is preserved, but the color values may change. 3 From the CMYK list box in the Open area, choose an option for managing CMYK colors in documents. The options are the same as the options that are available for RGB colors. 4 From the Grayscale list box in the Open area, choose an option for managing the grayscale colors in documents. The options are the same as the options that are available for RGB colors. To set a color management policy for importing and pasting files 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 In the Import and paste section of the Color management policies area, choose one of the following options from the RGB list box: 384 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Convert to document color profile — converts the RGB colors of the imported or pasted file to the RGB color profile of the active document. This option is used when the imported file contains a color profile that does not match the color profile of the document. • Assign document color profile — assigns the RGB color profile of the document to the imported or pasted file. The RGB color values of the file are preserved but the color appearance may change. • Use embedded color profile — uses the RGB color profile that is embedded in the file, preserving the RGB color values and appearance of the imported or pasted file. This option converts document colors to the color profile that is embedded in the imported or pasted file. 3 From the CMYK list box in the Import and paste area, choose an option for managing CMYK colors in imported and pasted files. The options are the same as the options that are available for RGB colors. 4 From the Grayscale list box in the Import and paste area, choose an option for managing the grayscale colors in imported and pasted files. The options are the same as the options that are available for RGB colors. To activate warning messages for missing and mismatched color profiles 1 Click Tools Color management Default settings. 2 In the Color management policies area, enable any of the following check boxes in the Open and Import and paste areas: • Warn on color profile mismatch • Warn on missing color profile Managing colors when opening documents The default color management policy for opening documents preserves colors in all tagged documents that you open and assigns the default color profiles to untagged documents. If a document that you open is missing a color profile or contains color profiles that do not match the default color profiles of the application, Corel DESIGNER makes colormanagement choices based on the color management policy. If you are comfortable with color management, you can view warnings about missing and mismatched color profiles and choose different color management options. For more information about how to activate warnings, see “To activate warning messages for missing and mismatched color profiles” on page 385. Using color management 385 Opening documents with missing color profiles The document you are opening may support one or multiple color modes and therefore be missing one or more color profiles. For example, a Corel DESIGNER (DES) or PDF document may contain three types of objects: RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale, so up to three color profiles may be missing from such a document. The following options are available when you are opening a document with a missing color profile and have activated warnings for missing color profiles. • Assign color profile — lets you assign a color profile to the document. This option preserves color values, but may change the appearance of colors. For example, if the RGB color profile is missing from the document, the default RGB color profile of the application is assigned by default. The RGB color values are preserved but the RGB colors may not appear as originally designed. You can also choose to assign a color profile that is different from the default color profile of the application. This option is recommended only if you know the original color space of the document and have the associated color profile installed. • Convert to default color profile — Used in conjunction with the Assign color profile control, this option converts colors from the assigned color profile to the default color profile. Colors will appear as they would in the assigned color space, but the color values may change. Corel DESIGNER displays this warning dialog box for a document that is missing an RGB color profile. 386 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Opening documents with mismatched color profiles When a document contains a color profile that does not match the default color profile, you can choose one of the following options: • Use embedded color profile — This option ensures that the color values are preserved and colors are displayed as originally intended. • Ignore embedded color profile, and use default color profile — Assigning the default color profile will preserve the color values but may change the appearance of colors. • Convert from embedded color profile to default color profile — This option converts colors from the embedded color profile to the default color profile. The appearance of colors will be preserved, but the color values may change. This option is recommended if you have already set color management options suitable for your workflow. For example, you may be creating graphics for the Web, and you may have chosen sRGB as the application default color space. Enabling this option ensures that the document uses the sRGB color space, and document colors are consistent and suitable for the Web. Opening documents with missing and mismatched color profiles Documents that support multiple color modes can be missing color profiles and contain mismatched color profiles at the same time. For example, a document that contains RGB, Grayscale, and CMYK objects may be missing an RGB profile and may have a mismatched CMYK color profile. In such cases, you are presented with warning dialog boxes that include options for missing and mismatched color profiles. Managing colors when importing and pasting files The default color policy for importing and pasting files converts the colors of imported and pasted files to the color profile of the active document. If the color profile of the imported or pasted file matches the color profile of the active document, no color conversion is performed. For more information about color management policies, see “Working with color management policies” on page 383. However, you can choose to view warnings about missing and mismatched profiles and set other color management options. For more information about how to view warnings, see “To activate warning messages for missing and mismatched color profiles” on page 385. Using color management 387 Importing and pasting files with missing color profiles If color profiles are missing from a file, you can choose to assign specific color profiles to the file, and then convert its colors to the document color profiles. The color values of the file will change. Importing and pasting files with mismatched color profiles If a file contains color profiles that do not match the document color profile, the following options are available: • Ignore embedded color profile, and assign the document color profile — Color values are preserved, but the appearance of colors may change. • Convert from embedded color profile to the document color profile (default option) — The color of the imported file are converted from the embedded color space to the document color space. The appearance of colors is preserved, but the color values may change. • Convert document colors to embedded color profile — Document colors are converted to the color profile embedded in the imported file. The appearance and color values of the imported or pasted file are preserved. Importing and pasting files with missing and mismatched color profiles Some files can be missing color profiles and contain mismatched color profiles at the same time. In such cases, you are presented with dialog boxes that include options for missing and mismatched color profiles. Managing colors for print By default, Corel DESIGNER does not perform color conversions when a document is sent to the printer. The printer receives the color values and interprets the colors. However, if there is a color profile associated with the printer in the operating system, Corel DESIGNER detects the color profile and uses it to convert document colors to the color space of the printer. If you have a PostScript printer, you can let Corel DESIGNER or the PostScript printer perform any necessary color conversion. When Corel DESIGNER manages the color conversion, document colors are converted from the assigned color space to the color space of the PostScript printer. Note that you must disable color management in the printer driver. Otherwise, both application and printer manage colors during printing, and document colors are corrected twice, which causes unwanted color shifts. 388 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide When the PostScript printer converts document colors, the color management feature must be enabled in the printer driver. Only PostScript printers and RIP engines that support printer color conversions can be used in this advanced method. Although it increases the file size, this method has the advantage of ensuring consistent colors when you send the same print job to different print service providers. For more information about reproducing colors for print, see “Printing colors accurately” on page 612. You can also manage colors in PDF files that you create for commercial printing. For more information, see “Specifying color management options for exporting PDF files” on page 670. Using a safe CMYK workflow Often, you may use specific CMYK color values in your projects. To ensure reliable color reproduction, you may obtain these CMYK color values from a color swatch book. By preserving these CMYK color values throughout the printing process, you can help prevent unwanted color conversions and ensure that colors are reproduced as they appeared in the original design. A workflow that preserves the CMYK color values is known as a “safe” CMYK workflow. Corel DESIGNER supports a safe CMYK workflow. By default, CMYK color values are preserved in any document that you open, import, or paste. Also, CMYK color values are preserved by default when you print documents. In some cases, you may want to bypass the safe CMYK workflow and preserve the appearance of CMYK colors when you open, import, or paste documents. This option is useful when you want to see the original colors of a design on-screen, or view a copy that is printed to a desktop printer. To preserve the appearance of CMYK colors, you can set color management policies that convert CMYK colors in documents that you open, import, or paste. In addition, when printing to a PostScript printer, you can convert CMYK colors to the printer color profile by disabling the Preserve CMYK numbers check box on the Color page of the Print dialog box. Managing colors for online viewing Managing colors for online viewing can be even more complex than managing colors for print. Documents and images on the Web are displayed on a great variety of Using color management 389 monitors, which are often uncalibrated. In addition, most Web browsers do not support color management and ignore the color profiles that are embedded in files. When you design documents for exclusive Web use, it is recommended that you use the sRGB color profile as your document RGB color profile and choose RGB colors. If a document contains a different color profile, you should convert document colors to sRGB before saving the document for use on the Web. When you create a PDF file for online viewing, you can embed color profiles in the file to reproduce colors consistently in Adobe® Reader® and Adobe® Acrobat®. For more information, see “To specify color management options for exporting PDF files” on page 670. When you start a new document that is destined for online viewing, you can choose a preset that can help you achieve good color results. In addition, Corel DESIGNER offers color management presets for Web documents. For information about how to choose a color management preset, see “To choose a color management preset for new documents” on page 382. 390 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Special effects Adding 3D effects to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Changing the transparency of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Using lenses with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 391 Adding 3D effects to objects You can create the illusion of three-dimensional (3D) depth in objects by adding contour, perspective, extrusion, bevel, or drop shadow effects. This section contains the following topics: • Contouring objects • Applying perspective to objects • Creating extrusions • Creating bevel effects • Creating drop shadows • Blending objects Contouring objects You can contour an object to create a series of concentric lines that progress to the inside or outside of the object. Corel DESIGNER also lets you set the number and distance of the contour lines. In addition to creating interesting 3D effects, you can use contours to create cuttable outlines for output to devices, such as plotters, engraving machines, and vinyl cutters. After contouring an object, you can copy or clone its contour settings to another object. With cloning, any changes you make to the master object are automatically applied to its clones. You can also change the colors of the fill between the contour lines and the contour outlines themselves. You can set a color progression in the contour effect, where one color blends into another. The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or counterclockwise path through the color range of your choice. You can separate an object from its contour lines. Adding 3D effects to objects 393 A center contour has been applied to the cabinet on the right. The number of contour lines, as well as the distance between lines, can be changed. An outside contour has been applied to the above object. Note that an outside contour projects from the outside edge of the object. To contour an object 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool . 2 Click an object or a set of grouped objects, and drag the start handle toward the center to create an inside contour or away from the center to create an outside contour. 3 Move the object slider to change the number of contour steps. 394 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Add contour lines to the center of the selected object Click the To center button Specify the number of contour lines Click the Inside contour or Outside contour button on the property bar, and type a value in the Contour steps box on the property bar. Specify the distance between contour lines Type a value in the Contour offset box on the property bar. Accelerate contour line progression Click the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar, and move the object slider. . You can create contours by clicking Effects Contour and specifying the settings you want in the Contour docker. If you need to scale the contoured object, you can change the object’s reference point to use when scaling by locating the Object origin icon on the property bar and clicking the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. To copy or clone a contour 1 Select the object you want to contour. 2 Click Effects and click one of the following: • Copy effect Contour from • Clone effect Contour from 3 Click the object whose contour effect you want to copy. You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy a contour. For more information, see “To copy effects from one object to another” on page 227. Adding 3D effects to objects 395 To set the fill color for a contour object 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool . 2 Select a contour object. 3 Open the Fill color picker on the property bar, and click a color. If you cannot apply the fill color, you need to make sure the Fill color option is enabled on the status bar. If the original object has a fountain fill, a second color picker appears. You can accelerate the fill color progression by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar. You can change the contour center’s color by dragging a color from the color palette to the end fill handle. To specify an outline color for the contour object 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool . 2 Select a contour object. 3 Open the Outline color picker on the property bar, and click a color. To set the fill progression 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Contour tool . 2 Select a contour object. 3 Click one of the following buttons on the property bar: • Linear contour colors • Clockwise contour colors • Counterclockwise contour colors To separate an object from its contour lines 1 Using the Pick tool , select a contoured object. 2 Click Arrange Break contour group apart. 396 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Applying perspective to objects You can create a perspective effect by shortening one or two sides of an object. This effect gives an object the appearance of receding in one or two directions, thereby creating a one-point perspective or a two-point perspective. Perspective effects can be added to objects or grouped objects. You can also add a perspective effect to linked groups, such as contours, blends, extrusions, and objects created with the Linear pattern brush tool. You can’t add perspective effects to paragraph text, bitmaps, or symbols. The original graphic (left) with one-point (middle) and two-point (right) perspectives applied to it. After you apply a perspective effect, you can copy it to other objects in a drawing, adjust it, or remove it from the object. To apply a perspective To Apply a one-point perspective Click Effects Add perspective. Press Ctrl, and drag a node. Apply a two-point perspective Click Effects Add perspective. Drag the nodes on the outside of the grid to apply the effect you want. Adding 3D effects to objects 397 Pressing Ctrl constrains the node’s movement to the horizontal or vertical axis to create a one-point perspective effect. You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by pressing Ctrl + Shift as you drag. To copy an object’s perspective effect 1 Select an object to which you want to apply a perspective effect. 2 Click Effects Copy effect Perspective from. 3 Select an object whose perspective effect you want to copy. You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy a perspective effect. For more information, see “To copy effects from one object to another” on page 227. To adjust the perspective 1 In the toolbox, click the Shape tool 2 Select an object that has a perspective effect. 3 Drag a node to a new position. You can also adjust the perspective by dragging one or both of the vanishing points. You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by pressing Ctrl + Shift while dragging the node. To remove a perspective effect from an object 1 Select an object that has a perspective effect. 2 Click Effects Clear perspective. 398 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Creating extrusions You can make objects appear three-dimensional by creating extrusions. You can create extrusions by projecting points from an object and joining them to create an illusion of three dimensions. Corel DESIGNER also lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object in a group. After you create an extrusion, you can copy or clone its attributes to a selected object. Cloning and copying transfer the extrusion attributes of an extruded object to another. However, the cloned extrusion settings cannot be edited independently from the master. You can change an extruded form by rotating it, changing its direction, changing its depth, and rounding its corners. Corel DESIGNER also lets you remove a vector extrusion. Bevels Another way in which you can give an object a three-dimensional appearance is by applying a beveled edge to an extrusion. A bevel creates the illusion that an object’s extruded edges are cut on an angle. You can specify the angle and depth values of the bevel to control the effect. You can create a bevel effect without extruding an object. For more information, see “Creating bevel effects” on page 404. Extruded fills You can apply fills to an entire extrusion or only to the extruded surfaces. You can cover each surface individually with the fill, or you can drape the fill so that it blankets the entire object with no breaks to the pattern or texture. Left to right: a simple shape, the shape with an extruded fill of solid color, the shape with an extruded gradient fill and a rotation applied. Adding 3D effects to objects 399 Lighting You can enhance extrusions by applying light sources. You can add up to three light sources to project toward the extruded object with varying intensity. When you no longer need light sources, you can remove them. Vanishing points You can create a vector extrusion in which the lines of the extrusion converge at a vanishing point. The vanishing point of a vector extrusion can be copied to another object so that both objects appear to recede toward the same point. Extrusions with the same vanishing point You can also give two extrusions different vanishing points. Extrusions with different vanishing points 400 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To create an extrusion 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Extrude tool . 3 Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion type list box on the property bar. 4 Select an object. 5 Drag the object’s selection handles to set the direction and depth of the extrusion. If you want to reset the extrusion, press Esc before releasing the mouse button. If you need to scale the extruded object, you can change the object’s reference point to use when scaling by locating the Object origin icon on the property bar and clicking the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. To copy or clone an extrusion 1 Select the object you want to extrude. 2 Click Effects and click one of the following: • Copy effect Extrude from • Clone effect Extrude from 3 Click an object whose extrusion properties you want to copy. You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy an extrusion. For more information, see “To copy effects from one object to another” on page 227. To change the form of a vector extrusion To Do the following Rotate an extrusion Select an extruded object. Click the Extrude rotation button on the property bar. Drag the extrusion in the direction you want. Adding 3D effects to objects 401 To Do the following Change the direction of an extrusion Using the Extrude tool , click an extrusion. Click the vanishing point, and drag in the direction you want. Change the depth of an extrusion Using the Extrude tool , click an extrusion. Drag the slider between the interactive vector handles. Round the corners of an extruded rectangle or square In the toolbox, click the Shape tool . Drag a corner node along the outline of the rectangle or square. To remove a vector extrusion 1 Select an extruded object. 2 Click Effects Clear extrusion. You can also remove a vector extrusion by clicking the Clear extrusion button on the property bar. To apply a fill to an extrusion 1 Select an extruded object with the Extrude tool 2 Click the Extrusion color button . on the property bar. 3 Click one of the following buttons: • Use object fill — applies the object’s fill to the extrusion • Use solid color — applies a solid color to the extrusion • Use color shading — applies a gradient fill to the extrusion You can apply an unbroken pattern or texture fill to an object by enabling the Drape fills check box before you click the Use object fill button. To apply beveled edges to an extrusion 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Extrude tool . 2 Select an extruded object. 402 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Click the Extrusion bevels button on the property bar. 4 Enable the Use bevel check box. 5 Type a value in the Bevel depth box. 6 Type a value in the Bevel angle box. You can also set the bevel depth and angle by using the Interactive display box below the Use bevel check box. You can show only the bevel and hide the extrusion by enabling the Show bevel only check box. To add light to an extrusion 1 Select an extruded object. 2 Click the Extrusion lighting button on the property bar. 3 Click any of the three Light buttons . The lights appear as numbered circles in the preview window. 4 Drag the numbered circles in the Light intensity preview window to position the lights. If you want to create more realistic shading, enable the Use full color range check box. You can also Adjust the intensity of a light source Select a light in the Light intensity preview window, and move the Intensity slider. Remove a light source Click an active Light button. To change the vanishing point of an extrusion To Do the following Lock a vanishing point Double-click an extruded object. Choose Page or object vanishing point from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Adding 3D effects to objects 403 To Do the following Copy a vanishing point Double-click an extruded object whose vanishing point you want to change. From the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar, choose Copy VP from. Select the extruded object that has the vanishing point you want to copy. Set one vanishing point for two extrusions Double-click an extruded object. Choose Shared vanishing point from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Select the extruded object that has the vanishing point you want to share. Creating bevel effects A bevel effect adds 3D depth to a graphic or text object by making its edges appear sloped (cut at an angle). Bevel effects can contain both spot and process (CMYK) colors, so they are ideal for printing. You can remove a bevel effect at any time. Bevel effects can be applied only to vector objects and text, not to bitmaps. Bevel styles You can choose from the following bevel styles: • Soft edge — creates beveled surfaces that appear shaded in some areas • Emboss — makes an object appear as a relief Left to right: Object without a bevel effect, with a Soft Edge bevel effect, and with an Emboss bevel effect 404 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Beveled surfaces You can control the intensity of the bevel effect by specifying the width of the beveled surface. Light and color An object with a bevel effect appears lit by white ambient (surrounding) light and a spotlight. The ambient light is of low intensity and cannot be changed. The spotlight is also white by default, but you can change its color, intensity, and location. Changing the spotlight color affects the color of the beveled surfaces. Changing the spotlight’s intensity lightens or darkens the beveled surfaces. Changing the location of the spotlight determines which beveled surfaces appear lit. You can change the location of the spotlight by specifying its direction and altitude. Direction determines where the light source is located in the plane of the object (for example, to the left or right of an object). Altitude determines how high the spotlight is located in relation to the object’s plane. For example, you can place the spotlight flush with the horizon (altitude of 0°) or directly above the object (altitude of 90°). In addition, you can change the color of the beveled surfaces that are in shadow by specifying a shadow color. To create a Soft Edge bevel effect 1 Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it. 2 Click Effects Bevel. 3 In the Bevel docker, choose Soft edge from the Style list box. 4 Enable one of the following Bevel offset options: • To center — lets you create beveled surfaces that meet in the middle of the object • Distance — lets you specify the width of the beveled surfaces. Type a value in the Distance box. You can also Change the color of beveled surfaces in shadow Choose a color from the Shadow color picker. Beveled surfaces change to a shade of the specified shadow color. Adding 3D effects to objects 405 You can also Choose a spotlight color Choose a color from the Light color picker. Change the intensity of the spotlight Move the Intensity slider. Specify the position of the spotlight Move either of the following sliders: •Direction •Altitude Direction values range from 0° to 360°; altitude values range from 0° to 90°. The lowest altitude value (0°) places the spotlight on the plane of the object; the highest altitude value (90°) places the spotlight directly above the object. Using a given altitude value, you can change the spotlight’s location by changing the direction value. For example, at an altitude of 45°, the following direction values change the spotlight location as noted: • 45° places the spotlight on the upper right. • 135° places the spotlight on the upper left. • 225° places the spotlight on the lower left. • 315° places the spotlight on the lower right. The effect of the shadow color is most apparent when the spotlight is located close to the object’s plane (low altitude value). To create an Emboss effect 1 Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it. 2 Click Effects Bevel. 3 In the Bevel docker, choose Emboss from the Style list box. 4 In the Distance box, type a low value. 5 To change the intensity of the spotlight, move the Intensity slider. 6 To specify the direction of the spotlight, move the Direction slider. 7 Click Apply. If you want to create a more pronounced bevel effect, type a higher value in the Distance box, and reapply the effect. 406 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Choose a shadow color Choose a color from the Shadow color picker. Choose a spotlight color Choose a color from the Light color picker. The Emboss bevel effect is achieved by creating two duplicates of the object. The duplicates are offset in opposite directions: one toward the light source and the other away from the light source. The color of the duplicate placed toward the spotlight is a blend of the spotlight and object colors and depends on the light intensity. The color of the duplicate placed away from the spotlight is a 50 percent blend of the shadow and object colors. The Altitude slider is disabled for the Emboss bevel style. To remove a bevel effect 1 Select an object with a bevel effect applied. 2 Click Effects Clear effect. Creating drop shadows Drop shadows simulate light falling on an object from one of five particular perspectives: flat, right, left, bottom, and top. You can add drop shadows to most objects or groups of objects, including artistic text, paragraph text, and bitmaps. Drop shadows created in Corel DESIGNER are ideal for printed outputs, but are not appropriate for output to devices, such as vinyl cutters and plotters. Cuttable shadows are needed for such projects. To add a cuttable shadow to an object, you need to duplicate the object, fill the duplicate with a dark color, and then place it behind the original object. When you add a drop shadow, you can change its perspective, and you can adjust attributes such as color, opacity, fade level, angle, and feathering. Adding 3D effects to objects 407 A drop shadow applied to an object The feathered effect softens the edges of a drop shadow. After you create a drop shadow, you can copy it or clone it to a selected object. When you copy a drop shadow, the original and copy have no connection and can be edited independently. With cloning, the master object’s drop shadow attributes are automatically applied to its clone. By separating a drop shadow from its object, you gain more control over the drop shadow itself. For example, you can edit the drop shadow as you would edit a transparency. For information about editing a transparency, see “Applying transparencies” on page 417. As with transparencies, you can apply a merge mode to a drop shadow to control how the color of the drop shadow blends with the color of the object underneath. 408 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can remove a drop shadow. To add a drop shadow 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Drop shadow tool . 2 Click an object. 3 Drag from the center or side of the object until the drop shadow is the size you want. 4 Specify any attributes on the property bar. Drop shadows cannot be added to linked groups, such as blended objects, contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, objects created with the Linear pattern brush tool , or other drop shadows. To add a cuttable shadow 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit Duplicate. 3 Click a dark color on the onscreen color palette. 4 Click Arrange Order Behind, and click the original to position the duplicate behind it. 5 Adjust the position of the duplicate. To copy or clone a drop shadow 1 Select the object to which you want to copy or clone a drop shadow. 2 Click Effects and click one of the following: • Copy effect Drop shadow from • Clone effect Drop shadow from 3 Click the drop shadow of an object. You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy a drop shadow. For more information, see “To copy effects from one object to another” on page 227. Adding 3D effects to objects 409 To separate a drop shadow from an object 1 Select an object’s drop shadow. 2 Click Arrange Break drop shadow group apart. 3 Drag the shadow. To apply a merge mode to a drop shadow 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Drop shadow tool . 2 Select an object with a drop shadow, and choose a merge mode from the Transparency operation list box on the property bar. The default merge mode Multiply produces natural-looking drop shadows. To remove a drop shadow 1 Select an object’s drop shadow. 2 Click Effects Clear drop shadow. You can also remove a drop shadow from an object by clicking the Clear drop shadow button on the property bar. Blending objects Corel DESIGNER lets you create blends, such as straight-line blends, blends along a path, and compound blends. Blends are often used for creating realistic shadows and highlights in objects. The highlights and shadows in the object on the right were created by using blends. 410 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide A straight-line blend shows a progression in shape and size from one object to another. The outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects progress along a straight-line path across the color spectrum. The outlines of intermediate objects show a gradual progression in thickness and shape. After you create a blend, you can copy or clone its settings to other objects. When you copy a blend, the object takes on all the blend-related settings, except for their outline and fill attributes. When you clone a blend, changes you make to the original blend (also called the master) are applied to the clone. Straight-line blends can be used to create graphics with a glass-like appearance. The rollover button (left) contains a blend of tightly overlapped blended objects. You can fit objects along part or all of a path’s shape, and you can add one or more objects to a blend to create a compound blend. The straight-line blend (top) is fitted to a curved path (bottom). Adding 3D effects to objects 411 You can change the appearance of a blend by adjusting the number and spacing of its intermediate objects, the blend’s color progression, the nodes the blends map to, the blend’s path, and the start and end objects. You can fuse the components of a split or compound blend to create a single object. You can also split and remove a blend. By mapping nodes, you can control the appearance of a blend. To blend objects To Do the following Blend along a straight line Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Blend tool . Select the first object, and drag over the second object. If you want to reset the blend, press Esc as you drag. Blend an object along a freehand path Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Blend tool . Select the first object. Hold down Alt, and drag to draw a line to the second object. Fit a blend to a path Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Blend tool . Click the blend. Click the Path properties button on the property bar. Click New path. Using the curved arrow, click the path to which you want to fit the blend. 412 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Stretch the blend over an entire path Select a blend that is already fitted on a path. Click the More blend options button on the property bar, and enable the Blend along full path check box. Create a compound blend Using the Blend tool, drag from an object to the start or end object of another blend. If you need to scale the blended object, you can change the object’s reference point to use when scaling by locating the Object origin icon on the property bar and clicking the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. To copy or clone a blend 1 Select the two objects you want to blend. 2 Click Effects, and click one of the following: • Copy effect Blend from • Clone effect Blend from 3 Select the blend whose attributes you want to copy or clone. You can’t copy or clone a compound blend. You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy a blend. For more information, see “To copy object properties from one object to another” on page 226. To set the number of intermediate objects in a blend 1 Select a blend. 2 Type a value in the Blend objects box on the property bar. 3 Press Enter. Adding 3D effects to objects 413 You can set object and color acceleration rates by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding slider. To set the distance between objects in a blend that is fit to a path 1 Select a blend that is fit to a path. 2 Click the Blend spacing button on the property bar. 3 Type a value in the Blend objects box on the property bar. 4 Press Enter. If you have used the Blend along full path command, the Blend spacing button is unavailable. You can set object and color acceleration rates by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding slider. To set the color progression in a blend 1 Select a blend. 2 On the property bar, click one of the following: • Direct blend • Clockwise blend • Counterclockwise blend You can’t create color progressions by using blended objects filled with bitmaps, texture, pattern, or PostScript fills. You can set how fast the object’s colors transform from the first to the last object by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding sliders. 414 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To map the nodes of a blend 1 Select a blend. 2 Click the More blend options button on the property bar. 3 Click the Map nodes button on the property bar. 4 Click a node on the start object and on the end object. To work with the start or end objects in a blend To Do the following Select the start or end object Select a blend, click the Starting and ending objects button on the property bar, and click Show start, or Show end. Change the start or end object of a blend Select a blend, click the Starting and ending objects button on the property bar, and click New start, or New end. Click an object outside the blend that you want to use as the start or end of the blend. Fuse the start or end object in a split or compound blend Hold down Ctrl, click a middle object in a blend, and then click a start or end object. Click the Miscellaneous options button on the property bar. If you have selected the start object, click the Fuse start button . If you have selected the end object, click the Fuse end button . You can reverse the direction of the blend by clicking Arrange Order Reverse order. To change the blend path 1 Select a blend. 2 Click the Path properties button on the property bar, and click New path. 3 Click the path you want to use for the blend. Adding 3D effects to objects 415 You can also Detach a blend from a path Click the Path properties button on the property bar, and click Detach from path. Change the path of a selected freehand blend Click the blend path with the Shape tool , and drag a path’s node. To select the blend path, click the Path properties button path. , and click Show To split a blend 1 Select a blend. 2 Click the Miscellaneous options button 3 Click the Split button on the property bar. . 4 Click the intermediate object at the point at where you want to split the blend. You can’t split a blend at the intermediate object that is immediately adjacent to the start or end object. To remove a blend 1 Select a blend. 2 Click Effects Clear blend. You can also remove a selected blend by clicking the Clear blend button on the property bar. 416 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Changing the transparency of objects You can apply a transparency to an object so that all objects behind it show through. The Corel DESIGNER application also lets you specify how the color of the transparent object combines with the color of the object beneath it. This section contains the following topics: • Applying transparencies • Applying merge modes Applying transparencies When you apply a transparency to an object, you make the objects beneath it partially visible. You can apply transparencies using the same kind of fills you apply to objects; that is, uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern. For more information about these fills, see “Filling objects” on page 333. By default, the program applies all transparencies to the object’s fill and outline; however, you can specify whether you want the transparency to apply only to the object’s outline or fill. You can also copy a transparency from one object to another. When you position a transparency over an object, you can freeze it, making the view of the object move with the transparency. To apply a uniform transparency 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 3 On the property bar, choose Uniform from the Transparency type list box. 4 Type a value in the Starting transparency box on the property bar, and press Enter. Changing the transparency of objects 417 You can click a color on the color palette to apply a color to the transparency. To apply a fountain transparency 1 Select an object. 2 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 3 On the property bar, choose one of the following fountain transparencies from the Transparency type list box: • Linear • Radial • Conical • Square 4 Reposition the interactive vector handles that display, or point to where you want the transparency to start on the object, and drag to where you want the transparency to end. If you want to reset the transparency, press Esc before releasing the mouse button. 5 Type a value in the Transparency midpoint box on the property bar, and press Enter. You can create a custom fountain transparency by dragging colors, whose shades convert to grayscale, from the color palette onto the object’s interactive vector handles . To apply a textured transparency 1 Select an object. 2 In the toolbox, click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 3 Choose Texture from the Transparency type list box on the property bar. 4 Choose a sample from the Texture library list box on the property bar. 5 Open the First transparency picker on the property bar, and click a texture. 6 On the property bar, type values in the following boxes: • Starting transparency — lets you change the opacity of the starting color • Ending transparency — lets you change the opacity of the ending color 418 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To apply a pattern transparency 1 Select an object. 2 In the toolbox, click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 3 From the Transparency type list box on the property bar, choose one of the following: • Two Color Pattern — a simple picture composed of “on” and “off ” pixels. The only shades included in the picture are the two that you assign. • Full Color Pattern — a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of color like bitmaps. These vector graphics are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and are easier to manipulate. • Bitmap Pattern — a color picture composed of patterns of light and dark or differently colored pixels in a rectangular array. 4 Open the First transparency picker on the property bar, and click a pattern. 5 On the property bar, type values in the following boxes: • Starting transparency • Ending transparency To specify the extent of a transparency 1 In the toolbox, click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 2 Select an object to which a transparency has been applied. 3 From the Transparency target list box on the property bar, choose one of the following: • Fill • Outline • All To copy a transparency to another object 1 Select an object to which you want to apply a transparency. 2 Click Effects Copy effect Lens from. 3 Using the horizontal cursor, select the object with the transparency you want to copy. Changing the transparency of objects 419 To freeze the contents of a transparency 1 In the toolbox, click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 2 Select an object to which a transparency has been applied. 3 Click the Freeze transparency button on the property bar. The view of the object beneath the transparency moves with it; however, the actual object remains unchanged. Applying merge modes You can apply a merge mode to a transparency to specify how the color of a transparency is combined with the color of the object behind it. The following merge modes available for transparencies can also be applied to drop shadows. Merge mode Description Normal Applies the transparency color on top of the base color Add Adds the values of the transparency color and the base color Subtract Adds the values of the transparency color and the base color together, and then subtracts 255 Difference Subtracts the transparency color from the base color and multiplies by 255. If the transparency color value is 0, the result will always be 255. Multiply Multiplies the base color by the transparency color, and then divides by 255. This has a darkening effect, unless you are applying color to white. Multiplying black with any color results in black. Multiplying white with any color leaves the color unchanged. 420 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Merge mode Description Divide Divides the base color by the transparency color, or conversely, divides the transparency color by the base color, depending on which color has the higher value If lighter Replaces any base color pixels that are a darker color with the transparency color. Base color pixels that are lighter than the transparency color are not affected. If darker Replaces any base color pixels that are a lighter color with the transparency color. Base color pixels that are darker than the transparency color are not affected. Texturize Converts the transparency color to grayscale, and then multiplies the grayscale value by the base color Hue Uses the hue of the transparency color, as well as the saturation and lightness of the base color. If you are adding color to a grayscale image, there will be no change because the colors are desaturated. Saturation Uses the lightness and hue of the base color and the saturation of the transparency color Lightness Uses the hue and saturation of the base color and the lightness of the transparency color Invert Uses the transparency color’s complementary color. If a transparency color value is 127, there will be no change because the color value falls in the center of the color wheel. Logical AND Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula AND to these values Changing the transparency of objects 421 Merge mode Description Logical OR Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula OR to these values Logical XOR Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula XOR to these values Red Applies the transparency color to the red channel of RGB objects Green Applies the transparency color to the green channel of RGB objects Blue Applies the transparency color to the blue channel of RGB objects To apply a merge mode to a transparency 1 Click the Interactive tools button, and click the Transparency tool . 2 Select an object with a transparency. 3 Choose a merge mode from the Transparency operation list box on the property bar. 422 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Using lenses with objects Lenses contain creative effects that let you change the appearance of an object without actually changing the object. This section contains the following topics: • Applying lenses • Editing lenses Applying lenses Lenses change how the object area beneath the lens appears, not the actual properties and attributes of the objects. You can apply lenses to any vector object, such as a rectangle, ellipse, closed path, or polygon. You can also change the appearance of artistic text and bitmaps. When you apply a lens over a vector object, the lens itself becomes a vector image. Likewise, if the lens is placed over a bitmap, the lens also becomes a bitmap. After you apply a lens, you can copy it and use it with another object. The following are the types of lenses you can apply to objects. Lens Description Brighten Lets you brighten and darken object areas and set the rate of the brightness and darkness Color add Lets you simulate an additive light model. The colors of the objects beneath the lens are added to the color of the lens as if you were mixing colors of light. You can choose the color and the amount of color you want to add. Using lenses with objects 423 Lens Description Color limit Lets you view an object area with only black and the lens color showing through. For example, if you place a green color limit lens over a bitmap, all colors except green and black are filtered out in the lens area. Custom color map Lets you change all the colors of the object area beneath the lens to a color ranging between two colors you specify. You can choose the range’s start and end colors and the progression between the two colors. The progression can follow a direct, forward, or reverse route through the color spectrum. Fish eye Lets you distort, magnify, or shrink the objects beneath the lens, according to the percentage value you specify Heat map Lets you create the effect of an infrared image by mimicking the heat levels of colors in object areas beneath the lens Invert Lets you change the colors beneath the lens to their complementary CMYK colors. Complementary colors are colors that are opposite one another on the color wheel. Magnify Lets you magnify an area on an object by an amount that you specify. The magnify lens overrides the original object’s fill, making the object look transparent. Tinted grayscale Lets you change the colors of object areas beneath the lens to their grayscale equivalents. Tinted grayscale lenses are particularly effective for creating sepia-tone effects. Transparency Lets you make an object look like a piece of tinted film or colored glass 424 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Lens Description Wireframe Lets you display the object area beneath the lens with the outline or fill color you choose. For example, if you set red for the outline and blue for the fill, all areas beneath the lens appear to have red outlines and blue fills. To apply a lens 1 Select an object. 2 Click Effects Lens. 3 Choose a lens type from the list box in the Lens docker. 4 Specify the settings you want. You cannot apply the lens effect directly to linked groups such as contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, paragraph text or objects created with Linear pattern tools. You can preview the different types of lenses in real-time before auto-applying one to a drawing by clicking the Lock button and then choosing a lens and settings to preview. When you find the lens you want to use, click the Lock button again, and click Apply. To copy a lens 1 Select an object. 2 Click Effects Copy effect Lens from. 3 Click the object whose lens you want to copy. Editing lenses You can edit a lens to change how it affects the area beneath it. For example, you can change the viewpoint of a lens, indicated by an X in the drawing window, to display any part of a drawing. The viewpoint represents the center point of what is being viewed Using lenses with objects 425 through the lens. You can position the lens anywhere in the drawing window, but it always shows the area around its viewpoint marker. For example, you can use the viewpoint marker on the Magnify lens to enlarge part of a map. You can also display a lens only where it overlaps other objects or the background. As a result, the lens effect is not seen where the lens covers blank space (white space) in the drawing window. Freezing the current view of a lens lets you move the lens without changing what’s displayed through it. In addition, changes you make to the areas beneath the lens have no effect on the view. To edit a lens 1 Select an object. 2 Click Effects Lens. 3 Enable the Viewpoint check box on the Lens docker. If you want to display a lens only where it covers other objects, enable the Remove face check box. 4 Click Edit to display the viewpoint marker. 5 Drag the viewpoint marker in the drawing window to a new location. 6 Click End. If you want to freeze the current view of a lens, enable the Frozen check box. 7 Click Apply. The Remove face check box is not available for the Fish Eye and Magnify lenses. 426 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Text Adding and formatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Working with Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Managing fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Using writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 427 Adding and formatting text The Corel DESIGNER application lets you use text to create documents or annotate drawings. This section contains the following topics: • Adding text • Selecting text • Encoding text • Changing the basic properties of text • Finding, editing, and converting text • Aligning text • Spacing text • Shifting and rotating text • Moving text • Fitting text to a path • Formatting paragraph text • Hyphenating text • Combining and linking paragraph text frames • Wrapping paragraph text around objects, artistic text, and text frames • Embedding graphics and adding special characters • Inserting formatting codes • Displaying nonprinting characters Adding text You can add two types of text to drawings — artistic text and paragraph text. You can add short lines of artistic text and then apply a wide range of effects, such as drop shadows or a contour, to the text. Paragraph text, also known as “block text,” can be Adding and formatting text 429 used for larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements. You can add both paragraph and artistic text directly in the drawing window. You can add artistic text along an open or closed path. You can also fit existing artistic and paragraph text to a path. For more information, see “Fitting text to a path” on page 448. When adding paragraph text, you must first create a text frame. By default, paragraph text frames remain the same size regardless of how much text you add to them. Any text that continues past the lower-right border of the text frame is hidden and becomes red until you either enlarge the text frame or link it to another text frame. You can fit text to a text frame by automatically adjusting the point size so that the text fits perfectly. For information about fitting text to a text frame, see “To fit text to a paragraph text frame” on page 452. You can also expand and shrink text frames automatically while you type, so that the text fits perfectly in the text frame. You can insert a paragraph text frame inside a graphic object. Doing so lets you use the object as a container for text and, and it increases the number of different shapes that you can use as text frames. You can also separate text from an object, so that each can be moved or modified independently and the text retains its shape. Paragraph text placed inside an object. 430 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide When you import or paste text, you can maintain formatting, maintain fonts and formatting, or discard fonts and formatting. Maintaining fonts ensures that imported or pasted text retains its original font type. Maintaining formatting preserves information such as bullets, columns, and bold or italic formatting. You can also preserve the text color or import black text as CMYK black. If you choose to discard fonts and formatting, the properties of the selected text are applied to the imported or pasted text. If no text is selected, the default font and formatting properties are applied to the imported or pasted text. For more information about importing files, see “Importing files” on page 647. For more information about pasting, see “To paste an object into a drawing” on page 224. You can also assign hyperlinks to text. For more information, see “To assign a hyperlink to text” on page 274. To add artistic text • Using the Text tool , click anywhere in the drawing window, and type. To add paragraph text To Do the following Add paragraph text Click the Text tool . Drag in the drawing window to size the paragraph text frame, and type. Add paragraph text inside an object Click the Text tool. Move the pointer over the outline of the object, and click the object when the pointer changes to an Insert in object pointer . Type inside the text frame. Separate a paragraph text frame from an object Click the Pick tool , select the object, and click Arrange Break paragraph text inside a path apart. Set paragraph text frames to adjust automatically to fit text Click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Expand and shrink paragraph text frames to fit text check box. Adding and formatting text 431 A red text frame indicates that the paragraph text continues past the lowerright border of the text frame. You can use the Pick tool to adjust the size of a paragraph text frame. Click the text frame, and drag any selection handle. To set options for importing or pasting text 1 Copy or cut text. If you want to import text, click File Import, and browse to the text file that you want to import. 2 Click Edit Paste. 3 In the Importing/Pasting text dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Maintain fonts and formatting • Maintain formatting only • Discard fonts and formatting If you want to apply CMYK black to the imported black text, enable the Force CMYK black check box. This check box is available when you choose an option that maintains text formatting. Clicking Cancel cancels the import or paste operation. If you choose to maintain fonts, and a required font is not installed on your computer, the PANOSE font matching system substitutes the font for you. For more information, see “Substituting fonts” on page 471. You can also set hyphenation options for imported text. For more information about hyphenation options, see “To create a custom definition for optional hyphenation” on page 457. If you want to use the same formatting options whenever you import or paste text, enable the Don’t show this warning again check box. To reactivate the warning, click Tools Options, click Warnings in the Workspace list of categories, and enable the Pasting and importing text check box. 432 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Selecting text To modify text, you must first select it. You can choose to select either entire text objects or only specific characters. To select text To Do the following Select an entire text object Using the Pick tool , click the text object. Select specific characters Using the Text tool , drag across the text. You can use the Pick tool to select multiple text objects. Hold down Shift, and click each text object. Encoding text After opening or importing a drawing that contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, you may find that the text is not displayed correctly. To display text correctly, you can change the encoding. Encoding determines the character set of text. Encoding settings do not affect the display of text outside the drawing window, such as keywords, filenames, and text entries in the Object manager and Object data manager dockers. For these types of text, you must use code page settings in the Open or Import dialog boxes to set the proper characters. For information about using code page settings, see “Starting and opening drawings” on page 52. To display text correctly in any language 1 Click Text Encode. 2 In the Text encoding dialog box, choose the Other encoding option. 3 From the Other encoding list, choose an encoding setting that makes the text readable. The preview window displays the text with the selected encoding setting. Adding and formatting text 433 Changing the basic properties of text You can enhance both artistic text and paragraph text by modifying the character properties. You can also change the default text style, so that the same properties are applied to all new artistic or paragraph text. For example, you can change the font type and size, or change the text to bold or italic. In addition, you can change the text color and add a background color to paragraph text frames, the bounding box of artistic text, or selected text characters. Left to right: Background color is applied to artistic text, paragraph text, and selected characters You can change the text format to subscript or superscript, which is useful if a drawing contains scientific notation. You can also add underlines, strikethrough lines, and overlines to text. In addition, you can change the thickness of these lines and change the distance between the lines and the text. You can change text to lowercase or uppercase without deleting or replacing letters. You can also increase or decrease font size by a specified increment. By default, the unit of measure is points. You can change this setting for the active drawing and all subsequent drawings that you create, so that the new unit of measure is used in all font settings. If you need to increase the redraw speed for text that is smaller than a specific font size, you can use lines to represent the text. This method, called “greeking” text, is useful for creating prototypes of documents or drawings. You can make text readable again by reducing the greeking value or by zooming in on the text. 434 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change the default text style 1 Using the Pick tool , click a blank space in the drawing window. 2 In the Character formatting docker, change any of the text properties. If the Character formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Character formatting. By default, you must specify whether to apply each modified text property to artistic text, to paragraph text, or to both. To use the modified text style as the default for future documents, click Tools Save settings as default. To make the style of an existing text frame or object the default style, click Window Graphic and text styles, and drag the text frame or object over either the Default artistic text icon or the Default paragraph text icon in the Graphic and text docker. To change character properties 1 Select the text. If the Character formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Character formatting. 2 In the Character formatting docker, perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Change the font Choose a font from the Font list box. Change the font style Choose a font style from the Font style list box. Change the font size Type a value for the font size in the Font size box. Underline text In the Character effects area, choose a style from the Underline list box. Use strikethrough text In the Character effects area, choose a style from the Strikethru list box. Adding and formatting text 435 To Do the following Use overline text In the Character effects area, choose a style from the Overline list box. Capitalize text In the Character effects area, choose Small CAPS or All CAPS from the Uppercase list box. The Small CAPS option formats lowercase text as capital letters in a smaller font size. The All CAPS option formats all lowercase text as capital letters. In the Character effects area, choose Superscript or Subscript from the Position box. Use superscript or subscript You can also change the font and font size from the property bar. You can also change the formatting of selected text by clicking the Bold button , Italic button , or Underline button on the property bar. To change the text color 1 Using the Text tool , select the text. 2 Click a color on the color palette. You can change the color of an entire text object by selecting it with the Pick tool and dragging a color swatch from the color palette to the text object. To add a background color to text To Do the following Add a background color to paragraph or artistic text Using the Pick tool , select the text. Open the Text box background color picker on the property bar, and pick a color. 436 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Add a background color to specific characters Using the Text tool , select the characters. Open the Character background color picker on the property bar, and pick a color. You can also add a background color to text by using the Background color controls on the Format page of the Property manager docker. To access the Property manager docker, click Window Property manager. To change the text case 1 Select the text. 2 Click Text Change case. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Sentence case — capitalizes the initial letter of the first word in each sentence • Lowercase — makes all text lowercase • Uppercase — makes all text uppercase • Title case — capitalizes the initial letter of each word • Toggle case — changes all uppercase letters to lowercase, and all lowercase letters to uppercase To resize text To Do the following Increase the size of text Press Num Lock to activate the number pad on your keyboard, and use the Text tool to select the text. Then, hold down Ctrl, and press 8 on the number pad. The Num Lock light on your keyboard indicates whether the number pad is activated. Decrease the size of text Adding and formatting text Using the Text tool, select the text. Then, hold down Ctrl, and press 2 on the number pad. 437 To Do the following Set an increment for resizing text Click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Text, and type a value in the Keyboard text increment box. Change the default unit of measure Click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Text, and choose a unit from the Default text units list box. To greek text 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Text. 3 Type a value in the Greek text below box. Finding, editing, and converting text You can find text in a drawing and replace it automatically. You can also find special characters, such as an em dash or optional hyphen. You can edit text directly in the drawing window or in a dialog box. Corel DESIGNER lets you convert artistic text to paragraph text if you require more formatting options, and paragraph text to artistic text if you’d like to apply special effects. You can also convert both paragraph and artistic text to curves. By transforming characters into single lines or curve objects, you can add, delete, or move the nodes of individual characters to alter their shape. For more information, see “Working with curve objects” on page 177. When you convert text to curves, the appearance of the text is preserved, including font, style, character position and rotation, spacing, and any other text settings and effects. Any linked text objects are also converted to curves. If you convert paragraph text in a fixed-sized text frame to curves, any text that overflows the text frame is deleted. For information about fitting text to a text frame, see “Formatting paragraph text” on page 451. 438 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To find text 1 Click Edit Find and replace Find text. 2 Type the text that you want to find in the Find box. If you want to find the exact case of the text that you specified, enable the Match case check box. 3 Click Find next. You can also find special characters by clicking the right arrowhead next to the Find box, choosing a special character, and clicking Find next. To find and replace text 1 Click Edit Find and replace Replace text. 2 Type the text that you want to find in the Find box. If you want to find the exact case of the text that you specified, enable the Match case check box. 3 Type the replacement text in the Replace with box. 4 Click one of the following buttons: • Find next — finds the next occurrence of the text that is specified in the Find what box • Replace — replaces the selected occurrence of the text that is specified in the Find what box. If no occurrence is selected, Replace finds the next occurrence. • Replace all — replaces every occurrence of the text that is specified in the Find what box To edit text 1 Select the text. 2 Click Text Edit text. 3 In the Edit text dialog box, make changes to the text. Text that has been converted to curves cannot be edited. You can also use the Text tool to edit text. Click the Text tool, select the text in the drawing window, and make changes to the text. Adding and formatting text 439 To convert text To Do the following Convert paragraph text to artistic text Using the Pick tool , select the text, and click Text Convert to artistic text. Convert artistic text to paragraph text Using the Pick tool, select the text, and click Text Convert to paragraph text. Convert artistic or paragraph text to curves Using the Pick tool, select the text, and click Arrange Convert to curves. Paragraph text cannot be converted to artistic text when it is linked to another text frame, has special effects applied to it, or overflows the text frame. You can also use the Pick tool to convert text to curves. Right-click the text, and click Convert to curves. Aligning text You can align both paragraph text and artistic text horizontally. When you align paragraph text, the text is positioned in relation to the paragraph text frame. You can horizontally align all paragraphs, or only selected paragraphs, in a paragraph text frame. Alternatively, you can vertically align all paragraphs in a paragraph text frame or align text with another object. You can align a text object with other objects by using the baseline of the first line, the baseline of the last line, or the edge of the text bounding box. 440 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text, the entire text object is aligned in relation to the bounding box. If characters have not been shifted horizontally, applying no alignment produces the same result as applying left alignment. Artistic text is aligned within the bounding box, which is indicated by eight selection handles (black squares). The text at the top is left-aligned; the text at the bottom is right-aligned. To align text horizontally 1 Using the Pick tool , select the text object. 2 In the Alignment area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose an alignment option from the Horizontal list box. If the Paragraph formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Paragraph formatting. You can also align text horizontally by clicking the Horizontal alignment button on the property bar and choosing an alignment style from the list box. The property bar displays the alignment icon that corresponds to the current alignment style. To align selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame, use the Text tool select the paragraphs. Adding and formatting text to 441 To align paragraph text vertically 1 Select the paragraph text. 2 In the Alignment area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose an alignment option from the Vertical list box. If the Paragraph formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Paragraph formatting. You can also align text vertically by clicking the Vertical alignment button on the property bar and choosing an alignment style from the list box. The property bar displays the alignment icon that corresponds to the current alignment style. To align text with an object 1 Hold down Shift, select the text, and then select the object. 2 Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3 Choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box: • First line baseline —uses the baseline of the first line of text to align objects • Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text to align objects • Bounding box — aligns text with its bounding box 4 Enable one of the following horizontal alignment check boxes: • Left • Right • Center 5 Enable one of the following vertical alignment check boxes: • Top • Bottom • Center 6 Click Apply. If you select the objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning the other objects. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the object that is positioned in the upper-left corner of the selection is used. 442 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you have applied a linear transformation, such as rotation, to the text and are aligning objects with a baseline, the objects align with the baseline point of the starting edge of the text object. Spacing text You can change the spacing between lines of text. This spacing is known as “leading” or “interline spacing.” Changing the leading for artistic text applies the spacing to lines of text that are separated by a hard return. For paragraph text, leading applies only to lines of text within the same paragraph. You can also change the spacing before and after paragraphs in paragraph text. You can change character spacing and word spacing in selected paragraphs, or in an entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. Changing the spacing between characters is also known as “tracking” or “letter spacing.” You can change the spacing between characters in an entire block of text or in a small group of characters. 1 2 1. Changing the interline spacing 2. Changing the letter spacing You can also kern pairs of selected characters. Kerning refers to the repositioning of two characters to balance the optical space between them. For example, kerning is often used to decrease the space in character pairs such as AW, WA, VA, or TA. Such character pairs are known as “kerning pairs.” Kerning increases readability and makes letters appear balanced and proportional, especially at larger font sizes. Adding and formatting text 443 In the second line, the kerning was decreased in between the “T” and the “A”. With Corel DESIGNER, you can space text by using the Paragraph formatting and Character formatting dockers, or by using the Shape tool. Spacing text by using the Shape tool To change the text spacing 1 Select the text. If the Paragraph formatting docker is not open, click Text Paragraph formatting. 2 Click the Spacing arrow in the Paragraph formatting docker, and perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Set the unit for spacing text vertically Choose an option from the Vertical spacing units list box. 444 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Change the spacing between lines (leading) Type a value in the Line spacing box. Change the spacing before or after a paragraph Type a value in the Before paragraph spacing box or the After paragraph spacing box. You can adjust the value in only one of these controls at a time. You can use this procedure to change the spacing between items in a bulleted list. Change the spacing between characters (tracking) Type a value in the Character spacing box. Change the spacing between words Type a value in the Word spacing box. Character and word spacing can be applied to entire paragraphs only, or to an entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. For information about adjusting character and word spacing for selected characters, see “To kern text” on page 445. Values for adjusting spacing represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values range from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000 percent. You can also use the Shape tool to change the spacing between words and characters proportionally. Select the text object, and drag the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the lower-right corner of the text object. To change the line spacing proportionally, drag the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the lower-left corner of the text object. To kern text 1 Using the Text tool , drag across the characters that you want to kern. If the Character formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Character formatting. 2 In the Character formatting docker, type a value in the Range kerning box. Adding and formatting text 445 Negative values decrease the spacing between characters; positive values increase the spacing between characters. To kern text directly in the drawing window, click the Shape tool sideways the node that is to the lower-left corner of a character. and drag Shifting and rotating text Artistic and paragraph text can be shifted vertically or horizontally, or rotated, to create interesting effects. You can straighten text into its original position, and you can return vertically shifted characters to the baseline. If you want to adjust the position of an entire text object that is fitted to a path such as a circle or a freehand line, see “To adjust the position of text that is fitted to a path” on page 449. Rotated characters To shift or rotate a character 1 Using the Text tool , select the character or characters. 2 Click the Character shift arrow in the Character formatting docker, type a value in one of the following boxes: • Angle — A positive number rotates characters counterclockwise, and a negative number rotates characters clockwise. • Horizontal shift — A positive number moves characters to the right, and a negative number moves characters to the left. 446 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Vertical shift — A positive number moves characters up, and a negative number moves characters down. If the Character formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Character formatting. You can also use the Shape tool to shift or rotate characters. Select the character node or nodes, and then type values in the Horizontal shift box , Vertical shift box , or Angle of rotation box on the property bar. To straighten a shifted or rotated character 1 Select the text. 2 Click Text Straighten text. To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select the text object, and select the node to the left of the character. 3 Click Text Align to baseline. To flip text by dragging diagonally 1 Using the Text tool , select the artistic text or the paragraph text frame. 2 Drag a corner selection handle across the text and past the corner handle on the opposite side. Moving text Corel DESIGNER lets you move paragraph text between frames, and artistic text between artistic text objects. You can also move paragraph text to an artistic text object, and artistic text to a paragraph text frame. To move text 1 Using the Text tool , select the text. 2 Drag the text to another paragraph text frame or artistic text object. Adding and formatting text 447 You can also Move text within the same text frame or object Select the text, and drag it to a new position. Move or copy selected text to a new text object Right-click, drag the text to a new position, and click Copy here or Move here. Fitting text to a path You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed object (for example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only. After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text position relative to that path. For example, you can mirror the text horizontally, vertically, or both. Using tick spacing, you can specify an exact distance between the text and the path. Corel DESIGNER treats text fitted to a path as one object; however, you can separate the text from the object if you no longer want it to be part of the path. When you separate text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the object to which it was fitted. The text reverts to its original appearance when you straighten it. Text and curve as separate objects (upper left), choosing a path with Fit Text to Path tool (upper middle), aligning text while fitting it to path (upper right), text fitted to path (lower left), interactive feedback about offset distance (lower middle), and text and curve stretched horizontally by 200% (lower right) 448 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To add text along a path 1 Using the Pick tool , select a path. 2 Click Text Fit text to path. The text cursor is inserted on the path. If the path is open, the text cursor is inserted at the beginning of the path. If the path is closed, the text cursor is inserted at the center of the path. 3 Type along the path. Text cannot be added to the path of another text object. You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool and pointing to a path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want the text to begin, and type. To fit text to a path 1 Using the Pick tool , select a text object. 2 Click Text Fit text to path. The pointer changes to the Fit text to path pointer . By moving the pointer over the path, you can preview where the text will be fitted. 3 Click a path. If the text is fitted to a closed path, the text is centered along the path. If the text is fitted to an open path, the text flows from the point of insertion. Artistic text can be fitted to open or closed paths. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only. Text cannot be fitted to the path of another text object. To adjust the position of text that is fitted to a path 1 Using the Pick tool , select the text that is fitted to a path. 2 Choose a setting from any of the following list boxes on the property bar: • Text orientation — specifies how the text bends to follow the path • Distance from path — distance between the text and the path • Offset — horizontal position of the text along the path Adding and formatting text 449 You can also Use tick spacing to increase the distance between the path and the text in specified increments Select the text. On the property bar, click Tick snapping, enable the Tick snapping on option, and type a value in the Tick spacing box. When you move the text from the path, it moves in the increment you specified in the Tick spacing box. When you move the text, the distance from the path is displayed below the original text. Change the horizontal position of fitted text Using the Shape tool , select the text, and drag the character nodes that you want to reposition. Move fitted text along or off the path Using the Pick tool , drag the red glyph that appears next to the text. When you drag the glyph along the path, a preview of the text is displayed. When you drag the glyph off the path, the distance between the text preview and the path is displayed. To mirror text that is fitted to a path 1 Using the Pick tool , click the text that is fitted to a path. 2 In Mirror text area of the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Mirror text horizontally — flips the text characters from left to right • Mirror text vertically — flips the text characters upside down You can apply a 180-degree rotation to text that is fitted to a path by clicking both the Mirror text horizontally and the Mirror text vertically buttons. To separate text from a path 1 Using the Pick tool , select the path and the fitted text. 2 Click Arrange Break text apart. 450 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To straighten text 1 Using the Pick tool , select the path and the fitted text. 2 Click Arrange Break text apart. 3 Using the Pick tool, select the text. 4 Click Text Straighten text. Formatting paragraph text Corel DESIGNER offers various formatting options for paragraph text. For example, you can fit text to a paragraph text frame. Fitting text to a text frame increases or decreases the point size of text so that it fits the text frame exactly. You can use columns to lay out text-intensive projects. You can create columns of equal or varying widths and gutters. Applying drop caps to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter and insets it into the body of text. You can customize a drop cap by changing its settings. For example, you can change the distance between the drop cap and the body of text, or specify the number of lines of text that you want to appear next to the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap at any point, without deleting the letter. You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can have text wrap around bullets, or you can offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. Corel DESIGNER lets you customize bullets by changing their size, position, and distance from text. You can also change the spacing between items in a bulleted list. For more information, see “To change the text spacing” on page 444. After you add a bullet, you can remove it without deleting the text. You can add tab stops to indent paragraph text, remove tab stops, and change the alignment of tab stops. You can also set tab stops with trailing leader characters, so that dots automatically precede the tab stops. When adding drop caps, bullets, tab stops, and columns, you can save time by previewing all the changes you make before committing to them. When you preview the changes, they are temporarily applied directly to the text in the drawing window. You can see exactly how the new settings would affect your drawing if they were applied. Indenting changes the space between a paragraph text frame and the text that it contains. You can add and remove indents without deleting or retyping text. You can Adding and formatting text 451 indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, or all lines of a paragraph except the first line (a hanging indent). You can also indent from the right side of the text frame. You can change the formatting of selected paragraph text frames, or of selected text frames plus the text frames with which they are currently linked. For information about setting these options, see “To choose formatting options for paragraph text frames” on page 461. To fit text to a paragraph text frame 1 Select a paragraph text frame. 2 Click Text Paragraph text frame Fit text to frame. If you fit text to linked paragraph text frames, the application adjusts the size of text in all the linked text frames. For more information about linking text frames, see “Combining and linking paragraph text frames” on page 458. To add columns to paragraph text frames 1 Select a paragraph text frame. 2 Click Text Columns. If you want to see how the columns will appear when they are applied to the text, enable the Preview check box. 3 Type a value in the Number of columns box. 4 Specify settings and options. To add a drop cap 1 Select the paragraph text. 2 Click Text Drop cap. If you want to see how the drop cap will appear when it is applied to the text, enable the Preview check box. 3 Enable the Use drop cap check box. 452 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can add a drop cap (left) or a hanging indent drop cap (right). You can also Specify the number of lines next to a drop cap Type a value in the Number of lines dropped box. Specify the distance between the drop cap and the body of text Type a value in the Space after drop cap box. Remove drop caps Disable the Use drop cap check box. Offset the drop cap from the body of text Enable the Use hanging indent style for drop cap check box. To add bullets 1 Select the paragraph text. 2 Click Text Bullets. 3 Enable the Use bullets check box. If you want to see how the bullets will appear when they are applied to the text, enable the Preview check box. 4 In the Appearance area, choose a font from the Font list box. 5 Open the Symbol picker, and click a symbol. 6 Type a value in the Size box to specify the bullet size. Adding and formatting text 453 7 Type a value in the Baseline shift box to specify the distance that the bullet is shifted from the baseline. 8 In the Spacing area, type a value in the Text frame to bullet box to specify the distance that the bullet is indented from the paragraph text frame. 9 Type a value in the Bullet to text box to specify the distance between the bullet and the text. You can also Change the bullet size Type a value in the Size box. Raise or lower a bullet Type a value in the Baseline shift box. Bullets are inserted at the beginning of each new line that is preceded by a return. To add a tab stop 1 Select the paragraph text. 2 Click Text Tabs. If you want to see how the tab stops will appear when they are applied to the text, enable the Preview check box. 3 Click Add. 4 Click the new cell in the Tabs column, and type a value. You can also Change the alignment of tab stops Click the cell in the Alignment column, and choose an alignment option from the list box. Set tab stops with trailing leader characters Click the cell in the Leaders column, and choose On from the list box. Delete a tab stop Click the cell, and click Remove. Change the default leader character Click Leader options, open the Character picker, and click a character. 454 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Change the default leader spacing Click Leader options, and type a value in the Spacing box. You can also add, move, or delete tab stops on the horizontal ruler at the top of the drawing window. Click to add a tab stop, drag a tab marker to move it, and drag a tab marker off the ruler to delete it. For information about rulers, see “Using the rulers” on page 512. To indent paragraph text 1 Select the paragraph text. 2 In the Paragraph formatting docker, click the Indents arrow. If the Paragraph formatting docker does not appear in your workspace, click Text Paragraph formatting. 3 Type values in the following boxes: • First line — indents the first line of paragraph text • Left — creates a hanging indent in which all text except the first line is indented • Right — indents the right side of paragraph text You can remove indents by typing 0 in the First Line, Left, and Right boxes. You can indent an entire paragraph by typing the same value in both the First line box and the Left box. Hyphenating text Hyphenation can be used to break a word if the entire word does not fit at the end of a line. You can hyphenate automatically by using a preset hyphenation definition in combination with your own hyphenation settings. You can set the minimum number of characters before and after a hyphen. You can also specify the number of characters in the “hot zone,” which is the area at the end of a line where hyphenation can occur. You can insert an optional hyphen in a word to produce a specific word break at the end of a line. You can also create custom definitions that specify the location of optional hyphens in specific words whenever you type, paste, or import the words in the application. Adding and formatting text 455 To hyphenate paragraph text automatically 1 Select the paragraph text frame or a paragraph. 2 Click Text Use hyphenation. Hyphenation can be used for any languages that have corresponding writing tools installed with the application. For more information about language modules, see “Working with languages” on page 482. If you do not see any hyphenated words in the paragraph after applying the Text Use Hyphenation command, you may need to modify the hyphenation settings. To modify the hyphenation settings 1 Select a paragraph or paragraph text frame. 2 Click Text Hyphenation settings. 3 Enable the Automatically hyphenate paragraph text check box. 4 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Hyphenate capitalized words Enable the Break capitalized words check box. Hyphenate words that contain all uppercase letters Enable the Break words using ALL CAPS check box. Set a minimum word length for automatic hyphenation In the Hyphenation criteria area, type a value in the Minimum word length box. This value represents the minimum number of characters that hyphenated words must contain. Set the minimum number of characters to precede a hyphen In the Hyphenation criteria area, type a value in the Minimum characters before box. Set the minimum number of characters to follow a hyphen In the Hyphenation criteria area, type a value in the Minimum characters after box. 456 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Set the “hot zone” In the Hyphenation criteria area, type a value in the Distance from right margin box. This value represents the number of characters in the hot zone. A word that does not fit within this zone is hyphenated or moved to the next line. To insert an optional hyphen 1 Using the Text tool hyphen. , click in a word where you want to place an optional 2 Click Text Insert formatting code Optional hyphen. You can insert an optional hyphen by pressing Ctrl + -. To create a custom definition for optional hyphenation 1 Click Text Insert formatting code Custom optional hyphens. 2 In the Word box, type the word for which you want to create the hyphenation definition. When you type in the Word box, the same text is entered in the Hyphenated word box. 3 In the Hyphenated word box, click where you want the optional hyphen inserted, and press the hyphen key (-). 4 Click Add definition. You can also Create a custom hyphen definition for a specific language keyboard Enable the Show all languages check box, and choose a language option from the Language list box. Automatically insert custom optional hyphens when typing Enable the When typing check box. Automatically insert custom optional hyphens when typing, pasting, or importing text Enable the When pasting and importing text check box. Adding and formatting text 457 You can also Delete a custom optional hyphen definition Click Remove definition. The custom hyphenation definition is defined only for the language specified in the Language list box. You can choose another language without affecting your keyboard. You can create a custom optional hyphen definition by selecting a word in the document. The word appears in the Word box of the Custom optional hyphens dialog box. After you insert the optional hyphen in the Hyphenated word box, you can apply it by clicking Apply to selection. You can find and replace optional hyphens. Combining and linking paragraph text frames You can combine paragraph text frames. You can also break paragraph text frames apart into subcomponents — columns, paragraphs, bullets, lines, words, and characters. Every time you break apart a text frame, the subcomponents are placed into separate paragraph text frames. Linking paragraph text frames directs the flow of text from one text frame to another if the amount of text exceeds the size of the first text frame. If you shrink or enlarge a linked paragraph text frame, or change the size of the text, the amount of text in the next text frame is automatically adjusted. You can link paragraph text frames before or after you type text. You cannot link artistic text. However, you can link a paragraph text frame to an open or closed object. When you link a paragraph text frame to an open object, such as a line, the text flows along the path of the line. Linking a text frame to a closed object, such as a rectangle, inserts a paragraph text frame and directs the flow of text inside the object. If text exceeds the open or closed path, you can link the text to another text frame or object. You can also link to paragraph text frames and objects across pages. After linking paragraph text frames, you can redirect the flow from one object or text frame to another. When you select the text frame or object, a blue arrow indicates the direction of the text flow. You can hide or display these arrows. 458 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can make text flow between text frames and objects by linking the text. You can remove links between multiple paragraph text frames, and between paragraph text frames and objects. When you have only two linked paragraph text frames and you remove the link, the text flows into the remaining paragraph text frame. Removing a link between paragraph text frames with a series of links redirects the flow of text into the next paragraph text frame or object. By default, paragraph formatting, such as columns, drop caps, and bullets, is applied to the selected paragraph text frames only. However, you can change your settings so that formatting is applied to all linked text frames, or to all selected and subsequently linked text frames. For example, if you apply columns to the text in one text frame, you can choose whether to apply columns to the text in all the linked text frames. For information about paragraph formatting, see “Formatting paragraph text” on page 451. To combine or break apart paragraph text frames 1 Select a text frame. If you are combining text frames, hold down Shift, and use the Pick tool select subsequent text frames. to 2 Click Arrange, and click one of the following: • Combine • Break apart Adding and formatting text 459 Text frames with envelopes, text fitted to a path, and linked text frames cannot be combined. If you first select a text frame with columns, the combined text frame will have columns. To link paragraph text frames and objects 1 Using the Text tool , select the starting text frame. 2 Click the Text flow tab at the bottom of the text frame or object. If the text frame cannot hold all the text, the tab contains an arrow and the text frame becomes red. 3 When the pointer changes to a Link to pointer , click the text frame or object into which you want to continue the text flow. If the text frame or object is on a different page, first click the corresponding Page tab on the Document Navigator. If a text frame is linked, the Text flow tab changes , and a blue arrow indicates the direction of text flow. If the linked text is on another page, the page number and a dashed blue line are displayed. To hide or display these indicators, see “To choose formatting options for paragraph text frames” on page 461. To link paragraph text frames successfully, the text frames cannot be automatically sized. To redirect text flow to a different text frame or object 1 Using the Pick tool , click the Text flow tab or object that contains the link to be modified. at the bottom of the text frame 2 Select the new text frame or object into which you want the text flow to continue. To remove links between text frames or objects 1 Click the text frame to which another text frame is linked. 2 Click Arrange Break apart. You can remove links from linked text frames that are on different pages. 460 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To choose formatting options for paragraph text frames 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph. If you want to hide or display the text flow indicators, disable or enable the Show linking of text frames check box. 3 Enable one of the following options: • To all linked frames — applies paragraph formatting to selected text frames and all text frames that are linked to them • To selected frames only — applies paragraph formatting to the selected text frames only • To selected and subsequent frames — applies paragraph formatting to selected text frames and any text frames that are later linked to them Wrapping paragraph text around objects, artistic text, and text frames You can change the shape of text by wrapping paragraph text around an object, artistic text, or a paragraph text frame. You can wrap text by using contour or square wrapping styles. The contour wrapping styles follow the curve of the object. The square wrapping styles follow the bounding box of the object. You can also adjust the amount of space between paragraph text and the object or text, and you can remove any previously applied wrapping style. Text wrapped around an object by using the contour wrapping style To wrap paragraph text around an object, artistic text, or a text frame 1 Select the object or text around which you want to wrap text. 2 Click Window Property manager. 3 In the Property manager docker, click the General tab. 4 Choose a wrapping style from the Wrap text list box. If you want to change the amount of space between wrapped text and the object or text, change the value in the Text wrap offset box. Adding and formatting text 461 5 Click the Text tool text. , and drag to create a paragraph text frame over the object or 6 Type text in the paragraph text frame. You can wrap existing paragraph text around a selected object by applying a wrapping style to the object and dragging the paragraph text frame over the object. To remove a wrapping style 1 Select the wrapped text or the object it wraps. 2 Click Window Property manager. 3 In the Property manager docker, click the General tab. 4 Choose None from the Wrap text list box. Embedding graphics and adding special characters You can embed a graphic object or bitmap in text. The graphic object or bitmap is treated as a text character. As a result, you can apply formatting options according to the type of text in which you embed the graphic object. You can also remove an embedded object from text, after which the object returns to its original state. You can add special characters to text as text objects or as graphic objects. When you add special characters as text, you can format the characters as you do the text. When you add special characters as graphic objects, the characters are curves. Consequently, you can edit them as you would other graphic objects. To embed a graphic object in text 1 Select a graphic object. 2 Click Edit, and click one of the following: • Cut • Copy 3 Using the Text tool , click where you want to embed the graphic object. 4 Click Edit Paste. 462 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To remove an embedded object from text 1 Using the Text tool , select an embedded object. 2 Click Edit Cut. 3 Click the Pick tool , and click outside the text object. 4 Click Edit Paste. To add a special character as a text object 1 Using the Text tool , click where you want to add the special character. 2 Click Text Insert symbol character. 3 In the Insert character docker, choose a font from the Font list box. 4 Double-click a character in the list. The size of the character is determined by the font size of the text. The Insert character docker displays the keyboard shortcuts that you can use to add special characters. To add a special character as a graphic object 1 Click Text Insert symbol character. 2 In the Insert character docker, choose a font from the Font list box. 3 Type a value in the Character size box. 4 Drag a special character from the list to the drawing page. The special character is inserted with the default graphic style. For information about graphic styles, see “Working with graphics, text, and color styles” on page 355. Inserting formatting codes You can insert formatting codes, such as em dashes and nonbreaking spaces. In some programs, formatting codes are also known as “symbols.” The following table lists the available formatting codes and their corresponding keyboard shortcuts. Adding and formatting text 463 Formatting code Keyboard shortcut Em space Ctrl + Shift + M En space Ctrl + Shift + N 1/4 em space Ctrl + Alt + Space Nonbreaking space Ctrl + Shift + Space Tab Tab Column break or text-frame break Ctrl + Enter Em dash Alt + _ En dash Alt + - Nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl + Shift + - Optional hyphen Ctrl + - All shortcut keys for formatting codes are customizable. For information about customizing these shortcut keys, see the Text commands category in “To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command” on page 759. You can find and replace formatting codes. For more information, see “To find text” on page 439 and “To find and replace text” on page 439. To insert a formatting code 1 Using the Text tool character or space. , click to place the cursor where you want to insert a 2 Click Text Insert formatting code, and choose a formatting code from the menu. The Insert formatting code menu is unavailable when the Text tool is not active. You can insert a character not listed in the Insert formatting code menu by clicking Text Insert symbol character and clicking the character in the Insert character docker. 464 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Displaying nonprinting characters You can display nonprinting characters, such as spaces, tabs, and formatting codes. For example, when you display nonprinting characters, a space appears as a tiny black dot, a nonbreaking space appears as a circle, and an em space appears as a line. When enabled, nonprinting characters are displayed only when you add or edit text. To display nonprinting characters • Click Text Show nonprinting characters. You can also display nonprinting characters by clicking Tools Options, choosing Text from the Workspace list of categories, and then enabling the Show nonprinting characters check box. Adding and formatting text 465 Working with Asian text If you are running Corel DESIGNER on an Asian operating system, or if you have Asian language support installed on another operating system, you can take advantage of the Asian text formatting capabilities available with Corel DESIGNER. This section contains the following topics: • Formatting Asian text • Using line-breaking rules for Asian text Formatting Asian text Asian character input is only supported in Corel DESIGNER when using an Asian operating system or when language support is installed on a non-Asian operating system. You can choose a default font and text orientation (either horizontal or vertical) when typing text on an operating system that has Asian language support. When you type artistic or paragraph text, the program uses a default artistic or paragraph text style. You can also mix Asian text and other scripts in one text object and set the spacing between the two. You can change the font properties of one or both languages in a block of Latin or Asian text. To choose a default font for Asian text 1 Click the Text tool . 2 Choose an input method from the Input Method Editor (IME) on the status bar. 3 Choose a font from the Font list list box on the property bar. Working with Asian text 467 To choose a text orientation To Do the following Choose a default text orientation Click a blank space in the drawing window, click Text Paragraph formatting. In the Text direction area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose either Horizontal or Vertical from the Orientation list box. Change the text orientation Using the Pick tool, select the text, and click Text Paragraph formatting. In the Text direction area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose either Horizontal or Vertical from the Orientation list box. The default orientation for Asian text is horizontal. When you change the text orientation from horizontal to vertical, underlines become left lines and overlines become right lines. The text orientation setting applies to the entire text object. You cannot mix orientations in one text object. If you have Asian text support installed with your operating system, you can also change text orientation on the Text tool property bar. To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text 1 Click Text Paragraph formatting. 2 In the Spacing area of the Paragraph formatting docker, type a value in the Language box. The inter-language spacing is based on the percentage of a standard space. For example, two spaces are represented by typing a value of 200. 468 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text 1 Select the text. 2 Click Text Character formatting. 3 In the Character formatting docker, choose one of the following from the Script list box: • Latin • Asian 4 Change any font properties. Using line-breaking rules for Asian text Corel DESIGNER includes line-breaking rules for use with Asian text when you have an Asian operating system. For most Asian languages, a line of text can break between any two characters, with a few exceptions. Some characters cannot appear at the beginning of a line. These characters are referred to as “leading characters.” Other characters — referred to as “following characters” — cannot appear at the end of a line. The line breaks either after the following character or before the character that precedes the following character. Still others — referred to as “overflow characters” — are not wrapped but are, instead, allowed to extend beyond the right or bottom margin. To enforce one or more of the line-breaking rules, you can enable any of the rules. To customize the rules, you can add or remove characters. You can also reset the rules to the default. To disable or enable line-breaking rules 1 Click Text Line-breaking rules. 2 In the Asian line-breaking rules dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes: • Leading characters — ensures that a line does not break before any of the characters in the list • Following characters — ensures that a line does not break after any of the characters in the list • Overflow characters — ensures that the characters in the list are allowed to extend beyond the margin of the line Working with Asian text 469 You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system to view the Asian line-breaking rules dialog box. To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule 1 Click Text Line-breaking rules. 2 Type or remove the characters in the appropriate box. You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system to view the Asian line-breaking rules dialog box. To reset a line-breaking rule to the default 1 Click Text Line-breaking rules. 2 Click the Default button beside a rule. You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system to view the Asian line-breaking rules dialog box. 470 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Managing fonts Corel DESIGNER allows you to manage fonts. This section contains the following topics: • Substituting fonts • Previewing and displaying fonts Substituting fonts You can use PANOSE font matching to access a list of fonts that can be used as substitutes for fonts used in a drawing but not installed on your computer. You can set options for font matching. You can use font matching in text only or in both text and text styles. You can also turn off font matching. When you use font matching, you can accept the default substitute font, or you can choose another font to substitute for the missing font. You can apply the substitution temporarily or permanently to the drawing. You can build a list of exceptions to font substitutions. Exceptions override the font substitutions recommended by the PANOSE font-matching feature. A list of exceptions can be useful when you share drawings across platforms, because sometimes the same font is spelled differently on each platform. To set options for font matching 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts. 3 Click PANOSE font matching. 4 In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Text — lets you choose font substitutions for text in the document and applies default font substitutions for text styles Managing fonts 471 • Text and styles — lets you choose font substitutions for text in the document and for text styles • Never show — applies default font substitutions for text in the document and for text styles To use PANOSE font matching 1 Open a drawing. If the drawing contains missing fonts, the Font substitution for missing fonts dialog box opens. The name of the missing font appears in the Missing font list, and the recommended substitute appears in the Substituted font list. 2 Enable one of the following options: • Temporary — replaces the missing font with the substitution in the current session of the drawing • Permanent — permanently replaces the missing font with the substitution. When you save and reopen the file, the new font is used. To substitute a missing font 1 Open a drawing. If the drawing contains missing fonts, the Font matching results dialog box opens. 2 Enable the Substitute font with option. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Show fonts in the same code page as missing font — displays only missing fonts that support the code page of the active drawing • Show all fonts — displays all missing fonts 4 Choose a missing font from the Missing font list. 5 Choose a font from the Substitute font with list box. 6 Enable one of the following options: • Temporary — replaces the missing font with the substitution in the current session of the drawing • Permanent — permanently makes the font substitution in the document. When you save and reopen the file, the new font is used. 472 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can save font substitutions by enabling the Save this exception for future font matching check box. You can substitute a font for more than one missing font by holding down Shift and selecting the fonts in the Missing font list in the Font substitution for missing fonts dialog box. To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts. 3 Click PANOSE font matching. 4 In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, click Exceptions. 5 In the PANOSE font matching exceptions dialog box, type the name of the missing font in the Missing font box. 6 Choose a font that is installed on your computer from the Substituted font list box. Previewing and displaying fonts Corel DESIGNER lets you preview fonts before you use them. You can also preview a font in all available styles, such as bold and italic. To preview a font 1 Click the Text tool . 2 On the property bar, click the Font list box. The font name appears in the given font. The names of symbol fonts are displayed in the default user interface font, with examples of the symbol font appearing to the right of the symbol font name. If a font has other styles, such as bold or italic, you can preview them by pointing to the flyout arrow next to the font name. Managing fonts 473 To display fonts in a document 1 Click Text Font list options. 2 Enable the Show document fonts only check box. Only the fonts used in the active drawing appear in the Font list box on the property bar when the Text tool is active. The fonts you used most recently are displayed at the top of the Font list box. By default, the list displays the five most recently used fonts. You can modify the number of fonts that appear in this list by typing a value in the Number of most recently used fonts displayed box. The maximum number of recently used fonts that you can display is 20. 474 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Using writing tools You can use writing tools to correct errors in spelling and grammar, correct mistakes automatically, and refine your writing style. This section contains the following topics: • Using QuickCorrect • Using the spelling checker and Grammatik • Using the thesaurus • Working with languages • Customizing the writing tools • Using checking styles • Using rule classes • Analyzing a drawing • Using word lists • Checking statistics For more information about using the writing tools, see “Reference: Using writing tools” on page 494. Using QuickCorrect QuickCorrect® automatically corrects misspelled words and capitalization errors. You can customize QuickCorrect by specifying which types of errors you want to correct automatically. In Corel DESIGNER, the quotation marks that are applied to text vary according to the language that you have selected. You can further customize the quotation marks for different languages by using QuickCorrect. For example, you can change the style of double, single, and straight quotation marks for a language. Adding words to QuickCorrect lets you replace words and abbreviations that you often mistype. The next time you type the misspelled word, QuickCorrect corrects the word Using writing tools 475 automatically. You can use this feature to create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. For example, you can store the phrase “for your information” under the abbreviation “FYI” so that each time you type “FYI” followed by a space, it is replaced with the phrase. You can have QuickCorrect add corrections made with the spelling checker to its word list so that the next time you misspell the word the same way, it is automatically corrected. You can also undo a QuickCorrect correction. To customize QuickCorrect 1 Click Text Writing tools QuickCorrect. 2 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Capitalize first letter of sentences • Correct two initial, consecutive capitals • Capitalize names of days • Automatic hyperlink • Replace text while typing The Correct two initial, consecutive capitals option doesn’t make a change when a capital letter is followed by a space or period, or if a word contains other capital letters. Instead of enabling the Capitalize first letter of sentences check box, you can change the text case to sentence case. For more information, see “To change the text case” on page 437. To customize quotation marks for different languages 1 Click Text Writing tools QuickCorrect. 2 Choose a language from the Language list box. 3 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Change straight quotation marks to typographic (“curly”) quotation marks Enable the Change straight quotes to typographic quotes check box. 476 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Insert straight quotation marks when the quotation mark follows a number Enable the Use straight quotation marks after numbers check box. Change the appearance of single quotation marks Choose a quotation mark style from the Open and Close list boxes, or type a character in each of the boxes. Change the appearance of double quotation marks Choose a quotation mark style from the Open and Close list boxes, or type a character in each of the boxes. Straight quotation marks are sometimes used to represent feet ( ' ) and inches ( " ). To add words to QuickCorrect 1 Click Text Writing tools QuickCorrect. 2 Enable the Replace text while typing check box. 3 In the Replace box, type the text to be replaced. 4 Type the replacement text in the With box. 5 Click Add. You can use this feature to create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. Type the abbreviation in the Replace box, and the word or phrase in the With box. To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling. 3 Enable the Add corrections to QuickCorrect check box. To undo a QuickCorrect correction • Click Edit Undo QuickCorrect. Using writing tools 477 Using the spelling checker and Grammatik The writing tools let you check your text in many ways. By using the spelling checker and Grammatik, you can check the spelling and grammar in an entire drawing, part of a drawing, or only selected text. You can manually edit text and then resume checking the drawing. The spelling checker and Grammatik replace words or phrases in two ways: you can choose a word, or define an automatic replacement for a word. Defining automatic replacement words is useful for words that are regularly misspelled. Automatic replacement words are stored in a user word-list file. For more information about user word-list files, see “Using word lists” on page 490. You can skip a writing error once but flag subsequent occurrences of the problem, or you can skip the error throughout the entire proofreading session. To check the spelling or grammar in an entire drawing 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Choose Document from the Check list box. 3 Click Start. To check the spelling or grammar in part of a drawing 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 From the Check list box, choose one of the following: • Paragraph • Selected text • Sentence • Word 3 Click one of the following: • Start — begins a new check • Resume — continues an interrupted check 478 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The options available from the Check list box vary according to the type of drawing that you are checking. To check the spelling or grammar of selected text 1 Select the text you want to check. 2 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik By default, the Auto start command is enabled for the spelling checker and Grammatik. If you want to disable the Auto start command, click Options Auto start; to check a drawing, you must click the Start button in the Writing tools dialog box. To edit text manually 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 When the spelling or grammar checker stops on a word or phrase, click where you want to make changes. 3 Edit the text. To replace a word or phrase 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 When the spelling or grammar checker stops, choose a word or phrase from the Replacements list. 3 Click Replace. If the spelling checker does not offer replacement words, you can edit text manually in the Replace with box. Using writing tools 479 To define automatic text replacements 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 When the spelling or grammar checker stops on a word, click Auto replace. To skip a spelling or grammar error once 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 When the spelling or grammar checker stops, click Skip once. To skip all occurrences of an error 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 When the spelling or grammar checker stops, click Skip all. You can also skip all occurrences of a word for all proofreading sessions by adding it to a user word list. For more information about user word-list files, see “Using word lists” on page 490. Using the thesaurus You can use the thesaurus to refine your writing style. The thesaurus lets you look up options such as synonyms, antonyms, and related words. You can replace a word by using the thesaurus. When you look up a word, the thesaurus provides a short definition and a list of the lookup options selected. The thesaurus also maintains a history list of the words that you have looked up. Each time you start the thesaurus, it begins a new history list. The thesaurus automatically replaces a word with a suggested word, but you can also use the thesaurus to insert words. 480 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To replace a word 1 Select a word. 2 Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 3 Click Look up. 4 In the list of categories, double-click a definition and click a word. 5 Click Replace. You can also Look up words suggested by the thesaurus View definitions in the pane to the right of the suggested words. Look up any word Type a word in the list box at the top of the Thesaurus page. Click Look up. Look up recently checked words Choose a word from the list box at the top of the Thesaurus page. In some instances, you are prompted to select the correct form of the word that you want to insert. This prompt appears when the word that you want to replace is spelled the same in both the present and past tenses (for example, “read”), or when the word can be used as more than one part of speech (for example, “wonder,” which can be used as either a noun or a verb). Click the left and right arrows to scroll through word lists. To insert a word 1 In the drawing, click where you want to insert the word. 2 Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 3 Type a word in the box at the top of the Thesaurus page. 4 Click Look up. 5 Choose a word from the list box. 6 Click Insert. Using writing tools 481 In some instances, you are prompted to select the correct form of the word that you want to insert. This prompt appears when the word that you want to replace is spelled the same in both the present and past tenses (for example, “read”), or when the word can be used as more than one part of speech (for example, “wonder,” which can be used as either a noun or a verb). Working with languages A drawing can contain text that alternates between different languages. For example, if English is the default language of your computer’s operating system, and you also have a French language module installed, you can use the writing tools to check the spelling or grammar of both French and English text. When you run the spelling checker or Grammatik, Corel DESIGNER checks words, phrases, and sentences according to their assigned language. This prevents foreign words from being marked as misspellings. You can use the writing tools the same way you would if the text were all in one language. You can select from a list of writing tool languages when you install the application. If you did not perform a custom installation to include additional languages, only the default writing tool language is installed. For more information about installing a Writing Tools language module, see “Changing languages” on page 5. You can also check for the formatting conventions of another language. For example, the spelling checker can format all dates in a drawing according to French conventions (such as “12 avril 2005”). Many of the languages support hyphenation. Hyphenation lets you reduce the raggedness of text along the right margin by dividing a word that falls at the end of a line, instead of forcing the entire word to the next line. You can also specify which quotation marks to use for different languages. For more information, see “To customize quotation marks for different languages” on page 476. To assign a language to text 1 Select the text. 2 Click Text Writing tools Language. 3 In the Text language dialog box, choose a language from the list. 482 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can assign a language to selected words, sentences, or paragraphs. To use the writing tools for the language you select in the Text language dialog box, the module for that language must be installed. You can check which language has been assigned to text by selecting the text and viewing the three-letter language code that appears in the status bar. Customizing the writing tools You can customize how the spelling is checked in a drawing. For example, you can choose how the spelling checker starts and whether it searches for misspelled words, irregular capitalization, duplicate words, or words with numbers. You can customize how Grammatik checks grammar in a drawing. For example, you can customize Grammatik to start automatically, to prompt you before it automatically replaces words, and to show spelling suggestions for misspelled words. You can customize the thesaurus to look up words or close automatically. The thesaurus can also be customized to suggest spelling suggestions for misspelled words and to display multiple alternative word lists. To set spelling checker options 1 Click Text Writing tools Spell check. 2 Click Options, and then click one of the following: • Auto start • Beep on misspelled • Recheck all text • Check words with numbers • Check duplicate words • Check irregular capitalization • Prompt before auto replacement • Show phonetic suggestions The options you click are applied the next time you open the spelling checker. Using writing tools 483 To set Grammatik options 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options, and click one of the following: • Auto start • Prompt before auto replacement • Suggest spelling replacements The options you click are applied the next time you open Grammatik. To set thesaurus options 1 Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 2 Click Options, and click one of the following: • Auto look up • Auto close • Spelling assist The options you click are applied the next time you open the thesaurus. Using checking styles A checking style is a preset writing style rule applied to a drawing. Using a checking style lets you check a drawing that has a specific type of writing. For example, you can choose an advertising checking style to check advertising copy or marketing materials. You can create, delete, edit, and restore a checking style. You can specify a maximum number of items when Grammatik checks the grammar of a drawing. For example, you can specify the maximum number of consecutive nouns that Grammatik allows. Choosing a formality level lets Grammatik check a drawing for strict or relaxed use of language and diction. Each checking style has a default level of formality assigned to it. Each formality level focuses on a different style of writing. You can choose from three formality levels: informal, standard, and formal. 484 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To select a checking style 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose one of the following: • Spelling plus • Quick check • Very strict • Formal memo or letter • Informal memo or letter • Technical or scientific • Documentation or speech • Student composition • Advertising • Fiction • Grammar As-You-Go™ 4 Click Select. A checking style remains in effect until you disable the checking style or choose another one. To create a checking style 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose Very strict from the list. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Edit checking styles dialog box, disable any rule classes in the Rule classes list that you do not want to include. 6 Modify any of the settings. 7 Click Save as. 8 In the Save as checking style dialog box, type a name in the Custom style name box. Using writing tools 485 To delete a checking style 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4 Click Delete. You can delete custom checking styles, but you cannot delete preset checking styles. To edit a checking style 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style. 4 Click Edit. 5 Modify any of the settings. 6 Click Save. When you save an edited checking style, an asterisk (*) is added to the style name. To restore an edited checking style 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose an edited checking style from the list. 4 Click Edit. 5 Click Restore. If you want to save an edited or restored checking style with a new name, click Save as, and type the new name in the Save as checking style dialog box. Custom checking styles saved with new names cannot be returned to default settings. 486 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To specify the maximum number of specific items 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Maximum allowed area, type values in any of the following boxes: • Consecutive nouns • Consecutive prepositional phrases • Long sentence length • Spell numbers below or equal to • Words allowed in split infinitive Set the Spell numbers below or equal to value to zero if you do not want numerals to be flagged as errors. To change a formality level 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Formality levels area, enable one of the following: • Informal • Standard • Formal Using rule classes Rule classes contain groups of grammar and style rules. Grammatik uses rule classes to detect common writing errors. You can enable or disable rules at any time during a Grammatik session. When you disable a rule, Grammatik ignores all the errors associated with that rule during the current proofreading session. You can also choose which rule classes to apply during a Grammatik session or save a new set of rules as a checking style. Using writing tools 487 To enable a rule 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Turn on rules. 3 In the Turn on rules dialog box, choose the rules you want to enable from the Rules list. The Turn on rules command is available only when you have disabled a rule during proofreading. Otherwise, it is grayed. To disable a rule 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Start a new grammar-checking session. 3 When Grammatik alerts you to an error that you do not want to flag, click Turn off. To add rule classes 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Checking styles. 3 In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4 Click Edit. 5 In the Edit checking styles dialog box, enable any check boxes beside the rule classes in the Rule classes list that you want to add. To save a set of rules as a new checking style 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Save rules. 3 In the Save rules dialog box, click Save as. 4 In the Save as checking style dialog box, type a name in the Custom style name box. The Save rules command is available only when a rule has been turned off. 488 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Analyzing a drawing Grammatik lets you analyze the grammatical structure of text in a drawing. You can analyze parts of a sentence and parts of speech. When Grammatik analyzes a sentence, it assigns a sentence part to each word or group of words. Grammatik uses Parse Tree to let you view the parts of a sentence. When Grammatik analyzes text, it assigns a part of speech to each word in a sentence. You can view the parts of speech that Grammatik assigns to a sentence. You can view a basic counts report to analyze a writing style. The basic counts report determines if there are too many long words or if paragraphs are too long and complicated for the reader to easily understand. You can also view a flagged errors report to analyze a writing style. The flagged errors report lists the types of errors flagged in a drawing and reports the number of times each error was flagged. You can also use this report to identify the types of grammar problems that often appear in a drawing. Viewing a readability report lets you analyze the amount of skill required for a reader to understand the text in a drawing. Grammatik analyzes the readability of a drawing by comparing the text with a comparison document. You can choose from one of three Grammatik comparison documents, or you can add a custom comparison document. To view a parse tree 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Analysis Parse tree. The location of the cursor determines the sentence that appears in the parse tree. To view parts of speech 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Analysis Parts of speech. The location of the cursor determines the sentence that appears in the Parts of speech dialog box. Using writing tools 489 To view a basic counts report 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Analysis Basic counts. To view a flagged errors report 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Analysis Flagged. To view the readability of a drawing 1 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2 Click Options Analysis Readability. 3 In the Readability dialog box, choose a comparison document from the Comparison document list box. To add a comparison document 1 Open the drawing you want to use as a comparison document. 2 Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 3 Click Options Analysis Readability. 4 In the Readability dialog box, click Add document. Grammatik lets you add only one custom comparison document. If you add a second document, it overwrites the first custom comparison document. Using word lists A word list is a list of words or phrases scanned when you proof text by using the writing tools. Writing tools scan two types of word lists: user word lists and main word lists. Each language comes with a default user word list. You can customize user word lists by adding, deleting, or replacing words. Main word lists are lists of specialized words used by the spelling checker for a particular language, field or company. You can choose a user word list to help proof a text. You can have up to 10 user word lists active simultaneously. For example, if you want the spelling checker to scan both 490 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide the US English and the Canadian English main word lists, choose both lists. If you work in the medical profession, you can select a third-party medical word list that runs with the writing tools. Each language supported by the spelling checker has a default main word list. The active user word lists are scanned first; if the word or phrase is not found there, the active main word lists are scanned. You can add, disable, or remove word lists. You can add a word to a user word list so that the word is not flagged as an error. You can also add replacement words to a user word list, which lets you choose a replacement when the spelling checker or Grammatik stops on a word. You can edit or delete words in a user word list at any time. To choose a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 Enable the User word list check box. If there is only one user word list, no check box appears. The default user word list for the language is always enabled. To add a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 Click in the User word lists list where you want to position the new user word list. 4 Click Add list. 5 In the Add user word list dialog box, choose the new user word list. 6 Click Open. The filename extension for a user word list is .uwl. When you check a drawing, the user word lists are scanned in the order of their appearance in the User word lists dialog box. Using writing tools 491 To disable a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 Disable the check box that corresponds to a user word list. The default user word list for the language is always enabled. To remove a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools Spell check. 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 Choose a user word list. 4 Click Remove list. You cannot remove the default language word list. To add a word to a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list. 4 Type a word in the Word/phrase box. 5 If you want to add a replacement word, type it in the Replace with box. 6 Click Add entry. 7 Click Close. In the spelling checker, replacement words appear in the Replacements box. Click Add from the Spell checker or Grammatik pages to add the word to the current user word list. You can also add short phrases to a user word list. 492 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To add alternative words to a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list. 4 Type a word in the Word/phrase box. 5 Type a replacement word in the Replace with box. 6 Click Add entry. 7 Click Close. You can also add short phrases to a user word list. To edit a word or phrase in a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 Choose the user word list that contains the word or phrase you want to edit. 4 Choose the word or phrase you want to edit. 5 Edit the word or phrase in the Replace with box. 6 Click Replace entry. If the word list you want to edit does not appear in the User word lists dialog box, click Add list to open the list. To delete a word or phrase from a user word list 1 Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2 Click Options User word lists. 3 Choose the word list you want to edit. Using writing tools 493 4 Choose the word or phrase you want to delete. 5 Click Delete entry. Checking statistics You can check text statistics to count text elements, including the number of lines, words, characters, and the names of the fonts and styles used. You can display statistics either for selected text objects or for the entire drawing. If no text is selected, all text elements in the drawing, including tab and space characters, are counted. To count text elements for an entire drawing 1 Click a blank space in the drawing window. 2 Click Text Text statistics. You can also Count text elements for selected text Select a block of text. Click Text Text statistics. If you want to display information about the styles used, enable the Show style statistics check box. Reference: Using writing tools Notation used in Grammatik Additional information about parts of speech is available in the following topic: • analyzing parts of a sentence Analyzing parts of a sentence Grammatik uses the following notations to identify parts of speech or parts of a sentence. 494 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Notation in Grammatik Grammatical term Explanation 3v third-person present verb The following sentences use the third-person present-tense verb form: “He waits.” “She brushes her hair.” “Does it sing?” <> punctuation Punctuation clarifies the meaning of a phrase or statement. Examples: •period (.) •comma (,) •question mark (?) abrv abbreviation An abbreviation is a shortened version of a word. For example, “etc.” is an abbreviation of “etcetera.” adj adjective An adjective modifies a noun. Example: a “good” book. adv adverb An adverb modifies a verb or an adjective. Examples: •go “quickly” •a “very” good book aux auxiliary verb An auxiliary verb is a form of “be,” “have,” or “do.” Examples: •“is” coming •“had” not run •“did” he say bv base verb A base verb is the form of a verb that comes after “to” in an infinitive, or after a modal (such as “would”). c/s comparative/ superlative The comparative and superlative forms of adjectives or adverbs indicate a degree of comparison. Examples: •happier •slowest Using writing tools 495 Notation in Grammatik Grammatical term Explanation cj conjunction A conjunction joins words, phrases, or clauses. Examples: •the book “and” the pen •I want to leave “because” it is late. det determiner A determiner is a type of adjective. Examples: •a •an •the •some •these •any direct object direct object A direct object receives the action. Example: Bob opened “the box.” ij interjection An interjection is an exclamation. Examples: •Hi! •Oh! •Hey! indirect object indirect object An indirect object tells “to whom” or “for whom” the action of the sentence occurs. Examples: • Bob gave “her” an apple. •I sent “him” a postcard. inf split infinitive A split infinitive is a verb in its infinitive form (to be, to run) that is split by intervening modifiers. For example, in the split infinitive “to boldly go,” the adverb “boldly” splits the infinitive “to go.” main clause main clause A main clause is complete in meaning without any other sentence component. Examples: • Let’s have the picnic today unless it rains. (Main clause: “Let’s have the picnic today”) •When not in school, children play. (Main clause: “children play”) 496 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Notation in Grammatik Grammatical term Explanation mod modal A modal is a type of auxiliary verb. Examples: • will •must •can •should •might num number A number expresses a quantity. Examples: •“three” boys •“497” days •“62” percent phrasal phrasal preposition A phrasal preposition is a preposition that belongs to, but is separated from, a verb phrase. Example: put the book “down.” pn plural noun A plural noun is the plural form of a noun. Examples: • books •children poss possessive noun A possessive noun shows ownership. It is used as an adjective to modify another noun. Examples: • “dog’s” leg •,“students’” cars •,“Joe’s” son ppt past participle A past participle is a past-tense verb form. Example: The note was “written” in ink. prep phr prepositional phrase A prepositional phrase consists of a preposition and its object, plus any modifiers. Prepositional phrases function as adjectives, adverbs, or nouns. Example: We came back “for the second show.” Using writing tools 497 Notation in Grammatik Grammatical term Explanation pres-p present participle A present participle is a verb form that can function as part of a verb phrase or as an adjective. It is usually created by adding “ing” to the base verb. Examples: •He is “writing” a book. •She is “going” to bed. •The lawyers presented “closing” arguments. prn pronoun A pronoun takes the place of a noun. Examples: •I •me •you •mine •yourself •these •who •which pv past tense The past tense expresses actions that have already occurred. Examples: •He “wrote” the book. •We “went” to the store. relative clause relative clause A relative clause is a type of subordinate clause that acts like an adjective, describing the noun or pronoun that precedes it. A relative clause usually begins with a relative pronoun, such as “who,” “whom,” or “what.” Example: The employees “who worked diligently” were rewarded. rel prn relative pronoun A relative pronoun introduces a subordinate clause and links it with an independent clause. Examples: The noise “that” scared you was made by the boy “who” lives next door. 498 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Notation in Grammatik Grammatical term Explanation sn singular noun A singular noun is the name of one person, place, thing, or idea. Examples: •Tom •Canada •pen •health subject subject The subject of a clause performs an action. A subject can be one word or several. Examples: •“John” ran. •“The cats” meowed. •“All the children and their mothers” took naps. subordinate clause subordinate clause A subordinate clause, which is also called a dependent clause cannot stand alone. It depends on another clause to complete its meaning. Example: We will have the meeting today, “because everyone is here.” that clause that-clause A that-clause is a specialized subordinate clause starting with “that.” Example: We were sure “that you would pay us.” verb or verb phrase verb or verb phrase A verb or verb phrase shows action. Verbs can contain one word or several words, but Grammatik uses “verb phrase” when the verb consists of more than one word. Examples: •John “ran.” •He “has gone. wh-clause wh-clause A wh-clause is a specialized subordinate clause starting with “when,” “how,” “why,” or “where.” A wh-clause can serve as a noun, an adverb, or an adjective. Examples: •We knew “where she would go.” •I will tell you “when I go.” Using writing tools 499 Pages and layout Working with pages and layout tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Working with tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 501 Working with pages and layout tools Corel DESIGNER lets you specify the size, orientation, unit of scale, and background of the drawing page. You can customize and display page grids and guidelines to help you organize objects and place them exactly where you want. Rulers can help you position grids, guidelines, and objects along a scale that uses units of your choice. Also, you can add and delete pages. Page layout settings and tools are fully customizable and can be used as defaults for other drawings. This section contains the following topics: • Specifying the page layout • Choosing a page background • Adding, duplicating, renaming, and deleting pages • Using the rulers • Calibrating the rulers • Setting up the grid • Setting up guidelines • Setting the drawing scale Specifying the page layout You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and layout style of the page. The options you choose when specifying the page layout can be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing. Page size There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size and creating your own. You can choose from many preset page sizes, ranging from legal-size paper Working with pages and layout tools 503 and envelopes to posters and Web pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs, you can create a custom page size by specifying a drawing’s dimensions. You can save custom page sizes as presets for later use, and you can delete any custom preset page sizes that you no longer need. Page orientation The orientation of the page can be landscape or portrait. In landscape orientation, the drawing’s width is greater than its height, and in portrait orientation, the drawing’s height is greater than its width. Any pages you add to a drawing project will have the current orientation; however, you can give a different orientation to single pages in a drawing project. Layout styles When you use the default layout style (Full Page), each page in a document is considered a single page and prints on one sheet. You can choose layout styles for multipage publications, such as booklets and brochures. The multipage layout styles — Book, Booklet, Tent Card, Side-fold Card, Top-fold Card, and Tri-fold Brochure — split the page size into two or more equal parts. Each part is considered a separate page. The advantage of working with separate parts is that you can edit each page in upright orientation, and in sequential order in the drawing window, regardless of the layout required to print your document. When you are ready to print, the application automatically arranges the pages in the order required for printing and binding. Label styles You can choose from more than 800 preset label formats from different label manufacturers. You can preview the dimensions of labels and see how they fit on a printed page. If Corel DESIGNER does not provide a label style that meets your requirements, you can modify an existing style or create and save your own original style. To set the page size and orientation 1 Click Layout Page setup. The Options dialog box appears with the Page size page displayed. 2 Perform a task from the following table. 504 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Choose a preset page size Choose a paper type from the Size list box. Match the page size and orientation to the printer settings Click Get page size from printer. Specify a custom page size Type values in the Width and Height boxes. Set the page orientation Click the Landscape or the Portrait button. Set the page size and orientation for an individual page in a multipage document Make sure the page you want to change is displayed in the drawing window, choose a page size and orientation, and enable the Apply size to current page only check box. Display the page border Enable the Show page border check box. Add a frame around the page Click the Add page frame button. Choose a rendering resolution for the document Choose a resolution from the Rendering resolution list box. This option is available only when the unit of measurement is set to Pixels. Set a bleed limit Enable the Show bleed area check box, and type a value in the Bleed box. You can also specify the page size and orientation by clicking View Page sorter view and adjusting the controls on the property bar. To add or delete custom preset page sizes 1 Click Layout Page setup. The Options dialog box appears with the Page size page displayed. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Add a custom preset page size Specify a custom page size, and click Save. The custom preset page size appears in the Size list box. Working with pages and layout tools 505 To Do the following Delete a preset page size Choose a paper type from the Size list box, and click Delete. With the Pick tool active and no objects selected, you can also add or delete custom preset page sizes by clicking Edit this list at the bottom of the Page size list box on the property bar. To choose a layout style 1 Click Layout Page setup. The Options dialog box appears with the Page size page displayed. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Layout. 3 Choose a layout style from the Layout list box. Each layout style is accompanied by a short description and illustration. To use a label style 1 Click Layout Page setup. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Label, and enable the Labels option. 3 Choose the manufacturer name from the list. 4 Choose the label style you want from the list. If you want to customize the label style, click Customize label, and adjust the label size, margins, gutters, and the number of labels appearing on each sheet. If you want to save the custom label style you created, click the Add button , and type a name for the new label style in the Save as box. You cannot use label styles if a drawing contains multiple pages. For best results, choose Letter paper size and Portrait orientation before applying a label style. 506 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To set the default page layout 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, click Document. 3 Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box. 4 Enable the Page options check box. Choosing a page background You can choose the color and type of background for a drawing. For example, you can use a solid color if you want a uniform background. If you want a more intricate or dynamic background, you can use a bitmap. When you choose a bitmap as the background, it is embedded in the drawing by default. This option is recommended. However, you can also link the bitmap to the drawing so that if you later edit the source image, the change is automatically reflected in the drawing. If you send a drawing with a linked image to someone else, you must also send the linked image. You can make a background bitmap printable and exportable, or you can save computer resources by exporting and printing a drawing without the background bitmap. If you no longer need a background, you can remove it. To use a solid color as the background 1 Click Layout Page background. 2 Enable the Solid option. 3 Open the Color picker, and click a color. When you export files to a bitmap format, the background color is used for anti-aliasing edges. If the bitmaps are of irregular shape and will be placed against a background different from white, it is recommended that you select a matching page background color. For example, if you are planning to place the exported bitmap against a blue background, you need to choose a similar blue color for the page background. Working with pages and layout tools 507 To use a bitmap as the background 1 Click Layout Page background. 2 Enable the Bitmap option. 3 Click Browse. 4 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 5 Double-click the filename. 6 In the Options dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Linked — links the bitmap to the drawing so that changes made to the source file are reflected in the bitmap background • Embedded — embeds the bitmap in the drawing so that changes made to the source file are not reflected in the bitmap background If you want the background to be printed and exported with the drawing, enable the Print and export background check box. 7 Enable one of the following options: • Default size — lets you use the bitmap’s current size • Custom size — lets you specify the dimensions of the bitmap by typing values in the H and V boxes. If you want to specify nonproportional height and width values, disable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. If the bitmap is smaller than the drawing page, it is tiled across the drawing page. If it is larger than the drawing page, it is cropped to fit the drawing page. A background bitmap is not an object and cannot be edited. To remove a background 1 Click Layout Page background. 2 Enable the No background option. Adding, duplicating, renaming, and deleting pages Corel DESIGNER lets you add pages to a drawing or duplicate existing pages. You can also rename pages and delete a single page or an entire range of pages. You can also move objects from one page to another. 508 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide When you duplicate a page, you can choose to copy only the layer structure of the page or to copy the layers and all the objects they contain. For more information about layers, see “Working with layers” on page 277. You can use the Page Sorter view to manage pages while viewing the page contents. The Page Sorter view lets you change the order of pages as well as copy, add, rename, and delete pages. To add a page 1 Click Layout Insert page. 2 In the Pages area, type the number of pages you want to add in the Number of pages box. 3 In the Place area, enable one of the following options: • Before • After If you want to insert a page before or after a page other than the current page, type the page number in the Existing page box. You can also Specify the page size Choose a paper type from the Size list box. Specify a custom page size Type values in the Width and Height boxes. Set the page orientation Click the Landscape or the Portrait button. If you are on the first or last page, you can add a page by clicking the Add page button in the document window. You can also choose where to add a page by right-clicking a page tab in the document window and clicking Insert page after or Insert page before. To duplicate a page 1 In the Object manager docker, click the name of the page that you want to duplicate. If the Object manager is not open, click Window Object manager. 2 Click Layout Duplicate page. Working with pages and layout tools 509 3 In the Insert new page area of the Duplicate page dialog box, choose one of the following options: • Before selected page • After selected page 4 At the bottom of the dialog box, choose one of the following options: • Copy layer(s) only — lets you duplicate the layer structure without copying the contents of the layers • Copy layer(s) and their contents — lets you duplicate the layers and all their contents You can also duplicate a page by right-clicking a page name and choosing Duplicate page. To rename a page 1 Click Layout Rename page. 2 Type the name of the page in the Page name box. You can also rename a page in the Object manager docker by clicking the page name twice and typing a new name. To access the Object manager docker, click Window Object manager. To delete a page 1 Click Layout Delete page. 2 In the Delete page dialog box, type the number of the page you want to delete. You can delete a range of pages by enabling the Through to page check box and typing the number of the last page to delete in the Through to page box. To change the order of pages • Drag the page tabs on the document navigator at the bottom of the drawing window. 510 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To move an object to another page 1 Drag the object over the tab with the destination page number (at the bottom of the document window). The destination page appears in the document window. 2 Without releasing the mouse button, drag the object onto the page to position the object. You can also move an object to another page by dragging the object name in the Object manager docker over a layer name on the destination page. To manage pages while viewing their contents 1 Click View Page sorter view. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Change the order of pages Drag a page to its new location. Copy a page Right-click and drag the page to its new location. Choose Copy here from the context menu. Add a page Right-click a page, and click Insert page before or Insert page after. Rename a page Click the page name below a selected page, and type a new name. Delete a page Right-click a page, and click Delete page. Return to normal view Double-click a page. You can also copy a page by right-clicking the page and choosing Duplicate page. Working with pages and layout tools 511 Using the rulers You can display rulers in the drawing window to help you draw, size, and align objects precisely. You can hide the rulers or move them to another position in the drawing window. You can also customize the ruler settings to suit your needs. For example, you can set the ruler origin, choose a unit of measure, and specify how many marks or ticks appear between each full unit mark. By default, Corel DESIGNER applies the same units used for the rulers to the duplicate and nudge distances. You can change the default so that you can specify different units for these and other settings. For information about nudging, see “Moving objects” on page 229. To hide or display the rulers • Click View Rulers. A check mark beside the Rulers command indicates that the rulers are displayed. To move a ruler • Hold down Shift, and drag a ruler to a new position in the drawing window. To customize ruler settings 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3 In the Units area, choose a unit of measure from the Horizontal list box. If you want to use a different unit of measure for the vertical ruler, disable the Same units for horizontal and vertical rulers check box, and choose a unit of measure from the Vertical list box. 4 In the Origin area, type values in the following boxes: • Horizontal • Vertical 5 Type a value in the Tick divisions box. If you change the unit of measure for rulers, the unit of measure for nudge distances automatically changes as well, unless you first disable the Same units for duplicate distance, nudge and rulers check box in the Nudge area. 512 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can access ruler settings directly by double-clicking a ruler. You can specify nudge settings by typing values in the Nudge, Super nudge, and Micro nudge boxes in the Nudge area. Calibrating the rulers You can have one inch on your screen equal one inch of “real” distance. This lets you work with real-world distances as opposed to relative distances that depend on screen resolution. This tool is particularly useful when you work with signs or draw in 1:1 zoom mode. Before you can perform this procedure, you must have a clear plastic ruler for comparing real-world and on-screen distances. This ruler should use the same unit of measure that you set for the Corel DESIGNER rulers. For information about ruler settings, see “Using the rulers” on page 512. To calibrate the rulers to real-world distance 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, Hand tool. 3 Click Calibrate rulers. 4 Place a clear plastic ruler under the on-screen horizontal ruler. 5 Click the up or down arrows on the Horizontal box to match one unit of measure on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measure on the actual ruler. 6 Place the ruler beside the on-screen vertical ruler. 7 Click the up or down arrows on the Vertical box to match one unit of measure on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measure on the actual ruler. Setting up the grid The grid is a series of non-printing intersecting lines that you can display in the drawing window. You can use the grid to precisely align and position objects. You can customize the look of the grid by changing the grid display and grid spacing. The grid display allows you to view the grid as lines or as dots. The spacing allows you Working with pages and layout tools 513 to set the distance between the grid lines. The spacing options are based on the unit of measure for the ruler. For example, if the ruler unit of measure is set to inches, the spacing options are based on inches. If the ruler unit of measure is set to pixels, or if you enabled the Pixel preview, you can specify the color and opacity of the pixel grid. You can also have objects snap to the grid or pixel grid so that when you move the objects, they jump between grid lines. To display or hide the grid • Click View Grid. A check mark beside the Grid command indicates that the grid is displayed. To set the grid display 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Grid. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Show grid as lines • Show grid as dots To set the grid spacing 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Grid. 3 In the Custom grid area, type a value in the Horizontal box. If you want to change the grid spacing intervals or the number of lines displayed per unit of measure, choose an option from the list box. The options are based on the unit of measure used for the ruler. 4 Type a value in the Vertical box. The unit of measure used for grid spacing is the same as that used for rulers. For information about ruler settings, see “To customize ruler settings” on page 512. 514 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change the color and opacity of the pixel grid 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Grid. 3 In the Pixel grid area, open the Color picker, and click a color. 4 Move the Opacity slider to the right to increase the opacity of the grid. You can disable the Show pixel grid at 800% or higher zoom check box if you do not want the pixel view to automatically display zoomed in at 800% or higher. To set objects to snap to the pixel grid 1 On the toolbar, click Snap to Snap to pixels. 2 Move the objects with the Pick tool . This option is available only when pixel view is enabled. For information, see “Choosing viewing modes” on page 67. Setting up guidelines Guidelines are lines that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object placement. In some applications, guidelines are known as guides. There are three types of guidelines: horizontal, vertical, and slanted. By default, the application displays guidelines that you add to the drawing window, but you can hide them at any time. You can also use objects as guides. You can set guidelines for individual pages or you can set guidelines for the entire document. For more information about local and master guidelines, see “Local layers and master layers” on page 278. You can add a guideline wherever you need one; however, you can also choose to add preset guidelines. There are two types of preset guidelines: Corel presets and userdefined presets. An example of a Corel preset is one with guidelines that display at oneinch margins. User-defined presets are guidelines whose location you specify. For example, you can add preset guidelines that display margins at a distance you specify or that define a column layout or grid. After you add a guideline, you can select it, move it, rotate it, lock it in place, or delete it. Working with pages and layout tools 515 Guidelines use the unit of measure specified for rulers. For information about ruler settings, see “To customize ruler settings” on page 512. To display or hide the guidelines • Click View Guidelines. A check mark beside the Guidelines command indicates that the guidelines are displayed. To add a horizontal or vertical guideline 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Guidelines. 3 In the list of categories, click one of the following: • Horizontal • Vertical 4 Specify the guideline settings you want. 5 Click Add. You can also add a guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler in the drawing window. To add a slanted guideline 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Guidelines. 3 In the Guidelines list of categories, click Guides. 4 From the Specify list box, choose one of the following: • 2 points — lets you specify two points to be joined to create a guideline • Angle and 1 point — lets you specify one point and an angle. The guideline crosses through the point at the angle specified. 5 Choose a unit of measure from the list box. 6 Specify the x and y coordinates and, if applicable, the angle. 7 Click Add. 516 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also add a slanted guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler in the drawing window, and typing a value in the Angle of rotation box on the property bar. To use an object as a guide 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the Object Manager docker, click the Guides layer on the page you want. 3 Draw and position the object you want to use as a guide. To set guidelines for the entire document 1 Click Window Object manager. 2 In the Object Manager docker, click Guides on the Master page. 3 In the drawing window, add the guidelines you want. The guidelines that you set on the Guides layer of the Master page appear on all pages of the document. These guidelines appear in addition to any guidelines that you set for individual pages. To add preset guidelines 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document, Guidelines list of categories, click Presets. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Corel presets • User defined presets 4 Specify guideline settings by enabling the corresponding check boxes. If you enable the User defined presets option, specify values in the Margins, Columns, or Grid areas. 5 Click Apply presets. Working with pages and layout tools 517 To modify guidelines To Do the following Select a single guideline Click the guideline with the Pick tool Select all guidelines on a page Click Edit Select all Guidelines. The local guidelines and master guidelines are selected. Move a guideline Drag a guideline to a new position in the drawing window. Rotate a guideline Using the Pick tool , click the guideline twice, and then rotate the guideline when skewing handles appear. Lock a guideline Click a guideline with the Pick tool, and click Arrange Lock object. Unlock a guideline Click a guideline with the Pick tool, and click Arrange Unlock object. Delete a guideline Click a guideline with the Pick tool, and press Delete. Delete a preset guideline Click Tools Options. In the Document, Guidelines list of categories, click Presets. Disable the check box beside the preset guideline that you want to delete. . You can also lock or unlock a guideline by right-clicking the guideline and then clicking Lock object or Unlock object. You can access the guidelines setup directly by right-clicking a ruler and then clicking Guidelines setup. Setting the drawing scale You can choose a preset or custom drawing scale so that distances in a drawing are proportionate to real-world distances. For example, you can specify that 1 inch in the drawing corresponds to 1 meter in the physical world. A preset drawing scale lets you 518 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide set a typical scale, such as 1:2 or 1:10. A custom drawing scale lets you set any distance on the page to correspond to a real-world distance. For example, you can set a more accurate, precise scale that includes decimal numbers, such as 4.5 to 10.6. Drawing scales are particularly useful if you are creating a technical or architectural drawing with dimension lines. For information about dimension lines, see “Drawing dimension lines” on page 144. To choose a preset drawing scale 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3 Click Edit scale. 4 Choose a drawing scale from the Typical scales list box. To create a custom drawing scale 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3 Click Edit scale. 4 Choose Custom from the Typical scales list box. 5 Specify the settings you want. The Edit scale button does not appear if the ruler’s unit of measure is pixels. If the drawing scale is set to anything other than 1:1, the units on the vertical ruler are the same as the units on the horizontal ruler. Working with pages and layout tools 519 Working with tables A table provides a structured layout that lets you present text or images within a drawing. You can draw a table, or you can create a table from paragraph text. You can easily change the look of a table by modifying the table properties and formatting. In addition, because tables are objects, you can manipulate them in various ways. You can also import existing tables from a text file or a spreadsheet. This section contains the following topics: • Adding tables to drawings • Selecting, moving, and navigating table components • Inserting and deleting table rows and columns • Resizing table cells, rows, and columns • Formatting tables and cells • Working with text in tables • Converting tables to text • Merging and splitting tables and cells • Manipulating tables as objects • Adding images, graphics, and backgrounds to tables • Importing tables in a drawing Adding tables to drawings With Corel DESIGNER, you can add a table to a drawing to create a structured layout for text and images. You can draw a table, or you can create a table from existing text. Working with tables 521 In this example, a table was used to create the title block of a drawing. To add a table to a drawing 1 Click the Table tool . 2 Type values in the Number of rows and columns boxes on the property bar. The value that you type in the top portion specifies the number of rows; the value that you type in the bottom portion specifies the number of columns. 3 Drag diagonally to draw the table. You can also create a table by clicking Table Create new table, and then typing values in the Number of rows, Number of columns, Height, and Width boxes in the Create new table dialog box. If you want to resize or scale the table, you can change the table’s reference point to use by finding the Object origin icon on the property bar and clicking the box that corresponds to the reference point you want to set. To create a table from text 1 Click the Pick tool . 2 Select the text that you want to convert to a table. 3 Click Table Convert text to table. 4 In the Create columns based on the following separator area, choose one of the following options: 522 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Commas — creates a column where a comma appears and a row where a paragraph marker appears • Tabs — creates a column where a tab appears and a row where a paragraph marker appears • Paragraphs — creates a column where a paragraph marker appears • User defined — creates a column where a specified marker appears and a row where a paragraph marker appears If you enable the User defined option, you must type a character in the User defined box. If you do not type a character in the User defined box, only one column is created, and each paragraph of text creates a table row. You can also convert a table to text. For more information, see “To convert a table to text” on page 532. Selecting, moving, and navigating table components You must select a table, table rows, table columns, or table cells before you insert rows or columns, change the table border properties, add a background fill color, or edit other table properties. You can move selected rows and columns to a new location in a table. You can also copy or cut a row or column from one table and paste it in another table. In addition, you can move from one table cell to another when editing the table cell text, and you can set the direction in which the Tab key lets you move around a table. To select a table, row, or column 1 Click the Table tool , and then click a table. 2 Perform one of the following tasks. To Do the following Select a table Click Table Select Table. Select a row Click in a row, and click Table Select Row. Select a column Click in a column, and click Table Select Column. Working with tables 523 To Do the following Select all table contents Position the Table tool pointer over the upper-left corner of the table until a diagonal arrow appears , and click. Use a keyboard shortcut to select a table With the Table tool pointer inserted in a cell, press Ctrl + A + A. Select a row by clicking within a table Position the Table tool pointer over the table border to the left of the row that you want to select. When a horizontal arrow appears , click the border to select the row. Select a column by clicking within the table Position the Table tool pointer over the top border of the column that you want to select. When a vertical arrow appears , click the border to select the column. To select table cells To Do the following Select a table cell Click the Table tool , click a table, and click a cell. Then, click Table Select Cell. Select nonadjacent table cells Using the Table tool, click a table. Then, hold down Ctrl, and click each table cell. This feature lets you change the text properties of several cells simultaneously. You can also select a cell by using the Shape tool tool pointer in a cell and pressing Ctrl + A. , or by inserting the Table To move a table row or column 1 Select the row or column that you want to move. 2 Drag the row or column to another location in the table. 524 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To move a table row to another table 1 Select the table row that you want to move. 2 Click Edit Cut. 3 Select a row in the other table. 4 Click Edit Paste. 5 Choose one of the following options: • Replace selected row • Insert above selected row • Insert below selected row To move a table column to another table 1 Select the table column that you want to move. 2 Click Edit Cut. 3 Select a column in the other table. 4 Click Edit Paste. 5 Choose one of the following options: • Replace selected column • Insert left of the selected column • Insert right of the selected column To move to the next table cell • With the Table tool inserted in a cell, press Tab. If you are pressing Tab in a table for the first time, you must choose a tab order option from the Tab order list box. You can use the Tab key to move to the next cell only if the Move to the next cell option is enabled in the Tab key options dialog box. To change the navigational direction of the Tab key 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace, Toolbox list of categories, click Table tool. 3 Enable the Move to the next cell option. Working with tables 525 4 From the Tab order list box, choose one of the following options: • Left to right, top to bottom • Right to left, top to bottom You can program the Tab key to insert a tab character in the table text by enabling the Insert a tab character into the text option. Inserting and deleting table rows and columns You can insert and delete the rows and columns in a table. To insert a table row 1 Select a row in the table. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Insert a row above the selected row Click Table Insert Row above. Insert a row below the selected row Click Table Insert Row below. Insert multiple rows above the selected row Click Table Insert Insert rows, type a value in the Number of rows box, and enable the Above the selection option. Insert multiple rows below the selected row Click Table Insert Insert rows, type a value in the Number of rows box, and enable the Below the selection option. When you use either the Row above command or the Row below command from the Table Insert menu, the number of rows that are inserted depends on how many rows you have selected. For example, if you have selected two rows, then two rows are inserted in the table. To insert a table column 1 Select a column. 2 Perform a task from the following table. 526 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Insert a column to the left of the selected column Click Table Insert Column left. Insert a column to the right of the selected column Click Table Insert Column right. Insert multiple columns to the left of the selected column Click Table Insert Insert columns, type a value in the Number of columns box, and enable the Left of the selection option. Insert multiple columns to the right of the selected column Click Table Insert Insert columns, type a value in the Number of columns box, and enable the Right of the selection option. When you use the Column left command or the Column right command from the Table Insert menu, the number of columns that are inserted depends on how many columns you have selected. For example, if you have selected two columns, then two columns are inserted in the table. To delete a row or column from a table 1 Select the row or column that you want to delete. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Delete a row Click Table Delete Row. Delete a column Click Table Delete Column. Resizing table cells, rows, and columns You can resize table cells, rows, and columns. In addition, if you previously changed the sizes of some rows or columns, you can redistribute all rows or all columns so that they are the same size. Working with tables 527 If table rows are different sizes (left), you can distribute them so that they are the same size (right). To resize a table cell, row, or column 1 Click the Table tool , and then click the table. 2 Select the cell, row, or column that you want to resize. 3 On the property bar, type values in the following boxes: • Width • Height To distribute table rows and columns 1 Select the table cells that you want to distribute. 2 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Make the height of all selected rows the same Click Table Distribute Distribute rows evenly. Make the width of all selected columns the same Click Table Distribute Distribute columns evenly. 528 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Formatting tables and cells You can change the look of a table by modifying both table and cell borders. For example, you can change the table border width or color. You can modify both table and table cell borders. In addition, you can change the table cell margins and cell border spacing. The cell margins let you increase the space between the cell borders and the text in the cell. By default, table cell borders overlap to form a grid. However, you can increase the cell border spacing to move the borders away from each other. As a result, the cells do not form a grid, but appear as individual boxes (also known as “separated borders”). You can modify an existing table (left) by applying separated borders (right). Working with tables 529 To modify table borders and cell borders 1 Select the table or table area that you want to modify. A table area can include a cell, a group of cells, rows, columns, or the entire table. 2 Click the Border button want to modify. on the property bar, and choose the borders that you 3 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Modify the border thickness Choose a border width from the Width list box on the property bar. Modify the border color Click the color picker on the property bar, and then click a color on the color palette. Modify the border line style Click the Outline pen button on the property bar, and set outline properties in the Outline pen dialog box. To modify cell margins in tables 1 Click the Table tool , and then click the table. 2 Select the cells that you want to modify. 3 Click Margins on the property bar. 4 Type a value in the Top margin box. By default, the value in the top margin box is applied to all margins, so that equal margins are created. If you want to apply different values for the margins, click the Lock button to unlock the margin boxes, and type values in the Top margin, Bottom margin, Left margin, and Right margin boxes. 5 Press Enter. To modify cell border spacing in tables 1 Click the Table tool , and then click the table. 2 Click Options on the property bar. 3 Enable the Separated cell borders check box. 530 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 4 Type a value in the Horizontal cell spacing box. By default, the vertical cell spacing is equal to the horizontal cell spacing. If you do not want equal cell spacing, click the Lock button to unlock the Vertical cell spacing box, and then type values in both the Horizontal cell spacing and Vertical cell spacing boxes. 5 Press Enter. Working with text in tables You can easily add text to table cells, and you can modify this text as you would any other paragraph text. For example, you can change the font, add bullets, or add indents to table text. You can change the text properties of a single table cell, or of multiple table cells simultaneously. In addition, you can add tab stops to table cells so that text is shifted away from the cell margins. When you type text in a new table, you can choose to automatically adjust the size of table cells. To type text in a table cell 1 Click the Table tool . 2 Click a cell. 3 Type text in the cell. You can select text in a cell by pressing Ctrl + A. To change the properties of text in table cells 1 Using the Table tool, click a table. 2 Hold down Ctrl, and click the table cells that contain text to be formatted. 3 To change the character properties, click Text Character formatting, and change any of the settings in the Character formatting docker. 4 To change the paragraph properties, click Text Paragraph formatting, and change any of the settings in the Paragraph formatting docker. Working with tables 531 For more information about formatting text, see “Adding and formatting text” on page 429. To change the text properties for an entire row, column, or table simultaneously, you must first select the table component or table. For more information, see “To select a table, row, or column” on page 523. To insert a tab stop in a table cell • Click Text Insert formatting code Tab. Another way to insert a tab stop is by pressing the Tab key. To use this method, you must set the Tab key to insert tab stops. For information about changing the Tab key options, see “To change the navigational direction of the Tab key” on page 525. To automatically resize table cells when you type 1 Click the Pick tool , and then click the table. 2 Click Options on the property bar, and enable the Automatically resize cells when typing check box. This option can be applied to new tables that do not yet have text or other content. If a table already contains text, only cells to which new text is added will be resized. Converting tables to text If you no longer want table text to appear in a table, you can convert the table text to paragraph text. For more information about converting text to a table, see “To create a table from text” on page 522. To convert a table to text 1 Click the Table tool , and then click the table. 2 Click Table Convert table to text. 532 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 In the Separate cell text with area, choose one of the following options: • Commas — replaces each column with a comma and replaces each row with a paragraph marker • Tabs — replaces each column with a tab and replaces each row with a paragraph marker • Paragraphs — replaces each column with a paragraph marker • User defined — replaces each column with a specified character and replaces each row with a paragraph marker If you enable the User defined option, you need to type a character in the User defined box. If you do not type a character in the User defined box, each of the table rows is divided into paragraphs, and the table columns are ignored. Merging and splitting tables and cells You can change how a table is configured by merging adjacent cells, rows, and columns. If you merge table cells, the formatting of the upper-left cell is applied to all merged cells. Alternatively, you can unmerge cells that were previously merged. You can change the look of a table (left) by merging adjacent table cells (right). You can also split table cells, rows, or columns. Splitting lets you create new cells, rows, or columns without changing the size of the table. Working with tables 533 You can insert additional rows in a table (left) by splitting table cells (right). To merge table cells 1 Select the cells to be merged. The selection must be rectangular. 2 Click Table Merge cells. To unmerge table cells 1 Select the cell that you want to unmerge. 2 Click Table Unmerge cells. To split table cells, rows, or columns 1 Click the Table tool . 2 Select the cell, row, or column that you want to divide. 3 Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Split a selection horizontally Click Table Split into rows, and type a value in the Number of rows box. Split a selection vertically Click Table Split into columns, and type a value in the Number of columns box. 534 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Manipulating tables as objects You can manipulate tables as you would other objects. The following table lists the various ways to manipulate a table as an object. You can For more information see Resize and scale a table “Sizing and scaling objects” on page 231 Rotate a table “Rotating objects” on page 233 Mirror a table “Flipping objects” on page 234 Lock a table “Locking objects” on page 245 Convert a table to a bitmap “Converting vector graphics to bitmaps” on page 541 Break a table apart “To convert objects to curve objects” on page 179 Adding images, graphics, and backgrounds to tables If you need to arrange bitmap images or vector graphics in an orderly way, you can add them to tables. You can also change the look of a table by adding a background color. To insert an image or a graphic in a table cell 1 Copy an image or a graphic. 2 Click the Table tool, and select the cell where you want to insert the image or graphic. 3 Click Edit Paste. You can also insert a graphic or an image by holding down the right mouse button over the image, dragging the image to a cell, releasing the right mouse button, and then clicking Place inside cell. Working with tables 535 To add a background color to a table 1 Click the Table tool , and then click the table. 2 Click the Background color picker, and then click a color on the color palette. You can also modify the background color of specific cells, rows, or columns by selecting the cells, clicking the Background color picker on the property bar, and then clicking a color on the color palette. Importing tables in a drawing With Corel DESIGNER, you can create tables by importing content from Quattro Pro® (.qpw) and Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) spreadsheets. You can also import tables created in a word-processing application, such as a WordPerfect or Microsoft® Word. To import a table from Quattro Pro or Excel 1 Click File Import. 2 Choose the drive and folder where the spreadsheet is stored. 3 Click the file to select it. 4 Click Import. The Import/Paste dialog box appears. 5 From the Import tables as list box, choose Tables. 6 Choose one of the following options: • Maintain fonts and formatting — imports all fonts and formatting that are applied to the text • Maintain formatting only — imports all formatting that is applied to the text • Discard fonts and formatting — ignores all fonts and formatting that are applied to the text To import a table from a word-processing document 1 Click File Import. 2 Choose the drive and folder where the text file is stored. 3 Click the file. 4 Click Import. 536 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 5 From the Import tables as list box, choose Tables. 6 Choose one of the following options: • Maintain fonts and formatting — imports all fonts and formatting that are applied to the text • Maintain formatting only — imports all formatting that is applied to the text • Discard fonts and formatting — ignores all fonts and formatting that are applied to the text Working with tables 537 Bitmaps Working with bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Working with bitmap color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Working with RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 539 Working with bitmaps You can convert a vector graphic to a bitmap. You can also import and crop bitmaps in Corel DESIGNER. You can also add color masks and special effects, and you can change the color and tone of the images. This section contains the following topics: • Converting vector graphics to bitmaps • Importing bitmaps • Cropping bitmaps • Changing the dimensions and resolution of bitmaps • Straightening bitmaps • Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps • Removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps • Applying special effects in bitmaps • Working with colors in bitmaps • Using the Image Adjustment Lab • Adjusting color and tone • Using the Tone Curve filter • Transforming color and tone • Editing bitmaps with Corel PHOTO-PAINT Converting vector graphics to bitmaps When you convert a vector graphic to a bitmap, you can apply special effects that are unavailable for vector graphics or objects. The process of converting a vector graphic to a bitmap is also known as “rasterizing.” When you convert the vector graphic, you can select the color mode of the bitmap. A color mode determines the number and kind of colors that make up the bitmap, so the Working with bitmaps 541 file size is also affected. For more information about color modes, see “Changing the color mode of bitmaps” on page 567. You can also specify settings for such controls as dithering, anti-aliasing, overprinting black, background transparency, and color profile. When you export a file to a bitmap file format, such as TIFF, JPEG, CPT, or PSD, the same bitmap conversion options are available. For more information about exporting, see “Exporting files” on page 652. To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap 1 Select an object. 2 Click Bitmaps Convert to bitmap. 3 Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box. 4 Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. 5 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This option is available for images that use 256 or fewer colors. • Always overprint black — overprints black when black is the top color. Enabling this option prevents gaps from appearing between black objects and underlying objects when you print bitmaps. • Apply ICC profile — applies the International Color Consortium profiles to standardize colors across devices and color spaces • Anti-aliasing — smooths the edges of the bitmap • Transparent background — makes the background of the bitmap transparent You can change the black threshold for the Always overprint black option. For information about setting the black threshold, see “To set the overprint black threshold” on page 638. If you export a vector file to a bitmap format, such as GIF, you are prompted to set the bitmap conversion options described in the procedure above before you export the file. Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background. 542 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap when exporting 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 3 Choose a bitmap file format from the Save as type list box, and type a filename in the File name list box. 4 Set the options you want, and click Export. 5 In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, type values in one of the following pairs of boxes: • Width and Height — let you specify the image dimensions • Width % and Height % — let you resize the image to a percentage of its original size 6 To specify the resolution, type a value in the Resolution box. 7 Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. 8 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This option is available for images that use 256 or fewer colors. • Always overprint black — overprints black when black is the top color. Enabling this option when you print bitmaps prevents gaps from appearing between black objects and underlying objects. • Apply ICC profile — applies the International Color Consortium profiles to standardize colors across devices and color spaces 9 In the Options area, enable any of the following: • Anti-aliasing — smooths the edges of the bitmap • Maintain layers — preserves layers • Transparent background — makes the background of the bitmap transparent You can change the black threshold for the Always overprint black option. For information about setting the black threshold, see “To set the overprint black threshold” on page 638. Not all options in the Convert to bitmap dialog box are available for all bitmap file formats. Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background. Working with bitmaps 543 Importing bitmaps You can import a bitmap into a drawing either directly or by linking it to an external file. When you link to an external file, edits to the original file are automatically updated in the imported file. After you import a bitmap, the status bar provides information about its color mode, size, and resolution. For more information about importing bitmaps, see “Importing files” on page 647. For more information about managing externally linked bitmaps, see “Adding bookmarks and hyperlinks to documents” on page 273. You can also resample or crop a bitmap while importing. For more information, see “To resample a bitmap while importing” on page 650 and “To crop a bitmap while importing” on page 651. Cropping bitmaps Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. To crop a bitmap into a rectangular shape, you can use the Crop tool. For more information, see “To crop objects” on page 186. To crop a bitmap into an irregular shape, you can use the Shape tool and the Crop bitmap command. To crop a bitmap 1 Click the Shape tool . 2 Select a bitmap. 3 Drag the corner nodes to reshape the bitmap. If you want to add a node, double-click the node boundary (dotted line) by using the Shape tool where you want the node to appear. 4 Click Bitmaps Crop bitmap. You cannot crop a bitmap comprised of more than one object. You can also crop a selected bitmap after you drag the corner nodes by clicking the Pick tool , then clicking the Crop bitmap button on the property bar. 544 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Changing the dimensions and resolution of bitmaps After you add a bitmap to a drawing, you can change its dimensions and resolution. Changing dimensions You can change the physical dimensions of bitmaps by increasing or decreasing their height and width. When you increase the dimensions, the application inserts new pixels between existing pixels, and their colors are based on the colors of adjacent pixels. If you increase the dimensions of bitmaps significantly, bitmaps may appear stretched and pixelated. The size of the bitmap on your screen depends on the pixel height and width of the bitmap, on the zoom level, and on your monitor settings. As a result, the size of the bitmap may appear different on your screen and in print. Changing bitmap resolution You can change the resolution of a bitmap to increase or decrease its file size. Resolution is measured by the number of dots per inch (dpi) when the bitmap is printed. The resolution you choose depends on how the bitmap is output. Typically, bitmaps created only for display on computer monitors are 96 or 72 dpi and bitmaps created for the Web are 72 dpi. Bitmaps created for printing on desktop printers are generally 150 dpi, while professionally printed bitmaps are usually 300 dpi, or higher. Higher-resolution bitmaps contain smaller and more densely packed pixels than lowerresolution bitmaps. Upsampling increases the resolution of a bitmap by adding more pixels per unit of measure. Bitmap quality may be reduced because the new pixels are interpolated based on the colors of neighboring pixels; the original pixel information is simply spread out. You cannot use upsampling to create detail and subtle color gradations where none existed in the original image. Downsampling decreases the resolution of a bitmap by removing a specific number of pixels per unit of measure. Best results are usually achieved when downsampling is done after color and tone corrections but before sharpening. To change the dimensions of a bitmap 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Resample. 3 Choose a unit of measure from the list box next to the Width and Height boxes. 4 Type values in any of the following boxes: • Width • Height Working with bitmaps 545 If you want to minimize the jagged appearance of curves, enable the Anti-alias check box. If you want to maintain the file size, enable the Maintain original size check box. When this check box is enabled, the resolution of the bitmap is automatically adjusted as you change the image dimensions. You can maintain the proportions of the bitmap by enabling the Maintain aspect ratio check box and typing a value in either the Width or Height box. You can also resample the bitmap as a percentage of its original size by typing values in the Width % and Height % boxes. To change the resolution of a bitmap 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Resample. 3 In the Resolution area, type values in any of the following boxes: • Horizontal • Vertical If you want to maintain the proportions of the bitmap, enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. If you want to maintain the file size, enable the Maintain original size check box. When this check box is enabled, the height and width of the bitmap are automatically adjusted as you change the resolution. You can also resample a selected bitmap by clicking the Resample button on the property bar. Enable the Anti-alias check box to minimize the jagged appearance of curves. Straightening bitmaps The Straighten image dialog box lets you straighten bitmap images quickly. This feature is useful for straightening photos that were taken or scanned at an angle. 546 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 1 7 2 3 4 5 8 6 9 10 Straighten image dialog box 1. Preview window 6. Options for cropping and resampling 2. Rotation tools 7. Reset button 3. Pan tool 8. Grid 4. Zoom tools 9. Hint for active control 5. Rotate Image controls 10. Grid control The Straighten image dialog box lets you rotate an image by moving a slider, typing a rotation angle, or using the arrow keys. You can specify a custom rotation angle from -15 to 15 degrees. You can use the preview window to dynamically preview the adjustments that you are making. If you want to change the orientation of the image before straightening it, you can start by rotating the image 90 degrees clockwise and 90 degrees counterclockwise. Working with bitmaps 547 A grid is displayed in the preview window to help you straighten the image. You can make more precise adjustments by controlling the cell size of the grid. To heighten the contrast of the grid against the colors of the image, you can change the grid’s color. You can also hide the grid if you want to preview the final result without the gridlines. In addition, you can zoom in and out, and pan the image in the preview window to evaluate the results. By default, the straightened image is cropped to the cropping area that is displayed in the preview window. The final image has the same aspect ratio as the original image, but it has smaller dimensions. However, you can preserve the original width and height of the image by cropping and resampling the image. You can also produce an image at an angle by disabling cropping and then using the Crop tool to crop the image in the drawing window. To straighten an image 1 Select an image. 2 Click Bitmaps Straighten image. 3 Move the Rotate image slider, or type a value between 15 and -15 in the Rotate image box. 4 If necessary, move the Grid slider to adjust the size of the grid cells. 5 To crop and straighten the image, enable the Crop image check box. The image is cropped to preserve the aspect ratio of the original image, which means that the final image is smaller than the original image. If you want to preserve the width and height of the original image, enable the Crop and resample to original size check box. The final image is resampled. Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps A Digimarc® watermark embeds copyright details, contact information, and image attributes in an image. A watermark makes subtle changes to the brightness of pixels in an image. These changes cannot be readily seen; however, at high magnification, you might notice changes in the brightness of some pixels. Digimarc watermarks aren’t affected by normal editing, printing, and scanning. 548 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Detecting watermarks When you open an image in Corel DESIGNER, you can check for a watermark. If a watermark is present, a copyright symbol appears on the title bar. You can find information about the watermarked image by reading the embedded message and by linking to the contact profile in the Digimarc database. Embedding watermarks In Corel DESIGNER, you can also embed Digimarc watermarks in images. First, you must obtain a unique Creator ID by subscribing to Digimarc’s online service. The Creator ID includes contact details, such as name, phone number, address, e-mail, and Web addresses. Once you have a Creator ID, you can embed a watermark in an image. You can specify the copyright year, image attributes, and the durability of a watermark. You can also specify the target output method for an image, such as print or the Web. Digimarc watermarks do not prevent unauthorized image use or copyright infringement. But the watermarks do communicate copyright claims. They also provide contact information for those who want to use or license an image. For more information about Digimarc, see www.digimarc.com. To detect a watermark 1 Click Bitmaps Plug-ins Digimarc Read watermark. 2 Click Web lookup to view the Web page with contact details, or call the Digimarc fax-back service at the listed fax number. To get a Creator ID 1 Click Bitmaps Plug-ins Digimarc Embed watermark. 2 Click Personalize. 3 In the Personalize Creator ID dialog box, click Register, and follow the instructions on the Digimarc Web site. 4 In the Personalize Creator ID dialog box, type your Creator ID in the Creator ID box. To embed a watermark 1 Click Bitmaps Plug-ins Digimarc Embed watermark. 2 In the Copyright year(s) box, type a year or years. Working with bitmaps 549 3 In the Image attributes area, enable the check boxes for the applicable attributes. 4 Choose an option from the Target output list box. 5 Type a value in the Watermark durability box. Higher values increase the persistence of the watermark under common image modifications such as dithering, cropping, compression, and scaling. If you want to confirm the information available to viewers when they detect the watermark, enable the Verify check box. In the Copyright year(s) box, you cannot type a year before 1922 or after the current year. Separate the years with commas. In the Target output box, the Monitor and Web controls require a setting of less than 200 per inch (dpi), and the Printer control requires a setting of 300 dpi or higher. Combine all objects with the background before adding a watermark. For more information about combining objects with the background, see “Combining objects” on page 244. Removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps You can quickly improve the appearance of a bitmap by removing dust and scratch marks. The dust and scratch filter works by eliminating the contrast between pixels that exceed the contrast threshold you set. You can set a radius to determine how many pixels are affected by the changes. The settings you choose depend on the size of the blemish and the area surrounding it. For example, to remove a white scratch that is 1 or 2 pixels wide on a dark background, you can set a radius of 2 or 3 pixels and set the contrast threshold higher than you would for a similar scratch on a light background. To remove dust and scratch marks from a bitmap 1 Click Effects Correction Dust and scratch. 2 Move the following sliders: • Radius — sets the range of pixels used to produce the effect. To retain image detail, choose a setting as low as possible. • Threshold — sets the amount of noise reduction. To retain image detail, choose a setting as high as possible. 550 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Applying special effects in bitmaps You can apply a wide range of special effects to bitmaps, such as three-dimensional (3D) and artistic effects. Special effect category Description 3D Effects Lets you create the illusion of depth. Effects include Emboss, Page Curl, and Perspective. Art Strokes Lets you apply hand-painted techniques. Effects include Crayon, Impressionist, Pastels, Watercolor, and Pen & Ink. Blur Lets you blur an image to simulate movement, speckling, or gradual change. Effects include Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, and Zoom. Camera Lets you simulate the effect produced by a diffusion lens Color Transform Lets you create photographic illusions by using color reduction and replacements. Effects include Halftone, Psychedelic, and Solarize. Contour Lets you highlight and enhance the edges of an image. Effects include Edge Detect and Trace Contour. Creative Lets you apply various textures and shapes to an image. Effects include Fabric, Glass Block, Crystallize, Vortex, and Stained Glass. Distort Lets you distort image surfaces. Effects include Ripple, Blocks, Swirl, and Tile. Noise Lets you modify the graininess of an image. Effects include Add Noise, Remove Moiré, and Remove Noise. Sharpen Lets you add a sharpening effect to focus and enhance edges. Effects include Adaptive Unsharp, High Pass, and Unsharp Mask. Plug-ins Lets you apply effects from a third-party filter to bitmaps in Corel DESIGNER. An installed plug-in appears at the bottom of the Bitmaps menu. Working with bitmaps 551 Adding plug-in filters to Corel DESIGNER provides additional features and effects that you can use to edit images. You can add plug-in filters, and you can remove them when you no longer need them. Corel DESIGNER automatically inflates a bitmap so that a special effect covers the entire image. You can disable automatic inflation and manually specify dimensions for the inflated bitmap. To apply a special effect 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps, choose a special effect type, and click an effect. 3 Adjust any special effect settings. To add a plug-in filter 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Plug-ins. 3 Click Add. 4 Choose a folder containing a plug-in. To remove a plug-in filter, click a plug-in folder from the Plug-in folders list, and click Remove. To inflate a bitmap manually 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Inflate bitmap Manually inflate bitmap. 3 In the Width and Height areas, do one of the following: • In the Inflate to boxes, type the number of pixels that should make up the dimensions of the inflated bitmap. • In the Inflate by boxes, type the percentages by which to inflate the original bitmap. 4 To inflate the bitmap proportionally, enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. To automatically inflate the bitmap to cover the entire image, click Bitmaps Inflate bitmap Auto inflate bitmap. 552 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with colors in bitmaps Corel DESIGNER lets you change colors in monochrome images, hide and show colors, and mask colors. Monochrome bitmaps have two colors: black and white. You can replace the black and white pixels with any color on a color palette. You can hide and display selected colors by masking them. Hiding colors in a bitmap lets objects or backgrounds show through the image. Hiding a color can also alter the apparent shape of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap shows a person on a black background, you can hide the background so that the bitmap appears to take on the shape of the person rather than a rectangular shape. Also, hiding colors in bitmaps can increase the speed at which objects are rendered on the screen. You can also display certain colors in a bitmap to change the appearance of the image or to see where a particular color has been applied. You can mask as many as 10 colors in a bitmap. Color masking also lets you change selected colors without altering the other colors in an image. You can also save a bitmap color mask to a file and open the file for future use. To color a monochrome bitmap 1 Select a bitmap by using the Pick tool . 2 Right-click a color on the color palette to change the color of the foreground (black) pixels. 3 Click a color on the color palette to change the color of the background (white) pixels. To hide or display a color in a bitmap 1 Select the bitmap by using the Pick tool . 2 Click Bitmaps Bitmap color mask. 3 Enable one of the following options: • Hide colors • Show colors 4 Enable the check box next to the channel that you want to hide or display. 5 Move the Tolerance slider to set the color tolerance for the color. 6 Click the Color selector button . 7 Click the color that you want to hide or display. 8 Click Apply. Working with bitmaps 553 Higher tolerance levels target a broader range of colors around the color you select. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, Corel DESIGNER hides or displays such colors as pastel blue or electric blue. To open a bitmap color mask 1 Click Bitmaps Bitmap color mask. 2 Click the Open mask button . 3 Choose the folder where the color mask file is stored. 4 Double-click the file. Files containing bitmap color mask have the filename extension .ini. To change a masked color 1 Click Bitmaps Bitmap color mask. 2 Choose a color from the list of masked colors. 3 Click the Edit color button . 4 Use the controls in the Select color dialog box to edit the color. You can also Save a bitmap color mask Click the Save mask button . Choose the folder where you want to save the current color mask. Type a name for the file in the File name list box. Click Save. You can also change a masked color by clicking the Color selector button selecting another color from the bitmap, and clicking Apply. , Using the Image Adjustment Lab The Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most photos quickly and easily. You can access the Image Adjustment Lab by clicking Bitmaps Image Adjustment Lab. 554 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 1 7 2 3 4 8 5 9 6 10 1. Rotation tools 5. Select white point 9. Sliders 2. Pan tool 6. Select black point 10. Hint for current tool 3. Zoom tools 7. Undo, Redo, and Reset 11. Histogram 4. Preview Modes 8. Snapshots 11 The Image Adjustment Lab consists of automatic and manual controls, which are organized in a logical order for image correction. By starting in the upper-right corner and working your way down, you can select only the controls you need to correct the problems specific to your image. It is best to crop or retouch any areas of the image before beginning the color and tone corrections. When you work in the Image Adjustment Lab, you can take advantage of the following features: • Create snapshot — You can capture the corrected version of an image in a “snapshot” at any time. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below the Working with bitmaps 555 image. Snapshots make it easy to compare different corrected versions of the image so you can choose the best one. • Undo, Redo, and Reset to original — Image correction can be a trial-and-error process, so the ability to undo and redo corrections is important. The Reset to original command lets you clear all corrections so that you can start again. Using automatic controls You can begin by using the automatic correction controls: • Auto adjust — automatically corrects the contrast and color in an image by detecting the lightest and darkest areas and adjusting the tonal range for each color channel. In some cases, this control may be all you need to improve an image. In other cases, you can undo the changes and proceed with more precise controls. • Select white point tool — automatically adjusts the contrast in an image according to the white point that you set. For example, you can brighten an image that is too dark by using the Select white point tool. • Select black point tool — automatically adjusts the contrast in an image according to the black point that you set. For example, you can darken an image that is too light by using the Select black point tool. Using color correction controls After using the automatic controls, you can correct color casts in your image. Color casts are typically caused by the lighting conditions when a photo is taken, and they can be influenced by the processor in your digital camera or scanner. • Temperature slider — lets you correct color casts by “warming” or “cooling” the color in an image to compensate for the lighting conditions at the time the photo was taken. For example, to correct a yellow color cast caused by taking a photo indoors in dim incandescent lighting, you can move the slider toward the blue end to increase the temperature values (based on degrees Kelvin). Lower values correspond to low lighting conditions, such as candlelight or light from an incandescent light bulb; these conditions cause an orange cast. Higher values correspond to intense lighting conditions, such as sunlight; these conditions cause a blue cast. • Tint slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the green or magenta in an image. You can add green by moving the slider to the right; you can add magenta by moving the slider to the left. Moving the Tint slider after using the Temperature slider lets you fine-tune an image. • Saturation slider — lets you adjust the vividness of colors. For example, by moving the slider to the right, you can increase the vividness of a blue sky in an image. By 556 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide moving the slider to the left, you can reduce the vividness of colors. You can create a black-and-white photo effect by moving the slider all the way to the left, so that all color in the image is removed. Correction of a color cast. The image on the right is the corrected version. Adjusting brightness and contrast across an entire image You can brighten, darken, or improve the contrast in an entire image by using the following controls: • Brightness slider — lets you brighten or darken an entire image. This control can correct exposure problems caused by too much light (overexposure) or too little light (underexposure) at the time the photo was taken. If you want to lighten or darken specific areas of an image, you can use the Highlights, Shadows, and Midtones sliders. Adjustment made by the Brightness slider is nonlinear, so the current white point and black point values are not affected. • Contrast slider — increases or decreases the difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Moving the slider to the right makes the light areas lighter and the dark areas darker. For example, if the image has a dull, gray tone, you can sharpen the detail by increasing the contrast. Adjusting the brightness and contrast of an image can reveal more image detail. Adjusting highlights, shadows, and midtones You can brighten or darken specific areas of an image. In many cases, the position or strength of the lighting at the time a photo is taken causes some areas to appear too dark and other areas to appear too light. Working with bitmaps 557 • Highlights slider — lets you adjust brightness in the lightest areas of an image. For example, if you take a photo with a flash, and the flash washes out the foreground subjects, you can move the Highlights slider to the left to darken the washed-out areas of the image. You can use the Highlights slider in conjunction with the Shadows and Midtones sliders to balance the lighting. • Shadows slider — lets you adjust the brightness in the darkest areas of an image. For example, a bright light behind a photo subject (backlighting) at the time a photo is taken can cause the subject to appear in shadow. You can correct the photo by moving the Shadow slider to the right to lighten the dark areas and reveal more detail. You can use the Shadows slider in conjunction with the Highlights and Midtones sliders to balance the lighting. • Midtones slider — lets you adjust the brightness of the midrange tones in an image. After adjusting the highlights and shadows, you can use the Midtones slider to fine-tune the image. The Highlights and Shadows sliders can lighten or darken specific areas of an image. Using the histogram The histogram lets you view the tonal range of an image to evaluate and adjust the color and tone. For example, a histogram can help you detect hidden detail in a photo that is too dark because of underexposure (a photo taken with insufficient light). The histogram plots the brightness values of the pixels in an image on a scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light). The left part of the histogram represents the shadows, the middle part represents the midtones, and the right part represents the highlights. The height of the spikes indicates how many pixels are at each brightness level. For example, a higher number of pixels on the left side of the histogram indicates the presence of image detail in the dark areas of the image. 558 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The photo on the left is underexposed. Right: The histogram indicates a large amount of image detail in the dark areas of the photo. Viewing images in the Image Adjustment Lab The tools in the Image Adjustment Lab let you view images in various ways, so that you can evaluate the color and tone adjustments you make. For example, you can rotate images, pan to a new area, zoom in or out, and choose how to display the corrected image in the preview window. Using other adjustment filters Although the Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most images, a specialized adjustment filter is sometimes required. Using the powerful adjustment filters in the application, you can make precise adjustments to images. For example, you can adjust images by using a tone curve. For more information about adjustment filters, see “Adjusting color and tone” on page 561. To correct color and tone in the Image Adjustment Lab 1 Click Bitmaps Image Adjustment Lab. 2 Click Auto adjust. Auto adjust automatically adjusts color and contrast by setting the white point and black point for an image. If you want to control the white point and black point setting more precisely, click the Select white point tool , and click the lightest area of your image. Then click the Select black point tool , and click the darkest area of your image. 3 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Correct color in the image Adjust the Temperature slider to warm or cool the colors, and then fine-tune the color correction by adjusting the Tint slider. Working with bitmaps 559 To Do the following Make colors more vivid or less vivid Move the Saturation slider to the right to increase the amount of color in the image; move the slider to the left to decrease the amount of color in the image. Brighten or darken an image Move the Brightness slider to the right to lighten the image; move the slider to the left to darken the image. Improve image sharpness by adjusting tone Move the Contrast slider to the right to make the light areas lighter and the dark areas darker. Brighten or darken specific areas Move the Highlights slider to brighten or darken the lightest areas of the image. Then, move the Shadows slider to lighten or darken the darkest areas of the image. Finally, move the Midtones slider to finetune the midrange tones in the image. The Image Adjustment Lab is not available for CMYK images. For CMYK images, you can access the Auto adjust filter and other adjustment filters from the Effects menu. You can capture the current version of your image by clicking the Create snapshot button. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below your image. Each snapshot is numbered sequentially and can be deleted by clicking the Close button in the upper-right corner of the snapshot title bar. You can undo or redo the last correction you made by clicking the Undo button or the Redo button . To undo all corrections, click the Reset to original button. To view images in the Image Adjustment Lab 1 Click Bitmaps Image Adjustment Lab. 2 Perform a task from the following table. 560 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Rotate the image Click the Rotate left button Rotate right button . Pan to another area of an image Using the Pan tool , drag the image until the area you want to see is visible. Zoom in and out Using the Zoom in tool or the Zoom out tool , click in the preview window. Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit Display an image at its actual size Click the 100% View the corrected image in a single preview window Click the Full preview button View the corrected image in one window and the original image in another window Click the Before and after full preview button . View the image in one window with a divider between the original and corrected versions Click the Before and after split preview button . Move your pointer over the dashed divider line, and drag to move the divider to another area of the image. or the button. button. . Adjusting color and tone Corel DESIGNER lets you adjust the color and tone of bitmaps. For example, you can replace colors and adjust the brightness, lightness, and intensity of colors. By adjusting color and tone, you can restore detail lost in shadows or highlights, remove color casts, correct underexposure or overexposure, and generally improve the quality of the bitmaps. You can also correct color and tone quickly by using the Image Adjustment Lab. For more information, see “Using the Image Adjustment Lab” on page 554. You can adjust the color and tone of bitmaps automatically by using the Auto Adjust command or by using the following filters. Working with bitmaps 561 Effect Description Contrast enhancement Lets you adjust the tone, color, and contrast of a bitmap while preserving shadow and highlight detail. An interactive histogram lets you shift or compress brightness values to printable limits. The histogram can also be adjusted by sampling values from the bitmap. Local equalization Lets you enhance contrast near edges to reveal detail in both light and dark regions. You can set the height and width around the region to accentuate contrast. Sample/Target balance Lets you adjust color values in a bitmap with sample colors taken from the image. You can choose sample colors from the dark, midtone, and light ranges of an image and apply target colors to each of the sample colors. Tone curve Lets you perform color corrections precisely, by controlling individual pixel values. By changing pixel brightness values, you can make changes to shadows, midtones, and highlights. For more information, see “Using the Tone Curve filter” on page 564. Brightness-contrast-intensity Lets you adjust the brightness of all colors and the difference between light and dark areas Color balance Lets you add cyan or red, magenta or green, and yellow or blue to selected tones in a bitmap Gamma Lets you accentuate detail in low contrast areas without affecting shadows or highlights 562 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Effect Description Hue-saturation-lightness Lets you adjust the color channels in a bitmap and change the position of colors in the spectrum. This effect allows you to change colors and their richness, as well as the percentage of white in an image. Selective color Lets you change color by changing the percentage of spectrum CMYK process colors from the red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta color spectrums in a bitmap. For example, decreasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum results in a color shift toward yellow. Replace colors Lets you replace one bitmap color with another color. A color mask is created to define the color to be replaced. Depending on the range you set, you can replace one color or shift an entire bitmap from one color range to another. You can set the hue, saturation, and lightness for the new color. Desaturate Lets you reduce the saturation of each color in a bitmap to zero, remove the hue component, and convert each color to its grayscale equivalent. This creates a grayscale black-and-white photo effect without changing the color model. Channel mixer Lets you mix color channels to balance the colors of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap has too much red, you can adjust the red channel in an RGB bitmap to improve image quality. To adjust color and tone automatically 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Auto adjust. Working with bitmaps 563 To adjust color and tone by using an adjustment filter 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Effects Adjust, and click an adjustment filter. 3 Specify any settings you want. Using the Tone Curve filter The Tone curve filter lets you perform color and tonal corrections by adjusting either individual color channels or the composite channel (all channels combined). Individual pixel values are plotted along a tone curve that appears in a graph and represents the balance between shadows (bottom of graph), midtones (middle of graph), and highlights (top of graph). The x-axis of the graph represents the tonal values of the original image; the y-axis of the graph represents the adjusted tonal values. Highlights Midtones Dynamic preview of original and adjusted values Shadows The tone curve shows the balance between the shadows, midtones, and highlights of an image. The original (x) and adjusted (y) pixel values are displayed side by side when you drag the tone curve. This example shows a small adjustment to the tonal range, in which pixel values of 152 are replaced with pixel values of 141. You can fix problem areas by adding nodes to the tone curve and dragging the curve. If you want to adjust specific areas in an image, you can use the Eyedropper tool and select the areas in the image window. You can then drag the nodes that appear on the tone curve to achieve the effect you want. 564 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Original image (left); the image with adjusted tonal range (right) The histogram lets you view the adjusted tonal range and evaluate the results. For more information about histograms, see “Using the histogram” on page 558. To fine-tune your adjustments, you can choose a curve style from the Style list box. For example, you can redraw the curve by using freehand lines or straight line segments. You can adjust the color and tone of an image by applying a preset. To access a preset, click the Open button to the right of the Presets box. You can also save tone settings as presets to use with other images. In addition, you can equalize the tonal range of an image by clicking Auto balance tone. To specify the outlying pixels (clipped pixels) at each end of the tonal range, you can click Settings and type values in the Auto-adjust range dialog box. Transforming color and tone You can transform the color and tone of an image to produce a special effect. For example, you can create an image that looks like a photographic negative or flatten the appearance of an image. To transform the color and tone of images, you can use the following effects: • Deinterlace — lets you remove lines from scanned or interlaced images • Invert — lets you reverse the colors of an image. Inverting an image creates the appearance of a photographic negative. • Posterize — lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an image. Posterize removes gradations and creates larger areas of flat color. To transform color and tone 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Effects Transform, and click any of the following: • Deinterlace • Invert • Posterize Working with bitmaps 565 Editing bitmaps with Corel PHOTO-PAINT You can access Corel PHOTO-PAINT, a complete image-editing application, from within Corel DESIGNER. When you finish editing a bitmap, you can quickly resume your work with Corel DESIGNER. To send a bitmap to Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can click the Edit bitmap button on the property bar, or you can use the Edit bitmap command from the Bitmaps menu. You can also enable an option that lets you access Corel PHOTO-PAINT by doubleclicking a bitmap. You can copy selected objects from Corel PHOTO-PAINT and then paste them into your drawing. The selected objects are pasted as a group of bitmaps. For more information about editing images with Corel PHOTO-PAINT, click Help Help topics from the Corel PHOTO-PAINT menu bar. To edit a bitmap with Corel PHOTO-PAINT 1 Using the Pick tool , select the bitmap that you want to edit. 2 On the property bar, click Edit bitmap to start Corel PHOTO-PAINT. The selected bitmap is displayed in the image window of Corel PHOTO-PAINT. 3 Edit the bitmap. 4 On the standard toolbar, click Finish editing to quit Corel PHOTO-PAINT. The edited bitmap appears on the drawing page of Corel DESIGNER. You can also use this procedure to edit groups of bitmaps. Corel PHOTO-PAINT opens the group of bitmaps as separate objects. If the bitmaps in the group have different color modes, you are prompted to change the color mode of all bitmaps in the group to the color mode of the bottommost bitmap. You can also open Corel PHOTO-PAINT by clicking Bitmaps Edit bitmaps. To access Corel PHOTO-PAINT by double-clicking a bitmap 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click Edit. 3 On the Edit page, enable the Double-click to edit bitmaps in PHOTO-PAINT check box. Enabling this check box lets you access Corel PHOTO-PAINT by double-clicking the bitmap in Corel DESIGNER. 566 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with bitmap color modes Changing an image to another color mode, such as RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale, changes a bitmap’s color structure. This section contains the following topics: • Changing the color mode of bitmaps • Changing bitmaps to black-and-white images • Changing bitmaps to duotones • Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode Changing the color mode of bitmaps The colors of the images that you work with in Corel DESIGNER are based on color modes. Color modes define the color characteristics of images and are described by their component colors. The CMYK color mode is composed of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black values; the RGB color mode is composed of red, green, and blue values. Although you may not be able to see the difference between an image in the CMYK color mode and an image in the RGB color mode on screen, the images are quite different. For the same image dimensions, an RGB image has a smaller file size than a CMYK image, and the RGB color space, or gamut, can display more colors. Therefore, images intended for the Web or desktop printers, which require accurate color fidelity, are generally in RGB mode. Where accurate print reproduction is needed, such as on a commercial printing press, images are generally created in CMYK mode. Paletted color images attempt to preserve color fidelity while reducing the file size, making them ideal for on-screen uses. Each time you convert an image, you may lose color information. For this reason, you should save an edited image before you change it to a different color mode. For more information about color modes, see “Working with color” on page 305. Working with bitmap color modes 567 Corel DESIGNER supports the following color modes: • Black and White (1-bit) • Duotone (8-bit) • Grayscale (8-bit) • Paletted (8-bit) • RGB Color (24-bit) • Lab Color (24-bit) • CMYK Color (32-bit) To change the color mode of a bitmap 1 Click a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Mode, and click a color mode. The current mode of the selected bitmap is not available in the menu. Changing bitmaps to black-and-white images You can change any image to a black-and-white image. In addition to conversion settings such as threshold, screen type, and intensity, there are seven conversion options that affect how the converted images will look. Conversion Line art Produces a high-contrast, black-and-white image. Colors with a grayscale value lower than the threshold value that you set change to black, while colors with a grayscale value higher than the threshold value change to white. Ordered Organizes the gray levels into repeating geometric patterns of black and white pixels. Solid colors are emphasized and image edges are hard. This option is best suited for uniform colors. 568 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Conversion Halftone Creates different shades of gray by varying the pattern of black and white pixels in an image. You can choose the screen type, angle for the halftone, lines per unit, and the unit of measure. Cardinality-Distribution Creates a textured look by applying a calculation and distributing the result to the screen. Jarvis Applies the Jarvis algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images. Stucki Applies the Stucki algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images. Floyd-Steinberg Applies the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images. To change a bitmap to a black-and-white image 1 Click a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Mode Black-and-white (1-bit). 3 Choose an option from the Conversion method list box. 4 Move the Intensity slider. If you want to view different parts of the image, you can drag the image in the Preview window. The Intensity slider is not available for the Halftone conversion option. Changing bitmaps to duotones To convert an image to a duotone, you change a bitmap to the grayscale color mode and enhance it using one to four additional colors, giving the image greater tonal depth. Working with bitmap color modes 569 The following four variations of the color mode correspond to the number of additional inks: • Monotone — a grayscale image colored with a single tone • Duotone — a grayscale image colored with two tones. In most cases, one is black and the other is colored. • Tritone — a grayscale image colored with three tones. In most cases, one is black and the other two are colored. • Quadtone — a grayscale image colored with four tones. In most cases, one is black and the other three are colored. Adjusting tone curves When you change an image to a duotone, a tone curve grid that represents the dynamic tone curves that are used throughout the conversion is displayed. The horizontal plane (x-axis) displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane (y-axis) indicates the intensity of a color (from 0 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values. For example, a grayscale pixel with a color value of 25 is printed with a 25-percent tint of the color. By adjusting the tone curves, you can control the color and intensity of the tone that is added to an image. Saving and loading inks You can save an adjusted duotone tone curve and ink settings and then load them for use with other bitmaps. Specifying how overprint colors display When you change an image to a duotone, you can specify the colors to overprint when you print an image. Overprint colors are used to preserve color integrity when inks overlap. When you display the image, each color is applied on the screen in sequence, creating a layered effect. You can view all instances in which the colors you choose for the duotone conversion overlap. Associated with each instance is the color that is produced by the overlap. You can also choose new overprint colors to see how they overlap. Duotones hold their color ink information when you save to EPS, PDF, Corel DESIGNER (DES), and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file formats. Other file formats don’t support duotone images. 570 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change an image to a duotone 1 Click a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Mode Duotone (8-bit). 3 Click the Curves tab. 4 Choose a duotone type from the Type list box. 5 Double-click an ink color in the Type window. 6 In the Select color dialog box, choose a color, and click OK. If you want to adjust the color’s tone curve, click the ink tone curve on the grid to add a node, and drag the node to adjust the percentage of color at that point on the curve. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each ink color you want to use. You can also Display all the ink tone curves on the grid. Enable the Show all check box. Save the ink settings Click Save. Choose the disk and folder where you want to save the file, and type a filename in the File name box. Specify how overprint colors display Click the Overprint tab, and enable the Use overprint check box. Double-click the color you want to edit, and choose a new color. You can load preset ink colors by clicking Load, locating the file in which the ink settings are stored, and double-clicking the filename. Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode The paletted color mode, also called indexed color mode, is sometimes used for images on the World Wide Web. When you convert an image to the paletted color mode, a fixed color value is assigned to each pixel. These values are stored in a compact color table, or palette, containing up to 256 colors. As a result, the paletted color mode image contains less data than a 24-bit color mode image, and it has a smaller file size. Conversion to paletted color mode works best on images that have a limited range of colors. Working with bitmap color modes 571 Choosing, editing, and saving a color palette When you change an image to the paletted color mode, you can use a predefined palette, or you can customize a color palette by replacing individual colors. Saving conversion settings After you choose a color palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for changing an image to the paletted color mode, you can save the settings as a conversion preset that you can use with other images. You can add as many conversion presets as you want. The color palette you use is called the processed color palette. It can be saved for use with other images. For more information about the predefined color palettes available for the paletted color mode, see “Palette types” on page 573. For more information about creating and opening custom color palettes, see “Creating and editing custom color palettes” on page 322. Dithering Changing images to the paletted color mode lets you use dithering to enhance color information. Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels of a specific color. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates the appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the color palette. You can use two types of dithering: ordered dithering and error diffusion. Ordered dithering approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are emphasized and edges appear harder. Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg are conversion options that provide error diffusion. The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than the error diffusion options (Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg) but is less accurate. Specifying a range-sensitivity color You can change an image to the paletted color mode and specify a focus color and a range sensitivity for the focus color, so that the focus color and colors that fall within the range settings are included in the processed color palette. You can also specify how much emphasis to place on the range sensitivity. Because the palette has a maximum of 256 colors, emphasizing a focus color reduces the number of colors that fall outside the range sensitivity. 572 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Palette types The table below outlines available palette types. Palette type Description Uniform Provides a range of 256 colors with equal parts of red, green, and blue Standard VGA Provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette Adaptive Provides colors original to the image and preserves the individual colors (the entire color spectrum) in the image Optimized Creates a color palette based on the highest percentage of colors in the image. You can also specify a range-sensitivity color for the color palette. This is the most common color palette for photographic images. Black Body Contains colors that are based on temperature. For example, black may represent cold temperatures, while red, orange, yellow, and white may represent hot temperatures. Grayscale Provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black to white System Provides the predefined palette of colors used by the operating system Web-safe Provides a predefined palette of 216 nondithered colors that will display the same on most browsers. This palette is not recommended for use with photographs and only benefits users with older computers. Custom Lets you add colors to create a customized color palette Working with bitmap color modes 573 To change an image to the paletted color mode 1 Click a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Mode Paletted (8-bit). 3 Click the Options tab. 4 Choose a color palette type from the Palette list box. 5 Choose an option from the Dithering list box. 6 Move the Dithering intensity slider. If you want to save the conversion settings as a preset, click the Add preset button, and type a name in the Save preset box. You can achieve better color fidelity by choosing the palette you want to use when you change an image to a paletted bitmap or when you export a GIF or PNG. For example, the standard color palette provides more colors than necessary for an image with a limited range of colors, but you can choose an optimized palette to ensure that color representation is accurate. You can choose a custom color palette by clicking Open, locating the color palette file you want, and double-clicking the filename. You can load preset conversion settings by choosing a preset from the Preset list box. To create a custom processed color palette 1 Click a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Mode Paletted (8-bit). 3 Click the Processed palette tab. 4 Click a color, and click the Edit button. 5 In the Color table, specify the color you want, and click Edit color. 6 Edit the color, and click OK. 7 Click the Save palette as button to save the new palette. 8 Choose the disk and folder where you want to store the color palette. 9 Type a name in the Name box, and click Save. 574 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity 1 Click a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Mode Paletted (8-bit). 3 Click the Options tab. 4 Choose Optimized from the Palette list box. 5 Enable the Color range sensitivity to check box. 6 Click the Eyedropper tool , and click a color in the image. 7 Click the Range sensitivity tab. 8 Move the range sensitivity sliders. If you want to preview the color palette, click the Processed palette tab. Working with bitmap color modes 575 Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results Corel DESIGNER lets you trace bitmaps to convert them to fully editable and scalable vector graphics. You can trace artwork, photos, scanned sketches, or logos and then easily integrate them into your designs. For information about the difference between vector graphics and bitmaps, see “Understanding vector graphics and bitmaps” on page 51. This section contains the following topics: • Tracing bitmaps • PowerTRACE controls • Previewing traced results • Fine tuning traced results • Adjusting colors in traced results • Setting default tracing options • Tips for tracing bitmaps and editing traced results Tracing bitmaps You can trace a bitmap in one step by using the Quick Trace command. Alternatively, you can choose a suitable tracing method and preset style and then use the PowerTRACE controls to preview and adjust the traced results. Corel DESIGNER offers two methods for tracing bitmaps: Centerline Trace and Outline Trace. Choosing a tracing method The Centerline Trace method uses unfilled closed and open curves (strokes) and is suitable for tracing technical illustrations, maps, line drawings, and signatures. This method is also referred to as “stroke tracing.” Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 577 The Centerline Trace method was used to convert the original bitmap (top) into a vector graphic (bottom). The Outline Trace method uses curve objects with no outlines and is suitable for tracing clipart, logos, and photo images. The Outline Trace method is also referred to as “fill” or “contour tracing.” Choosing a preset style A preset style is a collection of settings that are appropriate for the specific type of bitmap you want to trace (for example, line art or a high-quality photo image). Each tracing method comes with specific preset styles. The Centerline Trace method offers two preset styles: one for technical illustrations and another for line drawings. Technical illustration Line drawing The Outline Trace method offers the following preset styles that are suitable for line art, logos, clipart, and photo images. 578 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Line art Logo Detailed logo Clipart Low-quality image High-quality image Adjusting traced results You can adjust the traced results by using the controls in the PowerTRACE dialog box. For more information, see “Fine tuning traced results” on page 583 and “Adjusting colors in traced results” on page 586. To trace a bitmap by using Quick Trace 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Quick Trace. Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 579 You can also trace a bitmap in one step by clicking the Trace bitmap flyout button on the property bar and clicking Quick Trace. You can change the settings that are used by Quick Trace. For more information, see “Setting default tracing options” on page 590. To trace a bitmap by using the Centerline Trace method 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Centerline trace, and click one of the following: • Technical illustration — to trace black-and-white illustrations with thin, faint lines • Line drawing — to trace black-and-white sketches with thick, prominent lines If necessary, adjust the traced results by using the controls of the PowerTRACE dialog box. You can also access PowerTRACE from the Trace bitmap flyout button on the property bar. To trace a bitmap by using the Outline Trace method 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Click Bitmaps Outline trace, and click one of the following: • Line art — lets you trace black-and-white sketches and illustrations • Logo — lets you trace simple logos with little detail and few colors • Detailed logo — lets you trace logos that contain fine detail and many colors • Clipart — lets you trace ready-to-use graphics that vary according to their amount of detail and number of colors • Low quality image— lets you trace photos that lack fine detail (or that contain fine detail that you want to ignore) • High quality image — lets you trace high-quality, highly detailed photos If necessary, adjust the traced results by using the controls of the PowerTRACE dialog box. 580 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide PowerTRACE controls The PowerTRACE dialog box contains controls that help you preview and edit traced results. 1 8 2 9 3 4 5 6 10 7 11 Circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the following table, which describes the main controls of PowerTRACE. Control Description 1. Preview window Lets you preview the traced result and compare it to the source bitmap Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 581 Control Description 2. Preview list box Lets you choose one of the following previewing options: •Before and After — lets you display both the source bitmap and the traced result •Large preview — lets you preview a traced result in a single-pane preview window •Wireframe overlay — lets you display a wireframe (outline) view of the traced result on top of the source bitmap 3. Transparency slider Controls visibility of the source bitmap below the wireframe when the Wireframe overlay option is selected 4. Zooming and panning tools Let you zoom in and out of an image displayed in the preview window, pan an image displayed at a zoom level higher than 100%, and fit an image to the preview window. 5. Colors page Contains controls for modifying the colors of the traced results. For more information, see “Adjusting colors in traced results” on page 586. 6. Trace type list box Lets you change the tracing method 7. Type of image list box Lets you choose a suitable preset style for the image to be traced. The available preset styles change, depending on the tracing method you choose. 8. Undo and Redo buttons Let you undo and redo the last action you performed 9. Reset button Lets you restore the first settings used to trace the source bitmap 582 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Control Description 10. Options button Lets you access the PowerTRACE options page in the Options dialog box to set default tracing options. For more information, see “Setting default tracing options” on page 590. 11. Settings page Contains controls for adjusting the traced results. The Traced result details area on the Settings page lets you view the number of objects, nodes, and colors in the traced result while you are making adjustments. For more information about adjusting traced results, see “Fine tuning traced results” on page 583. Previewing traced results By default, PowerTRACE displays both the source bitmap and the traced result. You can also preview a traced result in a single-pane preview window, or you can display a wireframe (outline) view of the traced graphic on top of the source bitmap. You can zoom in and out to get a better view of the graphic, and you can pan to view areas that fall outside the preview window. To preview traced results • In PowerTRACE, choose one of the following options from the Preview list box: • Before and after — displays both the source bitmap and the traced result • Large preview — displays a preview of the traced result in PowerTRACE • Wireframe overlay — displays a wireframe (outline) preview of the traced result on top of the original bitmap. To control the visibility of the original bitmap underneath the wireframe, move the Transparency slider. Fine tuning traced results PowerTRACE lets you perform the following adjustments to fine-tune your trace results. Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 583 Adjusting detail and smoothing You can adjust the amount of detail in the traced result and smooth curved lines. When you adjust detail, you change the number of objects in the traced result. If you used the Outline Trace method to trace the bitmap, adjusting the traced result also changes the number of colors. Smoothing changes the number of nodes in the traced result. You can also control the appearance of corners in the traced result by setting the threshold for corner smoothness. Left to right: Original image (left); outline tracing with a low detail value (middle); outline tracing with a high detail value (right) Completing a trace By default, the source bitmap is preserved after being traced, and objects in the traced result are automatically grouped. You can have the source bitmap automatically deleted after the trace is complete. Removing and preserving the background You can choose to remove or preserve the background in the traced result. With the Outline Trace method, you can also specify the background color to be removed. If the background color around the edges is removed but some background color still shows through some areas of the image, you can remove the background from the entire image. Setting other Outline Trace options By default, object areas that are hidden from view by overlapping objects are removed from the traced result. You can choose to keep the underlying object areas. This feature is useful for traced results that will be output to vinyl cutters and screen printers. 584 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To reduce the number of objects in the traced result, you can combine adjacent objects of the same color. You can also group objects of the same color so that you can manipulate them more easily in Corel DESIGNER. Undoing and redoing actions You can adjust the settings in PowerTRACE and retrace a bitmap as many times as necessary until you are satisfied with the result. If you make a mistake, you can undo or redo an action, or you can revert to the first traced result. To fine-tune traced results 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Do one of the following: • Click Bitmaps Centerline trace, and click a command. • Click Bitmaps Outline trace, and click a command. 3 On the Settings page, move any of the following sliders: • Detail — lets you control the amount of original detail that is preserved in the traced result. Higher values maintain more detail and result in a greater number of objects and colors; lower values discard some detail and result in fewer objects. • Smoothing — lets you smooth curved lines and control the number of nodes in the traced result. Higher values result in fewer nodes and produce curves that do not closely follow the lines in the source bitmap. Lower values result in more nodes and produce more accurate trace results. • Corner smoothness — This slider works in conjunction with the Smoothing slider and lets you control the appearance of corners. Lower values maintain the appearance of corners; higher values smooth corners. You can also Change the tracing method Choose a method from the Trace type list box. Change the preset style Choose a preset style from the Type of image list box. Keep the source bitmap after a trace In the Options area, disable the Delete original image check box. Discard or preserve the background in the traced result Enable or disable the Remove background check box. Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 585 You can also Specify the background color you want to remove (Outline Trace) Enable the Specify color option, click the Eyedropper tool , and click a color in the preview window. To specify an additional background color to remove, hold down Shift, and click a color in the preview window. The last specified color is displayed next to the Eyedropper tool. Remove a background color from the entire image (Outline Trace) Enable the Remove color from entire image check box. Keep object areas that are hidden by overlapping objects (Outline Trace) Disable the Remove object overlap check box. Group objects by color (Outline Trace) Enable the Group objects by color check box. This check box is available only when the Remove object overlap check box is disabled. Merge adjacent objects that have the same color (Outline Trace) Enable the Merge adjacent objects of the same color check box. Undo or redo an action Click the Undo Revert to the first traced result Click Reset. or Redo button. You can also access PowerTRACE from the Trace bitmap flyout button on the property bar. Adjusting colors in traced results When the source bitmap is traced, the application generates a color palette for the traced result. The color palette uses the color mode of the source bitmap (for example, RGB or CMYK). The number of colors on the color palette is determined by the number of colors in the source bitmap and the selected preset style. 586 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can change the color mode of the traced result, and you can reduce the number of colors in the traced result. Left to right: Original image (left); traced graphic that contains 152 colors (middle); traced graphic that contains 5 colors (right) Sorting colors To edit the color palette more easily, you can sort colors by similarity or frequency. Sorting by similarity arranges the colors based on their hue and lightness. Colors of similar hue and lightness appear close to each other on the color palette. Sorting by frequency arranges the colors based on how much they are used in the traced results. The colors that are used most appear at the top of the color palette. Selecting colors You can select a color by clicking it on the color palette of the traced result or by clicking the color in the preview window. You can also select multiple colors. Editing, merging, and deleting colors When editing a color, you can choose a color from a color model that is different from that of other colors on the palette. For example, if you are editing a color in an RGB traced result, you can change the color to a spot color, creating a mixed color palette. This feature is useful when you are preparing the traced result for commercial printing. With the Outline Trace method, you can also merge and delete colors. By default, when two or more colors are merged, their color values are averaged to produce a new color. The merged colors are replaced by the new color. However, you can change the default setting to replace the colors to be merged with the first color that Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 587 you selected. For information on how to change the default setting, see “Setting default tracing options” on page 590. When you delete a color from the color palette, the deleted color is replaced by the next color on the color palette. Using and creating color palettes If you want the traced result to contain only colors from a specific color palette, you can open that color palette in PowerTRACE. The colors of the traced result are replaced by their closest match on the color palette. After you edit the color palette of the traced graphic, you can save it to create a custom color palette for later use. To adjust the colors of a traced result 1 Select a bitmap. 2 Do one of the following: • Click Bitmaps Centerline trace, and click a command. • Click Bitmaps Outline trace, and click a command. 3 Click the Colors tab, and perform any of the following tasks. To Do the following Change the color mode Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. Reduce the number of colors in a traced result (Outline Trace) Type a value in the Number of colors box, and click outside the box. Select a color Do one of the following: •Click a color on the color palette. The selected color swatch button appears pressed. •Click the Eyedropper tool , and click a color in the preview window. A marquee appears around the selected color. To select an additional color, hold down Shift, and click a color in the preview window. To deselect a color, hold down Ctrl, and click a color. 588 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Select a range of adjacent colors Hold down Shift, and click the first and last color swatch in the range you are selecting on the color palette. Select multiple nonadjacent colors Hold down Ctrl, and click the nonadjacent color swatches on the color palette. Edit a color Select the color you want to edit, click Edit, and modify settings in the Select color dialog box. Merge colors (Outline Trace) Select the colors that you want to merge, and click Merge. If you want to specify how to merge the colors, click Options to access the Options dialog box, and enable an option in the Merge colors area. Delete a color from a traced result (Outline Trace) Select a color, and click the Delete color button . The deleted color is replaced by the next color on the color palette. Use a custom color palette Click the Open color palette button , find the folder where the palette is stored, and click a filename. Color palettes have a .cpl filename extension. Each color of the traced graphic is mapped to a similar color on the custom palette. Create a custom color palette from the edited color palette of a traced result Click the Save color palette button . In the Save palette as dialog box, type a name in the File name box. The number of colors cannot be reduced, and colors cannot be merged, when you use the Centerline Trace method. Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 589 To increase the number of colors in a traced result, you need to change the preset style or increase the amount of detail. For information about how to change the preset style and the amount of detail, see “To fine-tune traced results” on page 585. Setting default tracing options You can enable any of the following tracing options. • Quick Trace method — You can change the default Quick Trace settings to any preset style, or to the most recently used settings. • Performance — This option determines how source bitmaps between 1 and 5 megapixels in size are handled, and how the quality of the traced results is affected. The performance of PowerTRACE depends on the size and color depth of the source bitmaps as well as on the available system memory. High-quality traced results require high-quality source bitmaps, which are often quite large. The larger the source bitmap, the more resources are required. Bitmaps that are too large need to be downsampled before tracing, which may decrease the image quality. To trace large bitmaps without sacrificing quality, you can set PowerTRACE to trace images as large as 5 megapixels (provided RAM is sufficient). To achieve maximum performance, you can set PowerTRACE to prompt you to downsample bitmaps larger that 1 megapixel. • Merge colors — You can choose whether to merge colors in a traced result by averaging their values or by replacing the colors to be merged with the first color you select. To set default tracing options 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click PowerTRACE. 3 Perform any of the following tasks. To Do the following Choose a Quick Trace method From the Quick Trace method list box, choose a preset style or the most recently used settings. 590 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Determine performance level and quality of a traced result Move the Performance slider to the left to increase performance, or to the right to increase the quality of the traced results. The lowest value prompts you to downsample all bitmaps that exceed 1 megapixel. The highest value prompts you to downsample all bitmaps that exceed 5 megapixels. Choose how to merge colors in a traced result In the Merge colors area, enable an option. The Average merging colors option replaces the colors to be merged with a color of their average value. The Merge to first color selected option replaces the colors to be merged with the first selected color. You can also access the PowerTRACE page in the Options dialog box by clicking Options in PowerTRACE. Tips for tracing bitmaps and editing traced results The following tips can help you achieve high-quality trace results. • Use high-quality source bitmaps. If dithering or JPEG compression was used in the source bitmap, the bitmap may contain additional noise. For best traced results, remove the noise before tracing the bitmap. • For best results when you use the Centerline Trace method, convert the bitmap to the black-and-white color mode before tracing. Note that in this case you cannot adjust detail. • When tracing technical illustrations and sketches with faint lines, you can improve the results by applying the Find edges special effect to the source bitmap. To do this, click Bitmaps Contour Find edges. • For outline tracing, reduce the color depth of the bitmap by changing the color mode, and then adjust the color and contrast. • You can adjust the traced results at any time, including during a trace, by changing the PowerTRACE settings. • To trace a specific area in a bitmap, use the Shape tool to define the area before clicking Bitmaps Trace bitmap. Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results 591 • If important detail has been removed from the traced results, you can disable the Remove background check box on the Settings page of PowerTRACE. You can also try enabling the Specify color option on the Settings page and sampling the color you want to specify as a background color. • If background color is removed around the edges but remains within image areas, enable the Remove from entire image check box. • If too many colors or details are lost, move the Detail slider on the Settings page. • To preserve detail in bitmaps that have fine details, thin lines, and no anti-aliasing applied, choose Line art from the Type of image list box on the Settings page. 592 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with RAW camera files You can import and process RAW camera files in Corel DESIGNER. This section contains the following topics: • Using RAW camera files • Bringing RAW camera files into Corel DESIGNER • Adjusting the color and tone of RAW camera files • Sharpening and reducing noise in RAW camera files • Previewing RAW camera files and obtaining image information Using RAW camera files RAW camera files contain picture data that is captured by the image censor of a digital camera. These files are called RAW because, unlike JPEG and TIFF files, they contain minimal in-camera processing and need to be edited and prepared for printing in an image-editing application. With RAW camera files, you can control the processing of image data, rather than having the camera make automatic color adjustments and conversions. You can adjust the white balance, tonal range, contrast, color saturation, and sharpness of a RAW image without any loss of image quality. In addition, you can reprocess RAW images at any time to achieve the results you want. In this sense, RAW camera files can be compared to an exposed but undeveloped film. To take advantage of RAW camera files, you need to set your camera to save files to its own RAW file format. Corel DESIGNER lets you import RAW camera files from supported camera models.To view a list of supported cameras, visit the Corel Knowledge Base. Working with RAW camera files 593 Bringing RAW camera files into Corel DESIGNER When you open single or multiple RAW camera files in Corel DESIGNER, they are first displayed in the Camera RAW Lab. You can use the controls in the Camera RAW Lab to adjust the color and tone of the RAW camera images.If you are satisfied with the adjustments of a file, you can apply the same adjustments to the remaining files. After processing RAW camera files, you can edit them further by using the tools and effects available in Corel DESIGNER. Then, you can save the RAW camera files as TIFF or JPEG files, or you can save them to any other file format supported by Corel DESIGNER. Note that RAW camera files cannot be saved to a RAW camera file format in Corel DESIGNER. Any changes made to the RAW camera files in the Camera RAW Lab are lost unless you save the files to a supported file format. Processing RAW camera files The Camera RAW Lab includes controls that are organized in a logical order for color correction and other adjustments of RAW camera images. It is recommended that you start from the top of the Color page and work your way down. Once you finish correcting the color and tone of your image, you can sharpen it and remove noise by using the controls on the Detail page. For information about the settings on the Color page, see “Adjusting the color and tone of RAW camera files” on page 597. For information about the settings on the Detail page, see “Sharpening and reducing noise in RAW camera files” on page 600. 594 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 2 1 7 8 3 9 4 10 5 6 11 Camera RAW Lab: circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the following table, which describes the main components of the lab. Component Description 1. Rotation tools Let you rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise 2. Zooming and panning tools Let you zoom in and out of an image displayed in the preview window, pan an image displayed at a zoom level higher than 100%, and fit an image to the preview window Working with RAW camera files 595 Component Description 3. Preview modes and Preview window Let you preview the adjustments made to a RAW camera image in a single or split window. To compare the original and the adjusted image, you can display them side by side. 4. Color page Contains controls that let you adjust the color and tone of RAW camera images to remove color casts and reveal hidden detail 5. Detail page Contains controls that let you remove noise from RAW camera images 6. Properties page Contains controls that let you view information about a RAW camera image, such as size, color mode, and camera settings 7. Undo and Redo buttons Let you undo and redo the last action you performed 8. Reset to original button Lets you clear all corrections so that you can start with the original RAW camera image 9. Create snapshot Lets you capture the corrected version of an image in a “snapshot” at any time. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below the image. 10. Hints area Displays information about the active control 11. Histogram Lets you preview the tonal range of the image. To bring a RAW camera file into Corel DESIGNER 1 Click File Import. 2 Select the RAW camera file or files that you want to import, and click Import. 3 In the Camera RAW Lab, adjust the color and tone of the RAW camera image. If necessary, you can also sharpen the image and reduce the amount of noise. 596 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you selected multiple RAW camera files and want to apply the same adjustments to all of them, enable the Apply to all remaining files check box. You can rotate the image by clicking the Rotate left button right button . or Rotate Adjusting the color and tone of RAW camera files You can adjust the color and tone of an image by using the following settings. Color depth Color depth refers to the number of colors an image can contain. One of the advantages of using RAW camera files is that they can contain more colors than photos saved as JPEG or TIFF files. This greater number of colors makes it easier to reproduce colors accurately, reveal detail in shadows, and adjust brightness levels. The Camera RAW Lab lets you process the RAW camera files as 48-bit or 24-bit images. 48-bit images offer more accurate color representation and prevent loss of image quality during retouching. Note that some of the special effects available in Corel DESIGNER cannot be applied to 48-bit images. White balance White balance is the process of removing unnatural color casts from images so that image colors appear as they do in real life. White balance takes into consideration the lighting conditions in which a photo was taken and sets the color balance to produce realistic image colors. By default, when a RAW camera file is brought into Corel DESIGNER, it reflects the camera setting for white balance. This setting appears as the preset As shot in the White balance list box. If you are not satisfied with this setting, you can have the white balance adjusted automatically by choosing the preset Auto. You can also apply any of the following presets: Daylight, Cloudy, Shade, Tungsten, Fluorescent, or Flash. These presets let you simulate different lighting conditions. In addition, you can use the Eyedropper tool to automatically adjust the contrast in an image according to the white or gray point that you sample in the preview window. If the White balance options do not produce the results you want, you can use the following controls to remove color casts: Working with RAW camera files 597 • Temperature slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the color temperature of an image to compensate for the lighting conditions at the time the photo was taken. For example, to correct a yellow color cast caused by taking a photo indoors in dim incandescent lighting, you can move the slider to the left. Conversely, to correct a blue color cast caused by intense lighting conditions, you can move the slider to the right. • Tint slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the green or magenta in an image. You can add green by moving the slider to the right; you can add magenta by moving the slider to the left. Moving the Tint slider after using the Temperature slider lets you fine-tune an image. Tonal adjustments You can use the following controls to adjust the tone of RAW camera files. • Saturation slider — lets you adjust the vividness of colors. For example, by moving the slider to the right, you can increase the vividness of a blue sky in an image. By moving the slider to the left, you can reduce the vividness of colors. • Exposure slider — lets you compensate for the lighting conditions at the time the photo was taken. Exposure is the amount of light allowed to fall on the image sensor of a digital camera. High exposure values result in areas that are completely white (no detail); low values result in increased shadows. Exposure values (EV) range from -3.0 to + 3.0. • Brightness slider — lets you brighten or darken an entire image. If you want to darken only the darkest areas of an image, you must use the Shadow slider. • Shadow slider — lets you adjust the brightness in the darkest areas of an image without affecting the lighter areas. For example, a bright light behind a photo subject (backlighting) at the time a photo is taken can cause the subject to appear in shadow. You can correct the photo by moving the Shadow slider to the right to lighten dark areas and reveal more detail. Using the histogram While you are making adjustments, you can view the tonal range of the image on the histogram to check for any clipping of shadow or highlight areas. Clipping is the shifting of image pixels to white (highlight clipping) or black (shadow clipping). Clipped highlight areas appear completely white and contain no detail; clipped shadow areas appear completely black and contain no detail. The button on the left side of the histogram displays a warning if the image contains shadow clipping. The button on the right side of the histogram displays a warning if 598 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide the image contains highlight clipping. You can also choose to apply shading to the clipped areas in the preview window. To adjust the color and tone of a RAW camera file 1 Click File Import. 2 Select the RAW camera file or files that you want to import, and click Import. 3 From the Color depth list box, choose one of the following options: • 48-bit (16 bits/channel) • 24-bit (8 bits/channel) 4 To remove a color cast, select the Auto option from the White balance list box. If you are not satisfied with the results, you can set the white point more precisely by using the Eyedropper tool to sample a white or gray color in your image. 5 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Simulate different lighting conditions Select an option from the White balance list box. Correct color in the image Adjust the Temperature slider, and then fine-tune the color correction by adjusting the Tint slider. Make colors more vivid or less vivid Move the Saturation slider to the right to increase the amount of color in the image or to the left to decrease the amount of color in the image. Adjust exposure Move the Exposure slider to the left to compensate for high-exposure camera settings or to the right to compensate for low-exposure camera settings. Brighten or darken an image Move the Brightness slider to the right to lighten the image or to the left to darken the image. Adjust the brightness in the darker areas of an image without changing the lighter areas Move the Shadow slider. Show clipped shadow areas Click the button to the left of the histogram. Working with RAW camera files 599 To Do the following Show clipped highlight areas Click the button to the right of the histogram. You can capture the current version of your image by clicking Create snapshot. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below your image. Each snapshot is numbered sequentially and can be deleted by clicking the close button in the upper right corner of the snapshot title bar. To change a color or tone setting one increment at a time, you can click in the box to the right of a slider, and press the Up or Down arrow keys. You can undo or redo the last correction you made by clicking Undo or Redo. To undo all corrections, click Reset to original. Sharpening and reducing noise in RAW camera files You can sharpen RAW camera files to enhance image edges. RAW camera files may contain luminous (grayscale) and color (chroma) noise that is especially obvious in the darker areas of an image. Luminous noise appears as a “white snow” effect; color noise appears as random pixels of different colors scattered against image areas. You can reduce noise in RAW camera files to improve image quality. To sharpen a RAW camera file 1 Click File Import. 2 Select the RAW camera file or files that you want to import, and click Import. 3 In the Camera RAW Lab, click the Detail tab. 4 Move the Sharpness slider to enhance the edges in an image. To reduce noise in a RAW camera file 1 Click File Import. 2 Select the RAW camera file or files that you want to import, and click Import. 3 Click the Detail tab. 4 Move any of the following sliders to the right: 600 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Luminance noise — to reduce the amount of luminance noise • Color noise — to reduce the amount of color noise. Note that higher settings may decrease the color accuracy of an image. Adjusting both the Luminance noise and Color noise settings produces better results. Previewing RAW camera files and obtaining image information By previewing RAW camera files in various ways, you can evaluate the color and tone adjustments you make. For example, you can rotate images, pan to a new area, zoom in or out, and choose how to display the processed image in the preview window. You can obtain information about the color mode, size, and resolution of a RAW camera file. In addition, you can obtain information about the camera and camera settings used when the photo was taken. To preview a RAW camera file 1 Click File Import. 2 Select the RAW camera file or files that you want to import, and click Import. 3 In the Camera RAW Lab, perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Pan to another area of an image Using the Pan tool , drag the image until the area that you want to see is visible. Zoom in and out Using the Zoom in tool or Zoom out tool , click in the preview window. You can also zoom in and out by dragging the Zoom slider. Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit Display an image at its actual size Click the 100% View the corrected image in a single preview window Click the Full preview button Working with RAW camera files button. button. . 601 To Do the following View the corrected image in one window and the original image in another window Click the Before and after full preview button . View the image in one window with a divider between the original and corrected versions Click the Before and after split preview button . Move your pointer over the dashed divider line, and drag to move the divider to another area of the image. To obtain information about a RAW camera file 1 Click File Import. 2 Select the RAW camera file or files that you want to import, and click Import. 3 In the Camera RAW Lab, click the Properties tab, and view any of the properties that are available for the selected RAW camera file, such as color space, camera manufacturer and model, focal length, exposure time, and ISO speed ratings. 602 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Printing Printing basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Preparing files for print service providers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 603 Printing basics Corel DESIGNER provides extensive options for printing your work. This section includes the following topics: • Printing your work • Laying out print jobs • Previewing print jobs • Applying print styles • Fine-tuning print jobs • Printing colors accurately • Printing to a PostScript printer • Using print merge • Viewing preflight summaries Printing your work Using Corel DESIGNER, you can print one or more copies of the same drawing. You can also specify the page type and the page range that you want to print. Before printing a drawing, you can specify printer properties, including paper size and device options. For example, you can specify printer features such as duplexing stapling. To set printer properties 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 In the Destination area, choose a printer from the Printer list box. 4 Click Preferences. 5 Set any properties in the dialog box. Printing basics 605 To print your work 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 In the Destination area, choose a printer from the Printer list box. 4 In the Destination area, choose a page size and orientation option from the Page list box. 5 In the Copies area, type a value in the Number of copies box. If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box. 6 In the Print range area, enable one of the following options: • Current document — prints the active drawing • Current page — prints the active page • Pages — prints the pages that you specify • Documents — prints the documents that you specify • Selection — prints the objects that you have selected If you enable the Pages option, you can choose to print a range of pages, only even pages, only odd pages, or both even and odd pages. You can also Automatically match the printer orientation to the document orientation In the Destination area, choose Match orientation from the Page list box. Apply the printer’s default page size In the Destination area, choose Use printer default from the Page list box. You must select objects before printing a selection. Certain printers support the automatic matching of page size and orientation. To enable this option, you need to modify the driver compatibility settings for the printer by clicking Tools Options. In the list of categories, double-click Global, double-click Printing, click Driver compatibility, and enable the Printer can match document page sizes check box. In the Print dialog box, you can then choose Match orientation and size from the Page list box. 606 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Laying out print jobs You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper. To specify the size and position of a print job 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Layout tab. 3 In the Image position and size area, enable one of the following options: • As in document — maintains the image size as it is in the document • Fit to page — sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page • Reposition images to — lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position from the list box Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and scale in the corresponding boxes. You can also choose an imposition layout, such as 2 x 2 (4-up) or 2 x 3 (6-up), from the Imposition layout list box. For more information, see “Working with imposition layouts” on page 626. To tile a print job 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Layout tab. 3 In the Image position and size area, enable the Print tiled pages check box. 4 Type values in the following boxes: • Tile overlap — lets you specify the amount by which to overlap tiles • % of page width — lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles will occupy You can include tiling alignment marks by enabling the Tiling marks check box. Printing basics 607 Previewing print jobs You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear on paper. For a detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the individual color separations will appear when printed. Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. To preview a print job • Click File Print preview. To close the print preview, click File Close print preview. You can quickly preview a print job in the Print dialog box by clicking File Print and clicking the Mini preview button . To magnify the preview page 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Click View Zoom. 3 Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the box. You can also magnify the preview page by choosing a preset zoom level. You can also zoom in on a portion of the print preview by clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox and marquee selecting an area. To preview color separations 1 Click File Print preview. 2 On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button . You can preview the composite by clicking View Preview separations Composite. You can view individual color separations by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the application window. 608 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To view a summary of issues for a print job 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Preflight tab. If there are no print job issues, the tab name displays as No issues. If there are issues, the tab name displays the number of issues that were found. If you want to exclude certain issues from the preflight check, click Settings, double-click Printing, and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you want overlooked. You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button typing a name in the Save preflight style box. and Applying print styles A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This lets you move a print style from one computer to another, back up a print style, and keep document-specific styles in the same directory as the document file. You can select an existing print style, create a new print style, or edit a print style and save the changes. You can also delete print styles. To choose a print style 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 Choose one of the following from the Print style list box: • Corel DESIGNER defaults • Browse To create a print style 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 Set any printing options. 4 Click Save as. 5 Choose the folder where you want to save the print style. Printing basics 609 6 Type a name for the style in the Filename box. When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called Settings to include. The settings in this section correspond to the printing options you have already selected. You can also specify which settings to include in a print style in this dialog box. You can also save a print style by clicking File Print preview, and clicking the Save print style as button. To edit a print style 1 Click File Print. 2 Choose a print style from the Print style list box. 3 Modify any of the printing options. 4 Click Save as. 5 Choose the folder where the print style is stored. 6 Click the filename. 7 Click Save. You should save the modified settings as a print style or apply the changes before canceling; otherwise, you’ll lose all the modified settings. To delete a print style 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Select a print style. 3 Click the Delete print style button . Fine-tuning print jobs You can fine-tune print jobs to ensure print quality. Because problems sometimes occur when you are printing text to a non-PostScript printing device (GDI printer), you can decrease printing time by specifying driver compatibility for non-PostScript printing devices. For more information, see “Printing colors accurately” on page 612. 610 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If a printing device has difficulty processing large bitmaps, you can divide a bitmap into smaller, more manageable chunks by setting an output threshold. If any lines appear when the printing device prints the chunks, you can set an overlap value to produce a seamless image. On occasion, you may experience difficulties with printing complex files. To print complex files, you may need to spend a considerable amount of time fixing and correcting the files. Another option is to convert a page to a bitmap, also known as rasterizing, which can allow you to print complex files more easily. To reduce file size, you can downsample bitmaps. Because bitmaps are made up of pixels, when you downsample a bitmap, the number of pixels per line decreases, which decreases the file size. To specify driver compatibility settings 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, double-click Printing, and click Driver compatibility. 3 Choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box. 4 Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the settings that you want to specify. To choose a threshold and chunk overlap 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3 From the Special settings list, choose one of the following: • Bitmap output threshold (K) • Bitmap chunk overlap pixels 4 Choose a value from the Setting list box. To print as a bitmap 1 Click File Print. 2 On the General tab, enable the Print as bitmap check box, and type a number in the dpi box to set the resolution. Printing basics 611 To downsample bitmaps 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the Bitmap downsampling area, enable any of the following check boxes and type a value in the corresponding box: • Color and grayscale • Monochrome Downsampling bitmaps affects them only when their resolution is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area. Printing colors accurately Corel DESIGNER allows you to manage colors when printing to ensure accurate color reproduction. You can print the document with the document colors settings applied or you can choose alternate color settings only for printing. You can also print a document using the color proofing settings that you previously specified in the Color proof settings docker. For more information, see “Using color management” on page 363. In addition, you can choose a rendering intent to effectively interpret the out-of-gamut colors when printing. The rendering intent that you choose depends on the graphic content of the document. For more information, see “Understanding color management” on page 363. For more information about color management, see “Using color management” on page 363. Notes for GDI printers GDI printers support only two color spaces: RGB and Grayscale. If your document contains colors from multiple color spaces, for example RGB, CMYK, and spot colors, you must convert all the colors to RGB or Grayscale before printing. You can determine if a printer is a GDI printer by clicking File Print and choosing a printer from the Printer list box. If the PostScript tab does not appear at the top of the dialog box, the selected printer is a GDI printer. The following table describes different ways of managing color when printing to a GDI printer. 612 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide How to In the Print dialog box Print the document and preserve the RGB or Grayscale colors Click the Color tab, and choose the appropriate color mode from the Output colors as list box. Print the document with original colors Click the Color tab, and choose the document color profile from the Document profile area of the Correct colors using color profile list box. Print the document and convert the document colors to the printer colors Choose the printer color profile from the Correct colors using color profile list box. Notes for PostScript printers Most PostScript printers support the use of multiple color spaces in a document. For example, a document can contain colors from multiple colors spaces, such as RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale. The following table describes different ways of managing color when printing to a PostScript printer. How to In the Print dialog box Print the document with the original colors Click the Color tab, and choose Native from the Output colors as list box. Print a document that contains multiple color modes using one color mode Click the Color tab, and choose a color mode from the Output colors as list box. If the printer supports only one color mode, you can control the color conversion within Corel DESIGNER. Print a document that contains only one color mode Printing basics Click the Color tab, and choose the color profile from the Output color as list box and from the Correct colors using color profile list box. 613 To specify color settings for printing 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Use document color settings option. If you selected a PostScript printer, you can choose one of the following options from the Color conversion performed by list box: • Corel DESIGNER — lets the application perform the color conversion • (selected printer) — lets the selected printer perform the color conversion (This option is only available for PostScript printers.) 4 Choose a color model from the Output colors as list box. This allows you to merge all document colors into a specific color model when printing. You can also Convert spot colors to process colors Enable the Convert spot colors to check box. If you selected Native from the Output colors as list box, you need to select a color mode from the list box. Choose a color profile for correcting colors when printing to a specific printer Choose a color profile from the Correct colors using color profiles list box. This option is available only for certain color models. Retain the color values associated with the selected color model Enable the Preserve (color model) numbers check box. To print using color proofing settings 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Use color proof settings option to apply the color settings that are defined in the Color proof settings docker. If you want to correct the proof colors, you can choose a color profile from the Correct colors using color profiles list box. 4 Click Print. 614 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To specify a rendering intent for printing 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 From the Rendering intent list box, choose one of the following options: • Relative colorimetric — for producing proofs on printers, without preserving the white point • Absolute colorimetric — for preserving the white point and proofing • Perceptual — for a variety of images, especially bitmaps and photographs • Saturation — for vector graphics and for preserving highly saturated colors (lines, text, and solid-colored objects, such as charts) Printing to a PostScript printer PostScript is a page-description language that sends printing instructions to a PostScript device. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document. For improved compatibility, you can choose a device-independent PostScript option. You can also select a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. A PostScript Printer Description file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer and is available from your printer’s manufacturer. You can automatically increase the fountain steps in a fountain fill to decrease banding. Increasing the number of steps used to render fountain fills produces smoother shading when printing. A print job that contains too many fonts may not print properly, and a print job that contains too many spot colors increases file size. You can set the PostScript options to warn you when a print job contains more than a set number of fonts or spot colors. By default, the printing device driver downloads Type 1 fonts to the printing device. You can disable the Download Type 1 Fonts option so that fonts are printed as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful when the file contains many fonts that would take a long time to download or would fail to download because of their file size. Bitmap versions of TrueType® fonts look better in small print and print faster than regular fonts. You can choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts that a print job can contain. Printing basics 615 To select a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 In the Destination area, choose a PostScript printer from the Printer list box. 4 Enable the Use PPD check box. 5 Choose the folder where the file is stored. 6 Double-click the filename. To print to a PostScript device 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 In the Destination area, choose a PostScript printer from the Printer list box. 4 Click the PostScript tab. 5 From the list box in the Compatibility area, choose the PostScript level that corresponds to the printer. If you want to compress bitmaps when printing, choose an option from the Compression type list box in the Bitmaps area. If you choose JPEG compression, you can move the JPEG quality slider to adjust the compression. Bitmap compression settings can be saved in PostScript Interpreted (PS or PRN) files when you print to a file using a PostScript driver. For information about printing to a file, see “To print to a file” on page 625. To test fountain fills for banding 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Preflight tab. If there are no print job issues, the tab name displays as No issues. 3 Click Settings. 4 Double-click Printing. 5 Enable the Banded fountain fills check box. If you want to optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity, enable the Optimize fountain fills check box on the PostScript tab. 616 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Testing fountain fills for banding applies only to linear fountain fills. To automatically increase fountain steps 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the PostScript tab. 3 Enable the Auto increase fountain steps check box. To set color separations and font warning options 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3 Choose Spot color separations warning from the Special settings list. 4 Choose one of the following from the Setting list box: • If any spot colors are used • If more than 1 spot color used • If more than 2 spot colors used • If more than 3 spot colors used 5 Choose Many fonts (preflight) from the Special settings list, and choose a number from the Setting list box that appears. To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the PostScript tab. 3 Disable the Download Type1 fonts check box. Type 1 fonts can be downloaded only for PostScript devices. When the Download Type1 fonts check box is enabled, the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box is enabled by default. This ensures that TrueType fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Disable the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box only if the output device has difficulty interpreting Type 1 fonts. Printing basics 617 To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3 Choose Bitmap font limit (PS) from the Special settings list. 4 Choose a value from the Settings list box. If you want to set a maximum bitmap font size, choose a font size from the Bitmap font size threshold (PS) list box. Using print merge Corel DESIGNER lets you combine text from a data source with a drawing. When you merge documents, you can produce several different copies of a drawing. You can use merged documents to create personalized documents, such as mailing lists, questionnaires, and targeted marketing documents, where each printed document contains specific information from a record in a data source, such as a text file or an ODBC data source (a Microsoft Excel or Microsoft® Access™ file). When you merge documents, you create a form document in Corel DESIGNER and combine it with a data source. A form document provides the pattern and layout for a merged document. A data source supplies information for a drawing during the merge. Corel DESIGNER supports the following data source files: Text (TXT) files, comma-separated values (CSV) files, Rich Text Format (RTF) files, and files that can be opened by means of an ODBC data source. Data source document (1), form document (2), and merged documents (3) 618 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Creating a data source file Information in a data source file is organized into fields and records. A field can contain one or more characters. Fields can contain alphanumeric data or only numeric data. For example, a record may include a first name, last name, address, and other contact information. Each item within the record, such as first name, last name, or address, is recognized as a field. A record can contain one or more fields. You can create a data source file or import an existing one. You can create a data text file by using Corel DESIGNER or a text editor. You can edit the data in a data source file at any time. Creating a form document Creating form documents is similar to creating regular drawings. For form documents, however, you insert merge fields, which are replaced by information from the data source during the merge. Associating a form document with a data source file When you use Corel DESIGNER to create a data file, or when you import an existing data file into Corel DESIGNER, the data file is associated with the form document. The association is always stored with the document and cannot be changed. Performing a merge Corel DESIGNERprovides different output options for merge documents. You can print a merge document or save it to a new document. When you print a merge document, the form document is merged with the data source file during printing. When you save the merged document to a new file, the application merges the form document with the data from the data source file in a new Corel DESIGNER file. You can use this file to preview your final output and make minor adjustments before printing. For major changes, such as the addition or repositioning of merge fields or the addition of new records, you must work in the form document. To create a data source file by using Corel DESIGNER 1 Click File Print merge Create/Load merge fields to launch the Print merge wizard. 2 Enable the Create new text option, and click Next. 3 On the Add fields page, do one or both of the following: Printing basics 619 • To create a text field, type a field name in the Text field box, click Add, and then click Next. • To create a numeric field, type a field name in the Numeric field box, click Add, and then click Next. 4 On the Add or edit records page of the Print merge wizard, do any of the following: • To add a record, click New, and then click Next. • To add data in a field, click in the field, type data, and click Next. • To modify existing data in a field, click in the field, modify the data, and click Next. 5 Enable the Save data settings as check box. 6 Type a filename, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file, and click Finish. You can also Apply formatting to the data in a numeric field On the Add fields page of the Print merge wizard, click a numeric field in the list, and choose a format from the Numeric format list box. Different numeric formats are available in Corel DESIGNER. For example, the X.0 format represents the value 1 as 1.0; the 00X format represents the value 1 as 001. Automatically increment the value in a numeric field Enable the Continually increment the numeric field check box, and specify starting and ending values in the corresponding boxes. Change the order of merge fields Select a field in the list and click Move up or Move down. Delete a record On the Add or edit records page of the Print merge wizard, click Delete. 620 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also View records On the Add or edit records page of the Print merge wizard, choose one of the following options from the Current view list box: •All records — lets you display all records in a source data file •Single record — lets you display one record at a time Browse records On the Add or edit records page of the Print merge wizard, click any of the following buttons: •First record •Next record •Previous record •Last record Find text in a data file On the Add or edit records page of the Print merge wizard, type a search term in the box, and press Enter. You can edit the fields and records in an existing data source file by clicking File Print merge Edit merge fields and following the instructions in the Print merge wizard. To create a data source by using a text editor 1 Open a text editor, and create a new file. 2 On the first line, type the number of merge fields that you want to insert in the drawing. For example: 3 3 On the second line, type the names of the merge fields by separating them with a backslash. Each merge field must begin and end with a backslash. For example: \Name\\Date\\Instructor\ 4 On the next lines, type the data that you want to appear in the merged document. Each line constitutes a record. For example: \Pixie Parsons\\6 September 2007\\Mr. Randy Harris\ Printing basics 621 \Shirley Wilkinson\\13 January 2007\\Ms. Corinne Pitts\ 5 Save the file as an ANSI text file (.txt extension) or as an RTF file. Backslashes function as markers to indicate the beginning and end of merge fields; therefore, you cannot use them as data in fields. Data in fields must end with a character. Blank spaces or lines before backslashes prevent the merge from being completed successfully. To import a data source file 1 Click File Print merge Create/Load merge fields. 2 In the Print merge wizard, enable the Import text from a file or an ODBC data source option, and click Next. 3 Enable the File option, and navigate to the drive and folder where the data file is stored. 4 Choose a file. 5 Click Open. 6 Click Next. 7 Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard. To import an ODBC data source file 1 Click File Print merge Create/Load merge fields. 2 In the Print merge wizard, enable the Import text from a file or an ODBC data source option, and click Next. 3 Enable the ODBC data source option, and click Select ODBC data source. 4 In the Select data source dialog box, click the Machine data source tab. 5 Under Data source name, select Excel files, and click OK. 6 In the Select workbook dialog box, choose the database that you want to import, and click OK. To create a form document 1 Open a drawing in which you want to insert merge fields. 2 Click File Print merge Create/Load merge fields. 622 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard to associate the drawing with a data source file, and then exit the Print merge wizard. The Print merge toolbar appears. 4 On the Print merge toolbar, choose a field name from the Field list box, and click Insert. Corel DESIGNER places the merge field in the center of the current view. If you want to reposition the merge field, drag it to a new location on the drawing page. 5 Repeat step 4 to insert additional fields. To perform a merge and print the document 1 Do one of the following: • Click File Print merge Perform merge. • Click File Print. In the Perform merge dialog box, enable the Perform print merge option, and click OK. • On the Print merge toolbar, click Merge to new document, and click Print. 2 Specify any printer settings. 3 Click Print. If you want to print all records and pages, enable the Current document option. To perform a merge and save the document to a new file • Click File Print merge Merge to new document. You can also perform a merge and save the document to a new file by clicking Merge to new document on the Print merge toolbar. Viewing preflight summaries Preflight checks the status of your file before you decide to output it and provides a summary of issues and potential problems, and suggestions for resolving them. You can specify which issues Preflight checks for. You can also save Preflight settings. For more information about specific Preflight settings, see any of the following: • To check for issues related to printing a file, see “To view a summary of issues for a print job” on page 609. Printing basics 623 • To check for issues related to publishing a PDF file, see “To view the preflight summary for a PDF file” on page 675. • To check for issues related to exporting a SWF file, see “To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file” on page 740. • To check for issues related to exporting an SVG file, see “Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)” on page 733. 624 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Preparing files for print service providers With Corel DESIGNER, you can prepare a print job for sending to a print service provider. This section contains the following topics: • Preparing a print job for a print service provider • Working with imposition layouts • Printing printers’ marks • Maintaining OPI links • Printing color separations • Working with color trapping and overprinting • Specifying In-RIP trapping settings • Printing to film • Working with a print service provider Preparing a print job for a print service provider You can print a drawing to a file, which lets the print service provider send the file directly to an output device.If you are unsure about which settings to choose, consult the print service provider. For more information about commercial printing, see “Working with a print service provider” on page 643. To print to a file 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the General tab. 3 In the Destination area, enable the Print to file check box. Preparing files for print service providers 625 4 Click the flyout arrow, and click one of the following commands: • For Mac — saves the drawing to be readable on a Macintosh computer • Single file — prints all pages in a document to a single file • Pages to separate files — prints each page to a separate file • Plates to separate files — prints each plate to a separate file 5 Click Print. 6 Choose one of the following from the Save as type list box: • Print file — saves the file as a PRN file • PostScript file — saves the file as a PS file 7 Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 8 Type a filename in the File name box. 9 Click Save. If you prefer not to prepare PostScript files, print service providers equipped with the application in which you created your work can take the original files (for example, Corel DESIGNER files) and apply the required prepress settings. Working with imposition layouts Working with imposition layouts lets you print more than one page of a document on each sheet of paper. You can choose a preset imposition layout to create documents such as magazines and books to print on a commercial printing press; produce documents that involve cutting or folding, such as mailing labels, business cards, pamphlets, or greeting cards; or print multiple thumbnails of a document on one page. You can also edit a preset imposition layout to create your own layout. You can select a binding method by choosing from three preset binding methods, or you can customize a binding method. When you choose a preset binding method, all but the first signature are automatically arranged. You can arrange pages on a signature manually or automatically. When you arrange the pages automatically, you can choose the angle of the image. If you have more than one page across or down, you can specify the size of gutters between pages; for example, you can choose the automatic gutter spacing option, which sizes gutters so that the document’s pages fill the entire available space in the layout. 626 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide When printing on a desktop printer, you can adjust the margins to accommodate the non-printable area of a page. If the margin is smaller than the non-printable area, the edges of some pages or some printers’ marks may be clipped by your printer. To choose a preset imposition layout 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Layout tab. 3 Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box. The layout you choose does not affect the original document, only the way it is printed. To edit an imposition layout 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Layout tab. 3 Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box. 4 Click Edit. 5 Edit any imposition layout settings. 6 Click File Save imposition layout. 7 Type a name for the imposition layout in the Save as box. When editing an imposition layout, you should save it with a new name; otherwise the settings for a preset imposition layout will be overwritten. To select a binding method 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Click the Imposition layout tool . 3 Choose Edit basic settings from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4 Type values in the Pages across/down boxes. If you want the page to be double-sided, click the Single/double sided button . 5 Choose one of the following binding methods from the Binding mode list box: • Perfect binding — cuts apart individual pages and glues them at the spine • Saddle stitch — folds pages and inserts them into one another Preparing files for print service providers 627 • Collate and cut — collates and stacks all signatures together • Custom binding — lets you arrange the pages that are printed in each signature If you choose either Saddle stitch or Custom binding, type a value in the corresponding box. When you click the Single/double sided button for double-sided printing, and you are printing on a non-duplex printing device, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the paper into the printer, so that you can print on both sides of the page. To arrange pages 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Click the Imposition layout tool . 3 Choose Edit page placements from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4 Click one of the following buttons: • Intelligent auto-ordering — automatically arranges the pages on a signature • Sequential auto-ordering — arranges the pages from left to right and top to bottom • Cloned auto-ordering — places the working page in each frame of the printable page If you want to arrange the page numbering manually, click on the page and specify the page number in the Page sequence number box. 5 Choose an angle from the Page rotation list box. To edit gutters 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Click the Imposition layout tool . 3 Choose Edit gutters and finishing from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4 Click one of the following buttons: • Auto gutter spacing — sizes gutters so that the document’s pages fill the entire available space in the layout • Equal gutters — lets you set equal horizontal and vertical gutters 628 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 5 Click one of the following buttons: • Cut location — places cut marks between pages • Fold location — places fold marks between pages If you click the Equal gutters button, you must specify a value in the Gutter size box. You can edit the gutters only if you’ve selected an imposition layout with two or more pages across and down. To adjust margins 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Click the Imposition layout tool . 3 Choose Edit margins from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4 Click one of the following buttons: • Auto margins — sets the margins automatically • Equal margins — lets you make the right margin equal to the left one, and the bottom margin equal to the top one If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes. When preparing a job for a commercial press, the print service provider may request minimum margin sizes, such as for page grippers and printers’ marks. Printing printers’ marks Printing printers’ marks lets you display information on a page about how a document should be printed.The available printers’ marks are as follows: • Crop/fold marks — represent the size of the paper and print at the corners of the page. You can print crop/fold marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you print multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns), you can choose to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop/fold marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. Crop/fold marks ensure that marks appear on each plate of a separated CMYK file. Preparing files for print service providers 629 • Bleed limit — determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size. • Registration marks — are required to line up film for proofing or printing plates on a color press. They print on each sheet of a color separation. • Color calibration bars — are color scales that print on each sheet of a color separation and ensure accurate color reproduction. To see calibration bars, make sure that the page size of the print job is larger than the page size of the work you are printing. • Densitometer scale — is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale. • Page numbers — helps you collate pages of an image that do not include any page numbers or do not contain page numbers that correspond to the actual number of pages • File information — prints file information, such as, the color profile; halftone settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name To print crop and fold marks 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the Crop/folds marks area, enable the Crop/fold marks check box. If you want to print all crop/fold marks, disable the Exterior only check box. To print crop and fold marks, ensure that the paper on which you print is 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing. To set crop and fold marks, see “To edit gutters” on page 628. To print composite crop and fold marks 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 630 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Choose Composite crop marks (PS) from the Option list. 4 Choose Output on all plates from the Setting list box. To set a bleed limit 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Layout tab. 3 Enable the Bleed limit check box. 4 Type a value in the Bleed limit box. Usually, a bleed limit of 0.125 to 0.25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper. To print registration marks 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the Registration marks area, enable the Print registration marks check box. 4 Choose a registration mark style from the Style picker. To print registration marks, ensure that the paper on which you print is 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing. To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the Calibration bars area, enable any of the following check boxes: • Color calibration bar • Densitometer scales If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares, choose a number from the Densities list (lower values represent lighter squares), and type a new density for that square. To print page numbers 1 Click File Print. Preparing files for print service providers 631 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the File information area, enable the Print page numbers check box. If you want to position the page number inside the page, enable the Position within page check box. To print file information 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the File information area, enable the Print file information check box. 4 Type a job name in the Print file information box. If you want to position the file information inside the page, enable the Position within page check box. To position printers’ marks 1 Click File Print preview. 2 Click the Marks placement tool . 3 Click the Auto-position marks rectangle button on the property bar. 4 Type values in the Marks alignment rectangle boxes. You can also change the position of printers’ marks by clicking a printers’ mark icon in the print preview window and dragging the bounding box. If you want to affix printers’ marks to the object’s bounding box instead of to the page bounding box, click File Print, click the Prepress tab, and enable the Marks to objects check box. Maintaining OPI links Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a print service provider receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the lowresolution placeholders. 632 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To maintain OPI links 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the PostScript tab. 3 Enable the Maintain OPI links check box. The Maintain OPI links option is available for PostScript devices only. You can reduce your work time by using OPI and print management server solutions, such as Creo Color Central. Low-resolution samples are automatically created from the high-resolution originals and are placed in Corel DESIGNER. These files contain their own OPI comments, which the Creo Color Central server recognizes when it receives the job and then substitutes the high-resolution version of the file for the low-resolution version. Low-resolution images must be flagged as OPI images (this must be done using third-party software) before you can import them into a document. Printing color separations When you send color work to a print service provider or printing shop, either you or the print service provider must create color separations. Color separations are necessary because a typical printing press applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. You can specify the color separations to print, including the order in which they print. Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot color, or both. You can convert the spot colors to process colors at printing time. For more information on spot and process colors, see “Choosing colors” on page 309. When setting halftone screens to print color separations, we recommend that you use the default settings; otherwise, screens can be improperly set and result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. However, if you are using an imagesetter, the screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the print service provider uses. Before customizing a halftone screen, consult the print service provider to determine the correct setting. If you have overprinted areas, you can choose how you want those areas to print. For more information about overprinting, see “Working with color trapping and overprinting” on page 635. Preparing files for print service providers 633 To print color separations 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print separations option. If you want to print specific color separations, click the Separations tab, and enable the corresponding check box in the list of color separations. You can change the order in which color separations print, by enabling the Use advanced settings check box in the Options area. In the separations list at the bottom of the dialog box, click in the Order column next to the color separation that you want to change. Chose a new order value from the list box. If you want to print separations using a color profile that is different from the document color profile, you can click the Color tab and choose a color profile from the Correct colors using color profile list box. To convert spot colors to process colors 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print separations option. 4 Enable the Convert spot colors to check box. Changing the spot colors to process colors does not affect the original Corel DESIGNER file; it affects the way colors are sent to the printer. To customize a halftone screen 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print separations option. 4 Click the Separations tab. 5 In the Options area, enable the Use advanced settings check box. 6 Click Advanced. 7 Change any of the following settings: 634 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Screening technology • Resolution • Basic screen • Halftone type You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees. Working with color trapping and overprinting When colors are trapped, they are intentionally overlapped so that misalignments of print separations are not noticeable. In manual trapping, one color must overprint the other. Overprinting is achieved by printing one color over another. Overprint trapping works best when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color may result (for example, cyan over yellow results in a green object). In some cases, you might actually want to create a third color; for example, you can overprint two spot colors to create a third color. How overprinted colors mix depends on the type of colors and ink you are mixing and the types of objects you are overprinting. For example, an object that uses a CMYK color overprints differently from an object that uses a spot color. Bitmaps also overprint differently from vector objects. You can preview a simulation of how overprinted colors will mix by enabling the Enhanced viewing mode and the Simulate overprints viewing mode. For more information about choosing a viewing mode, see “Choosing viewing modes” on page 67. Some variation between the preview and the printed version may occur, depending on the printer you use. When you are ready to print, you can choose to preserve overprint settings if you want to trap objects in a document, or if you want to mix the overlapping colors for effect. You can also choose to knock out the overprinted areas so that only the top color is visible. If you want to print a proof version of the file, you can simulate overprints. Simulating overprints rasterizes the file, and it prints using process colors only. You can set a group of objects to overprint. You can overprint bitmaps; or each vector object’s fill, or outline, or both. You can also overprint specific color separations and specify in which order they will print, as well as whether you want to overprint graphics, or text, or both. Preparing files for print service providers 635 The two methods for automatic color trapping include always overprinting black and auto-spreading. Overprinting black creates a color trap by causing any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint any underlying objects. This option is useful for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content. You can adjust the threshold, if the print service provider recommends a black threshold value other than 95%. Auto-spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object’s fill and having it overprint underlying objects. Auto-spreading is created for all objects in the file that meet three conditions: they do not already have an outline, are filled with a uniform fill, and have not already been designated to overprint. For advanced trapping options, see “Specifying In-RIP trapping settings” on page 639. To preserve or ignore overprints when printing 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Choose one of the following options: • Print composite • Print separations 4 Click one of the following tabs: • Separations • Composite 5 From the Document overprints list box, choose one of the following options: • Ignore — does not overprint areas; color on top prints and underlying colors are knocked out • Preserve — preserves overprinted areas To print a simulated overprint 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print composite option. 4 Click the Composite tab. 5 From the Document overprints list box, choose Simulate. The Simulate option rasterizes the file; the file is printed with process colors. 636 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To overprint selected objects 1 Select an object. 2 Click Edit, and choose any of the following: • Overprint outline • Overprint fill • Overprint bitmap You can also set an object to overprint by right-clicking the object and choosing an overprint option from the context menu. To overprint selected color separations 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print separations option. 4 Click the Separations tab. 5 In the Options area, enable the Use advanced settings check box. 6 Click Advanced. 7 In the Advanced separations settings dialog box, choose a color separation from the Screening technology list box. 8 In the Overprint column, click one or both of the following icons: • Overprint graphics • Overprint text The icons appear darker when the separation is set to overprint. You can change the order in which color separations print by selecting a color separation and choosing an order from the Order list box. To trap by always overprinting black 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Choose one of the following options: Preparing files for print service providers 637 • Print composite • Print separations 4 Click one of the following tabs: • Separations • Composite 5 In the Options area, enable the Always overprint black check box . To set the overprint black threshold 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3 Choose Overprint black threshold (PS) from the Option list. 4 Choose a number from the Setting list box. The number you choose represents the percentage of black above which black objects overprint. To trap by auto-spreading 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Choose one of the following options: • Print composite • Print separations 4 Click one of the following tabs: • Separations • Composite 5 In the PostScript trapping or Trapping area, do one of the following: • Enable the Auto-spreading option, and type a value in the Maximum box. • Enable the Fixed width option, and type a value in the Width box. 6 Type a value in the Text above box. The value that you type in the Text above box represents the minimum size to which auto-spreading is applied. If you set this value too low, small text may be rendered illegible when auto-spreading is applied. 638 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The amount of spread assigned to an object depends on the maximum trap value specified in the Maximum box and the object’s color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value. Specifying In-RIP trapping settings In-RIP trapping allows you to specify advanced trapping settings. Before selecting InRIP trapping, ensure that your PostScript 3 printer supports In-RIP trapping options. You can select a trap width — the amount that one color spreads into another. You can also specify image trap placement, which determines where the trap occurs. You can, for example, specify whether the trap is a choke or a spread, depending upon the neutral densities of adjacent colors. Neutral density indicates the lightness or darkness of a color and helps determine how adjacent colors spread into one another. You can specify a threshold at which a trap is created by specifying a step trap limit. If trap colors are of similar neutral densities, the trap placement adjusts accordingly. The step trap limit specifies a threshold at which a trap adjusts. Before trapping, you can set the inks; for example, you can set an ink to opaque, as in the case of a metallic ink, so that nothing shows through it. To reduce the visibility of a trap, you can decrease the amount of ink color in a trap. This is especially helpful in the case of pastel colors, contrasting colors, and colors with similar neutral densities. To select a trap width 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print composite option. 4 Click the PostScript tab. 5 Choose PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box. 6 Click the Composite tab. 7 Enable the PostScript 3 In-RIP trapping check box. 8 Click Settings. 9 Type a value in the Trap width box. If you are trapping to black, type a value in the Black trap width box. Preparing files for print service providers 639 To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box. To specify image trap placement 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print composite option. 4 Click the PostScript tab. 5 Choose PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box. 6 Click the Composite tab. 7 Enable the PostScript Level 3 In-RIP trapping check box. 8 Click Settings. 9 From the Image trap placement list box, choose one of the following placements: • Neutral density — used to determine the lighter object and thus the direction and placement of the trap • Choke — used to trap a dark foreground object to a light background image • Spread — used to trap a light foreground object to a dark background image • Centerline — used when adjacent images and objects have similar neutral densities or when image density changes along an object’s edge If you want to trap an object to an image, enable the Trap objects to images option. To specify a threshold 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print composite option. 4 Click the PostScript tab. 5 Choose PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box. 6 Click the Composite tab. 7 Enable the PostScript 3 In-RIP trapping check box. 8 Click Settings. 640 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 9 Type a value in one or more of the following boxes: • Step limit — specifies a threshold between color variations. The lower the threshold value, the more likely it is that a trap will be created. • Black limit — specifies the threshold at which process black is considered pure black • Black density limit — specifies a neutral density value for the black ink • Sliding trap limit — specifies the difference between the neutral densities of adjacent colors at which a trap adjusts (slides) from the darker side of a color edge toward the centerline. The lower the sliding trap limit, the more gradual the transition. To choose In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box. To set inks for trapping 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print composite option. 4 Click the Composite tab. 5 Enable the PostScript Level 3 In-RIP trapping check box. 6 Click Settings. 7 In the Type column, select one of the following for each color separation: • Transparent — the selected ink doesn’t get trapped, but anything beneath it does • Neutral density — the neutral density of the selected ink determines how it is treated • Opaque — the selected ink is treated as opaque • Opaque ignore — the selected ink doesn’t get trapped nor does anything beneath it To choose In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box. Preparing files for print service providers 641 To select a trap color reduction 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Color tab. 3 Enable the Print composite option. 4 Click the Composite tab. 5 Enable the PostScript 3 In-RIP trapping check box. 6 Click Settings. 7 Type a value in the Trap color reduction box. A reduction value of 100% indicates no reduction, while a lower value reduces the neutral density. Printing to film You can set up a print job to produce negative images. An imagesetter produces images on film that may need to be produced as negatives depending on which printing device you are using. Consult your print service provider to determine whether you can produce images on film. You can specify to print with the emulsion down. Printing with the emulsion down produces a backward image on desktop printers. To print a negative 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the Paper/film settings area, enable the Invert check box. Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printer. To specify film with the emulsion down 1 Click File Print. 2 Click the Prepress tab. 3 In the Paper/film settings area, enable the Mirror check box. 642 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Working with a print service provider When you send a file to a print service provider, the provider takes your file and converts it directly to film or to plates. When you prepare a print job for printing, you can send camera-ready paper output or the work on disk. If you send the work on disk, the print service provider needs either a PostScript file or a native file from the application that you use. If you are creating a file to send to an imagesetter or a plate-setter, speak with the print service provider about the best file format and printing device settings to use. Always provide a final printout of the work to the print service provider, even if it is only a black-and-white representation. This helps the print service provider to identify and assess any potential problems. Before printing a drawing, you must choose and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver. Consult the printing device manufacturer instructions, or the print service provider or printing shop that you use to print the work, to find out the best way to set up the printing device driver. Preparing files for print service providers 643 File formats Importing and exporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Working with 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Exporting to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Working with office productivity applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 Exporting to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Supported file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 645 Importing and exporting files Your application provides filters that convert files from one format to another when you import or export files. This section contains the following topics: • Importing files • Exporting files Importing files You can import files created in other applications. For example, you can import an Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF), JPEG, or Adobe Illustrator (AI) file.You can import a file and place it in the active application window as an object. You can also resize and center a file as you import it. The imported file becomes part of the active file. You can also import a bitmap as an externally linked image. When you link to an external file, edits to the original file are automatically updated in the imported file. While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to reduce the file size, or crop it to eliminate unused areas of the photo. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact area and size of the image you want to import. When you import a file from an earlier version of Corel DESIGNER that contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, you can use code page settings to ensure that object names, keywords, and notes saved with the file are displayed correctly. To import a file into an active drawing 1 Click File Import. 2 Choose the folder where the file is stored. If necessary, you can search for an image by using the search box. You can search for such things as file name, title, subject, author, keyword, comment, bitmap names, object names, and so on. Importing and exporting files 647 3 Choose a file format from the list box next to the File name box (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or the Files of type list box (Windows XP). If you don’t know the file’s format, choose All file formats. 4 Click the file name. If the file contains text in a language different from that of your operating system, choose the corresponding option from the Select code page list box (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or Code page list box (Windows XP) to ensure that object names, keywords, and notes are correctly displayed. These options are not available for all file formats. 5 Click Import, and do one of the following: • Click the drawing page to maintain the dimensions of the file and position its top-left corner where you click. • Click and drag on the drawing page to resize the file. The import cursor displays the dimensions of the resized file as you drag on the drawing page. • Press Enter to center the file on the drawing page. Active snapping options are applied to the imported file. You can also Link to a bitmap externally instead of embedding it 648 Click the arrow on the Import button, and then click Import as externally linked image (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or enable the Link bitmap externally check box (Windows XP). If you want to display a list of the linked images, click Window Dockers Links and bookmarks. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Link to a high-resolution file for Open Prepress Interface (OPI) output Click the arrow on the Import button, then click Import as high-resolution file for output using OPI (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or enable the Link to highresolution file for output using OPI check box (Windows XP). This procedure inserts a low-resolution version of a TIFF or Scitex® Continuous Tone (CT) file into a document. The lowresolution version is linked with the highresolution image, which resides on an Open Prepress Interface (OPI) server. Merge layers in an imported bitmap Enable the Combine multi-layer bitmap check box. Save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile Enable the Extract embedded ICC profile check box to save the ICC profile to the color folder where the application is installed. This option is not available for all file formats. Check for watermark or copyright information Enable the Check for watermark check box. This option is not available for all file formats. Use the default settings for the filter instead of opening the dialog box Enable the Do not show filter dialog check box. This option is not available for all file formats. Preserve layers and pages in an imported file Importing and exporting files Enable the Maintain layers and pages check box. If you disable the check box, all layers are combined into a single layer. This option is not available for all file formats. 649 You can also Select the pages to import when importing multi-page TIFF documents In the Import TIFF dialog box, enable an option in the Select the page(s) to import area. This option is available only for the TIFF file format. Open only part of an image (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) In the Load partial file dialog box, type the range of frames to open in the Load frames box. Not all importing options are available for all file formats. You can import multiple files. Hold down Shift and click to select consecutive files in a list. Hold down Ctrl and click to select non-consecutive files. To import a bitmap as an externally linked image 1 Click Window Links and bookmarks. 2 In the Links and Bookmarks docker, click the New linked image button. 3 Browse to the drive and folder where the image is stored. 4 Click Import. 5 Click in the workspace to place the image. You can also Update a linked image Click the Update linked image button. Break the link to an externally linked image Click the Break link button. To resample a bitmap while importing 1 Click File Import. 2 Choose the folder where the image is stored. 3 Choose a file format from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the file name. 650 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 5 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Click the arrow next to the Import button, and then click Resample and load. • (Windows XP) Choose Resample from the list box beside the Files of type list box, and click Import. 6 In the Resample image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes: • Width — specifies the width of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original width • Height — specifies the height of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original height 7 In the Resolution area, type values in the following boxes: • Horizontal — lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi) • Vertical — lets you specify the vertical resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi) 8 Click the drawing page. You can also Maintain the width-to-height ratio of the image Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. Change the units of measurement Choose a unit type from the Units list box. Maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values automatically Enable the Identical values check box. If a dialog box for the import format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see “Supported file formats” on page 685. Not all importing options are available for all file formats. To crop a bitmap while importing 1 Click File Import. 2 Choose the folder where the image is stored. 3 Choose a file format from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the file name. Importing and exporting files 651 5 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Click the arrow next to the Import button, and click Crop and load. • (Windows XP) Choose Crop from the list box beside the Files of type list box, and click Import. 6 In the Crop image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes: • Top — specifies the area to remove from the top of the graphic • Left — specifies the area to remove from the left edge of the graphic • Width — specifies the width of the graphic you want to keep • Height — specifies the height of the graphic you want to keep 7 Click the drawing page. You can also resize a graphic by dragging the selection handles in the preview window. You can change the units of measurement by choosing a unit type from the Units list box in the Crop image dialog box. Exporting files You can use the File Export command to export files to a variety of bitmap and vector file formats that can be used in other applications. For example, you can export a file to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) or GIF format. You can also export a file so that it is optimized for use with a suite of office productivity applications, such as Microsoft Word or Corel WordPerfect Office. When you are exporting a file, the original file is left open in the drawing window in its existing format. You can use the File Save as command to save files to various vector formats. After you save a file to a different format, the saved file is displayed immediately in the drawing window.It is recommended that you first save the file as a Corel DESIGNER file because some file formats do not support all of the features found in a Corel DESIGNER file. To export a file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 652 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Choose a file format from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a file name in the File name list box. 5 Enable any of the following active check boxes: • Export this page only — exports only the current page in a multipage file • Selected only — saves only the objects selected in the active drawing • Do not show filter dialog — suppresses dialog boxes that offer more advanced exporting options These options are not available for all file formats. 6 Click Export. If a dialog box for the export format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see “Supported file formats” on page 685. You can also Compress a file on export Choose a compression type from the Compression type list box. Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the Notes box. Not all of the options or compression types in the Export dialog box are available for all file formats. Objects on a hidden layer are displayed in the exported file unless the printing and exporting function for the hidden layer is disabled. For information about the options available when you export to a bitmap file format, see “To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap when exporting” on page 543. If you are using a trial version, you will not be able to export files. For more information about trial versions, see “Working with trial versions” on page 7. You can specify which layers will appear in the exported file. For more information, see “To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer” on page 282. Importing and exporting files 653 To export a file to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office 1 Click File Export for Office. 2 From the Export to list box, choose one of the following: • Microsoft Office — lets you set options to meet the output requirements of Microsoft Office applications • WordPerfect Office — optimizes the image for Corel WordPerfect Office by converting it to a WordPerfect Graphics file (WPG) 3 If you chose Microsoft Office, choose one of the following options from the Graphic should be best suited for list box: • Compatibility — lets you save the drawing as a Portable Network Graphic (PNG) bitmap. This preserves the appearance of the drawing when you import it into an office application. • Editing — lets you save the drawing in the Extended Metafile Format (EMF). This retains most of the editable elements in vector drawings. 4 If you chose Microsoft Office and Compatibility, choose one of the following options from the Optimized for list box: • Presentation — lets you optimize the file for outputs such as slide shows or online documents (96 dpi) • Desktop printing — lets you maintain good image quality for desktop printing (150 dpi) • Commercial printing — lets you optimize the file for high-quality printing (300 dpi) An estimated file size appears in the lower-left corner of the dialog box. 5 Click OK. 6 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 7 Type a file name in the File name list box. 8 Click Save. You can also Zoom in and out in the preview window Using the Zoom in or Zoom out tool, click in the preview window. Pan to view another area of the drawing Using the Pan tool , drag in the preview window until the area you want to see becomes visible. 654 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide The Graphics should be best suited for and Optimized for options are available only if you choose the Microsoft Office and Compatibility options. Layers in a drawing are flattened when exported to Microsoft Office or Corel WordPerfect Office. To save a file to a different format 1 Click File Save as. 2 Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 3 Choose a file format from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a file name in the File name list box. 5 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Selected only — saves only the objects selected in the active drawing • Save with embedded VBA project — lets you save, with the file, macros you have created in the VBA editor These options are not available for all file formats. 6 Click Save. You can also Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the Add comments box (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or Notes box (Windows XP). Add keywords Type any keywords you want in the Add a tag box (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or Keywords box (Windows XP). Not all of the options or the compression types in the Save drawing dialog box are available for all file formats. Importing and exporting files 655 Working with 3D models Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 includes software that lets you add three-dimensional (3D) models to your technical illustrations. By using Deep Exploration™ Standard Edition, a 3D-illustration application made by Right Hemisphere, you can view 3D models and import them as 2D vector images when you work with Corel DESIGNER. This section contains the following topics: • Installing Deep Exploration • Importing 3D models Installing Deep Exploration To work with 3D models, you need to install Deep Exploration, the 3D illustration application that is included with Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5. To install Deep Exploration 1 Close any open programs. 2 Insert the disc in the CD drive of your computer. 3 On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control panel. 4 Do one of the following: • (Windows Vista) Click Uninstall a program. • (Windows XP) Click the Add or remove programs icon. 5 Do one of the following: • (Windows Vista) Double-click Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 from the Uninstall or change a program page. • (Windows XP) Choose Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 from the Currently installed programs list. 6 Click Change/Remove. 7 In the installation wizard, enable the Modify option. 8 Click Next. Working with 3D models 657 9 In the Available features list, enable the Deep Exploration check box. 10 Click Begin. Importing 3D models Corel DESIGNER lets you add 3D models as 2D images to your illustrations. Before importing an image into Corel DESIGNER, you need to open it with Deep Exploration. With Deep Exploration, you can preview the 3D image from different angles. For example, you can specify parallel or perspective projected views. You also can change its position, orientation, and size, and you can create cross sections. When you are satisfied with the view of a 3D model in Deep Exploration, you can import it as a 2D image into the active drawing or save it for later use. Deep Exploration Standard Edition lets you import the following 3D file formats: • AutoCAD® (DWG, DXF, and DWF) • 3ds Max® (3DS and MAX) • SketchUp® (SKP) • VRML (WRL,VRML) • Rhino® 3D Model (3DM) • Universal 3D (U3D) • Cinema 4D® (C4D) If you require additional file formats, you can upgrade to Right Hemisphere® Deep Exploration™ CCE, which supports native 3D CAD file formats including CATIA®, Pro/ENGINEER®, SolidWorks®, Autodesk® Inventor®, and NX™. It also supports 3D CAD exchange formats such as JT, IGES, STEP, SAT, and Parasolid®. Deep Exploration CCE also supports 3D PDF publishing from imported 3D files. For a detailed list of the 3D CAD file formats supported by Deep Exploration CCE (also referred to as Deep Exploration CAD Edition), see the Help system within Deep Exploration CE. To import 3D models 1 Click File 3D Import. If this menu command is not available, you must install the Deep Exploration software. 2 From Deep Exploration, open and adjust the 3D model that you want to import. 3 Click File Send to Corel DESIGNER. When working with Deep Exploration, you can access detailed information about the application by clicking Help Deep Exploration Help. 658 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Exporting to PDF PDF is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file. This section contains the following topics: • Exporting documents as PDF files • Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files • Reducing the size of PDF files • Working with text and fonts in PDF files • Specifying an encoding format for PDF files • Specifying a viewing option for EPS files • Specifying color management options for exporting PDF files • Setting security options for PDF files • Optimizing PDF files • Viewing preflight summaries for PDF files • Preparing PDF files for a print provider Exporting documents as PDF files You can export a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform provided that users have Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader, or a PDFcompatible reader installed on their computers. A PDF file can also be uploaded to an intranet or the Web. You can also export an individual selection or an entire document to a PDF file. When you export a document as a PDF file, you can choose from several PDF presets, which apply specific settings. For example, with the Web preset, the resolution of the images in the PDF file is optimized for the Web. Exporting to PDF 659 You can also create a new PDF preset or edit any existing preset. PDF file security settings are not saved with a PDF preset. For information about PDF file security options, see “Setting security options for PDF files” on page 671. If you have used symbols in a document, they will be supported in the PDF file. For more information on symbols, see “Working with symbols” on page 249. To export a document as a PDF file 1 Click File Export. You can also save a PDF file by clicking File Save as. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 In the Export range area, enable one of the following options: • Current document — exports the current document • Documents — exports the documents that you specify • Selection — exports the objects that you have selected • Current page — exports the active page • Pages — exports the pages that you specify 7 In the Page size area, choose one of the following options: • As defined in CorelDRAW — applies the page size that is defined in the document • Set by the selected objects — allows the page size to be determined by the size of the objects on the page 8 Choose one of the following from the PDF preset list box: • Archiving (CMYK) — creates a PDF/A-1b file, which is suitable for archiving purposes. In comparison to traditional PDF files, PDF/A-1b files are better suited for long-term preservation of documents because they are more self-contained and more device-independent. PDF/A-1b files include embedded fonts, deviceindependent color, and their own description as XMP metadata. This PDF style preserves any spot or Lab colors included in the original document, but it converts all other colors, such as grayscale or RGB, to the CMYK color mode. In 660 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide addition, this style embeds a color profile to specify how CMYK colors should be interpreted on the rendering device. • Archiving (RGB) —similarly to the previous style, creates a PDF/A-1b file, preserving any spot and Lab colors. All other colors are converted to the RGB color mode. • Document distribution — creates a PDF file that can be printed on a laser or desktop printer and is suitable for general document delivery. This style enables JPEG bitmap image compression and can include bookmarks and hyperlinks. • Editing — creates a high-quality PDF file intended to be sent to a printer or digital copier. This style enables LZW compression, embeds fonts, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all the fonts, with all of the images at full resolution, and with hyperlinks, so that you can edit the file at a later date. • PDF/X-1a — enables ZIP bitmap image compression, converts all objects to the destination CMYK color space • PDF/X-3 — This style is a superset of PDF/X-1a. It allows both CMYK and non-CMYK data (such as Lab or Grayscale) in the PDF file. • Prepress — enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options best designed for high-end quality printing. Before preparing a PDF file for printing, it’s always best to consult your print provider to find out which settings are recommended. • Web — creates a PDF file intended for online viewing, such as a PDF file to be distributed by e-mail or published on the Web. This style enables JPEG bitmap image compression, compresses text, and includes hyperlinks. If you want to create a PDF file for archiving purposes that conforms to the PDF/A-1b standards, embedding must be allowed for all the fonts in your document. To check for fonts that cannot be embedded, view the preflight summary of the PDF file. For more information about viewing summaries, see “To view the preflight summary for a PDF file” on page 675. You can substitute any fonts that cannot be embedded, or you can convert all text to curves by enabling the Export all text as curves check box on the Objects page of the Publish to PDF settings dialog box. To check if a font can be embedded, you can view licensing information and embedding restrictions by using a free tool, such as the Font properties extension tool available on the Microsoft Web site. Exporting to PDF 661 To quickly export a document as a PDF file 1 Click File Publish to PDF. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Type a filename in the File name box. If you want to modify the PDF file settings, click Settings. 4 Click Save. To export multiple documents as a single PDF file 1 Click File Export. You can also export a PDF file by clicking File Save as. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 On the General tab, enable the Documents option from the Export range area. 7 Enable the check box for each document you want to save. To create a PDF preset 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the PDF settings dialog box, specify any settings. 7 Click the General tab. 8 Click the Add PDF preset button next to the PDF preset list box. 9 Type a name for the style in the Save PDF preset as list box. 662 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you want to delete a PDF style, select the style and click the Delete PDF preset button next to the PDF preset list box. To edit a PDF preset 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the PDF settings dialog box, specify any settings. 7 Click the General tab. 8 Click the Add PDF preset button next to the PDF list box. 9 Choose the style you want to edit from the Save PDF preset as list box. If you save changes you make to preset settings, the original settings will be overwritten. To avoid this, save any changes to preset settings with a new name. Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files You can include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file. Hyperlinks are useful for adding jumps to Web pages or to Internet URLs. Bookmarks allow you to link to specific areas in a PDF file. You can specify whether bookmarks or thumbnails are displayed when the PDF file is first opened in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. Exporting to PDF 663 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Document tab. 7 In the Bookmarks area, enable any of the following check boxes: • Include hyperlinks • Generate bookmarks • Generate thumbnails If you want to display bookmarks or thumbnails on startup, enable the Bookmarks or Thumbnails button in the On start, display area. Reducing the size of PDF files You can compress bitmap images, text, and line art to reduce the size of a PDF file. Options for bitmap image compression include JPEG, LZW, and ZIP. Bitmap images that use JPEG compression have a quality scale ranging from 2 (high quality, less compression) to 255 (lower quality, more compression). The higher the image quality, the larger the file size. You can also reduce the size of a PDF file by downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images. Using symbols in a drawing can help you reduce the file size of the PDF file when publishing to PDF. For more information, see “Working with symbols” on page 249. To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Choose one of the following from the Compression type list box: • None • LZW 664 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • JPEG • ZIP • JP2 The JP2 (JPEG 2000) option is available only for Adobe Acrobat 6.0, Adobe Acrobat 8.0, and Adobe Acrobat 9.0 If you choose JPEG compression, you can specify the compression quality by moving the Quality factor slider. To compress text and line art in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Enable the Compress text and line art check box. To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Enable any of the following check boxes, and type a value in the corresponding box: Exporting to PDF 665 • Color • Grayscale • Monochrome Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images is effective only when the resolution of the bitmap image is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area. Working with text and fonts in PDF files You can determine how the text in your PDF file outputs by setting text and font options. You can choose how text is encoded in a PDF file to accommodate the type of text your file contains and specific output requirements. For example, if you are creating a multilingual document that includes Korean and Japanese, choose the Unicode encoding option. Unicode is designed to support text characters from a wide range of languages, including Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. If you are creating an English or German document, ASCII encoding is commonly used. The default setting should work in most cases, but the type of software or hardware you are using to output your files can also influence which encoding option you need. For example, older raster image processors (RIP) may not support type that is defined in a Unicode format. You can embed fonts in a PDF file, including PostScript base 14 fonts. Embedding increases the file size but makes a PDF file more portable, since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems. When you embed base 14 fonts, the fonts are added to your PDF file, thus eliminating font variances on different systems. The base 14 fonts are resident on all PostScript devices. You can also convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts, which can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file. When you convert fonts, you can reduce file size by subsetting fonts if you use only a smaller number of characters (for example, English characters A to E). You can also include a percentage of fonts used. For example, you can create a subset that contains 50 percent of the fonts. If the number of characters used in the document exceeds 50 percent, the whole set of characters is embedded. If the number of characters used in the document is less than 50 percent, only the characters used are embedded. You can also eliminate font variances on different computers by exporting text as curves. For example, if you are using unusual text characters, you can export the text as curves. 666 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Exporting text as curves increases the complexity of the file and can increase file size. For general document publication, embed fonts in a document rather than convert text to curves. To specify text encoding for a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 In the Text and fonts area, choose one of the following options: • ASCII — American Standard Code for Information Interchange. This format is generally more compatible with Latin-based languages than Unicode, but is not fully multilingual. • Unicode — an encoding format that is fully multilingual. This format supports languages such as Chinese, Japanese, and Korean, but may not be supported by some raster image processors or viewers. To embed fonts in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Enable the Embed fonts in document check box. If you want to install the basic fonts to your PDF file, enable the Embed base 14 fonts check box. Exporting to PDF 667 Enabling the Embed base 14 fonts check box increases file size, and, therefore, it is not recommended for publishing to the World Wide Web. To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Enable the Convert TrueType to Type 1 check box. If you want to reduce file size, you can create a subset of fonts by enabling the Subset fonts check box and typing a percentage of fonts used in the Under% of charset box. If you create a subset of fonts, you should not edit or correct the PDF file by using Adobe Acrobat because some characters from the font may not be present in the file. To export text as curves 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Enable the Export all text as curves check box. 668 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Specifying an encoding format for PDF files ASCII and binary are encoding formats for documents. When you publish a file to PDF, you can choose to export ASCII or binary files. The ASCII format creates files that are fully portable to all platforms. The binary format creates smaller files, but they are less portable, because some platforms cannot handle the file format. To specify an encoding format for a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Document tab. 7 Enable one of the following options: • ASCII 85 • Binary Specifying a viewing option for EPS files EPS files are PostScript files that are embedded in a document. You can choose how encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are viewed in a PDF document. The PostScript option includes high-resolution images in the PDF document but does not let you view them in Adobe Acrobat. The Preview option includes high-resolution images in the PDF file and displays their low-resolution bitmap representation in Adobe Acrobat. To choose a viewing option for EPS files 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. Exporting to PDF 669 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Choose one of the following from the EPS files list box: • PostScript — includes high-resolution images in the PDF document but does not let you view them • Preview — includes high-resolution images in the PDF file and displays their low-resolution bitmap representation Specifying color management options for exporting PDF files You can specify color management options for exporting files to PDF. You can choose a color profile or leave the objects in their original color space. You can also embed the color profile with the PDF. If you have spot colors in your file, you can either preserve the spot colors or convert them to process colors so that the file produces four plates for CMYK output. If you want to export to PDF for the purpose of soft-proofing the document, you can apply the document’s color proofing settings. In addition, you can choose additional soft-proofing options, such as preserving document overprints and overprinting black. To specify color management options for exporting PDF files 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Color tab. 7 In the Color management area, enable the Use document color settings option. 8 Choose a color profile option from the Output colors as list box: • RGB • CMYK • Grayscale • Native 670 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you choose the Native option from the Output colors as list box, a maximum of three color spaces are displayed, or embedded, in the PDF file. Setting security options for PDF files You can set security options to protect PDF files that you create. Security options let you control whether, and to what extent, a PDF file can be accessed, edited, and reproduced when viewed in Adobe Reader. The level of security that is available is also determined by which version of Adobe Reader you use to create the PDF file. The encryption levels provided by Adobe Reader have increased over time. For example, if you save to Adobe Reader version 6, or lower, it has standard encoding, version 8 has 128-bit encoding, and version 9 has 256-bit encoding. For more information about choosing a version, see “Optimizing PDF files” on page 673. The security options are controlled by two passwords: the Permission password and the Open password. The Permission password is the master password that lets you control whether a file can be printed, edited, or copied. For example, as the owner of the file, you can protect the integrity of the file’s content by choosing permission settings that prevent editing. You can also set an Open password that lets you control who can access the file. For example, if your file contains sensitive information, and you want to limit the users who can view it, you can set an Open password. It is not recommended that you set an Open password without setting a Permission password, because users would then have unrestricted access to the PDF file — including the ability to set a new password. The security options are applied when you save the PDF file. These settings can be viewed when a PDF file is opened in Adobe Acrobat. To open and edit a secured PDF file, you must enter the Permissions password (or the Open password if no Permission password is set). For information about opening and importing PDF files, see “Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)” on page 724. To set PDF file permissions 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. Exporting to PDF 671 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Security tab. 7 Enable the Permission password check box. 8 Type a password in the Password box. 9 Retype the password in the Confirm Permission password box. 10 In the Printing permissions box, choose one of the following options: • None — lets users view the PDF on-screen but prevents them from printing the PDF file • Low resolution — lets users print a low resolution version of the PDF file. This option is available for PDF files compatible with Adobe Acrobat 5 or higher. • High resolution — lets users print a high resolution version of the PDF file 11 In the Editing permissions box, choose one of the following options: • None — prevents users from editing the PDF file • Insert, delete, and rotate pages — lets users insert, delete, and rotate pages when editing the PDF file. This option is available for PDF files compatible with Adobe Acrobat 5 or higher. • Any except extracting pages — lets users edit the PDF file but prevents them from removing pages from the file If you want to allow copying of content from the PDF file to other documents, enable the Enable copying of text, images, and other contents check box. The Permission password is the master password for the document. It can be used by the file owner to set permissions, or to open the file if an Open password is set. Some PDF compatibility options, such as PDF/X-3 and PDF/A-1b, do not let you set PDF file permissions. If you choose such a compatibility option, all controls on the Security page appear disabled. To change the compatibility, see “To select a compatibility option” on page 674. 672 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To set a user password for a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Security tab. 7 Enable the Open password check box. 8 Type a password in the Password box. 9 Retype the password in the Confirm Open password box. If you set an Open password, it is recommended that you also set a Permission password. Optimizing PDF files You can optimize PDF files for different versions of Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader by choosing a compatibility option that matches the type of viewer used by the recipients of the PDF file. In Corel DESIGNER, you can select one of the following compatibility options: Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, Acrobat 6.0, Acrobat 8.0, PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3, or PDF/A-1b.The available controls differ, depending on which compatibility option you choose. If you are publishing a PDF file for a wide distribution, it is better to choose an earlier compatibility option such as Acrobat 5.0 or 6.0 to ensure that the file can be viewed in earlier versions of Acrobat. However, if security is a concern, you may want to choose a later version because the encryption levels are higher. For example, if you save to Adobe Reader version 6, or lower, it has standard encoding, version 8 has 128-bit encoding, and version 9 has 256-bit encoding. For more information, see “Setting security options for PDF files” on page 671. You can optimize the viewing of a PDF document on the Web to speed up the loading time of the PDF. Exporting to PDF 673 If you added complex fills to the document, you can choose to convert them to bitmaps, which is also known as rasterizing. This may increase the PDF file size, but it will ensure that the complex fills display correctly. To select a compatibility option 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the General tab. 7 From the Compatibility list box, choose a compatibility option. To preserve layers and layer properties in the published PDF file, you must choose the Acrobat 6.0, Acrobat 8.0, or Acrobat 9.0 option. Note that master layers will not be preserved. To preserve transparencies in the published PDF file, you must choose the Acrobat 5.0, Acrobat 6.0, Acrobat 8.0, or Acrobat 9.0 option. To optimize a PDF file for viewing on the Web 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Document tab. 7 Enable the Optimize for fast web view check box. 674 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To convert complex fills to bitmaps 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Objects tab. 7 Enable the Render complex fills as bitmaps check box. Viewing preflight summaries for PDF files Before saving a document as a PDF file, you can preflight your document to find potential problems. Preflighting checks and displays a summary of errors, possible problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. By default, many PDF issues are checked during a preflight, but you can disable the issues that you do not want to check. To view the preflight summary for a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Preflight tab. You can limit the issues to check during the preflight by clicking the No issues tab, clicking Settings, and, in the Preflight settings dialog box, disabling the check boxes next to the items that you want the preflight to overlook. Exporting to PDF 675 You can save settings by clicking the No issues tab, clicking Settings, and, in the Preflight settings dialog box, clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style as box. Preparing PDF files for a print provider Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a print provider receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the low-resolution images with the high-resolution images. Printers’ marks provide information to the print provider about how the work should be printed. You can specify which printers’ marks to include on the page. The available printers’ marks are as follows: • Crop marks — represent the size of the paper and appear at the corners of the page. You can add crop marks to use as guides in trimming the paper. If your output has multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns), you can add the crop marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. A bleed determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks.A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the image area must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size. • Registration marks — are required to line up the film, analog proofs, or print plates on a color press.Registration marks print on each sheet of a color separation. • Densitometer scale — is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale. • File information — can be printed, including the color profile; name, date, and time the image was created; and page number. To maintain OPI links in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 676 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Prepress tab. 7 Enable the Maintain OPI links check box. Don’t use OPI links if you are not sure whether your PDF file is destined for an OPI server. To include printers’ marks in a PDF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box. 3 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type a filename in the File name box. 5 Click Export. The PDF settings dialog box appears. 6 Click the Preflight tab. 7 Enable any of the following check boxes: • Crop marks • File information • Registration marks • Densitometer scales If you want to include a bleed, enable the Bleed limit check box, and type a bleed amount in the corresponding box. The bleed option is only available for Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, PDF/X-1a, and PDF/X-3. A third party plug-in is required to view printers’ marks in Adobe Acrobat. Usually, a bleed amount of 0.125 to 0.25 inch is sufficient. Any object extending beyond this amount uses space needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper. Exporting to PDF 677 Working with office productivity applications Corel DESIGNER is highly compatible with office productivity applications such as Microsoft Word and WordPerfect Office. You can import and export files between applications, and you can copy or insert objects from Corel DESIGNER into office productivity documents. This section contains the following topics: • Importing files from office productivity applications • Exporting files to office productivity applications • Adding objects to documents Importing files from office productivity applications Corel DESIGNER lets you import files created in other applications. For example, you can import a file from a Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office application. For more information about importing files, see “WordPerfect Document (WPD)” on page 743 and “Microsoft Word (DOC, DOCX, or RTF)” on page 699. Exporting files to office productivity applications You can export a file so that it is optimized for use with office productivity applications such as Microsoft Word or WordPerfect. For more information about exporting files from Corel DESIGNER, see “To export a file to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office” on page 654. Adding objects to documents Corel DESIGNER lets you copy an object and paste it into a drawing. You can also copy an object and place it into a document created in an office productivity application such Working with office productivity applications 679 as Microsoft Word or WordPerfect. For more information about copying objects, see “Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects” on page 223. You can insert an object into a Corel DESIGNER document, or into an office productivity document, such as one created in Microsoft Word or WordPerfect. For more information about inserting objects into Corel DESIGNER documents, see “Finding and managing content” on page 77. For information about inserting objects into office productivity documents, see “Inserting linked or embedded objects” on page 287, or see the Help in the office productivity application. 680 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Exporting to HTML You can ensure that your Corel DESIGNER files and objects publish to HTML successfully by setting document elements to be HTML-compatible, selecting the settings you want, and checking Preflight issues. You can then publish to HTML. The resulting HTML code and images can be used in HTML authoring software for creating a Web site or page. This section contains the following topics: • Setting preferences for exporting images to HTML • Creating Web-compatible text • Previewing and verifying files before exporting to HTML • Exporting to HTML Setting preferences for exporting images to HTML You can set preferences for exporting images that are destined to be viewed on the Web. For example, you can determine layout options, such as size and position of the image white space. You can also publish your document as a single image, from which the application creates an image map. An image map is a hypergraphic whose hotspots link to different URLs — including pages, locations, and images — when you view the HTML document with a browser. Note that large image maps might cause slow downloads for those with a slow Internet connection. To set preferences for exporting images to HTML 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Export HTML. 3 Set any bitmap options. Exporting to HTML 681 You can also Specify the number of pixels text can be automatically nudged to avoid introducing rows or columns that are only a few pixels in size Type a value in the Position tolerance box. Specify the number of pixels that can occur in an empty cell before it’s merged with an adjacent cell Type a value in the Image white space box. Specify the amount of white space allowed in an image Type a value in the Position white space box. Create a Server-side image map Enable the Server check box, and choose a format. This lets you avoid splitting a single graphic that spans adjacent cells. Creating Web-compatible text When you convert paragraph text to Web-compatible text, you can edit the text of the published document in an HTML editor. If you are exporting text to HTML, you can change text font characteristics, including the font type, size, and style. The Webcompatible text sizes, numbered 1 through 7, correspond to particular point sizes between the 10-point and 48-point range. For more information about formatting text, see “Formatting paragraph text” on page 451. The default Web font style is used automatically unless you override it with another font. If you choose to override it, the default font is used when visitors to your Web site don’t have the same font installed on their computers. The bold, italic, and underline text styles are also available. You can apply uniform fills, but not outlines, to Webcompatible text. Any non-Web-compatible text in your drawing is converted to bitmaps when you publish your drawing to the World Wide Web as HTML. 682 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To make text Web-compatible To Do the following Change paragraph text to Web-compatible text Using the Pick tool , select the paragraph text. Click Text Make text Web compatible. Make new text Web-compatible Click Tools Options. In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Make all new paragraph text frames Web compatible check box. Ensure that the Web-compatible text does not intersect or overlap other objects or extend beyond the boundaries of the drawing page; otherwise the text will be converted to a bitmap, and it will lose its Internet properties. Artistic text cannot be converted to Web-compatible text and is always treated as a bitmap. However, you can convert it to paragraph text and then make it Web compatible. For information on converting text, see “Finding, editing, and converting text” on page 438. Previewing and verifying files before exporting to HTML You can preview your files and objects in a browser before exporting them to HTML. You can also identify any potential exporting problems by checking for Preflight issues. To preview a Web page 1 Click File Export HTML. 2 Click Browser preview. To set HTML preflight options 1 Click File Export HTML. 2 Click the Issues tab. 3 Click Settings. 4 In the Issues to check for list, expand the Publishing to Web tree. 5 Deselect the issues you do not want to check for. Exporting to HTML 683 Exporting to HTML When publishing a document or selection to the World Wide Web, you can choose several options, such as image format, HTML layout, export range, and file transfer protocol (FTP) site parameters. To export to HTML 1 Click File Export HTML. 2 Set the following options in the Export HTML dialog box: • General — contains options for HTML layout, folders for HTML file and images, and FTP site and export range. You can also select, add, and remove presets. • Details — contains details of HTML files produced, and allows you to change the page name and file name • Images — lists all images for the current HTML export. You can set individual objects to JPEG, GIF, and PNG formats. Click Options to select presets for each image type. • Advanced — provides options for generating JavaScript for rollovers and cascading style sheets, and maintaining links to external files • Summary — shows statistics for files according to various download speeds • Issues — displays a list of potential issues, including explanations, suggestions, and tips Corel DESIGNER assigns the extension .htm to documents you publish in the HTML format. By default, HTML files share the same name as the Corel DESIGNER (DES) source file and are saved in the last folder you used to store exported Web documents. 684 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Supported file formats A file format defines how an application stores information in a file. If you want to use a file created in a different application than the one you are currently using, you must import that file. Conversely, if you create a file in one application and want to use it in another application, you must export the file to a different file format. When you name a file, an application automatically appends a filename extension, usually three characters in length (for example, .cdr, .bmp, .tif, and .eps). This filename extension helps you and the computer differentiate between files of different formats. The following list includes all file formats used in this application. Note that not all file format filters are installed by default. If you cannot export or import a file from the list, you need to update your installation of Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5. For more information, see “To modify or repair a Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite installation” on page 4. • Adobe Illustrator (AI) • Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB) • Windows Bitmap (BMP) • OS/2 Bitmap (BMP) • Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) • CorelDRAW (CDR) • Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) • Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) • Corel Symbol Library (CSL) • Cursor Resource (CUR) • Microsoft Word (DOC, DOCX, or RTF) • Microsoft Publisher (PUB) • Corel DESIGNER (DES, DSF, DS4, or DRW) • AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) and AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) Supported file formats 685 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) PostScript (PS or PRN) GIF HTML JPEG (JPG) JPEG 2000 (JP2) Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD) PICT (PCT) PaintBrush (PCX) Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) HPGL Plotter File (PLT) Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Adobe Photoshop (PSD) Corel Painter (RIF) Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) Macromedia Flash (SWF) TARGA (TGA) TIFF TrueType Font (TTF) Visio (VSD) WordPerfect Document (WPD) WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) RAW camera file formats Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WI) Windows Metafile Format (WMF) Additional file formats Recommended formats for importing graphics Recommended formats for exporting graphics General notes on importing text files 686 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Adobe Illustrator (AI) The Adobe Illustrator (AI) file format was developed by Adobe Systems, Incorporated for the Macintosh® and Windows platforms. It is primarily vector-based, although later versions support bitmap information. You can import AI files for use in Corel DESIGNER or export Corel DESIGNER files to the AI file format. Before exporting a document as an AI file, you can preflight your document to find potential problems. Preflighting checks and displays a summary of errors, possible problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. By default, many AI issues are checked during a preflight, but you can disable the issues that you do not want to check. To import an Adobe Illustrator file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click in the drawing page where you want to import the file. To export an Adobe Illustrator file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 From the Compatibility list box, choose an Adobe Illustrator file format. 7 In the Export range area, enable one of the following options: • Current document — exports the active drawing • Current page — exports the active page • Selection — exports the objects that you have selected • Pages — exports the pages that you specify (This option is only available for CS 4.) Supported file formats 687 8 In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options: • Curves — lets you export text as curves • Text — lets you export text as editable characters You can also Convert transparent areas to bitmaps In the Transparency area, enable the Preserve appearance and convert transparent areas to bitmaps option. (This option is only available for version 8 and lower.) Discard transparent areas and preserve curves and text In the Transparency area, enable the Preserve curves and text by removing transparent effects option. (This option is only available for version 8 and lower.) Convert an outline to an object to create an unfilled closed object with the outline’s shape In the Options area, enable the Convert outlines to objects check box. Convert complex outlines to curves In the Options area, enable the Simulate complex filled curves check box. Convert spot colors to process colors In the Options area, enable the Convert spot colors to process check box. Embed the color profile In the Options area, enable the Embed color profiles check box. Generate a preview of the document in the Adobe Illustrator File open dialog box In the Options area, enable the Include preview images check box. If you enable the Simulate complex filled curves check box, an object that is composed of complex curves, such as a text object that was converted to curves, may be broken into several objects on export to help minimize the complexity of the object. If you disable the Include placed images check box and export the file, the exporting process generates one Adobe Illustrator file and a series of EPS files. The EPS files contain individual objects and images which are linked to the AI file. Always store the EPS files with the AI file to preserve the link to the AI file. 688 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To view the preflight summary for an AI file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Adobe Illustrator Export dialog box, click the second tab. You can limit the issues to check during the preflight by clicking the Settings button, double-clicking AI Export, and disabling the check boxes next to the items that you want the preflight to overlook. You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style as box. Adobe Illustrator (AI) technical notes Importing an AI file • You can import AI file formats up to and including Adobe Illustrator CS5. • For files saved in Adobe Illustrator CS or higher with PDF-compatibility, text can be imported as text or curves. • Objects with gradient fills that were created in CS5 may not appear correctly when imported. • Corel programs cannot import AI files containing bitmaps linked as EPS files. • Adobe Illustrator graphics are imported into the program as a group of objects. Click Arrange Ungroup to manipulate objects in the imported graphic. If you open an AI file instead of importing it, you do not need to ungroup objects. • For AI CS4 and CS5 files, each Artboard is imported as an individual Corel DESIGNER page. In multi-page documents, objects that are placed off of a page are placed on the first page of the Corel DESIGNER document. • Objects filled by using Live Color groups (color schemes) appear correctly in Corel DESIGNER, but the Live Color groups are not maintained as color styles. • Certain compression settings in Adobe Illustrator may further compress the file to save space, making it difficult to open the file in Corel DESIGNER To avoid this problem, open the file in Adobe Illustrator and change the document settings so that the file is not compressed. Supported file formats 689 • Symbols, objects with patterns, and objects that have 3d extrude or bevel applied are converted as curves. • Objects that have the Feather or Transparency effect applied are converted using the applicable lens effect in Corel DESIGNER. • Objects that have the texture, drop shadow, blur, or brushstroke effect applied are converted as bitmap objects in Corel DESIGNER. Exporting an AI file • During export conversion, objects can become complex, making it difficult to edit them in other drawing programs, or in Corel DESIGNER if you reimport them. To avoid this problem, keep a copy of the image in Corel DESIGNER (DES) format, and use Corel DESIGNER for all editing. • If you create a file that will be printed in other programs, such as Adobe® PageMaker®, export it using the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) filter, not the Adobe Illustrator (AI) filter. The Encapsulated PostScript filter supports more drawing effects than the Adobe Illustrator filter does and yields better results overall. • Most linear and radial fountain fills are preserved. Conical and square fountain fills are exported as a series of filled bands, an effect similar to that achieved by blending. You can set the number of bands by clicking Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and type a number in the Preview fountain steps box. The maximum number of bands supported is 256. • To accurately reproduce calligraphic outlines, corner styles, and line caps, click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and enable the Calligraphic text check box in the Clipboard area. The outlines are exported as a group of polygons that match the appearance of the outlines in the program, but add significantly to the size of the exported file. • You can export text as text when you are exporting AI files from versions CS and later. • When exporting multi-page Corel DESIGNER files to the CS4 format, individual pages are exported as Artboards. They are also layed out using the Arrange by row format. • When exporting multi-page Corel DESIGNER files to the CS4 format, objects that are placed off of the page are removed. 690 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB) The Adobe Type I Font (PFB) is a file format that stores Adobe Type 1 fonts. Most Type 1 fonts are single master fonts that permit only style editing; for example, Roman, italic, bold. A single master Type 1 font contains two files: a Printer Font Metrics (PFM) file and a Printer Font Binary (PFB) file. Some Type 1 fonts are also available in multiple master format. You can customize design elements of multiple master fonts such as weight, width, style, and optical size. A multiple master base font is the multiple master font itself, from which you create variations called multiple master instances. A multiple master base font is composed of a PFM file, a PFB file, and a Multiple Master Metrics (MMM) file. A multiple master instance is composed of a PFM file and a PostScript Printer Stub (PSS) file. Adobe Type 1 Fonts technical notes • Adobe Type 1 fonts exported from Corel DESIGNER are unhinted. • Each exported character constitutes a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects. • For best results, avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the following example. Left to right: three objects correctly combined; five objects correctly combined; five objects incorrectly combined • Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported. • Adobe Type 1 fonts you create are compatible with Adobe Type Manager version 2.0, but not with earlier versions. Supported file formats 691 Windows Bitmap (BMP) The Windows® bitmap (BMP) file format was developed as a standard for representing graphic images as bitmaps on the Windows operating system. To import a bitmap file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose BMP - Windows bitmap (*.bmp; *.dib; *.rle) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. To export a bitmap file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust the width, height, resolution, color mode, or any of the other settings. Windows Bitmap (BMP) technical notes Importing a BMP file • You can import Windows Bitmap files conforming to the Windows and OS/2 BMP specifications. • Windows Bitmap files may be black-and-white, 16 colors, grayscale, paletted, or RGB color (24-bit), and print accordingly, depending on your printer. • Run-length encoding (RLE) compression may be used on all bitmaps, except RGB color (24-bit), and black-and-white bitmaps. 692 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • The resolution ranges from 72 to 300 dpi, or higher if you choose custom settings. • The maximum image size is 64,535 × 64,535 pixels. Exporting a BMP file • Because raster images such as bitmaps are mapped pixel by pixel to the page, the resolution does not increase. Instead, your bitmap appears jagged, with an apparent loss of resolution. OS/2 Bitmap (BMP) This type of bitmap file is designed for the OS/2 operating system. The OS/2 Bitmap file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 × 64,535 pixels. OS/2 uses Runlength encoding (RLE) compression. OS/2 Bitmap (BMP) technical notes • Corel programs support Standard Version 1.3 and Enhanced Version 2.0, or later versions of the OS/2 Bitmap file format. • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing and exporting BMP files: 1-bit black and white, 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale, 16-color (4-bit) and 256-color (8-bit) paletted, and 24-bit RGB. Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) is an open, platform-independent metafile format used for storing and exchanging two-dimensional graphics. It supports RGB color. CGM files can contain both vector graphics and bitmaps, but they usually contain one graphic type or the other — rarely both. Corel DESIGNER supports CGM Version 1, CGM Version 3, and three CGM Version 4 profiles — ACGM, WebCGM, S1000D, and GREX. The CGM Version 4 profiles are subsets of the CGM standard; each profile contains some CGM features. Files of these profiles allow associating of non-graphical data with graphical elements, and are often referred to as “intelligent graphics.” Below is a short description of the supported Version 4 profiles: • ACGM (ActiveCGM) — supports hyperlinking of both vector graphics and bitmaps, zooming, panning, hotspots, and database links. It is very suitable for displaying 2D drawings on the Internet. Supported file formats 693 • WebCGM (Versions 1.0, 2.0, and 2.1) — a binary file format that supports hyperlinks, document navigation, picture structuring and layers, as well as searching on WebCGM picture contents. It also supports Unicode and Web fonts. The WebCGM profile is used widely in Web electronic documents. • WebCGM S1000D Profile — a standard that specifies requirements for creating graphics that are compliant with S1000D. S1000D is an international, SGML/ XML-based standard for creating and managing technical publications. It was originally developed by the Aerospace and Defense Industries Association of Europe (ASD) for creating technical publications for military aircrafts. The standard has since been modified and is now supported by numerous industries for creating technical publications. • GREX (ATA GREXCHANGE) — very similar to WebCGM in its rules for graphical elements. Unlike WebCGM, this profile supports only Western encoding and some base fonts. Although it does not support URL links, it does support references that can be externally resolved. The GREX profile is widely used in the automotive, aerospace, and defence industries. To import a CGM file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose CGM - Computer Graphics Metafile (*.cgm) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose CGM - Computer Graphics Metafile from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. To export a CGM file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose CGM - Computer Graphics Metafile from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 694 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 6 In the CGM export dialog box, choose a version from the Export version list box. If the version you selected supports text encoding, enable one of the following encoding options: • Text • Binary Choose an encoding type from the Type list box. Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) technical notes Importing a CGM file • Corel DESIGNER can import CGM Version 1, 3 and 4 files. Version 4 files include WebCGM 1.0, 2.0, 2.1, and S1000D files. • The CGM filter accepts only markers supported by the CGM file format standard. Private-use markers are ignored. • Text is editable, provided the file is exported from the source program with the correct text options specified. The typeface you see may not correspond to the one used in the source program; however, you can easily correct the typeface in the Corel program. • If the CGM file contains a font that is not on your computer, the PANOSE fontmatching dialog box lets you replace the font with an available one. • When you import a CGM file, some object types are converted to Corel DESIGNER objects. For example, hyperbolic and parabolic elements are converted to Bézier curves. • When you import a WebCGM (Version 2.0 and 2.1) or WebCGM S1000D file in Corel DESIGNER, objects attributes stored in an XML companion file (XCF) are imported. Exporting a CGM file • Corel DESIGNER can export version 1, 3 and 4 CGM files. • When you export to the WebCGM format, you choose from three Text encoding options: UTF-8, UTF-16, and ISO 8859-1. • You can export WebCGM (Version 2.0 and 2.1) or S1000D CGM files with objects attributes stored in an XML companion file (XCF). • You have the option of compressing WebCGM 2.1 files on export. • CGM files can be saved in text or binary format. Text-encoded files can be opened in an ASCII text editor. • PostScript textures are converted to solid gray fills. Supported file formats 695 CorelDRAW (CDR) CorelDRAW (CDR) files are primarily vector graphic drawings. Vectors define a picture as a list of graphic primitives (rectangles, lines, text, arcs, and ellipses). Vectors are mapped point by point to the page, so if you reduce or increase the size of a vector graphic, the original image will not be distorted. Vector graphics are created and edited in graphics design applications, such as CorelDRAW, but you can also edit vector graphics in image-editing applications such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can use vector images of various formats in desktop publishing programs. To import a CorelDRAW file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose CDR - CorelDRAW (*.cdr) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose CDR - CorelDRAW from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. CorelDRAW (CDR) technical notes • Imported Corel DESIGNER files appear as a group of objects. Click Arrange Ungroup to manipulate individual objects in the imported graphic. • Halos, callouts, and dimensions are converted to curves and are grouped. Text remains as text. • Linked symbols are converted to internal symbols. Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) is a metafile format that supports bitmap and vector information and the full range of PANTONE, RGB, and CMYK colors. Files saved in CMX format can be opened and edited in other Corel applications. 696 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To import a Corel Presentation Exchange file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose CMX - Corel Presentation Exchange (*.cmx) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose CMX - Corel Presentation Exchange from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. To export a Corel Presentation Exchange file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose CMX - Corel Presentation Exchange from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) technical notes • The following versions are supported: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11. • Corel DESIGNER imports Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) files as bitmaps. • When you import a CMX file from an earlier version, any text color backgrounds included in the file are not preserved. Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) Files saved to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format are bitmaps that represent shapes as pixels arranged to form an image. When you save a graphic to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, masks, floating objects, and lenses are saved with the image. Corel DESIGNER can import and export files in Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, including files that contain color and grayscale information. Supported file formats 697 To export a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose CPT - Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust the width, height, resolution, color mode, or any of the other settings. You can export Corel DESIGNER layers as objects in the CPT file format. You can export to an image with transparent background. Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) technical notes • This filter is available in Corel DESIGNER. • Corel PHOTO-PAINT files may be black-and-white, grayscale, paletted, CMYK color (32-bit), RGB color (24-bit), or Lab. Corel Symbol Library (CSL) Corel Symbol Library (CSL) files store symbols that can be used in other files. Corel Symbol Library (CSL) files can be stored locally or on a network, allowing easy deployment and management of symbol collections. For more information, see “Managing collections and libraries” on page 253. Cursor Resource (CUR) The Windows® 3.x/NT Cursor Resource (.cur files) file format is used to create icons for Windows® 3.1, Windows® NT, and Windows® 95 interfaces. It supports cursor graphic elements that are used in Windows pointers. You can select a color for Transparent and Inverse masks. The Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource file format supports a maximum image size of 32 × 32 pixels. 698 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Cursor Resource (CUR) technical notes • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing .cur files: 1-bit black-and-white, 16-color (4-bit) paletted, and 256-color (8-bit) paletted. Microsoft Word (DOC, DOCX, or RTF) You can import the following Microsoft Word files: • Microsoft Word Document (DOC) files from versions 97, 2000, 2002, and 2003. In addition, files saved as DOC from MS Word 2007. • Microsoft Word Open XML Document (DOCX) files. This file format is based on Open XML and uses ZIP compression. It was introduced with Microsoft Word 2007. • Rich Text Format (RTF) files. Rich Text Format (RTF) is a text format that stores plain text and text formatting, such as bold. When you import an RTF file to Corel DESIGNER, the text and any embedded Windows Metafile Format (WMF) graphics are transferred. However, graphic elements are not transferred in an RTF file exported from CorelDRAW. Because Microsoft Word is a proprietary file format, it’s sometimes difficult to precisely import all aspects of a Microsoft Word file in CorelDRAW. To successfully import text with fewer inconsistencies, it is recommended that you install the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack. If the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack was not previously installed on your computer, you will be prompted to install it when you attempt to import text. To import a Microsoft Word file 1 Click File Import. 2 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose DOC, DOCX - MS Word or RTF Rich Text Format from the All file formats list box. • (Windows XP) Choose DOC, DOCX - MS Word or RTF - Rich Text Format from the Files of type list box. 3 Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. Supported file formats 699 If the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack was not previously installed on your computer, the Install compatibility pack dialog box appears. The installation of the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack is highly recommended. To proceed with the installation, click Ok and follow the instructions in the installation wizard. 6 In the Importing/Pasting text dialog box, you can choose to maintain or discard text formatting. You can also choose to import tables as tables or text. 7 Position the import cursor in the drawing window, and click. Any embedded Windows Metafile Format (WMF) or Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) graphics are preserved in the imported file. If the file contains other graphic elements, these are lost during conversion and do not appear in Corel DESIGNER. You can place your imported text by dragging a marquee to define a paragraph text box, or by pressing the Spacebar to place the imported text in the default location. If you import text and choose not to install the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack, the Install compatibility pack dialog box will reappear the next time you import text, unless you enable the Do not ask me this question again check box. You can reactivate the Install compatibility pack dialog box by clicking Tools Options. In the list of categories, double-clicking Workspace, clicking Warnings, and enabling the Install Compatibility Pack for DOC and DOCX check box from the Show warnings when list box. To export a Microsoft Word file 1 Open a drawing that contains a text object. 2 Click File Export. 3 Choose DOC - MS Word for Windows 97/2000/2002 or RTF - Rich Text Format from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. The filename extension for the format you choose is appended to the filename automatically. 700 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Only text in drawings can be exported to the Microsoft Word file formats. Other graphical elements, such as lines, curves, and rectangles, are lost during conversion and do not display in the file.To export graphics, use a graphic format such as WMF. Microsoft Word (DOC, DOCX, and RTF) technical notes Importing a DOC, DOCX, and RTF file • To successfully import text with fewer inconsistencies, it is recommended that you install the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack. If the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack was not previously installed on your computer, you will be prompted to install it when you attempt to import text. • The following Microsoft Word versions are supported: Microsoft Word 97-2007, Microsoft Word for Windows 6/7, Microsoft Word for Windows 2.x, Microsoft Word 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, and 5.5. • The embedded-field method for building indexes in Microsoft Word is supported, but the style-implied method for building indexes is not. • The Corel program matches the fonts in the file you are importing with the same or similar fonts, depending on the fonts installed on your computer. However, the Normal text style in Microsoft Word is converted to the default text style. To set the default text style, click Tools Options. In the list of categories, double-click Document, double-click Styles, and choose a text style. • Whenever possible, the program automatically converts characters available in the sets “Symbol” or “MS Linedraw” to the corresponding Windows character set entries. • Most fonts are proportionally spaced, and text is reflowed when imported. As a result, soft line and page breaks often appear in new locations if you are converting to a fixed-pitch or nonscalable font. • When you import text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is adjusted to fit the current page size, which may affect the placement of text. • If a table is longer then the current page, the table data continues down and off the page. • Nested tables are not fully supported. The text within a nested table appears within the text box of the top-level table cell as text only (no bounding lines). • Nested bullets are not fully supported. • Objects and graphs are not supported. Supported file formats 701 • Equations are not maintained — the data and results may be maintained but they are unlinked. • Text direction is not maintained. Microsoft Publisher (PUB) Microsoft® Publisher (PUB) is the native format for files created in Microsoft Publisher, an application in the Microsoft Office line of products used for creating publications and market materials. Microsoft Publisher (PUB) technical notes • Corel DESIGNER imports Microsoft Publisher files from versions 2002, 2003, and 2007. • Exporting is not supported. • Two-page spread is imported as separate pages. • Master pages are not supported. A master page is imported as a separate layer on the page. The name of the layer corresponds to the name of the master page in Microsoft Publisher. • Headers and footers are not supported. Text from the header/footer is placed in the appropriate position on each page. • Tables are supported. Not all border types are supported. If a border type is not supported, it is replaced with an outline of the desired thickness and color. • Border art is not supported. • Styles are not supported. Style and formatting attributes are mapped to text. • Some underline styles are not supported. Unsupported underline styles are replaced with the best-match underline style available in Corel DESIGNER. • Shadow, Emboss, and Engrave font effects are not supported. • Horizontal rules in text objects are not supported. • Color schemes are not supported. Color scheme colors are mapped to object colors. • Font schemes are not supported. Font names and styles are mapped to their equivalents in Corel DESIGNER. • 3D shapes are supported. Surface textures are not supported. • Word art is imported as artistic text in Corel DESIGNER. Surface textures for extrudes are not supported. • Linked text boxes are supported. • Bookmarks and hyperlinks are supported. • Form objects (Microsoft Publisher 2002) are not supported. 702 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Corel DESIGNER (DES, DSF, DS4, or DRW) You can import Corel DESIGNER (formerly Micrografx Designer) files. Files from version 10 and later have the filename extension .des. Files from Micrografx versions 6 to 9 have the filename extension .dsf. Version 4 files have the filename extension .ds4. The .drw filename extension is used for a Micrografx 2.x or 3.x file. Micrografx template files (DST) are also supported. To import a Corel DESIGNER file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose DES - Corel DESIGNER (*.des) or DSF, DRW, DST, MGX - Corel/Micrografx Designer (*.dsf; *.drw; *.ds4) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose DSF, DRW, DST, MGX - Corel/Micrografx Designer or DES - Corel DESIGNER from the Files of type list box. 4 In the Designer import dialog box, adjust any of the settings. Corel DESIGNER (DSF) technical notes • Guidelines are preserved. Grid settings are not converted, however. • Snap points are not converted — the program preserves the default gravity settings. • Objects on some pages may be grouped together. You may want to select the group and then ungroup it before editing. • DSF files display OLE data as picture objects. OLE data object types are lost in the conversion. • Curvygons are converted to curves. • Any part of a graphic that is outside the extents that Corel DESIGNER can support cannot be accessed. You should resize the graphic before converting. • Enhanced line styles are preserved. • Gradient transparency may be offset in some cases. • Hatch fills are preserved in the imported file. • Unclosed, filled lines are converted to two objects: one for the line and one for the fill. Supported file formats 703 • Block text in Corel DESIGNER 9 files is converted to paragraph text in Corel DESIGNER X5. Freeform text is converted to artistic text. • Warped text is converted to curves. • Repelled text (block text that wraps around an object) is converted to multiple text objects. • Each line of a nonrectangular text object (text placed within an object) is converted to a separate text object. • For block text that has many transformations, tab stops may stretch or shrink. • Text flowing between containers is not preserved; each container is converted to a separate object. • Dimensions of text in small caps vary when the text is imported. Corel DESIGNER (DES) technical notes • Dimension lines and connector lines are converted to curves when you save a file to an earlier version of Corel DESIGNER. AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) and AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) files are vector files used as a native format for AutoCAD drawings. The Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) is a tagged data representation of the information contained in an AutoCAD drawing file. The Drawing Interchange format is a native file format of AutoCAD. It has become a standard for exchanging CAD drawings and is supported by many CAD applications. The Drawing Interchange format is vector-based and supports up to 256 colors. To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file (DWG) or AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose DWG - AutoCAD (*.dwg) or DXF AutoCAD (*.dxf) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose DWG - AutoCAD or DXF - AutoCAD from the Files of type list box. 704 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 From the 3D projection list box in the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point. 7 In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options: • Automatic — scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file • English (1 unit = 1 inch) — lets you scale the drawing in inches • Metric (1 unit = 1 mm) — lets you scale the drawing in millimeters If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable the Auto-reduce nodes check box. 8 Click OK. If the file is password protected, type the password in the Password box. If views are specified in your file, they appear automatically in the 3D projection list box. If your computer is missing a font that is included in a file you are importing, a PANOSE font matching dialog box appears and lets you substitute the font with a similar font. To export an AutoCAD Drawing Database file (DWG) or an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file (DXF) 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 From the Save as type list box, choose one of the following options: • DWG - AutoCAD • DXF - AutoCAD 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, choose an AutoCAD version from the Export version list box. 7 Choose a unit of measure from the Export units list box. 8 In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options: • Curves — lets you export text as curves • Text — lets you export text as editable characters Supported file formats 705 9 In the Export bitmap as area, enable one of the options to export the bitmaps in a drawing to a supported bitmap format. 10 In the Fill unmapped fills area, enable one of the following options: • Color — fills all unmapped fills with color. To change the color, click the Color picker and choose a color on the palette. • Unfilled — leaves unmapped fills unfilled AutoCAD Data Interchange Format (DXF) technical notes • The program supports AutoCAD files from version R2.5 to 2008. • Layers are retained on import and export. Importing an AutoCAD DXF file • If a DXF file is too complex to import into Corel DESIGNER, you can configure your AutoCAD output device as an HP7475 plotter and perform a plot-to-file of the drawing. Then you should be able to import this plot file using the import filter. Newer versions of AutoCAD allow you to create EPS files. • Corel graphics programs try to center the imported image. The image is scaled down if the coordinates are larger than the maximum page size available in Corel DESIGNER — 150 × 150 feet. • Model space pages are imported as master pages. • Solid and trace entities are filled. • Dimension lines are imported as curves, not as dimension objects. • A point is imported as an ellipse of minimum size. • Files exported as “Entities only” may not appear as expected in the Corel program because of a lack of header information. • Imported AutoCAD 2008 files that contain formatted paragraph text preserve text formatting such as spacing, alignment, and indents. • Justification of text entries may not be preserved, especially if fonts are replaced in the imported files. For best results, avoid justification of text. • If the DXF file contains a font that is not on the user’s computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets the user replace the font with an available one. • Lines with a number of points that exceed the maximum supported in Corel DESIGNER will be broken into multiple lines, and their fills will be dropped. • 3D solids are not directly supported in Corel DESIGNER. Users can import 3D solids with the 3D Import program. 706 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Exporting an AutoCAD DXF file • Corel DESIGNER saves drawings in a vector format accepted by computer-aided design/computer-aided manufacturing (CAD/CAM) programs and devices, such as AutoCAD and certain computer-driven sign and glass cutters. • Password protection is not available in the exported files. • Only the outlines of objects are exported. • Filled objects with no outlines have an outline appended to them on export. • All text is exported by using a generic font. Text formatting is not preserved. AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) technical notes • Corel DESIGNER can import and export AutoCAD files from version R2.5 to 2008. • If the DWG file contains a font that is not on your computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets you replace the font with an available one. • Password protection is not available in the exported files. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) EPS files can contain text, vector graphics, and bitmaps and are intended to be included (encapsulated) in other documents. Unlike other PostScript files, which can contain multiple pages, an EPS file is always a single page. EPS files usually contain a preview image (header) that lets you view the file content without the help of a PostScript interpreter. An EPS file without a preview image is displayed as a gray box in Corel applications. You can import and export EPS files. You can import an EPS file as a group of editable objects as you would import any other PostScript (PS) file. You can also bring the file as encapsulated, placing the preview image in the drawing window. The preview image is linked to the file. It is recommended that you import an EPS file as encapsulated in the following situations: • You want text in the EPS file to be displayed with the original fonts, without any font substitutions. • You are working with a large EPS file, and you don’t want to slow down the application. During the Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 installation, you have the option of installing Ghostscript®, which is an application that interprets the PostScript file format. Ghostscript allows you to import PostScript Level 3 files. If you did not install Ghostscript when you first installed the product, you can do so now. Supported file formats 707 To import an encapsulated PostScript file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PS, EPS, PRN - PostScript (*.ps; *.eps; *.prn) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PS, EPS, PRN - PostScript from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 In the Import EPS dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Import as editable —brings in the file as a group of Corel DESIGNER objects that you can modify • Place as encapsulated PostScript —places the preview image in the drawing. You cannot modify specific parts of the file, but you can edit the file as a whole by applying transformations, such as sizing and rotation. 7 If you are importing the file as editable, enable one of the following text options: • Text — preserves text objects in the imported file so that you can edit the text • Curves — converts text to curves 8 Click OK. 9 Click the drawing page. Some restrictions apply when you modify EPS files imported as editable. For more information, see “PostScript (PS or PRN) technical notes” on page 714. If the EPS file contains text converted to curves, the text in the imported file is not editable, even if you choose to import the text as text. You can also drag an EPS file from Windows Explorer into the drawing window. To export an encapsulated PostScript file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 708 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Choose EPS - Encapsulated PostScript from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the EPS export dialog box, adjust any of the settings. To set general exporting options 1 In the EPS export dialog box, click the General tab. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Specify the color mode for exporting to eps In the Color management area, choose an option from the Output colors as list box: •Native •RGB •CMYK •Grayscale If you choose the Native option, all objects preserve the color mode in which they were created, for example RGB, CMYK, Grayscale, or spot. Convert spot colors In the Color management area, enable the Convert spot colors to check box, and select an option from the list box. Choose a file format for previewing the PostScript image In the Preview image area, choose one of the following options: •None •TIFF •WMF If you choose the TIFF format, choose a color mode and resolution. Supported file formats 709 To Do the following Specify how to export text Enable one of the following options in the Export text as area: •Curves — lets you export text as curves •Text — lets you export text as editable characters If you want to include PostScript font information with your file, enable the Include fonts check box. Choose a compatibility option From the Compatibility list box, choose a PostScript level that is supported by the printer or the application with which you will be printing or displaying the file. Objects are always output as CMYK. Bitmaps have the option of different color modes. If you choose the 8-bit TIFF format for previewing images, you can make the background of the bitmap transparent by enabling the Transparent background check box in the Preview image area. To set advanced exporting options 1 In the EPS export dialog box, click the Advanced tab. 2 Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Specify the author’s name Type a name in the Author box. Apply bitmap compression In the Bitmap compression area, enable the Use JPEG compression check box. Move the JPEG quality slider to adjust the quality of the bitmaps. 710 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Apply a trapping option In the Trapping area, enable any of the following options: •Preserve document overprint settings — maintains current settings on objects •Always overprint black — creates a color trap by causing any objects that contain at least 95 percent black to overprint any underlying objects •Auto-spreading — creates a color trap by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as its fill and having it overprint underlying objects •Maximum — lets you specify the amount of spread that the Auto-spreading option assigns to an object If you want to specify the minimum font size to which Auto-Spreading is applied, type a value in the Text above box. If you want the outlines of all objects on the page to have the same width, enable the Fixed width check box. Apply a bounding box Supported file formats In the Bounding box area, enable any of the following options: •Objects — aligns the bounding box exactly to the objects in the file •Page — aligns the bounding box to the page •Bleed limit — lets you specify how far the bleed extends beyond the edge of the area to be printed •Crop marks — lets you use crop marks as alignment aids when you trim the print output to its final size •Floating point numbers — lets you use numbers with decimals 711 To Do the following Maintain OPI link Enable the Maintain OPI links check box to use low-resolution images as placeholders for high-resolution images. The Use JPEG compression check box remains disabled until you choose a PostScript level that supports this feature. To install Ghostscript 1 Close any open programs. 2 On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control panel. 3 Do one of the following: • In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Uninstall a program. • In Windows XP, click the Add or remove programs icon. 4 Do one of the following: • In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, double-click Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 from the Uninstall or change a program page. • In Windows XP, choose Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 from the Currently installed programs list. 5 Click Modify. 6 Click the Features tab. 7 Enable the GPL Ghostscript check box. 8 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) technical notes Importing an EPS file • If the encapsulated PostScript file was imported with the Place as Encapsulated PostScript option, and if it contains a preview image (called a header), the preview image is imported and displayed. The EPS information remains attached to the header and is used when the image is printed to a PostScript printer. • The PostScript Interpreted filter converts the objects in the encapsulated PostScript file to native Corel DESIGNER objects on import. • When you import a file with large or complex gradient fills, you may generate a large number of objects. 712 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Exporting an EPS file • On a PostScript printer, graphics exported to the encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format print from other programs exactly as they do from a Corel graphics programs. • You can save a header to the Tagged Image file format (TIFF) or Windows Metafile format (WMF) in black and white, 4-bit grayscale or color, or 8-bit grayscale or color. You can set the header resolution between 1 and 300 dots per inch (dpi); the default header resolution is 72 dpi. If the program importing the EPS file has a limitation on the image header size, you might receive an error message stating that the file is too large. To reduce file size, in the EPS export dialog box, choose Black and White from the Mode box, and lower the header resolution before exporting the file. The setting determines only the resolution of the header and has no impact on the print quality of a drawing. Color headers are useful for viewing EPS files. If the program in which you are going to use the file does not support color headers, try exporting with a mono header instead. You can also export without a header. • Along with the graphic, exported EPS files contain a filename, program name, and date. • To save font information in an EPS file, enable the Include fonts check box in the Export text as area. • If you export text as curves, text is converted to vector curves. • If a font used in the file is not available on the printer or has not been saved in the file, either the text is printed in Courier font or the drawing is not printed. PostScript (PS or PRN) PostScript (PS) files use PostScript language to describe the layout of text, vector graphics, or bitmaps for printing and display purposes. They can contain multiple pages. PostScript files are imported as a group of objects that you can edit. PostScript files usually have a .ps filename extension, but you can also import PostScript files with a .prn extension. Files with a .prn filename extension, commonly known as Printer (PRN) files, contain instructions about how a file should be printed. These files let you reprint a document even if the application in which the document was created is not installed on your computer. During the Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5 installation, you have the option of installing Ghostscript, which is an application that interprets the PostScript file format. Supported file formats 713 Ghostscript assists the file importing process. If you did not install Ghostscript during the installation, see “To install Ghostscript” on page 712. You can also import encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files. For more information, see “Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)” on page 707. To import a PostScript (PS or PRN) file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PS, EPS, PRN - PostScript (*.ps; *.eps; *.prn) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PS, EPS, PRN - PostScript from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename, and click Import. 5 In the Import text as area, enable one of the following text options: • Text — preserves text objects in the imported file so that you can edit the text • Curves — converts text to curves 6 Click OK. 7 Click the drawing page. When the PostScript file contains text converted to curves, the text in the imported file is not editable, even if you choose to import the text as text. PostScript (PS or PRN) technical notes • PostScript files containing mesh fills with spot colors, DeviceN images, or duotone images cannot be imported. Installing Ghostscript resolves this issue. • Mesh fills in the CMYK color mode are imported as bitmaps and cannot be edited. • Gradient fills are imported as a group of filled objects simulating the gradient fill appearance and cannot be edited as gradient fills. • RGB bitmaps are converted to CMYK in imported PS files. Installing Ghostscript resolves this issue. • Font information is maintained only if the font was embedded in the original file before it was imported. 714 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Files that are too large cannot be imported into some programs because of memory limitations. This problem can be caused by complex gradient fills that increase the number of objects in a graphic. • Only Printer (PRN) files, PS files, and EPS files in PostScript format are supported. GIF GIF is a bitmap-based format designed for use on the Web. It is highly compressed to minimize file transfer time and supports images with up to 256 colors. The GIF file format supports a maximum image size of 30,000 × 30,000 pixels and uses LZW compression. The GIF format provides the ability to store multiple bitmaps in a file. When the multiple images are displayed in rapid succession, the file is called an animated GIF file. For Internet use, you can also save images to the JPEG and PNG formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and are not sure which format to use, see “Exporting bitmaps for the Web” on page 261. To import a GIF file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose GIF - CompuServe Bitmap (*.gif) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose GIF - CompuServe Bitmap from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see “To resample a bitmap while importing” on page 650. Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a bitmap while importing” on page 651. You can drag on the drawing page to resize the image. Supported file formats 715 GIF technical notes • Corel programs import versions 87A and 89A of the GIF file format, but export only to version 89A. Version 87A supports basic features and interlacing. The newer version, 89A, includes all features found in 87A plus the ability to use transparent colors and to include comments and other data from the image file. • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing animated GIF files: black and white (1-bit), 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), and 256 color paletted (8bit). HTML HTML files are plain-text (also known as ASCII) files that can be created using any text editor, including SimpleText and TextEdit. HTML files are intended for display on a Web browser. You can import HTML files to edit text and add Web objects, bookmarks, and hyperlinks. For more information about preparing files and objects for Web publishing and uploading to the Web, see “Exporting to HTML” on page 681. To import an HTML file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose HTM - HyperText Markup Language (*.htm) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose HTM - HyperText Markup Language from the Files of type list box. If you don’t see this option, you first need to add the HTML filter to your installation of Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite X5. For information about modifying your installation, see “To modify or repair a Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite installation” on page 4. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 In the Use default text colors area, enable one of the following options: • Yes — uses the default color for text and for visited, unvisited, and active links, ignoring the colors specified in the HTML file • No — uses the colors specified in the HTML file 7 Click the drawing page. 716 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide HTML technical notes Importing an HTML file • The HTML import filter extracts editable information from a Web document and brings objects into Corel DESIGNER in a manner similar to the original layout. • The HTML import filter extracts editable information from a Web document and brings objects into Corel DESIGNER in a manner similar to the original layout. • Imported HTML files that exceed the boundaries of the drawing page continue down the workspace without a page break. JPEG (JPG) JPEG is a standard format developed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group. Through the use of superior compression techniques, this format allows the transfer of files among a wide variety of platforms. JPEG supports 8-bit grayscale, 24-bit RGB, and 32-bit CMYK color modes. The JPEG format is commonly used on the Web. For more information about exporting to the JPEG file format, see “Exporting bitmaps for the Web” on page 261. To import a JPEG file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose JPG - JPEG Bitmaps (*.jpg; *.jtf; *.jff; *.jpeg) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose JPG - JPEG Bitmaps from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing Supported file formats For more information, see “To resample a bitmap while importing” on page 650. 717 You can also Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a bitmap while importing” on page 651. You can drag on the drawing page to resize the image. JPEG technical notes • JPEG files can contain EXIF data. This data may affect how the JPEG files open. JPEG 2000 (JP2) The JPEG 2000 (JP2) file format is a JPEG image with advanced compression and file data capabilities. JPEG 2000 standard files can store more descriptive file data (or metadata), such as dimensions, tone scale, color space, and intellectual property rights, than JPEG 2000 codestream files. Codestream files are optimized for network transmission since they resist bit errors that can cause data loss on low-bandwidth channels. Not all Web browsers support JPEG 2000 formats. You may require a plug-in to view these files. When you export the image to a JP2 file, you can choose to view download progression by resolution, quality, and position. To import a JPEG 2000 file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose JP2 - JPEG 2000 Bitmaps (*.jp2; *.j2k) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose JP2 - JPEG 2000 Bitmaps from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. 718 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To export a JPEG 2000 bitmap 1 Click File Export. 2 Choose JP2 - JPEG 2000 bitmaps from the Save as type list box. 3 Type a name in the File name box. 4 Click Export. 5 Choose a JPEG 2000 preset from the Preset list list box in the upper-right corner of the dialog box. If you want modify the preset settings, you can change the exporting options in the dialog box. 6 Click OK. You can also Choose a color mode In the Settings area, choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. Embed the color profile In the Advanced area, enable the Embed color profile check box. Control image quality In the Settings area, choose a quality option from the Quality list box or type a value. Set the JPEG 2000 download from low to high resolution so that the size of the entire image increases In the Advanced area, choose Resolution\Quality from the Progression list box. Set the JPEG 2000 download from the upper-left corner of the image to the lowerright corner In the Advanced area, choose Resolution\Position from the Progression list box. Set the JPEG 2000 download from the upper-left corner of the image to the lowerright corner In the Advanced area, choose Position from the Progression list box. Set the JPEG 2000 download progressively by color channel In the Advanced area, choose Channels from the Progression list box. Allow JPEG 2000 codestream In the Advanced area, enable the Codestream check box. Supported file formats 719 JPEG 2000 (JP2) technical notes • Corel DESIGNER can import either JP2 or JPC files but export only to the JP2 format. • Corel DESIGNER supports exporting JPEG 2000 files in 24-bit RGB, and 8-bit grayscale. • CMYK, 48-bit RGB, and black-and-white images are not supported for export. Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD) Kodak® Photo CD image file is a raster format developed by Eastman Kodak for scanning photographic images onto compact discs. PCD images are derived from 35mm film negatives or slides that have been converted to digital format and stored on a CD. Photo CD allows high-quality digital storage and manipulation of photographic images. The PCD format is typically used by photofinishers and service bureaus who provide the service of placing photographs on CDs. To import a Kodak Photo CD image file 1 Click File Import. 2 Choose the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PCD - Kodak Photo-CD image (*.pcd) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PCD - Kodak Photo-CD image from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 In the PCD import dialog box, move any of the following sliders: • Brightness — lets you set the amount of light • Contrast — lets you specify the contrast between the pixels in the image • Saturation — lets you specify the purity of a color • Red — lets you specify the amount of red in the image • Green — lets you specify the amount of green in the image • Blue — lets you specify the amount of blue in the image 7 From the Resolutions list box, choose an image size. 8 From the Image type list box, choose a color mode. 9 Position the import placement start cursor on the drawing window, and click. 720 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see “To resample a bitmap while importing” on page 650. Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a bitmap while importing” on page 651. You can drag on the drawing page to resize the image. You can remove the adjustments made by the photofinisher at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk by enabling the Subtract scene balance check box. You can identify out-of-gamut areas of the image by enabling the Show colors out of gamut check box, which renders the out-of-gamut pixels in pure red or pure blue. Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD) technical notes • Kodak Photo CD (PCD) images may be subject to copyright. The Corel program does not display a warning message about this. • Other Kodak-compatible programs may install the Kodak pcdlib.dll file in the Windows folder instead of the Windows\System folder. This difference in the folder location produces an error message. • When you import Photo CD files, a dialog box appears and prompts you to choose the desired file resolution and color. The resolution is limited to 72 dpi and the maximum image size is 3072 × 2048 pixels. • You can import the following color modes: RGB (24-bit), paletted (8-bit), and grayscale (8-bit). PICT (PCT) The Macintosh PICT file format was developed for the Mac® OS platform by Apple® Computer Inc. It is a native file format of QuickDraw® and can contain both vectors and bitmaps. The Macintosh PICT file format is widely used in Macintosh applications. Supported file formats 721 To import a PICT file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT (*.pct; *.pict) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. You can drag on the drawing page to resize the image. To export a PICT file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. PICT (PCT) technical notes • Corel graphics programs can import vector drawings and bitmaps contained in PICT (PCT) files. • Objects that contain a fill and an outline open as a group of two objects. One object is the outline, and the other is the fill. • PICT fills are often bitmap patterns, and the Corel program tries to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns. • Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color. • Text in PICT files opens as editable text. If a typeface in the imported file is not available on your computer, it is converted to the font that it most closely resembles. • Text alignment may not be preserved in the original file. This is due to the differences in font size, and intercharacter and interword spacing between the two formats. Any misalignment is easily corrected using the text formatting settings in the program. 722 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide PaintBrush (PCX) The PaintBrush (PCX) file format is a bitmap format originally developed by the ZSoft Corporation for the PC Paintbrush program. To import a PaintBrush file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PCX - PaintBrush (*.pcx) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. To export a PaintBrush file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust the width, height, resolution, color mode, or any of the other settings. 7 In the Convert to paletted dialog box, adjust any of the settings. PaintBrush (PCX) technical notes Exporting a PCX file • Bitmaps may be black-and-white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit). • Run-length encoding (RLE) compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 × 64,535 pixels. • These files may contain one, two, or four color planes. • This file format is supported in Corel DESIGNER. Supported file formats 723 Importing a PCX file • PCX files can be imported if they conform to the following PCX specifications: 2.5, 2.8, and 3.0. • Bitmaps may be black-and-white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit). • RLE compression is supported and the maximum image size is 64,535 × 64,535 pixels. • These files may contain one, two, or four color planes. Files containing three color planes or more than four color planes cannot be imported. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) The Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original file. Using Adobe Reader and Adobe Acrobat Exchange, a PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed by Mac OS, Windows, and UNIX® users. You can open or import a PDF file. When you open a PDF file, it is opened as a Corel DESIGNER file. When you import a PDF file, the file is imported as grouped objects and can be placed anywhere within your current document. You can import an entire PDF file, individual pages from the file, or multiple pages. Some PDF files are secured by a password. You are prompted to enter a password before you can open and edit a secured PDF file. For information about PDF security options, see “Setting security options for PDF files” on page 671. You can save a file in the PDF format. For more information, see “Exporting to PDF” on page 659. Importing text The method by which PDF files store information affects how text looks and how easily it can be edited. To help ensure the best results for your document, you can choose whether to import the text in your file as text or as curves. When you import text as text, the font and text are preserved, and the text is fully editable as artistic or paragraph text. However, some effects and formatting may be lost. This option is recommended if you have a PDF file that contains large blocks of text, such as a newsletter, and you want to reformat the text or add text content. 724 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide When you import text as curves, the appearance of the text, including all effects applied to it, are preserved, and each letter is converted to a curve object. With this option, the text formatting features can no longer be used to edit the text. If you have a PDF file that contains a small amount of text that does not require editing, or if you do not have the fonts used in the PDF file, you can import the text as curves. For more information about converting text to curves, see “Finding, editing, and converting text” on page 438. Importing comments Some PDF files can contain comments and annotations. These may consist of text, curves, and other drawings or shapes that are added to the PDF document by a reviewer. If commenting rights have been granted, you have the option of importing the comments with the PDF file. When comments are imported, they are placed on a separate “Comments” layer in the document. By default, this layer is set as nonprintable. If the PDF document contains comments written by multiple reviewers, the comments are grouped on the “Comments” layer based on the author’s name. To import an Adobe Portable Document Format file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format (*.pdf; *.ai) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. If the file is protected by a password, type a valid password in the Password box. 6 In the Import text as area, choose one of the following options: • Text — lets you edit and reformat the text from the PDF file • Curves — converts text to curves. Choose this option when you do not need to edit the text from the PDF file, and you want to maintain the appearance of the original text. If you are importing a multipage document, select the pages you want to import, and click OK. Supported file formats 725 If the document contains comments that you want to import, check the Import comments and place on a separate layer check box. 7 Click the drawing page. If a block of text is imported as separate text objects, you can combine the text objects by selecting them and clicking Arrange Combine. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) technical notes Publishing a PDF file • Texture fills created in Corel DESIGNER are exported and imported as bitmap patterns. Importing a PDF file • Corel DESIGNER imports Adobe Portable Document Format files. • Transparency applied to text and graphics is preserved. • Character attributes of text, including superscript and subscript, are preserved. • DeviceN color spaces may be converted to RGB or CMYK processed colors in the imported file, depending on the file content. • Layers are preserved in files created with Adobe Acrobat 6 and later. • Xform objects are converted to symbols. • Symbols are preserved when PDF files created with version 1.3 or later undergo round-tripping. • Pattern and texture fills are preserved. • Most mesh fills created in Adobe Illustrator are preserved. • Comments are preserved and imported on a separate “Comments” layer in the document. • Text annotations, including free text annotations, are imported as paragraph text. • Sticky Notes display as a rectangle with the appropriate background and border color. Headers in Sticky Notes are not supported. • Line annotations display as straight lines with the appropriate width and color. Arrows with different fill and outline colors display fill and outline of the same color. • Square and circle annotations display as rectangles and ellipses with the appropriate fill/outline properties. Polygon and polyline annotations are mapped as polycurves with similar fill/outline properties. Cloud shapes display as polygons. 726 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Text markup annotations, such as highlights, underlining, and strikeouts, are imported. • Standard ink and stamp annotations are supported. Custom stamp annotations are not supported. • Sound annotations, movie annotations, and file link annotations are not supported. HPGL Plotter File (PLT) The HPGL Plotter File (PLT) format, developed by Hewlett-Packard®, is vector-based. It is used in programs such as AutoCAD for printing drawings on plotters. Other Corel applications can interpret a SUBSET of the HPGL and HPGL/2 command set. This format uses a scaling factor of 1,016 plotter units to 1 inch. To import an HPGL Plotter file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PLT - HPGL Plotter File (*.plt; *.hgl) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PLT - HPGL Plotter File from the Files of type list. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 In the HPGL options dialog box, adjust any of the settings. To export an HPGL Plotter file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder where you want to store the file. 3 Choose PLT - HPGL Plotter File from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the HPGL export dialog box, adjust any of the settings. Supported file formats 727 HPGL Plotter (PLT) technical notes Importing a PLT file • Corel programs support versions 1 and 2 of PLT file formats although some features of version 2 are not supported. • You can import images larger than the Corel program’s maximum page size by enabling the Scale option in the HPGL options dialog box, which lets you resize the imported image. • The curve resolution factor can be set to a value between 0.0 and 1.0 inch. The value can be very precise; up to eight decimal places are accepted. A setting of 0.0 results in the highest resolution, but it also greatly increases file size. A curve resolution of 0.004 inch is recommended. • The PLT file format does not contain color information. Instead, the various objects in a PLT file have certain pen numbers associated with them. When imported into a Corel program, each pen number is assigned a specific color. You can specify the color assigned to a particular pen, so that you can match the original colors of the graphic. • The Pen selection list contains 256 pens, although not all of the pens may be assigned. You can change the color assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new color for that pen from the Pen color list box. Choosing Custom colors brings up a color definition dialog box that allows you to define a custom color according to RGB values. • You can change the pen width assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new width for that pen from the Pen width list box. • You can change the pen velocity by choosing the pen and then choosing a new velocity for that pen from the Pen velocity list box. This is useful only for exporting PLT files. • You can set a defined pen to the Unused option. You can also reset the current Pen Library pen settings to the previously saved settings. • Corel programs support numerous dotted, dashed, and solid line types of the PLT file format. The pattern number of a line in a PLT file is translated to a line type pattern. • If the PLT file contains a font that is not on the user’s computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets the user replace the font with an available one. Exporting a PLT file • In Corel DESIGNER X5, you now have the option of setting the Plotter origin to Top left. 728 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Only the outlines of objects are exported to the PLT file format. • Dotted lines, dashed lines, and arrowheads are mapped to standard line types of the PLT file format. • Bézier curves are converted to line segments. • Outline thickness and calligraphic settings are lost. • Outline colors are limited to eight: black, blue, red, green, magenta, yellow, cyan, and brown. Portable Network Graphics (PNG) The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) file format is an excellent file format for lossless, portable, and well-compressed storage of bitmaps. It takes up a minimum amount of disk space and can be easily read and exchanged between computers. The Portable Network Graphics format provides a replacement for the GIF format and can also replace many common uses of the TIFF format. The Portable Network Graphics format is designed to work well in online viewing, such as on the Web, and it’s fully streamable with a progressive display option. Some Web browsers do not support all formatting and features. You can export images to the Portable Network Graphics file format if you want to use transparent backgrounds, image interlacing, image maps, or animation in your Web pages. Exporting graphics to the Portable Network Graphics format converts them to bitmaps that can be used in desktop publishing programs and Microsoft Office applications. You can also edit Portable Network Graphics in image-editing programs such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Adobe Photoshop. For more information, see “Exporting bitmaps for the Web” on page 261. You can also save images to the GIF and JPEG formats to use on the Internet. If you want to publish an image to the Web but are not sure which format to use, see “Exporting bitmaps for the Web” on page 261. To import a Portable Network Graphics file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics (*.png) from the list box next to the File name box. Supported file formats 729 • (Windows XP) Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see “To resample a bitmap while importing” on page 650. Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a bitmap while importing” on page 651. You can drag on the drawing page to resize the image. Portable Network Graphics (PNG) technical notes • You can import Portable Networks Graphics (PNG) files from 1-bit black and white to 24-bit color; 48-bit color is not supported. • Masks and indexed-color, grayscale, and true color images are supported. Masks, however, are not saved in 1-bit black-and-white or 8-bit paletted files. • LZ77 compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 30,000 × 30,000 pixels. Sample depths range from 1 to 16 bits. • The PNG file format also checks full-file integrity and detects common transmission errors. The PNG file format can store gamma and chromatic data for improved color matching on different platforms. Adobe Photoshop (PSD) The Adobe Photoshop (PSD) file format is the native bitmap file format for Adobe Photoshop. To import an Adobe Photoshop file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: 730 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop (*.psd; *.pdd) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see “To resample a bitmap while importing” on page 650. Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a bitmap while importing” on page 651. To export an Adobe Photoshop file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust the width, height, resolution, color mode, or any of the other settings. You can export to an image with a transparent background. Adobe Photoshop (PSD) technical notes Importing a PSD file • Monotone, grayscale, duotone, 48-bit RGB, and up to 32-bit CMYK images are supported. • Some layer effects cannot be imported. (Gradient map adjustment layer is imported without Noise, Opacity stops, and Dither.) Supported file formats 731 • Imported layers using the Darken Color and Lighten Color blend modes map to the If Darker and If Lighter merge modes, respectively. For more information about working with merge modes, see “Applying merge modes” on page 420. • Files that contain spot color channels are imported as multichannel (DeviceN) bitmaps. Exporting a PSD file • This format supports 1-bit black-and-white and up to 32-bit CMYK color images. • Layers are supported. • Text is rasterized. • Spot color channel information is preserved in the exported file. Corel Painter (RIF) Imported Corel Painter (RIF) files retain information such as floating objects, which makes the files much larger than GIF or JPEG files. Corel Painter files can be imported for resizing and adjusting floaters. To import a Corel Painter file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose RIFF - Painter (*.rif) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose RIFF - Painter from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see “To resample a graphic while importing.” Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a graphic while importing.” 732 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Corel Painter (RIF) technical notes • The embedded color profile is preserved, but can be changed after importing the file. • If the Corel Painter image contains a transparent background, which is called a canvas in Corel Painter, it is preserved. • Vector shapes are not preserved in the imported file. • Text and annotations are not preserved. • Bitmap layers are imported as grouped objects. • Liquid Ink, Watercolor, Digital Watercolor, and plug-in layers are imported as RGB objects. • Mosaics and tesselations are imported as RGB objects. • Image slicing is not retained. Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) is an open standard graphics file format that allows designers to put the power of vector graphics to work on the Web. It was created by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C®). SVG files are described in Extensible Markup Language (XML). They are vector graphic images, which can provide superior detail and faster download times than bitmaps. Compressed SVG files have an .svgz filename extension. To view SVG files, you need an SVG viewer plug-in such as the Corel SVG viewer. Unicode support SVG files support Unicode encoding for text. When exporting an SVG file, you can choose a Unicode encoding method. Embedding and linking You can embed information in an SVG file, or you can create additional files to store some of the information. For example, you can embed a style sheet in an SVG file, or you can create an external cascading style sheet and link it to the SVG file. By default, JavaScript, such as JavaScript related to rollovers, is embedded in the exported file, but you can choose to store it as a separate file linked to the SVG file. Also, you can embed bitmaps, or you can save bitmaps as externally linked files. Supported file formats 733 Exporting text You can export text as text or curves. When exporting text as text, you can choose to embed all fonts in a Scalable Vector Graphics file to have full editing capabilities. You can also embed only the fonts used, and common English or common Roman fonts. Using preset export options To make your work easier, you can use preset export options, and you can create custom preset export options that you can reuse later. Using SVG colors SVG colors correspond to color keywords. You can use the SVG color palette available in the application to help ensure that colors in the exported SVG file are defined by color keywords. To ensure that the SVG color names you choose are retained in the SVG exported file, it is recommended that you disable color correction. For information about color correction, see “Getting started with color management in Corel DESIGNER” on page 369. Adding reference information to SVG objects and files Reference information can be added to a drawing and retained in an exported Scalable Vector Graphics object or file. You can add information to a drawing so that the information appears in the file’s XML tags. These tags are derived from the data field names, each of which is formatted as general text, data and time, linear and angular dimensions, or numbers. For example, you can name individual objects in the drawing and add comments for each of these objects. The name and comments for each object display in the tags of the exported Scalable Vector Graphics file. Similarly, you can preserve page property information in a Scalable Vector Graphics file, in which the data field categories are maintained as inline tags. You can also rename the default author name, classification, description, and keywords categories. To export a Scalable Vector Graphics file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose SVG - Scalable vector graphics or SVGZ - Compressed SVG from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 734 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 6 From the Encoding method list box, choose one of the following encoding options: • Unicode - UTF-8 — produces a smaller file size. This is the default encoding method and is useful in most circumstances. • Unicode - UTF-16 — produces a bigger file size 7 In the Export text area, enable one of the following options: • As text — exports text as editable characters, known as glyphs • As curves — exports text as curves 8 Choose one of the following options from the Styling options list box: • Presentation attributes — lets you specify attributes directly in an element in the exported file • Internal style sheet — uses the CLASS attribute to embed the style sheet in the Scalable Vector Graphics file • External CSS — creates an external cascading style sheet file and links it to the Scalable Vector Graphics file JavaScript related to rollovers can be saved to a separate file by enabling the Link externally check box in the JavaScript area. You can also Embed a font Enable the Embed font in file check box. Choose which fonts you want to embed from the Character subsetting list box. Give an embedded font priority over the default browser font Enable the Give embedded font priority check box. Set the drawing precision From the Drawing precision list box, select the drawing precision defined as a ratio of units. Set the number of fountain fill steps to export In the Fountain steps box, type the number of fill levels. Export bitmaps to the JPEG, GIF, or PNG file format Choose a bitmap format from the Bitmap export type list box, and enable one of the following options: •Link images — saves each bitmap as a separate file that is linked to the SVG file •Embed images — embeds each bitmap in the SVG file Supported file formats 735 You can also Apply preset export options Choose a preset from the Presets list box. Create custom preset export options Choose the settings you want, click the Add preset button beside the Presets list box, and type a name for the settings. Preview the exported file Click Preview. You must embed fonts when you require the display of a specific font that the users may not have installed on their computers. As the number of fonts or fountain fill steps increases, so does the size of the file. Objects with mesh fills or drop shadows are exported as bitmaps. If no single element in a drawing is selected, the content of the entire page is exported. To choose a color by using the SVG color palette 1 Select an object. 2 Click Window Color palettes More palettes. The Color palette manager opens. 3 From the Palette libraries folder, double-click the Process folder. 4 Click the Show or hide icon beside the SVG colors palette. 5 Click a color swatch on the SVG color palette. To ensure that SVG colors are preserved in the exported file, you can disable color correction by clicking Tools Color management and then choosing Color management off from the Settings list box in the Color management dialog box. To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object 1 Select an object using the Pick tool . 2 Click Window Object data manager. 3 In the Name/value list, click a data field name. 4 Type the information in the text box. 736 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Rename a data field Click the Open field editor button . Choose the name of the data field, and type a new name. Add a data field Click the Open field editor button. Click the Create new field button, and type the name of the new field. Change the data field format Click the Open field editor button. Click a field name and then click the Change button. Enable a field type option. Fields containing no values are ignored when a file is exported to the Scalable Vector Graphics format. To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file 1 Click on the drawing page to deselect all objects. 2 Click Window Property manager. 3 Click the Page tab. 4 Type information in one or both of the following: • Page title box • Content boxes in the Page information area The Page tab appears only when no objects are selected. Information in the HTML file box is not retained in the Scalable Vector Graphics file. A valid Scalable Vector Graphics file must contain unique field names and no spaces or special characters. In the SVG export dialog box, you can click the Issues tab and ensure that all elements of the file are correctly named. Supported file formats 737 Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) technical notes Importing an SVG file • Most of the information in SVG files created in other programs is preserved in the imported file, even if Corel DESIGNER does not support a feature. For example, information about ink strokes in an SVG file created in another program is preserved in the imported file, even though the ink strokes are not displayed. • Clipped and masked objects are imported as PowerClip objects. • Group, object, and symbol names and IDs are retained in the imported file. • Symbols in the imported file appear in the Symbol manager docker. • Bitmap files embedded in an SVG file are retained. • SVG color definitions and names are supported. • Round-tripping is supported. • Metadata is supported. • Hyperlinks are supported. Exporting an SVG file • Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) allows three types of graphic objects: vector graphic shapes (for example, paths consisting of straight lines and curves), images, and text. • Drop shadows are rasterized in SVG files. • Hotspot information added to a drawing is retained in the exported file. For information about hotspotting, see “Managing object data” on page 293. • All Corel DESIGNER symbols are supported on export as SVG symbols. • Object, layer, group, and symbol names are also supported. If the names are the same, the SVG file appends unique numbers to the object IDs. Invalid names are corrected on export. • Graphical objects can be grouped, styled, transformed, and combined into previously rendered objects. • You can export text as editable characters, so that after you publish an SVG graphic to the Web, text continues to be recognized as text. Text strings can be restyled, copied and pasted, or indexed by search engines. Text can also be edited by SVGcapable editing programs, eliminating the need for maintaining multiple versions of graphic images for editing. • The SVG standard allows the use of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to define font, text, and color properties of objects on a page. 738 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Layers are retained as groups in the exported file. If you import the file back into Corel DESIGNER, the layer groups are converted into layers with the original layer names preserved. • Only the active page in a drawing is exported. If you want to export only a part of a drawing, enable the Selected only check box in the Export dialog box. • URLs assigned to text objects are retained in the exported file. • Transformations, such as rotation and skewing, are usually retained in the exported files. In some cases, transformations may be lost, and transformed shapes may be converted into curves. Macromedia Flash (SWF) Macromedia® Flash® is a file format for creating and displaying vector-based images and animation. Macromedia Flash files are extremely compact and of high quality, making them ideal for use on the Web. Before you save a file to the Macromedia Flash file format, you can determine whether the file has potential export problems. You can check the current file and display a summary of errors, possible problems, and a suggestion for resolving the issue. To export a Macromedia Flash file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose SWF - Macromedia Flash from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Flash export dialog box, choose values from any of the following list boxes: • JPG compression — specifies the amount of JPEG file compression • Resolution (dpi) — specifies the resolution of the image • Smoothing — tones down differences between adjacent pixels 7 Enable one of the following options in the Bounding box size area: • Page — applies the bounding box to the page • Objects — aligns the bounding box to the objects in the file 8 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Optimization area: • Convert dashed outlines — converts dashed outlines to solid lines Supported file formats 739 • Rounded caps and corners — rounds the corners and endpoints of lines and curves • Use default fountain steps — lets you use the default number of steps for fountain fills You can save the settings in the Flash export dialog box to a preset by clicking the Add preset button and typing a name in the Setting name box. To preview a Macromedia Flash file in a browser, you must have the Macromedia Flash Player plug-in installed on your computer. To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose SWF - Macromedia Flash from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Flash export dialog box, click the Issues tab. 7 Click an error or warning in the error list to see the details and suggestions for resolving the issue. If you want to overlook certain issues, click Settings, and disable the check boxes that correspond to those issues. The Issues tab heading indicates the number of issues. The icon on the tab heading changes, depending on the severity of the issue or issues identified. Macromedia Flash (SWF) technical notes • Macromedia Flash (SWF) files cannot be imported into Corel DESIGNER. TARGA (TGA) The TARGA (TGA) graphics format is used for describing bitmaps. It supports various compression systems and can represent bitmaps ranging from black-and-white to RGB color. You can import or export TGA files in Corel DESIGNER. 740 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To export a TARGA file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose TGA - Targa bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. To compress an image while exporting it, choose a compression type from the Compression type list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust the width, height, resolution, color mode, or any of the other settings, and click OK. 7 In the TGA export dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Normal • Enhanced Black-and-white images cannot be saved as TARGA files. TARGA (TGA) technical notes • The following features are supported: uncompressed color-mapped images, uncompressed RGB images, run-length encoding (RLE) compressed color-mapped images, RLE-compressed RGB images (types 1, 2, 9, and 10 as defined by the AT&T Electronic Photography and Imaging Center), and masks. • The type of file produced depends on the number of colors exported. For example, 24-bit color TARGA (TGA) files are exported as RLE-compressed RGB bitmaps. • You can import TGA files from 8-bit grayscale to 24-bit RGB. • Masks are not saved in 1-bit black-and-white or 8-bit paletted files. • RLE compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 × 64,535 pixels. TIFF The Tagged Image File format (TIFF) is a raster format designed as a standard. Almost every graphics application can read and write TIFF files. TIFF supports various color modes and bit depths. For information about importing TIFF files, see “To import a file into an active drawing” on page 647. Supported file formats 741 To export a TIFF file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose TIF - TIFF bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust the width, height, resolution, color mode, or any of the other settings, and click OK. TIFF technical notes • When importing a TIFF that contains multiple pages, you can import all pages or choose the individual pages that you want to import. • Black-and-white, color, and grayscale TIFF files up to and including the 6.0 specification can be imported and exported. • TIFF files compressed using JPEG, ZIP, CCITT, Packbits 32773, or LZW compression can also be imported. However, you may notice additional loading time with these files because the program decodes the file compression. TrueType Font (TTF) The TrueType Font (TTF) file format was created jointly by Apple Computer and Microsoft Corporation. It is the most common format for fonts used in both Macintosh and Windows operating systems. The TTF file format prints font characters as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. True Type fonts appear the same in print and on-screen, and they can be resized to any height. TrueType Fonts (TTF) technical notes • TrueType fonts exported from Corel DESIGNER are unhinted. • Each exported character constitutes a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects. • Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported. • For best results, avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the following example. 742 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Left to right: three objects correctly combined; five objects correctly combined; five objects incorrectly combined Visio (VSD) • • • • • VSD is the Visio drawing format. It can contain bitmaps and vectors. You can import all VSD file types, up to VSD 2007. Rectangle shapes are imported as rectangle objects. Circle and ellipse shapes are imported as circle objects. Curvygon, pentagon, hexagon, heptagon, octagon, and megagon shapes are imported as polygon objects. • All other shapes are imported as polycurves. WordPerfect Document (WPD) The WordPerfect Document format (WPD) is the native file format for WordPerfect files. Corel DESIGNER supports WPD files from WordPerfect 4.2 to 14. WordPerfect files for versions 4 and 5 have the file extensions .wp4 and .wp5. For more information, see “General notes on importing text files” on page 749. WordPerfect Document (WPD) technical notes • When you import text from a WPD file, you can maintain formatting, maintain fonts and formatting, or discard fonts and formatting. Supported file formats 743 • When you import or export a WordPerfect file, only text is transferred. Graphic elements are not imported or exported. • The following features are not supported: index functions, text in tables of contents, and style sheets. • Equations and formulas created in the WordPerfect equation language are converted to regular text. • Graphic features like HLine and VLine are not converted. • When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size, which may affect the placement of text. WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) The Corel WordPerfect Graphic file format (WPG) is primarily a vector graphic format, but it can store both bitmap and vector data. The WPG files may contain up to 256 colors, chosen from a palette of more than 1 million colors. To import a WordPerfect Graphic file 1 Click File Import. 2 Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3 Do one of the following: • (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Choose WPG - Corel WordPerfect Graphic (*.wpg) from the list box next to the File name box. • (Windows XP) Choose WPG - Corel WordPerfect Graphic from the Files of type list box. 4 Click the filename. 5 Click Import. 6 Click the drawing page. Any embedded Windows Metafile Format (WMF) or Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) graphics are preserved in the imported file. If the file contains other graphic elements, these are lost during conversion and do not appear in Corel DESIGNER. 744 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To export a WordPerfect Graphic file 1 Click File Export. 2 Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3 Choose WPG - Corel WordPerfect Graphic from the Save as type list box. 4 Type a filename in the File name list box. 5 Click Export. 6 Enable one of the following options in the Export colors area: • 16 colors — exports the image as a 16-color image • 256 colors — exports the image as a 256-color image 7 Enable one of the following options in the Export text as area: • Text — exports text as editable characters • Curves — exports text as curves 8 Enable one of the following options in the Export file as area: • WordPerfect Version 1.0 — supported by WordPerfect 5.1 and earlier • WordPerfect Version 2.0 — supported by WordPerfect 6 and later WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) technical notes • Graphics Text Type 2 is not supported. RAW camera file formats A RAW camera file is a data file captured by the image censor of a high-end digital camera. RAW camera files contain minimal in-camera processing, such as sharpening or digital zoom, and they give you full control over the sharpness, contrast, and saturation of images. Various RAW camera file formats exist, so the files can have different filename extensions, such as .nef, .crw, .dcr, .orf, or .mrw. You can import RAW camera files directly into Corel DESIGNER. For more information, see “Working with RAW camera files” on page 593. Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WI) Importing a WI file • Corel programs support the following color depths when you import Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (.wi) files: 256-shade (8-bit) grayscale, and 24-bit RGB. Supported file formats 745 Exporting a WI file • Corel programs support the following color depths when you export to the Wavelet Compressed Bitmap file format: 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale, 24-bit RGB. • The Wavelet Compressed Bitmap file format supports Wavelet compression. It also supports a minimum image size of 16 pixels and a maximum size of 2,048 pixels. Windows Metafile Format (WMF) Developed by Microsoft Corporation, this file format stores both vector and bitmap information. It was developed as the internal file format for Microsoft Windows 3. It supports 24-bit RGB color and is supported by most Windows applications. Windows Metafile Format (WMF) technical notes Importing a WMF file • Corel DESIGNER substitutes fonts that are missing from a file in the WMF format from similar fonts available on your computer. • The following features are not supported: PANOSE font matching and rotated and skewed bitmaps. Exporting a WMF file • The WMF format is used to export graphics to Windows programs. • A header contains additional information, such as sizing. Therefore, a WMF file can successfully be exported from Corel DESIGNER if the header is included. • Text is maintained as text when exported, and WMF files can be very large. This can cause problems in programs that limit the size of imported files. • The WMF format is 16 bits, while Corel DESIGNER is 32 bits. When you export a WMF file, the 32-bit numbers are converted to 16 bits. For example, lines that are thinner than 0.01388 inch appear as hairlines because the WMF format does not have enough precision to specify these widths accurately. Additional file formats Corel DESIGNER also supports the following file formats: • ANSI Text (TXT) — ANSI Text (TXT) is a vector format that stores ANSI characters. This format is able to store text information but not formatting information, such as the font type or size. When a TXT file is imported to or exported from Corel DESIGNER, only the text is transferred. If the file has graphic elements, they are not imported or exported. 746 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL) — CALS Raster (CAL) is a bitmap format used mainly for document storage by high-end CAD programs. It supports a monochrome (1-bit) color depth and is used as a data graphics exchange format for computer-aided design and manufacturing, technical graphics, and imageprocessing applications. • Corel ArtShow 5 (CPX) — The CPX file format is a native file format of Corel ArtShow 5. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps. • Corel Presentations (SHW) — The SHW file format is a native format of Corel Presentations. • CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX) — The CDX file format is a compressed CorelDRAW file. • Corel DESIGNER or CorelDRAW Template (CDT) — The CDT file format is for a Corel DESIGNER or CorelDRAW template file. • Encapsulated PostScript (Desktop Color Separation) — The DCS file format, developed by QuarkXPress, is an extension of the standard encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file format. Typically, the DCS file format consists of five files. Four of the five files contain information about high-resolution color. This information is expressed in CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) format. The fifth file, considered the master file, contains a PICT preview of the DCS file. • EXE — The EXE format is a Windows 3.x/NT bitmap resource. • FPX — The FlashPix® file format stores images at different resolutions in a single file. • Frame Vector Metafile (FMV) — The FMV file format is used for a Frame Vector Metafile. • GEM Paint (IMG) — GEM Paint (IMG) is a bitmap format that is the native bitmapped file format of the GEM environment. IMG files support 1- and 4-bit paletted color and are compressed by using an RLE method. IMG was a common format in the early days of desktop publishing. • GEM File (GEM) — The GEM file format is used for a GEM file. • GIMP (XCF) — XCF is the native GIMP format. It supports layers and other GIMP-specific information. • ICO — The ICO format is a Windows 3.x/NT icon resource. • MacPaint Bitmap (MAC) — MacPaint (MAC) is a bitmap format that uses the filename extensions MAC, PCT, PNT, and PIX. It is the format used by the MacPaint program that was included with the Macintosh 128. It supports only two colors and a palette of patterns. It is used mainly by Macintosh graphics Supported file formats 747 • • • • • • • • • • • applications to store black-and-white graphics and clipart. The maximum size for MAC® images is 720 × 576 pixels. Macromedia® FreeHand® (FH) — the FH format is the native vector file format for Macromedia Freehand. Corel graphics applications support versions 7 and 8 of Macromedia FreeHand. MET Metafile (MET) — The MET file format is for a MET Metafile. Micrografx Picture Publisher 4 & 5 (PP4, PP5) — The PP4 file format is a native file format of Micrographx Picture Publisher 4. The PP5 file format is a native file format of Micrographx Picture Publisher 5. Picture Publisher File (PPF) — The PPF file format is native to Micrografx Picture Publisher 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. Microsoft Excel (XLS, XLSM) — The XLS file format is the native file format of a Microsoft Excel workbook. The XLSM file format is the native file format of a macro-enabled XML workbook. Microsoft® PowerPoint® (PPT) — The PPT file format is native to Microsoft PowerPoint. NAP Metafile (NAP) — The NAP file format is used for a NAP Metafile. Pattern File (PAT) — The PAT file format is used for a pattern file. PostScript Interpreted (PS or PRN) — PRN PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import PS, PRN, and EPS PostScript files. SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT) — The SCT file format is used for importing 32-bit color and grayscale SCITEX images. SCITEX bitmaps are created from high-end scanners. The bitmaps are then processed for output by film recorders or high-end page layout programs. XPixMap Image (XPM) — The XPM file format is used with an XPixMap Image file. Recommended formats for importing graphics The table below shows what file formats to use when you are importing graphics from other applications. Application Recommended import format Adobe Illustrator AI, PDF (for some Adobe Illustrator files version 11) 748 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Application Recommended import format AutoCAD DXF, DWG, HPGL (PLT files) Text editors Clipboard and Paragraph text import Recommended formats for exporting graphics When exporting graphics to be used in Adobe PageMaker, use the encapsulated PostScript file format if you have a PostScript printer. If you have a non-PostScript printer, the WMF format is recommended. The following table lists the recommended file formats for exporting to page layout and desktop publishing packages that have graphics editing capabilities. Application Recommended format Adobe Illustrator AI AutoCAD DXF Macromedia FreeHand and other vector programs PCT, AI WordPerfect Office WPG Micrografx Designer CGM The HPGL or DXF outlines formats are recommended for exporting graphics to be output to devices such as plotters and computer-driven cutters. General notes on importing text files • When you import a text file into a Corel program, it appears almost the same as in the source program. However, some formatting attributes and page layout features may not be supported. In such cases, the program tries to simulate the results of a feature when a reasonable substitution can be made. • The following word-processing features are not supported: headers, footers, footnotes and endnotes, columns, and macros. • Font matching support is included. You can modify font-matching settings in the Font matching results dialog box. Fonts are converted by size and by family, Supported file formats 749 • • • • • • • • • • • • 750 provided the source file format includes font family information that the program can access. Rich Text Format (.rtf) files are automatically converted to the Microsoft Windows ANSI (American National Standards Institute) character set. The Macintosh Character Set and Standard IBM PC Code Page 437 are also supported. Corel graphics programs match characters as closely as possible. Font matching is used if the imported text font is not on the user’s system. However, if a match cannot be made, the font characters appear in the program as unrecognizable text. Conversion of font sizes is supported. Corel graphics programs support all font families for the following word-processing programs and formats: Corel WordPerfect, Microsoft RTF, Microsoft Word PC, Microsoft Word Macintosh, Word for Windows. Corel graphics programs support only selected fonts from the fonts supported by Ami Professional. This typically includes Standard PostScript fonts and the Standard HP PCL fonts. When Macintosh files are converted, font support is limited to the supported font families of the Windows formats. Fonts converted to formats other than those listed in the table above are mapped to fonts that Corel graphics programs find as the best fit. You may encounter alignment problems when converting from and to a proportional and nonproportional font. Therefore, if you import a document created in a nonproportional font to a proportional font, some pages may have more text on a page than the original document. Source documents that contain a table of contents and index are converted into the appropriate functions in an .rtf file. Data that is automatically outlined is converted to regular text. Style sheet properties are converted to RTF. The file appears as in the source program; however, the style sheet from the original program is not imported. Text contained within a frame or a positioned object is retained. Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Customizing and automating Setting basic preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753 Customizing Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755 Using macros to automate tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .775 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 751 Setting basic preferences This section includes the following topics: • Disabling warning messages • Viewing system information • Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows XP) Disabling warning messages You may encounter warning messages while working in the application. Warning messages explain the consequences of an action you are about to perform, and inform you of permanent changes that might result from that action. Although the warnings are helpful, you can disable them so you don’t have to view them after you become familiar with the software. Avoid disabling warning messages until you are comfortable with the application and familiar with the results of the commands you use. To disable warning messages 1 Click Tools Options. 2 Click Workspace, and click Warnings in the list of categories. 3 Disable one or more of the check boxes. Viewing system information You can view information about your computer as well as information about the application itself. For example, you can view details about your computer’s setup. You can view detailed information about your system, display and printing properties, Corel applications and DLL files, and system DLL files. This feature is useful, for instance, to find out how much space you have on the drive to which you want to save a file. Setting basic preferences 753 To view system information 1 Click Help About Corel DESIGNER. 2 Click System info. 3 Choose a category from the Choose a category list box. Click the Save button to store system information for printing. Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows XP) Corel® Application Recovery Manager™ (C.A.R.M.) is an online wizard that allows you to save your work and exit in case the application becomes unstable. You can also send an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it. Note that C.A.R.M. can be used only in Windows XP. The C.A.R.M. wizard opens automatically at program failure and offers three courses of action: • saving the drawing and closing the application • exiting the application without saving the drawing • continue working With the last option, there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your drawing after the last time you saved or kept the program open. After you have made your selection, you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log. Your report will be vital part of Corel’s product improvement efforts. You can disable C.A.R.M., but doing so can result in your losing any work since the last time you saved. To disable Corel Application Recovery Manager 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, click Global. 3 Disable the Enable CARM check box. All Corel applications installed on your computer are affected when C.A.R.M. is disabled. 754 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Customizing Corel DESIGNER You can customize your application by arranging command bars and commands to suit your needs. Command bars include menus, toolbars, the property bar, and the status bar. Help topics are based on the application’s default settings. When you customize command bars, commands, and buttons, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes. This section contains the following topics: • Saving defaults • Using multiple workspaces • Customizing keyboard shortcuts • Customizing menus • Customizing toolbars • Customizing the property bar • Customizing the status bar • Customizing feedback sounds • Customizing filters • Customizing file associations Saving defaults Many application settings apply to the active drawing only. These include page layout options, grid and ruler settings, guideline settings, style options, save options, some tool settings, and Web publishing options. Saving the current settings as defaults lets you use the settings of the active drawing for all new drawings you create. You can also choose to save only specific settings as defaults. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 755 To save current settings as defaults • Click Tools Save settings as default. To save specific settings as defaults 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, click Document. 3 Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box. 4 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the options you want to save. Using multiple workspaces A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. You can create and delete workspaces, and you can choose a preset workspace included in the application.You can also reset the current workspace to the default settings. You can export and import workspaces to and from other computers that use the same application. For example, you can customize a workspace and share it with a group of users. To create a workspace 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3 Click New. 4 Type the name of the workspace in the Name of new workspace box. 5 From the Base new workspace on list box, choose an existing workspace on which to base the new workspace. If you want to include a description of the workspace, type a description in the Description of new workspace box. Custom workspaces are saved as XML files and exported as XML-based Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT) files. 756 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To choose a workspace 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3 Enable the check box beside a workspace in the Workspace list. If you want to be able to choose a workspace as you start the application, make sure that the Select workspace at startup check box is enabled. To delete a workspace 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3 Choose a workspace from the Workspace list. 4 Click Delete. You cannot delete the default workspace. To reset the current workspace 1 Exit the application. 2 Restart the application while holding down F8. To import a workspace 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3 Click Import. 4 In the Import workspace dialog box, click Browse. 5 Choose the folder where the file is stored. 6 Double-click the file. 7 Follow the instructions on screen. To export a workspace 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the list of categories, click Workspace. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 757 3 Click Export. 4 Enable the check boxes beside the workspace items you want to export. 5 Click Save. 6 Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 7 Type a filename in the File name box. 8 Click Save. 9 Click Close. The workspace items available for export are dockers, toolbars (including the property bar and toolbox), menus, status bar, and shortcut keys. Custom workspaces are exported as XML-based Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT) files. You can use a workspace saved to the XSLT format when you set up or deploy custom workspaces. You can send a workspace as an e-mail attachment by clicking Email in the Export workspace dialog box. Customizing keyboard shortcuts Although your application has preset keyboard shortcuts, you can change them, or add your own shortcuts, to suit your working style. You can assign keyboard shortcuts to the commands and text styles that you use the most, and you can delete keyboard shortcuts. Assigning a keyboard shortcut to a text style lets you quickly change the style of selected text. You can print a list of keyboard shortcuts. You can also export a list of keyboard shortcuts to the CSV file format — a comma delimited format that is easily opened by word processors and spreadsheet applications. When you change keyboard shortcuts, the changes are saved in a file called an accelerator table. Your application comes with the following accelerator tables which can be customized to suit your work habits: • Anchor editing table — contains shortcut keys for anchor editing • Main table — contains all non-text-related shortcut keys • Table editing table — contains non-text-related shortcut keys for table editing • Table text editing table — contains shortcut keys for editing text in tables 758 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide • Text editing table — contains all text-related shortcut keys To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4 Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box. 5 Choose a command category from the top list box. 6 Click a command in the Commands list. The shortcut keys currently assigned to the selected command are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box. 7 Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination. If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box. 8 Click Assign. If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut. You can reset all keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all. You can view all of the existing keyboard shortcuts by clicking View all. To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4 Choose Apply styles from the top list box. 5 Choose a text style from the list. If any shortcut keys are currently assigned for applying the selected style, they are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 759 6 Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination. If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box. 7 Click Assign. If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut. You can reset all keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all. To delete a keyboard shortcut 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4 Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box. 5 Choose a command category from the top list box. 6 Click a command in the Commands list. 7 Click a shortcut key in the Current shortcut keys box. 8 Click Delete. To print keyboard shortcuts 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4 Click View all. 5 Click Print. To export a list of keyboard shortcuts 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 760 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4 Click View all. 5 Click Export to CSV. 6 Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 7 Type a filename in the File name box. 8 Click Save. Customizing menus Corel customization features let you modify the menu bar and the menus it contains. You can change the order of menus and menu commands; add, remove, and rename menus and menu commands; and add and remove menu command separators. You can search for a menu command if you do not remember the menu in which it belongs. You can also reset menus to the default setting. The customization options apply to the menu bar menus as well as to shortcut menus that you access by right-clicking. Help topics are based on the application’s default settings. When you customize menus and menu commands, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes. To change the order of menus and menu commands 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 In the application window, drag a menu on the menu bar to the left or right. If you want to change the order of menu commands, click a menu on the menu bar, click a menu command, and drag it up or down. If you want to change the order of context menu commands, right-click in the application window to display the context menu, and drag a menu command to a new position. To rename a menu or menu command 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 761 4 Click a menu or command in the list. A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. 5 Click the Appearance tab. 6 Type a name in the Caption box. An ampersand (&) before a letter in the Caption box indicates a shortcut, also known as a mneumonic accelerator key. Menus are displayed by pressing Alt + the letter. Commands are invoked by pressing the letter that is underlined when the menu is displayed. You can reset the name to the default by clicking Restore defaults. To add or remove an item on the menu bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. If you want to remove an item, drag it off the menu bar. 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. 4 Drag an item to the menu bar. A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. All other items in the list are commands. To add or remove a command on a menu 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. If you want to remove a command from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command off the menu. 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. 4 Drag a command to a menu in the application window. To add or remove a command separator on a menu 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 762 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide If you want to remove a command separator from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command separator off the menu. 3 Choose User menus from the top list box. 4 Click Separator and drag it onto a menu in the application window. To find a menu command quickly 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Click the Search button . 4 In the Find text dialog box, type the menu command in the Find what box. 5 Click Find next. To reset menus to the default setting 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3 Choose Menu bar from the list. 4 Click Reset. Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbar position and display. For example, you can move or resize a toolbar, and you can choose to hide or display a toolbar. Toolbars can be either docked or floating. Docking a toolbar attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a toolbar pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around. You can create, delete, and rename custom toolbars. You can customize toolbars by adding, removing, and arranging toolbar items. You can adjust toolbar appearance by resizing buttons; adjusting the toolbar border; and displaying images, captions, or both. You can also edit toolbar button images. When moving, docking, and undocking toolbars, you use the grab area of the toolbar. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 763 For a The grab area is Docked toolbar Identified by a dotted line at the top or left edge of the toolbar Floating toolbar The title bar. If the title is not displayed, the grab area is identified by a dotted line at the top or left edge of the toolbar. If you do not want to move docked toolbars by mistake, you can lock them. Locked toolbars do not have a dotted line along their left edge. A locked toolbar To customize toolbar position and display To Do the following Move a toolbar Click the toolbar’s grab area, and drag the toolbar to a new position. Dock a toolbar Click the toolbar’s grab area, and drag the toolbar to any edge of the application window. Undock a toolbar Click the toolbar’s grab area, and drag the toolbar away from the edge of the application window. Resize a floating toolbar Point to the edge of the toolbar and, using the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the toolbar. Hide or display a toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, and disable or enable the check box next to the toolbar name. 764 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To Do the following Reset a toolbar to its default setting Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Reset. Docked toolbars cannot be moved when they are locked. For information about unlocking toolbars, see “To lock or unlock toolbars” on page 767. To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar To Do the following Add a custom toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click New, and type a name in the Command bars list. Holding down Alt + Ctrl, drag a tool or button in the application window to the new toolbar. Delete a custom toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Delete. Rename a custom toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar name twice, and type a new name. To add or remove an item on a toolbar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. 4 Drag a toolbar item from the list to a toolbar in the application window. If you want to remove an item from a toolbar, drag the toolbar item off the toolbar. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 765 To arrange toolbar items 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 On the toolbar in the application window, drag the toolbar item to a new position. If you want to move a toolbar item to another toolbar, drag the toolbar item icon from one toolbar to the other. You can copy a toolbar item to another toolbar by holding down Ctrl while dragging a toolbar item. To modify toolbar appearance 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3 Click a toolbar name in the list. If you want to choose multiple toolbars, hold down Ctrl, and click the other toolbar names. 4 Choose a size from the Button list box. 5 In the Border box, click an arrow to specify a value from 1 to 10 pixels for the toolbar border. 6 From the Default button appearance list box, choose one of the following: • Caption below image • Caption only • Caption to right of image • Default • Image only If you want to hide the title when the toolbar is floating, disable the Show title when toolbar is floating check box. You can reset a built-in toolbar to its default settings by clicking Reset. To edit a toolbar button image 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 766 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. 4 Click a toolbar command. 5 Click the Appearance tab. 6 Edit the button image using the options in the Image area. When you choose either Small or Medium in the Size list box, you edit the small or medium versions of a particular button image. You cannot edit the large version of a button image. For information about how to display all buttons as small, medium, or large, see “To modify toolbar appearance” on page 766. You can reset toolbar button images to the default settings by clicking Restore defaults. To lock or unlock toolbars • Click View Toolbars Lock toolbars. The Lock toolbars command is enabled when a check mark appears beside it. Floating toolbars cannot be locked. You can also lock or unlock toolbars by right-clicking a toolbar and clicking Lock toolbars. Customizing the property bar You have control over the placement and content of the property bar. You can move the property bar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the application window creates a floating property bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the application window docks it, making it part of the window border. When moving, docking, or undocking the property bar, you use the grab area of the property bar, which is the same as the grab area of a toolbar. For more information about the grab area, see “Customizing toolbars” on page 763. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 767 You can also set up a custom property bar by adding, removing, and rearranging toolbar items. This lets you customize what appears on the property bar when you choose various tools. For example, when the Text tool is active, you can have the property bar display additional commands for text-related tasks such as increasing or decreasing font size, or changing case. To position the property bar To Do the following Move the property bar Click the property bar’s grab area, and drag the property bar to a new position. Undock the property bar Click the property bar’s grab area, and drag the property bar away from the edge of the application window. Dock the property bar Click the property bar’s grab area, and drag the property bar to any edge of the application window. To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. 4 Drag a toolbar item from the list to the property bar. If you want to remove an item from the property bar, drag the toolbar item icon off the property bar. The new item is displayed on the property bar for the active tool or task. When the property bar content changes, the item is not displayed. The new item is displayed again when the related tool or task is activated. To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position on the property bar. 768 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Customizing the status bar The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as color, fill type, and outline. The status bar also shows the current cursor position and relevant commands. In addition, it displays document color information, such as the document color profile and color proofing status. You can customize the status bar by changing the information that is displayed and by resizing it. If you want to see more of the application window, you can hide the status bar. You can also customize the status bar by adding, removing, and resizing toolbar items. In addition, you can restore the status bar to its default settings. To change the information the status bar displays 1 On the first line of the status bar, click the flyout button next to the displayed information and choose one of the following options: • Object details • Information about selected tool 2 On the second line of the status bar, click the flyout button next to the displayed information and choose one of the following options: • Cursor position • Color information To resize the status bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3 Click Status bar, and enable the check box. 4 Type 1 or 2 in the Number of lines when docked box. To hide the status bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3 Disable the check box beside Status bar. You can also switch between hiding and displaying the status bar by clicking View Toolbars Status bar. You can also switch between hiding and displaying the status bar by rightclicking any toolbar and clicking Status bar. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 769 To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3 Choose a command category from the top list box. 4 Drag a toolbar item from the list to the status bar. If you want to remove a toolbar item from the status bar, drag the item off the status bar. To resize toolbar items on the status bar 1 Click Tools Customization. 2 In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3 Click Status bar, and enable the check box. 4 Choose one of the following options from the Button list box: • Small • Medium • Large Only toolbar items you have added to the status bar are affected by resizing. The size of the default icons remains unchanged. To restore the status bar default settings • Right-click the status bar, and click Customize Status bar Reset to default. Customizing feedback sounds Your application supports sounds through the Windows operating system. These sounds, which provide feedback through audio cues, are associated with certain user interface events. Though your application registers events available for sound cues, it does not supply any sounds. You can assign feedback sounds to specific events. Once assigned, feedback sounds are enabled by default, but you can disable them. 770 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To assign feedback sounds (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) 1 Click Start Control panel on the Windows taskbar. 2 Click Hardware and sound. 3 In the Sound area, click Change system sounds. The Sound dialog box appears. 4 In the Program events list, click an event below the application name. 5 Choose a sound from the Sounds list box. For more information about feedback sounds, consult the Windows Help. To assign feedback sounds (Windows XP) 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar. 2 Click Control panel. 3 Click Sounds, speech, and audio devices. 4 Click Sounds and audio devices. 5 In the Sounds and audio properties dialog box, click the Sounds tab. 6 From the Program events list, choose an event below the application name. 7 Choose a sound from the Sounds list box. To disable feedback sounds 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click General. 3 Disable the Enable sounds check box. You must restart the application for the disable command to take effect. Customizing filters Filters are used to convert files from one format to another. They are organized into four types: raster, vector, animation, and text. You can customize filter settings by adding or removing filters so that only the filters you need are loaded. You can also change the order of the list of filters and reset filters to the default setting. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 771 To add a filter 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3 Double-click a type of filter in the Available file types list. 4 Click a filter. 5 Click Add. To remove a filter 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3 Click a filter in the List of active filters. 4 Click Remove. To change the order of the list of filters 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3 Click a filter in the List of active filters. 4 Click one of the following: • Move up — moves the filter up the list • Move down — moves the filter down the list You can reset the List of active filters to the default setting by clicking Reset. Customizing file associations You can associate a number of different file types with Corel applications. When you double-click a file you have associated with an application, the application starts and the file opens. When you no longer need a file type association, you can break it. To associate a file type with Corel DESIGNER 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 772 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 3 Click Associate. 4 In the Associated file extensions with Corel DESIGNER list, enable the check box of the file type you want to associate. (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) Associating a file type with an application adds the application to the list of recommended programs for opening this file type. To open a file of an associated file type in Corel DESIGNER while browsing in Windows, you also need to make Corel DESIGNER the default program. To do this, click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and then click Default programs. Next, click Associate a file type or protocol with a program. For detailed instructions about how to change the default program for a file type, see the Windows Help. You can reset file associations by clicking Reset. To break a Corel DESIGNER file type association 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3 Click Associate. 4 In the Associated file extensions with Corel DESIGNER list, disable the check box of the file type association you want break. You can reset file associations by clicking Reset. Customizing Corel DESIGNER 773 Using macros to automate tasks You can use macros to speed up repetitive tasks, combine multiple or complex actions, or make an option more easily accessible. You create macros by using the built-in features for Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) or Visual Studio Tools for Applications (VSTA). Using a macro is similar to using the speed-dialing feature on a phone. On many phones, you can set a frequently dialed number to a speed-dial button; then, the next time you need to dial that number, you can save time by pressing its speed-dial button. Similarly, a macro lets you set the actions that you want to repeat; then, the next time that you need to repeat those actions, you can save time by playing that macro. This section contains the following topic: • Working with macros Working with macros You can save time by using a macro to automate a series of repetitive tasks. A macro lets you specify a sequence of actions so that you can quickly repeat those actions later. You don’t need any programming experience to use macros — in fact, the basic tools for working with macros are available within the main application window. However, if you want to have more control over your macros, you can use the following built-in programming environments: • Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), version 6.4 — a subset of the Microsoft Visual Basic (VB) programming environment, and an excellent choice for beginners. You can use VBA to create basic macros for personal use, but you can also use it to create more advanced macro projects. • Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for Applications (VSTA), version 2.0 — the successor to VBA, and an excellent choice for developers and other programming experts. VSTA provides the tools and features that you need to create the most advanced kinds of macro projects. Using macros to automate tasks 775 For detailed information on the differences between VBA and VSTA, please see the Corel DESIGNER Macros Help file (des_om.chm, which is located in the Data folder for the installed software). Getting started with macros The macro features for VBA and VSTA are installed with the software by default, but you can manually install these features if necessary. You can specify options for the VBA feature. The macro features provide several tools for working with macros in the main application window: • Macros toolbar — provides easy access to common macro functions • Macro Manager docker — provides easy access to all available macro projects for VBA, and to basic functions for working with those projects • Macro Editor (formerly the Visual Basic Editor) — provides advanced functions for creating VBA-based macro projects • VSTA Editor — provides advanced functions for creating VSTA-based macro projects Creating macros Macros are stored in modules (also called “code modules”), which are stored in macro projects. The Macro Manager docker lets you view and manage all of the macro projects, modules, and macros that are available to you. You can use the Macro Manager docker to create macro projects in the form of Global Macro Storage (GMS) files. Using a GMS file is an excellent way to bundle the components of your macro project for sharing with others. You can use the Macro Manager docker to open (or “load”) the macro projects that you create, as well as the macro projects that install with the software or that are otherwise made available to you. You can also use the Macro Manager docker to rename macro projects, as well as to copy and close (or “unload”) GMS-based macro projects. Some macro projects are locked and cannot be modified. When you create a document, a macro project for that document is automatically added to the Macro Manager docker. Although you can store macros within the macro project for a document — for example, to create an 776 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide all-in-one template — it is recommended that you instead use GMS files to store your macro projects. Each macro project contains at least one module. You can use the Macro Manager docker to add a module to a VBA-based macro project, or to open existing VBA modules for editing. You can also use the Macro Manager docker to rename or delete VBA modules. The editing feature is disabled for some modules. Finally, you can use the Macro Manager docker to create macros within the available modules. You don’t need any programming experience to create macros; however, if you have programming experience and want to edit VBA macros, you can do so by using the Macro Editor. You can also use the Macro Manager docker to rename and delete VBA macros. Corel DESIGNER includes sample macros, which supply additional functionality, demonstrate automation in the software, and provide sample code. For information on these sample macros, please see the Corel DESIGNER Macros Help file (des_om.chm, which is located in the Data folder for the installed software). Recording macros You can record macros and save them for later use. You can also record temporary macros for actions that you need to repeat only a few times. A temporary macro is accessible until a new temporary macro is recorded. The recording feature is disabled for some macro projects. Before recording a macro, make sure that you know exactly which actions you want to record and the order in which you want to record them. When you start recording, the macro recorder captures every change that you make in a drawing. For example, if you create a shape, resize the shape, and then change its color, the macro records all the changes. When you are done making the changes, you must stop recording the macro. Using macros to automate tasks 777 Playing macros You can perform the actions that are associated with a macro by playing that macro. You can also play a temporary macro. Learning more about macros Corel DESIGNER provides additional resources that contain helpful information about macros. These additional resources, which are located in the Data folder for the installed software, are described in the following table. Resource Description and filename Macros Help file Provides detailed information about the features and functions for creating macro projects in Corel DESIGNER des_om.chm Macro Programming Guide Provides an instructional approach to creating macro projects for Corel DESIGNER Macro Programming Guide.pdf Object Model Diagram Provides a hierarchical representation of the features and functions that can be automated in Corel DESIGNER Corel DESIGNER Object Model Diagram.pdf The Macros Help file includes documentation on every feature and function that can be automated in the application. (Collectively, these features and functions are called an “object model.”) You can easily access the Macros Help file from within the Macro Editor. For more detailed information about VBA and its programming environment, please consult the Microsoft Visual Basic Help from the Help menu in the Macro Editor. For more detailed information about VSTA and its programming environment, please consult the Help menu in the VSTA Editor. 778 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To manually install the macro features 1 Insert the installation disc into your computer. If the installation wizard does not start automatically, locate and run the Setup.exe file on the installation disc. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions for modifying the software. 3 On the Features page of the setup, enable the following check boxes in the Utilities list box: • Visual Basic for Applications 6.4 • Visual Studio Tools for Applications The macro features for VBA and VSTA are installed with the software by default. To specify VBA options 1 Click Tools Options. 2 In the Workspace list of categories, click VBA. 3 In the Security area, specify how to control the risk of running malicious macros by clicking Security options. If you want to bypass this security feature, enable the Trust all installed GMS modules check box, and then proceed to step 6. 4 On the Security level page of the Security dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Very high — allows only macros installed in trusted locations to run. All other signed and unsigned macros are disabled. • High — allows only signed macros from trusted sources to run. Unsigned macros are automatically disabled. • Medium — lets you choose which macros run, even if they are potentially harmful • Low (not recommended) — allows all potentially unsafe macros to run. Enable this setting if you have virus-scanning software installed, or if you check the safety of all documents that you open. 5 On the Trusted publishers page of the Security dialog box, review which macro publishers are trusted. Click View to display details on the selected macro publisher, or click Remove to delete the selected macro publisher from the list. Using macros to automate tasks 779 If desired, you can enable or disable the Trust access to Visual Basic project check box for the selected macro publisher. 6 Disable the Delay load VBA check box if you want to load the VBA feature at start-up. To access the macro tools To Do the following Display the Macros toolbar Click View Toolbars Macros. A check mark next to the command indicates that the toolbar is displayed. Display the Macro Manager docker Do one of the following: •Click Tools Macros Macro Manager. •Click the Macro Manager button on the Macros toolbar. Display the Macro Editor Do one of the following: •Click Tools Macros Macro Editor. •Click the Macro Editor button on the Macros toolbar. •Right-click Visual Basic for Applications in the Macro Manager docker, and then click Show IDE. Display the VSTA Editor Click Tools Macros VSTA Editor. To create a macro project • In the Macro Manager docker, do one of the following: • Click Visual Basic for Applications in the list, click New, and then click New macro project. • Right-click Visual Basic for Applications in the list, and then click New macro project. 780 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide You can also Open (or “load”) a macro project Do one of the following: •Click Visual Basic for Applications in the list, click Load, and then choose the project. •Right-click Visual Basic for Applications in the list, click Load macro project, and then choose the project. Rename a macro project Right-click the project in the list, and then click Rename. Copy a GMS-based macro project Right-click the project in the list, click Copy to, and then choose the target location for the copied project. NOTE: You cannot copy a document-based macro project. Such projects are stored within a document and cannot be managed separately from that document. Display or hide all modules in the list Click the Simple mode button Add a module to a macro project Do one of the following: •Click the project in the list, click New, and then click New module. •Right-click the project in the list, and then click New module. Edit a module in a macro project Do one of the following: •Click the module in the list, and then click the Edit button . •Right-click the module in the list, and then click Edit. Rename a module in a macro project Right-click the module in the list, and then click Rename. Using macros to automate tasks . 781 You can also Delete a module from a macro project Do one of the following: •Click the module in the list, and then click the Delete button . •Right-click the module in the list, and then click Delete. Close (or “unload”) a GMS-based macro project Right-click the macro project in the list, and then click Unload macro project. NOTE: You can close a document-based macro project only by closing the document in which it is stored. Some macro projects are locked and cannot be modified. To create a macro • In the Macro Manager docker, do one of the following: • Click the desired container module, click New, and then click New macro. • Right-click the desired container module, and then click New macro. You can also Edit a macro Do one of the following: •Click the macro in the list, and then click the Edit button . •Right-click the macro in the list, and then click Edit. Delete a macro Do one of the following: •Click the macro in the list, and then click the Delete button . •Right-click the macro in the list, and then click Delete. Some macro projects are locked and cannot be modified. 782 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To record a macro 1 Do one of the following: • Click Tools Macros Start recording, or click the Start recording button on the Macros toolbar, to store the macro in the default macro project for recordings. • In the Macro Manager docker, click the project in which to store the macro, and then click the Record button . The Record macro dialog box appears. 2 In the Macro name box, type a name for the macro. Macro names can contain numerals, but they must begin with a letter. Macro names cannot contain spaces or non-alphanumeric characters other than underscores ( _ ). 3 Type a description of the macro in the Description box, and then click OK. 4 Perform the actions that you want to record. The application begins recording your actions. If you want to pause recording, do one of the following: • Click Tools Macros Pause recording. Repeat this step to resume recording. • Click the Pause recording button on the Macros toolbar or in the Macro Manager docker. Repeat this step to resume recording. 5 To stop recording, do one of the following: • Click Tools Macros Stop recording. • Click the Stop recording button on the Macros toolbar or in the Macro Manager docker. You cannot record a macro if all available macro projects are locked. Not all actions can be recorded — some because of their complexity (although many such actions can be manually coded in the Macro Editor). When an action cannot be recorded, a comment is placed in the macro code (“The recording of this command is not supported.”), but the recording process continues until you stop it. You can view any comments in the code by opening the macro in the Macro Editor. You can specify the default macro project for recordings by right-clicking the project in the Macro Manager docker, and then clicking Set as recording project. However, you cannot specify a locked macro project. Using macros to automate tasks 783 You can cancel recording a macro, and discard any commands recorded thus far, by clicking Tools Macros Cancel recording. You can also Save the actions in the Undo list as a VBA macro Click Tools Undo, perform the actions that you want to record, and then click the Save list to a VBA macro button in the Undo docker. To record a temporary macro 1 Click Tools Macros Record temporary macro. 2 Perform the actions that you want to record. The application begins recording your actions. If you want to pause recording, do one of the following: • Click Tools Macros Pause recording. Repeat this step to resume recording. • Click the Pause Recording button on the Macros toolbar or in the Macro Manager docker. Repeat this step to resume recording. 3 To stop recording, do one of the following: • Click Tools Macros Stop recording. • Click the Stop Recording button on the Macros toolbar or in the Macro Manager docker. The macro is temporarily saved to the default recording project. When the current session is ended, the macro is deleted from that project. You cannot record a temporary macro if all available macro projects are locked. Not all actions can be recorded. You can specify the default recording project by right-clicking the project in the Macro Manager docker, and then clicking Set as recording project. (You cannot specify a locked macro project.) If you want, you can create multiple temporary recordings by assigning each one to its own macro project. You can cancel recording a macro, and discard any commands recorded thus far, by clicking Tools Macros Cancel recording. 784 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide To play a macro • Do any of the following: • Click Tools Macros Run macro, or click the Run macro button on the Macros toolbar. From the Macros in list box, choose the project or file in which the macro is stored. From the Macro name list, choose the macro. Click Run. • In the Macro Manager docker, double-click the macro in the list. • In the Macro Manager docker, click the macro in the list, and then click the Run button . • In the Macro Manager docker, right-click the macro in the list, and then click Run. To play a temporary macro • Click Tools Macros Run temporary macro. This option is enabled only after you record a temporary macro. If you have created multiple temporary macros, you must specify which macro project contains the one that you want to run. Right-click the project in the Macro Manager docker, and then click Set as recording project. To access the Macros Help file from within the Macro Editor 1 Press F2 to display the Object Browser. The Object Browser displays all the features and functions that can be automated in the Macro Editor. 2 Choose Corel DESIGNER from the Library list box. The Object Browser is updated to display only the features and functions of Corel DESIGNER that can be automated in the Macro Editor. Collectively, these features and functions are called an “object model.” 3 Do one of the following: • Display the home page for the Macros Help file by pressing F1. You can browse the object-model documentation for the application by accessing the “Object Model Reference” section of the Help file. • Display the Help topic for a specific item in the Object Browser by clicking that item and pressing F1. You can also display a Help topic for any item in the Code window of the Macro Editor by clicking that item and pressing F1. Using macros to automate tasks 785 Reference Comparing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide 787 Comparing features If you are moving from another technical graphics program, you will find many familiar features in Corel DESIGNER. However, some of these features have different names. The following table lists features and standard industry terms used in other technical graphics programs that have different names in Corel DESIGNER. Technical graphic term Corel DESIGNER feature Banner Status bar Bevel Chamfer Block select Marquee select (definition: marquee select) Block text Paragraph text Bounding box Selection box Canvas Drawing window Clone Duplicate Color depth Color mode Construction lines Guidelines Dynamic snap Snap to point (see Gravity snapping) Edit image Edit bitmap Fillet Rounded corner Freeform text Artistic text Gradient fill Fountain fill Image fill Bitmap pattern fill Comparing features 789 Technical graphic term Corel DESIGNER feature Line attributes Line settings Line style overall width Pattern width Line style width Outline width Magnetism Gravity snapping Magnify Magnify lens Masked object PowerClip object Object explorer Object Manager Object fill 2-color or full color pattern fill Hotspots Object Data Manager Page manager Page sorter view Palette window Toolbox Path text Text fit to path Pivot point Center of rotation Prompt and report area Status bar Reflection Flipping objects Ribbon Property bar Rotation point Center of rotation Rubberband box Marquee select (definition: marquee select) Share media Scrapbook Smash Convert to curves Snap points Gravity snapping Snap to rulers Snap to grid (see Gravity snapping) Solid color fill Uniform fill Stretchable box Marquee select (definition: marquee select) 790 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Technical graphic term Corel DESIGNER feature Structure view Object Manager (see To create a layer) Target sheet Active layer Text container Text frame Comparing features 791 Glossary A accelerator table A file that contains a list of shortcut keys. Different tables are active depending on the task that you are performing. anchor point The point that remains stationary when you stretch, scale, mirror, or skew an object. Anchor points correspond to the eight handles that appear when an object is selected, as well as the center of a selection box marked by an X. animation file A file that supports moving images; for example, animated GIF and QuickTime® (MOV). anti-aliasing A method of smoothing curved and diagonal edges in images. Intermediate pixels along edges are filled to smooth the transition between the edges and the surrounding area. arrow keys Direction keys that move or “nudge” selected objects in small increments. You can also use arrow keys to position the cursor when you type or edit text on-screen or in a dialog box. artistic text A type of text created with the Text tool. Use artistic text to add short lines of text, such as titles, or to apply graphic effects, such as fitting text to a path, creating extrusions and blends, and creating all other special effects. An artistic text object can contain up to 32,000 characters. Glossary 793 aspect ratio The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3. axonometric A type of orthographic projection in which three faces of a projected cube are visible. Dimetric, trimetric, and isometric are types of axonometric projection. B base color The color of the object that appears under a transparency. The base color and the color of the transparency combine in various ways depending on the merge mode you apply to the transparency. Bézier line A straight or curved line made up of segments connected by nodes. Each node has control handles that allow the shape of the line to be modified. bit depth The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap. For example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be black or white. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal to 2 to the power of the bit depth. For example, a bit depth of 1 can produce two color values (2 1=2), and a bit depth of 2 can produce 4 color values (2 2 = 4). Bit depth ranges between 1 and 64 bits per pixel (bpp) and determines the color depth of an image. bitmap An image composed of grids of pixels or dots. See also vector graphic. black point A brightness value that is considered black in a bitmap image. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can set the black point to improve the contrast of an image. For example, in a histogram of an image, with a brightness scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light), if you set the black point at 5, all pixels with a value greater than 5 are converted to black. 794 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide black-and-white color mode A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors — black and white — with no gradations. This color mode is useful for line art and simple graphics. To create a black-and-white photo effect, you can use the grayscale color mode. See also grayscale. bleed The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the page. The bleed ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and trimming. blend An effect created by transforming one object into another through a progression of shapes and colors. bookmark An indicator for marking an address on the Internet. bounding box The invisible box indicated by the eight selection handles surrounding a selected object. brightness The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color mode, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. For example, a brightness value of 0 produces black (or shadow in photos), and a brightness value of 255 produces white (or highlight in photos). C calligraphic angle The angle that controls the orientation of a pen to the drawing surface, like the slant of the nib on a calligraphy pen. A line drawn at the calligraphic angle has little or no thickness, but widens as its angle gets farther from the calligraphic angle. cascading style sheet (CSS) An extension to HTML that allows styles such as color, font, and size to be specified for parts of a hypertext document. Style information can be shared by multiple HTML files. See also HTML. Glossary 795 center of rotation The point around which an object rotates. CGI script An external application that is executed by an HTTP server in response to an action you perform in a Web browser, such as clicking a link, image, or another interactive element of a Web page character A letter, number, punctuation mark, or other symbol. child color A color style created as a shade of another color style. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent, but have different saturation and brightness levels. See also parent color. choke In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object into the foreground object. clipart Ready-made images that can be imported into Corel applications and edited if required. Clipboard An area that is used to temporarily store cut or copied information. The information is stored until new information is cut or copied to the Clipboard, replacing the old. clone A copy of an object or an area of an image that is linked to a master object or image area. Most changes made to the master are automatically applied to its clones. See also symbol. closed object An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are connected. closed path A path whose start point and end point are connected. 796 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide color cast A color tint that often occurs in photos as a result of lighting conditions or other factors. For example, taking a photo indoors in dim incandescent light can result in a yellow color cast, and taking a photo outdoors in bright sunlight can result in a blue color cast. color depth The maximum number of colors an image can contain. Color depth is determined by the bit depth of an image and the displaying monitor. For example, an 8-bit image can contain up to 256 colors, while a 24-bit image can contain roughly up to 16 million colors. A GIF image is an example of an 8-bit image; a JPEG image is an example of a 24-bit image. CMYK A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). CMYK printing produces true blacks and a wide tonal range. In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages; therefore, a value of 100 for an ink means that the ink is applied at full saturation. code page A code page is a table in the DOS or Windows operating system that defines which ASCII or ANSI character set is used for displaying text. Different character sets are used for different languages. collection A group of symbol library files. color channel An 8-bit grayscale version of an image. Each channel represents one level of color in the image; for example, RGB has three color channels, while CMYK has four. When all the channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image. See also RGB and CMYK. color gamut The range of colors that can be reproduced or perceived by any device. For example, a monitor displays a different color gamut than a printer, making it necessary to manage colors from original images to final output. Glossary 797 color mode A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up an image. Blackand-white, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and paletted are examples of color modes. color model A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB (red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), and CIE L*a*b (Lab) are examples of color models. color palette A collection of solid colors from which you can choose colors for fills and outlines. color profile A description of the color-handling capabilities and characteristics of a device. color separation In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image. In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) must be made. color space In electronic color management, a virtual representation of a device or the color gamut of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device’s color space are mapped by color management software. See also color gamut. color swatch A solid-colored patch in a color palette. color trapping A printing term used to describe a method of overlapping colors to compensate for misaligned color separations (misregistration). This method avoids white slivers that appear between adjoining colors on a white page. See also spread, choke, and overprinting. 798 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide color value A set of numbers that define a color in a color mode. For example, in the RGB color mode, color values of 255 for red (R) and zero for both green (G) and blue (B) result in the color red. combined object An object created by combining two or more objects and converting them into a single curve object. A combined object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the last selected object. Sections where an even number of objects overlapped have no fill. Sections where an odd number of objects overlapped are filled. The outlines of the original objects remain visible. compound blend A blend created by blending the start or end object of one blend with another object. concave Hollowed or rounded inward like the inside of a bowl. content The object or objects that appear inside a container object when you apply PowerClip effects. This term is also used to describe graphics resources included with the product such as clipart, photos, symbols, fonts, and objects. constrain key A key you hold to constrain drawing and editing to a shape or at an angle. The default key is Ctrl. You can change the default key to Shift, the Windows standard, on the Pick tool page of the Options dialog box. contour An effect created by adding evenly spaced concentric shapes inside or outside the borders of an object. This effect can also be used for creating cuttable outlines for devices, such as plotters, engraving machines, and vinyl cutters. contrast The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast values indicate greater differences and fewer gradations between dark and light. Glossary 799 control object The original object used to create effects such as envelopes, extrusions, drop shadows, contours, and objects created with the Linear pattern tool. Changes made to the control object control the appearance of the effect. control handles The handles that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape tool. Control handles determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node. convex Curved or rounded outwards like the exterior of a sphere or circle. crop To cut unwanted areas of an image without affecting the resolution of the part that remains. curve object An object that has nodes and control handles, which you can manipulate to change the object’s shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line. cusp A point or corner created where two curves meet. D desktop The area in a drawing where you can experiment and create objects for future use. This area is outside the borders of the drawing page. You can drag objects from the desktop area to the drawing page when you decide to use them. DeviceN A type of color space and device color model. This color space is multi-component, allowing color to be defined by other than the standard set of three (RGB) and four (CMYK) color components. diacritical mark An accent mark above, below, or through a written character; for example, the acute (é) and cedilla (ç) accents. 800 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide dimension line A line that displays the size of objects or the distance or angle between objects. dithering A process used to simulate a greater number of colors when only a limited number of colors are available. document navigator The area at the bottom-left of the application window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages. The document navigator also displays the page number of the active page and the total number of pages in a drawing. dpi (dots per inch) A measure of a printer’s resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 600 dpi. Imagesetters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution. drawing A document you create in Corel DESIGNER. drawing page The portion of a drawing window enclosed by a rectangle with a shadow effect. drawing plane The area bounded by two axes in the drawing profile. The top drawing plane is bounded by the x and z axes. The front drawing plane is bounded by the x and y axes. The right drawing plane is bounded by the y and z axes. drawing profile A group of settings that determines how three-dimensional objects are represented in two dimensions. drawing window The portion of the application window on which you can create, add, and edit objects. drop shadow A three-dimensional shadow effect that gives objects a realistic appearance. Glossary 801 duotone An image in the duotone color mode is an 8-bit grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors. dynamic guides Temporary guidelines that appear from the following snap points in objects — center, node, quadrant, and text baseline. E envelope A closed shape that can be placed around an object to change the object’s shape. An envelope consists of segments connected by nodes. After an envelope has been placed around an object, the nodes can be moved to change the shape of the object. exposure A photographic term referring to the amount of light used to create an image. If not enough light is permitted to interact with the sensor (in a digital camera) or film (in a traditional camera), the image appears too dark (underexposed). If too much light is permitted to interact with the sensor or film, the image appears too light (overexposed). extrusion A feature that lets you apply a three-dimensional perspective by projecting lines from an object to create the illusion of depth. F feathering The level of sharpness along the edges of a drop shadow. fill A color, bitmap, fountain, or pattern applied to an area of an image. filter An application that translates digital information from one form to another. floating object A bitmap with no background. Floating objects are also referred to as photo objects or cutout images. 802 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide font A set of characters with a single style (such as italic), weight (such as bold), and size (such as 10 point) for a typeface such as Times New Roman. fountain fill A smooth progression of two or more colors applied to an area of an image that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. Two-color fountain fills have a direct progression from one color to another, while custom fills may have a progression of many colors. fountain step The shades of color that make up the appearance of a fountain fill. The more steps in a fill, the smoother the transition from the beginning color to the end color. freehand marquee select To marquee select objects or nodes while dragging the Shape tool and controlling the shape of the marquee box enclosure as if you were drawing a freehand line. See also marquee select. FTP (File Transfer Protocol) A method of moving files between two computers. Many Internet sites have established repositories of material that can be accessed by using FTP. G GIF A graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily exchanged between computers. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 or fewer colors to the Internet. glyph Diamond-shaped handles that can be dragged to alter the form of a shape. grab area The area of a command bar that can be dragged. Dragging the grab area moves the bar, while dragging any other area of the bar has no effect. The location of the grab area depends on the operating system you are using, the orientation of the bar, and whether the bar is docked or undocked. Command bars with grab areas include toolbars, the toolbox, and the property bar. Glossary 803 gravity candidate A snap point that attracts the pointer. A box, tooltip, or status bar prompt appears when the gravity candidate is active and has become a gravity source. gravity field The area around a gravity candidate. When the pointer is within this distance, a box or tooltip may appear, and a prompt appears on the status bar. gravity source An active gravity candidate that is the snap point when you click. grayscale A color mode that displays images by using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). Grayscale images, especially photos, are commonly referred to as “black and white.” greeking A method of representing text by using either words that have no meaning or a series of straight lines. grid A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines that are used to help draw and arrange objects. group A set of objects that behave as one unit. Operations you perform on a group apply equally to each of its objects. guideline A horizontal, vertical, or slanted line that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object placement. gutter The space between columns of text, also called the alley. In printing, the white space formed by the inside margins of two facing pages. 804 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide H halftone An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes to represent different tones. handles A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize, or mirror the object. If you click a selected object, the shape of the handles changes to arrows so that you can rotate and skew the object. halo A mask behind a line that makes it easier to see when the line is on top of another object. Halos are usually the same color as the page. histogram A histogram consists of a horizontal bar chart that plots the brightness values of the pixels in your bitmap image on a scale from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). The left part of the histogram represents the shadows of an image, the middle part represents the midtones, and the right part represents the highlights. The height of the spikes indicates the number of pixels at each brightness level. For example, a large number of pixels in the shadows (the left side of the histogram) indicates the presence of image detail in the dark areas of the image. hotspot The area of an object that you can click to jump to the address specified by a URL. hot zone The distance from the right margin at which hyphenation begins. HSB (hue, saturation, brightness) A color model that defines three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, and so on); brightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). Glossary 805 HTML The World Wide Web authoring standard comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page. hue The property of a color that allows it to be classified by its name. For example, blue, green, and red are all hues. hyperlink An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another place in that document or to another document. I icon A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other application item. image map A graphic in an HTML document that contains clickable areas that link to locations on the World Wide Web, to other HTML documents, or to graphics. image resolution The number of pixels per inch in a bitmap measured in ppi (pixels per inch) or dpi (dots per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance of the bitmap; high resolutions can produce smoother images but result in larger file sizes. imagesetter A high-resolution device that creates film or film-based paper output used in the production of plates for printing presses. insert To import and place a photo image, clipart object, or sound file into a drawing. intensity Intensity is a measure of the brightness of the light pixels in a bitmap compared with the darker midtones and dark pixels. An increase in intensity increases the vividness of whites while maintaining true darks. 806 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide interlacing In GIF images, a method that lets you display a Web-based image on the screen at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality improves. isometric A type of projection characterized by three axes at right angles. Objects can be represented as three-dimensional by projecting them. A square becomes one of the faces of a cube when it is projected. Isometric projections use angles that are increments of 30 degrees. J JavaScript A scripting language used on the Web to add interactive functions to HTML pages. JPEG A format for photographic images that offers compression with some loss of image quality. Because of their compression (up to 20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images are widely used in Internet publishing. JPEG 2000 An improved version of the JPEG file format that features better compression and allows you to attach image information and assign a different compression rate to an image area. justify To modify the spacing between characters and words so that the edges on the left, right, or both margins of a block of text are even. K kerning The space between characters, and the adjustment of that space. Often, kerning is used to place two characters closer together than usual, for example WA, AW, TA, or VA. Kerning increases readability and makes letters appear balanced and proportional, especially at larger font sizes. knockout A printing term that refers to an area where underlying colors have been removed so that only the top color prints. For example, if you print a small circle on a large circle, Glossary 807 the area under the small circle is not printed. This ensures that the color used for the small circle remains true instead of overlapping and mixing with the color used for the large circle. L Lab A color model that contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two chromatic components: “a” (green to red) and “b” (blue to yellow). layer A transparent plane on which you can place objects in a drawing. leader tabs A row of characters placed between text objects to help the reader follow a line across white space. Leader tabs are often used in place of tab stops, especially before text that is flush right such as in a list or table of contents. leading The spacing between lines of text. Leading is important for both readability and appearance. library The area in a Corel DESIGNER (DES) file that contains symbol definitions and information about instances. lightness The level of brightness that is shared between a transparency and the object to which it is applied. For example, if a transparency is applied to an object whose color appears bright, the transparency color takes on a comparable brightness. The same is true for a transparency that is applied to an object whose color appears dark — the transparency takes on a comparable darkness. lossless A kind of file compression that maintains the quality of an image that has been compressed and decompressed. lossy A kind of file compression that results in noticeable degradation of image quality. 808 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide LZW A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time. LZW compression is commonly used on GIF and TIFF files. M marquee select To select objects or nodes by dragging the Pick tool or Shape tool diagonally and enclosing objects in a marquee box with a dotted outline. master object An object that has been cloned. Most changes you make to the master object are automatically applied to the clone. master layer A layer on a master page whose objects appear on every page of a multipage drawing. A master page can have more than one master layer. master page A virtual page that contains global objects, guidelines, and grid settings that apply to all pages in your document. mesh fill A type of fill that lets you add patches of color to the inside of a selected object. micro nudge To move an object in small increments. See also nudge and super nudge. miter limit A value that determines when two lines that meet at a sharp angle switch from a pointed (mitered) joint to a squared-off (beveled) joint. moiré pattern The visual effect of radiating curves created by superimposing two regular patterns. For example, a moiré pattern can result from overlapping two halftone screens of different angles, dot spacing, and dot size. Moiré patterns are the undesirable result of rescreening an image with a different halftone screen or with the same halftone screen on an angle different from the original. Glossary 809 multiple select To select multiple objects by using the Pick tool, or multiple nodes by using the Shape tool. N nested group A group of two or more groups that behaves as one object. nested PowerClip objects Containers that hold other containers to form complex PowerClip objects. nested symbol A symbol definition that contains one or more other definitions. nodes The square points at each end of a line or curve segment. You can change the shape of a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes. noise In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a television screen. nonprinting characters Items that appear on the screen but do not print. They include the rulers, guidelines, table gridlines, hidden text, and formatting symbols, such as spaces, hard returns, tabs, and indents. nudge To move an object in increments. See also micro nudge and super nudge. O object A generic term for any item you create or place in a drawing. Objects include lines, shapes, graphics, and text. 810 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide one-point perspective An effect created by lengthening or shortening one side of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in one direction. opacity The quality of an object that makes it difficult to see through. If an object is 100 percent opaque, you cannot see through it. Opacity levels under 100 percent increase the transparency of objects. See also transparency. open object An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are not connected. origin The point in the drawing window at which the rulers intersect. orthogonal A view of an object that is perpendicular to one plane. A cube appears as a square since only one plane is visible. output resolution The number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser printer, produces. outline The line that defines the shape of an object. overexposure Excessive light in an image that gives it a washed-out appearance. See also exposure. overprinting Overprinting is achieved by printing one color over another. Depending on the colors you choose, the overprinted colors mix to create a new color, or the top color covers the bottom color. Overprinting a dark color on a light color is often used to avoid registration problems that occur when color separations are not precisely aligned. See also color trapping, choke, and spread. Glossary 811 P paletted color mode An 8-bit color mode that displays images of up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to achieve more precise control of the colors used throughout the conversion process. pan To move the drawing page around in the drawing window. Panning changes the page view in the same way that scrolling moves the drawing up, down, to the left, or to the right in the drawing window. When working at high magnification levels where not all of the drawing is displayed, you can quickly pan to see parts of the drawing that were previously hidden. PANOSE font matching A feature that lets you choose a substitute font if you open a file that contains a font not installed on your computer. You can make a substitution for the current working session only, or you can make a permanent substitution, so that the new font is automatically displayed when you save and reopen the file. PANTONE process colors The colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color System, which is based on the CMYK color model. paragraph text A text type that allows you to apply formatting options and directly edit large blocks of text. parent color An original color style that you can save and apply to objects in a drawing. You can create child colors from the parent color. See also child color. path The basic component from which objects are constructed. A path can be open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, a circle), and it can be made up of a single line or curve segment or many joined segments. 812 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide pattern fill A fill consisting of a series of repeating vector objects or images. pixel A colored dot that is the smallest part of a bitmap. See also resolution. PNG (Portable Network Graphics) A graphic file format designed for use in online viewing. This format can import 24-bit color graphics. point A unit of measure used primarily in typesetting to define type sizes. There are approximately 72 points to an inch and 12 points to a pica. PostScript fill A type of texture fill designed using the PostScript language. PowerClip effect A way of arranging objects that lets you contain one object inside another. PowerClip object An object created by placing objects (contents objects) inside other objects (container objects). If the contents object is larger than the container object, the contents object is automatically cropped. Only the contents that fit inside the container object are visible. process color In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color). progressive In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear on screen in its entirety, at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves. Glossary 813 Q QuickCorrect A feature that automatically displays the fully worded form for abbreviations or the correct form for errors as you type. You can use QuickCorrect to capitalize words or to correct common spelling and typographic errors automatically; for example, QuickCorrect can replace “asap” with “as soon as possible” and “hte” with “the.” R radius As applied to orbits, sets the distance between the center of the brushstroke and the nibs that travel around the center of the brushstroke when you paint with orbits. Increasing this value increases the size of the brushstroke. range sensitivity A paletted color mode option that lets you specify a focus color for the paletted conversion. You can adjust the color and specify its importance to guide converting. rasterized image An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphic files to bitmap files, you create rasterized images. render To capture a two-dimensional image from a three-dimensional model. resample To change the resolution and dimensions of a bitmap. Upsampling increases the size of the image; downsampling decreases the size of the image. Resampling with fixed resolution lets you maintain the resolution of the image by adding or subtracting pixels while varying the image size. Resampling with variable resolution keeps the number of pixels unchanged while changing the image size, resulting in lower or higher resolution than that of the original image. resolution The amount of detail that an image file contains, or that an input, output, or display device is capable of producing. Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch) or ppi (pixels per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance; high resolutions can produce higher quality images but result in larger file sizes. 814 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide rich text Rich text supports text formatting, such as bold, italics, and underlining, as well as different fonts, font sizes, and colored text. Rich text documents can also include page formatting options, such as custom page margins, line spacing, and tab widths. RGB A color mode in which the three colors of light (red, green, and blue) are combined in varying intensities to produce all other colors. A value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green, and blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color. rollover An interactive object or group of objects that changes its appearance when you click or point to it. round-tripping The conversion of a document saved in one file format, such as Portable Document Format (PDF), to another format, such as Corel DESIGNER (DES) and then back again. rotate To reposition and reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation. ruler A horizontal or vertical bar marked off in units and used to determine the size and position of objects. By default, the rulers appear on the left side and along the top of the application window, but they can be hidden or moved. S saturation The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has 100 percent saturation contains no white. A color with 0 percent saturation is a shade of gray. scale To change an object’s horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by a specified percentage. For example, scaling a rectangle that is 1 inch high and 2 inches wide by Glossary 815 150 percent results in a rectangle that is 1.5 inches high and 3 inches wide. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained. segment The line or curve between nodes in a curve object. selection box An invisible rectangle with eight visible handles that appears around any object you select using the Pick tool. simple wireframe view An outline view of a drawing that hides fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome. size To change an object’s horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by changing one of the dimensions. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1 inch and a width of 2 inches can be sized by changing the value of the height to 1.5 inches. A width of 3 inches automatically results from the new height value. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained. skew To slant an object vertically, horizontally, or both. snap To force an object that is being drawn or moved to align automatically to a point on the grid, a guideline, or another object. source object The object you use to perform a shaping action on another object, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting. The source object receives the fill and outline attributes of the target object. See also target object. splash screen The screen that appears when Corel DESIGNER starts. It monitors the progress of the startup process and provides information about copyright and registration. 816 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide split blend A single blend that is broken into two or more components to create a compound blend. The object where the blend is split becomes the end object for one component of the blend and start object for the other. spot color In commercial printing, a solid ink color that prints individually, one plate per spot color. spread In commercial printing, a type of trap that is created by extending the foreground object into the background object. style A set of attributes that controls the appearance of a specific type of object. There are three style types: graphic styles, text styles (artistic and paragraph), and color styles. subpaths Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is constructed. subscript Text characters that are positioned below the baseline of the other characters in a line of text. subtractive color model A color model, such as CMYK, that creates color by subtracting wavelengths of light reflected from an object. For example, a colored ink appears blue if it absorbs all colors except blue. super nudge To move an object in large increments by pressing Shift and an Arrow key. The super nudge value is multiplied by the nudge value to obtain the distance by which the object is moved. See also nudge and micro nudge. superscript Text characters that are positioned above the baseline of the other characters in a line of text. Glossary 817 swap disk Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory available in your computer. swatch One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in the color palette. symbol A reusable object or group of objects. A symbol is defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. symbol instance An occurrence of a symbol in a drawing. A symbol instance automatically inherits any changes made to the symbol. You can also apply unique properties to each instance, including size, position, and uniform transparency. T target object The object you perform a shaping action on, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting with another object. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes while copying these attributes to the source objects used to perform the action. See also source object. template A predefined set of information that sets the page size, orientation, ruler position, and grid and guideline information. A template may also include graphics and text that can be modified. text frame The rectangle that appears as a series of dashed lines around a block of paragraph text created using the Text tool. text style A set of attributes that controls the appearance of text. There are two text style types: artistic text styles and paragraph text styles. 818 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide texture fill A fractally generated fill that, by default, fills an object or image area with one image instead of with a series of repeating images. threshold A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap. thumbnail A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration. tick Invisible divisions to which your pointer gravitates. tiling The technique of repeating a small image across a large surface. Tiling is often used to create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages. tint In photo editing, a tint often refers to a semitransparent color applied over an image. Also called a color cast. In printing, a tint refers to a lighter shade of a color created with halftone screening — for example, a spot color. See also halftone. tonal range The distribution of pixels in a bitmap image from dark (a value of zero, indicating no brightness) to light (a value of 255, indicating full brightness). Pixels in the first third of the range are considered shadows, pixels in the middle third of the range are considered midtones, and pixels in the last third of the range are considered highlights. Ideally, the pixels in an image should be distributed across the entire tonal range. A histogram is an excellent tool for viewing and evaluating the tonal range of images. tone The variations in a color or the range of grays between black and white. Glossary 819 transparency The quality of an object that makes it easy to see through. Setting lower levels of transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or image. See also opacity. trapping See color trapping. tree view A hierarchical view of folders, sub-folders, and files. In the Symbol manager docker, the tree shows the current document at the top, followed by collections and library files. TrueType fonts A font specification developed by Apple. TrueType fonts print the way they appear on the screen and can be resized to any height. TWAIN By using the TWAIN driver supplied by the manufacturer of the imaging hardware, Corel graphics applications can acquire images directly from a digital camera or scanner. two-point perspective An effect created by lengthening or shortening two sides of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in two directions. U underexposure Insufficient light in an image. See also exposure. uniform fill A type of fill used to apply one solid color to your image. See also fill. Unicode A character encoding standard that defines character sets for all written languages in the world by using a 16-bit code set and more than 65, 000 characters. Unicode lets 820 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide you handle text effectively regardless of the language of the text, your operating system, or the application you are using. URL (Uniform Resource Locator) A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet. V vanishing point A marker that appears when you select an extrusion or an object to which perspective has been added. With an extrusion, the vanishing point marker indicates the depth (parallel extrusion) or the point at which the extruded surfaces would meet if extended (perspective extrusion). In both cases, the vanishing point is indicated by an X. vector graphic An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Vector graphics are created as collections of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels. See also bitmap. vector object A specific object within a drawing that is created as a collection of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels. Vector objects are generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. W watermark A small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the image pixels which carries information about the image. This information survives normal editing, printing, and scanning. weld To combine two objects into a single curve object with a single outline. A source object is welded to a target object to create a new object that takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object. white point The measurement of white on a color monitor that influences how highlights and contrast appear. Glossary 821 In image correction, the white point determines the brightness value that is considered white in a bitmap image. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can set the white point to improve the contrast of an image. For example, in a histogram of an image, with a brightness scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light), if you set the white point at 250, all pixels with a value greater than 250 are converted to white. Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) A standard interface and driver, created by Microsoft, for loading images from peripheral devices, such as scanners and digital cameras. Z zoom To reduce or magnify the view of a drawing. You can zoom in to see details or zoom out for a broader view. ZIP A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time. 822 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Corel DESIGNER Index Numerics Adaptive palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 1-Leg Callout tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Add Preset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 2-Leg Callout tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Adobe Illustrator (AI) files . . . . . . . . . . 687 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 viewing preflight summaries . . . . . .689 2-Point Ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2-Point Line tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 2-Point Rectangle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3D effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 converting to 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 3-Leg Callout tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3-Point Circle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3-Point Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 3-Point Ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3-Point Rectangle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 A absolute colorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 accelerator table (definition) . . . . . . . . 793 acquiring images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 actions automating. See macros redoing in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . 586 repeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 undoing and redoing . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 undoing in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . 586 active layer, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 ActiveCGM commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Index Adobe Illustrator support . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Adobe PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 Adobe Photoshop (PSD) files . . . . . . . . 730 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731 Adobe Photoshop support . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB) files . . . . . . . 691 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 AI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 aligning nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 objects to other objects . . . . . . . . . . .99 objects when drawing . . . . . . . . . . . .99 objects with one another . . . . . . . . .237 objects with page center . . . . . . . . .238 objects with page edge . . . . . . . . . . .238 objects with precision . . . . . . . . . . . .95 objects with specified point . . . . . . .239 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 alternate text, HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 angular dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Angular Dimension tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 animation file (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 793 ANSI Text (TXT) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 823 anti-aliasing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 spacing with Latin text . . . . . . . . . . 468 using line-breaking rules . . . . . . . . 469 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 changing language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 changing startup options . . . . . . . . . . 6 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 terms and concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 trial versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 using multiple workspaces . . . . . . . 756 aspect ratio (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 arcs, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Attributes Eyedropper tool . . . . . . . . . . 48 auto-backup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) files . . . 704 DWG technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . 707 DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 DXF technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . 706 automating tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 auto-spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 axonometric (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 794 arrow keys (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 B Arrow Shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 background exporting as transparent . . . . . . . . . 269 for pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 in traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 arrowheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding to lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 154 156 155 154 artistic text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . converting to paragraph text . . . . . . creating styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fitting to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shaping by using envelopes . . . . . . spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 793 431 440 179 440 355 448 204 440 ASCII text encoding in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . 667 Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 choosing default font . . . . . . . . . . . 467 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 824 backup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 auto-backup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 recovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 banding in fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 bar codes, inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 base color (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 Basic Shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 light and color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Soft Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 beveling corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 bevels, depth and angle . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Bézier Curve Connector tool . . . . . . . . 43 Bézier Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Bézier curves, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Bézier line (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 bit depth (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 bitmap font limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 adjusting brightness and contrast . . 557 adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . 561 adjusting highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 adjusting midtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 adjusting shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 anti-aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 applying lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 as background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 changing to black and white . . . . . . 568 changing to duotone . . . . . . . . . . . 569 changing to paletted color mode . . . 571 checking for watermarks . . . . . . . . . 647 color and tone effects . . . . . . . . . . . 565 color for exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 color masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 color modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 coloring monochrome . . . . . . . . . . 553 compressing in PDF files . . . . . . . . 664 compressing when saving . . . . . . . . . 72 converting complex fills . . . . . . . . . 675 converting vector graphics . . . . . . . 541 creating PowerClip objects . . . . . . . 197 cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 cropping while importing . . . . . . . . 651 display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 displaying and hiding colors . . . . . . 553 dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 downsampling for printing . . . . . . . 612 downsampling in PDF files . . . . . . 665 editing in Corel PHOTO-PAINT . 566 embedding in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Index exporting transparent . . . . . . . . . . .269 extracting embedded color profiles . .647 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 inflating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 interlacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 linking externally . . . . . . . . . . 647, 650 optimizing for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 printing large bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . .610 removing dust and scratch marks . . .550 resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 resampling while importing . . . . . .650 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 using as fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 using the histogram . . . . . . . . . . . .558 using the Image Adjustment Lab . . .554 Black Body palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 black point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 black-and-white color mode . . . . . . . . 568 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795 bleed (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 bleed area, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 bleed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Blend tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 blending modes. See merge modes blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795 changing path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 color acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 copying and cloning . . . . . . . . . . . .413 copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 825 end objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 mapping nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 saving with file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 setting color progression . . . . . . . . 414 setting distance between objects . . . 414 setting objects in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 start objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 block text. See paragraph text BMP files OS/2 Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 Windows Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 B-Spline Connector tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 B-Spline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 B-splines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 buttons, Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 C C.A.R.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754 calibrating rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 calligraphic lines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . 157 Calligraphic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 bold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Callout Shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Callout tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 273 795 273 274 663 borders page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 table cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 boundaries creating objects from . . . . . . . . . . . 196 bounding box (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 adding halos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 adding text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 breaking apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 CALS Compressed Bitmap files . . . . . . 746 Camera RAW Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 cardinality-distribution black-and-white conversion . . . . . . 569 cascading style sheet (definition) . . . . . 795 CDR files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 CDT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 breaking file associations . . . . . . . . . . . 773 CDX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 brightness (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 adjusting in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . 557 center of rotation (definition) . . . . . . . 796 browsing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Center-Point Polygon tool . . . . . . . . . . . 39 brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center-Point Polygon tools (category) . 39 826 127 159 159 159 Centerline Trace method . . . . . . . . . . 580 Center-Point Circle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Center-Radius Circle tool . . . . . . . . . . . 38 CGI script (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide CGM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ActiveCGM commands . . . . . . . . . 299 applying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 WebCGM commands . . . . . . . . . . 296 WebCGM S1000D commands . . . . 301 CGM files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 chamfering corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 in rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . 166 characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 changing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 nonprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 returning to baseline . . . . . . . . . . . 446 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 spacing between. See spacing, text special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 child colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . 360 creating series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 clone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 cloning blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 closed object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 796 closed path (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .782 CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 CMX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 CMYK color mode (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .797 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 CMYK color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 code modules. See modules, code code pages (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .797 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 collection (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 choke (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 color acceleration, in blends . . . . . . . . . 413 circle text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 special effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Circle tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 using object coordinates . . . . . . . . . 109 clipart (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 searching for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 color blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 choosing colors with . . . . . . . . . . . .317 color calibration bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 color channel (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 797 color depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 color engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Clipboard (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Index 827 Color Eyedropper tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 color gamut (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 797 color harmonies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 document settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 for new documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 for online viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 for print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 importing and pasting files . . . . . . 387 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 monitor calibration and profiling . . 366 opening documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 soft proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 color management policies . . . . . . . . . 383 for importing and pasting files . . . . 384 for opening documents . . . . . . . . . 384 color masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 554 554 554 color models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 color modes (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 black and white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 changing in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . 567 changing in traced results . . . . . . . 588 choosing for PDF files . . . . . . . . . . 670 duotone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 for new documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 GDI printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 paletted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 PostScript printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 828 Color Palette Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 creating folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 choosing colors with . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Color Palette Libraries . . . . . . . . . . 314 copying locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 creating custom palettes . . . . . . . . . 322 creating from documents . . . . . . . . 324 creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . 324 creating from traced results . . . . . . . 589 custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 custom, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 customizing color swatches . . . . . . 331 docking or undocking . . . . . . . . . . 330 Document palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Palette library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 using in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . 588 color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 converting colors to . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 for new documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 installing and loading . . . . . . . . . . . 374 warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Color Proof Settings docker . . . . . . . . . 18 color proofing printing with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 soft proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 color sampling options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 overprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 setting print warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 617 color settings for Web bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 color spaces (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 GDI printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 PostScript printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 copying to another drawing . . . . . . 362 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 creating child colors . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 color swatch (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 798 color temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 color trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 auto-spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 In-RIP trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 overprinting black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 color blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 color harmonies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 color viewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 contour fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 contour outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 controlling in traced results . . . . . . .586 custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 default color palette . . . . . . . . . . . .313 displaying and hiding in bitmaps . . .553 displaying spot or process . . . . . . . .329 for hotspots and hypergraphics . . . .275 in bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 parent and child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 printing accurately . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 sampling from images . . . . . . . . . . .311 setting progression in blends . . . . . .414 swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 using color harmonies . . . . . . . . . . .316 using the histogram . . . . . . . . . . . .558 vector extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Web colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 columns, text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 combined object (definition) . . . . . . . . 799 color viewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 combining objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 paragraph text frames . . . . . . . . . . .458 color, text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 comments, adding to files . . . . . . . . . . . 655 color-conversion settings . . . . . . . . . . . 377 commercial printing preparing print jobs for . . . . . . . . . .625 color value (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 adding to mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 adjusting in RAW camera files . . . . 597 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Index comp images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 checking and replacing . . . . . . . . . . .89 viewing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 comparing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 829 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 679 exporting to Microsoft Office . . . . . 654 exporting to WordPerfect Office . . . 654 optimizing PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . 673 printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 searching for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 using and managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Complex Star tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Contour tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 compound blend (definition) . . . . . . . . 799 contouring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 compressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 bitmaps in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . 664 text and line art in PDF files . . . . . 665 contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 copying and cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 outline color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 separating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 setting fill progression . . . . . . . . . . 396 Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) . 693 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 concave (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 ConceptShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . opening account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . publishing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 124 123 124 Connect docker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 adding locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 displaying and hiding panes . . . . . . . 82 feature overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 removing locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 resizing panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 connector lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 143 141 142 Connector tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . 42 constrain keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 799 103 102 content (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 830 contrast (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 control handles (definition) . . . . . . . . . 800 control object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 800 conventions for documentation . . . . . . . 22 converting colors to color profiles . . . . . . . . . . 376 objects to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 outlines to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 table to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 text to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 text to table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 vector graphics to bitmaps . . . . . . . 541 convex (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 copying blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 color styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 distortion effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 locked color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 object effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 object outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 object transformations . . . . . . . . . . 227 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 perspective effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Corel Presentations (SHW) files . . . . . .746 Corel Application Recovery Manager . 754 disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754 CorelTUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Corel ArtShow 5 (CPX) files . . . . . . . . 746 Corel CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 adding locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 displaying and hiding panes . . . . . . . 82 feature overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 removing locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 resizing panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Corel DESIGNER DES, DSF, DS4 or DRW files . . . . 703 technical notes (DES files) . . . . . . . 704 technical notes (DSF files) . . . . . . . 703 Template (CDT) files . . . . . . . . . . 746 Corel DESIGNER features comparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 new and enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Corel Painter (RIF) files . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 Corel PHOTO-PAINT editing bitmaps in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) files . . . 697 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Corel Presentation Exchange CMX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 Index Corel Professional Services . . . . . . . . . . 28 Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Corel Symbol Library (CSL) files . . . . . 698 Corel Technology Partners . . . . . . . . . . 28 Corel Training Partners (CTPs) . . . . . . . 28 CorelDRAW (CDR) files . . . . . . . . . . . 696 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX) files 746 CorelDRAW Template (CDT) files . . . 746 corners beveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 filleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 scalloping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 correcting color and tone in bitmaps . . . . . . . .554 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 CPT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 CPX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Create a New Document dialog box . . . 20 crop marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 printing composite . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Crop tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 cropping (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 bitmaps while importing . . . . . . . . .651 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 CSL files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 831 CUR files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Cursor Resource (CUR) files . . . . . . . 698 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 curve objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding and deleting nodes . . . . . . . chamfering corners . . . . . . . . . . . . converting objects to . . . . . . . . . . . converting to ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . curving a straight segment . . . . . . . filleting corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . modifying nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reducing number of nodes . . . . . . . Reflect Nodes mode . . . . . . . . . . . . scalloping corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . straightening segments . . . . . . . . . 177 800 181 192 179 180 183 192 179 182 181 184 192 183 Curve tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 hiding bounding box . . . . . . . . . . . 134 curved lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 adding arrowheads . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 converting text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 open, filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 cusp (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 cusp nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 custom color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cutting or copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . opening legacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 323 328 326 327 324 327 325 Custom palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 832 customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 auto-backup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 color palettes of traced results . . . . . 588 constrain keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 default fill color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 drawing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 feedback sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 hyphenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 mouse wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 new drawing presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 startup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 Undo settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 user interface language . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 zooming and panning . . . . . . . . . . . 64 cuttable shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 D data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 adding and deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 data source files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 adding fields to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 browsing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 changing merge field order . . . . . . . 620 creating with a text editor . . . . . . . . 621 creating with Corel DESIGNER . . 619 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 formatting numeric fields . . . . . . . . 620 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 importing ODBC files . . . . . . . . . . 622 incrementing numeric fields . . . . . . 620 viewing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 diacritical mark (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 800 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 adding fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 choosing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 managing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 digital cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 loading photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 DCS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Deep Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 enhancements to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 default color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 default color settings . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 369 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 saving current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 saving custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 default text style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Delete Preset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Deletion tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 densitometer scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 deployment guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 DES files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 deselecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 designer notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 adding to templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 desktop (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 Desktop layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 DeviceN (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 Index diametric dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Diametric Dimension tool . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Digimarc digital watermarks. See watermarks dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .801 angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 changing display units . . . . . . . . . .148 diametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Dimension tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . 40 Distort tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 distortion effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 distributing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .801 dividing objects equally . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 DOC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 docking property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764 document color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 833 Document Color Settings dialog box . . 17 document navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Document palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 adding colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 choosing colors with . . . . . . . . . . . 310 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 removing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 DOCX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 downsampling bitmaps for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 dpi (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 drawing arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 circles using object coordinates . . . 104 ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ellipses using object coordinates . . . 104 flow lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 lines using object coordinates . . . . . 105 parallel lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 polygons using object coordinates . 105 predefined shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 preset lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 158 pressure-sensitive lines . . . . . . . . . 157 projected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . . . 165 rectangles using object coordinates . 103 shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 squares using object coordinates . . 103 stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 using shape recognition . . . . . . . . . 174 wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 834 drawing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 adding when saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 drawing page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Drawing Plane toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 displaying or hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 drawing planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 unprojecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 drawing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 choosing preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 drawing scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 choosing preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 creating custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 drawing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 adding tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 choosing preset destination . . . . . . . . 54 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 creating new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 creating preset destination . . . . . . . . 56 inserting bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 reverting to saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 saving default settings . . . . . . . . . . 755 scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 sharing symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 starting from templates . . . . . . . . . . . 56 using symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 drawing parallel lines . . . . . . . . . . . .99 enabling and disabling . . . . . . . . . . .97 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 snapping objects to intersection . . . .100 tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 E Drop Shadow tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Edit Anchor tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 applying merge mode . . . . . . . . . . . 410 copying and cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 separating from objects . . . . . . . . . . 410 editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 editing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 DS4 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 push and pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 twister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 zipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 DSF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Ellipse tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 duotone color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 changing images to . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 overprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 saving and loading inks . . . . . . . . . 570 tone curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 converting curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 using object coordinates . . . . . . . . .108 DRW files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 duplicating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 dust marks, removing from bitmaps . . 550 DWG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Index embedded objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 embedding color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 fonts in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 objects in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Emboss effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 embossing, bevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 835 Encapsulated PostScript (DCS) files . . 746 Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files . . . advanced exporting options . . . . . . displaying in PDF files . . . . . . . . . general exporting options . . . . . . . . technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707 710 669 709 712 encoding formats for PDF files . . . . . . 669 encoding text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Envelope tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapping modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 802 205 206 227 206 207 205 EPS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707 EPS level 3 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Eraser tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 erasing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 straight lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 error diffusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 EXE files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 exiting Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . 76 export filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 Export for Web dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 19 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adobe Illustrator (AI) files . . . . . . . bitmaps for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . bitmaps for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting vector to bitmap . . . . . . files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . files to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . 836 652 687 265 261 543 652 679 files to WordPerfect Office . . . . . . . 679 JPEG file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 recommended file formats . . . . . . . 749 soft proofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 supported file formats . . . . . . . . . . . 685 text as curves in PDF files . . . . . . . . 668 to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 to the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 to WordPerfect Office . . . . . . . . . . 654 transparent bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 extension lines, customizing . . . . . . . . 148 external images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 extracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 embedded ICC profile . . . . . . . . . . . 57 paths from objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 PowerClip contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Extrude tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 extruded fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 beveled edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 copying and cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 light sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 saving with file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 vanishing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Eyedropper tools (category) . . . . . . . . . 48 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide F facing pages, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 feathering (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 feedback sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 assigning to events . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 FH files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 file encryption, PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 recommended for exporting . . . . . . 749 recommended for importing . . . . . . 748 file information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 file properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 File Transfer Protocol (definition) . . . . 803 file types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 associating with Corel DESIGNER 772 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 exporting to Microsoft Office . . . . . 654 exporting to WordPerfect Office . . . 654 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 saving to different formats . . . . . . . 655 Fill button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 filleting corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 in rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . 166 fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 applying to extrusions . . . . . . . . . . 402 Index controlling display quality . . . . . . . .336 controlling print quality . . . . . . . . .336 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 copying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 extruded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 in open curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 saving as styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 setting default colors . . . . . . . . . . . .352 texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 film, printing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772 changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .771 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772 finding menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 fitting text to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 FlashPix (FPX) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 flipping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 floating object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 802 flow lines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Flowchart Shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 flowing, connector lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 837 Floyd-Steinberg black-and-white conversion . . . . . . 569 FPX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 FMV files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 frame, page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 fold marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 printing composite . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 frames, text. See text frames font matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Frame Vector Metafile (FMV) files . . . . 746 Free Transform tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 freehand curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 freehand marquee select (definition) . . 803 471 803 467 618 668 617 474 667 666 474 473 617 471 Freehand tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 formatting paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 text characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 GIF (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 formatting codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 GIMP (XCF) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bitmap font limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting TrueType to Type 1 . . . disabling Type 1 fonts . . . . . . . . . . displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . embedding in PDF files . . . . . . . . . in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . most recently used . . . . . . . . . . . . . previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . setting print warnings . . . . . . . . . . substituting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fountain Fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 fountain fills (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying two-color . . . . . . . . . . . . display quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . increasing steps during printing . . . print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 335 334 335 336 617 336 616 fountain step (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 803 838 FTP (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 full-screen preview mode . . . . . . . . . . . 66 G gamut warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 GDI printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 GEM File (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 GEM Paint (IMG) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 geometric information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Geometric Properties button . . . . . . . . 49 GIF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 saving transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716 glyph (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 grab area (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 grammar checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 analyzing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 assigning languages . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 automatic replacements . . . . . . . . . 480 checking styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 comparing documents . . . . . . . . . . 490 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 entire drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 formality level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 replacing words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide rule classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 skipping errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 user word lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 viewing basic counts . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 viewing flagged errors . . . . . . . . . . 490 viewing parse tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 customizing pixel grid . . . . . . . . . . .515 displaying and hiding . . . . . . . . . . .514 Graph Paper tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 grids drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Graphic and Text Styles docker . . . . . . 358 graphics styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . 356 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 finding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 graphics, adding to tables . . . . . . . . . . . 535 gravity candidate (definition) . . . . . . . . 804 gravity field (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 gravity snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 gravity source (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 804 grayscale (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 grayscale color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 duotone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 grayscale color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Grayscale palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 greeking (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Index Grid layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 group (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 grouping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 adding objects to a group . . . . . . . . .243 editing a single object . . . . . . . . . . .243 removing objects from a group . . . .243 selecting objects in a group . . . . . . .221 ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 adding preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 displaying and hiding . . . . . . . . . . .516 document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . .518 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 slanted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 snapping to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 using objects as guides . . . . . . . . . .517 Guides layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 guides, dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 guides. See guidelines gutters (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804 in imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . .628 839 H halftone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 black-and-white conversion . . . . . . 569 halos (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 adding to callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 handles (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 hatch fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scaling with object . . . . . . . . . . . . . transforming with object . . . . . . . . 337 341 338 340 338 341 341 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 changing language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Hex values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 hidden objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 highlights, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 HSB color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 alternate text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 exporting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 exporting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 previewing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 setting preflight options . . . . . . . . . 683 support for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 hue (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 assigning to rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . 271 assigning to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 hyphenating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 hyphens, optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 I horizontal dimension lines . . . . . . . . . 146 Horizontal or Vertical Dimension tool . 40 ICC profiles extracting while opening drawings . . 57 hot zone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 ICO files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 hotspots (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 changing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 icon (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 hotspotting, Object Data Manager . . . 291 HPGL Plotter File (PLT) . . . . . . . . . . . 727 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728 840 Image Adjustment Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 correcting color and tone . . . . . . . . 559 creating snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 using automatic controls . . . . . . . . 556 using color correction controls . . . . 556 viewing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 image map (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide image resolution (definition) . . . . . . . . 806 inflating bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . 554 color and tone effects . . . . . . . . . . . 565 correcting in Image Adjustment Lab 559 inserting in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 updating external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 viewing in Image Adjustment Lab . 560 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 In-RIP trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 color reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 inks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 trap placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 trap width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 imagesetter (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 IMG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 import filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 insert (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Deep Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 macro features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Adobe Illustrator (AI) files . . . . . . . 687 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 cropping bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Microsoft Office files . . . . . . . . . . . 679 RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 recommended formats for graphics . 748 resampling bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 supported file formats . . . . . . . . . . . 685 tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749 WordPerfect Office files . . . . . . . . . 679 workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 intensity (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 adjusting margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 arranging pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 editing gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 selecting binding method . . . . . . . . 627 intersecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Interactive Fill tools (category) . . . . . . . . 47 Interactive tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . 45 interlacing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 interlanguage spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Internet bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 creating objects for . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 exporting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 publishing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 setting preflight options . . . . . . . . .683 transparent bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Internet toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 isometric (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 J indenting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Jarvis black-and-white conversion . . . . . .569 indexed color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 JavaScript (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Index 841 Join Curves docker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 joining curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 end nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 subpath nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 JPEG (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 JPEG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 justify (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 K Keep Settings button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 kerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assigning to commands . . . . . . . . . assigning to text styles . . . . . . . . . . customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exporting a list of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758 759 759 758 760 760 760 keywords, file adding when exporting . . . . . . . . . 655 adding when saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Knife tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 knockout (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD) files . . 720 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 L Lab (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 842 adding to writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 changing user interface and Help . . . . 5 customizing quotation marks . . . . . 476 displaying text correctly . . . . . . . . . 433 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 changing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 changing stacking order . . . . . . . . . 284 changing the order of objects . . . . . 240 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 copying objects to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 283 maintaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 master page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 master page settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 moving objects to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 preserving while importing files . . . 647 printing and exporting . . . . . . . . . . 282 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 showing and hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 stacking order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 layout binding method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 leader tabs (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide leading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 adding arrowheads . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Bézier curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 calligraphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 drawing B-splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 drawing curved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 drawing flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 drawing multi-point lines . . . . . . . .112 drawing preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 drawing straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 hiding bounding box . . . . . . . . . . . .134 miter limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 offsetting sprayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 pressure-sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 rotating sprayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 shaping by using envelopes . . . . . . .204 specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 using object coordinates . . . . . . . . .111 learning resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 library (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 lighting applying to extrusions . . . . . . . . . . 403 enhancing extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . 400 in bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 removing from extrusions . . . . . . . . 403 lightness (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 line art black-and-white conversion . . . . . . 568 line segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 line styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Linear Pattern Brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Linear Pattern Preset tool . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Linear Pattern Sprayer tool . . . . . . . . . . 44 Linear Pattern tools (category) . . . . . . . 44 line-breaking rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 adding and removing characters . . . 470 enabling and disabling . . . . . . . . . . 469 following characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 leading characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Index Link Manager docker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 linked objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 source links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 linking bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 links assigning to Web objects . . . . . . . . .273 between text frames or objects . . . . .458 843 deleting from Web objects . . . . . . . fixing in symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to external images . . . . . . . . . . . . . updating in symbols . . . . . . . . . . . verifying in Web objects . . . . . . . . . 274 252 650 252 274 list of comp images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 live text preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 loading color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 locked color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 locking layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 245 198 767 lossless (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 lossy (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 Lotus 1-2-3 (WK) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Lotus PIC (PIC) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 LZW (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 M MacPaint Bitmap (MAC) files . . . . . . . 746 Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 Macro Manager docker . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 deleting modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 displaying or hiding modules . . . . . 781 editing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 renaming modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Macromedia Flash (SWF) files . . . . . . . 739 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 viewing issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Macromedia FreeHand (FH) files . . . . 746 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 creating from Undo lists . . . . . . . . . 784 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 installing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779 playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 specifying VBA options . . . . . . . . . 779 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 Macros toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 magnifying drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 managing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 mapping nodes in blends . . . . . . . . . . . 415 macro programming guide . . . . . . . . . . 27 margins page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 table cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 adding modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 marquee selecting (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 macro modules. See modules, code 844 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide masking colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 merging table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 master layers (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Mesh Fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 enhancements to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 master object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 809 master page (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 matte color for Web bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 adding and removing commands . . 762 adding and removing separators . . . 762 adding to menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 changing order of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 finding commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 removing from menu bar . . . . . . . . 762 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 merge fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 creating data source files . . . . . . . . . 619 inserting in form documents . . . . . . 622 merge modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 applying to drop shadows . . . . . . . . 410 merging colors in traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 merging documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 creating data source files . . . . . . . . . 619 creating form documents . . . . . . . . 622 importing data source files . . . . . . . 619 inserting merge fields . . . . . . . . . . . 622 performing a merge . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 saving to a new file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Index mesh fills (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .809 adding and removing nodes . . . . . .348 adding colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 applying transparency . . . . . . . . . . .350 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 smoothing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 MET Metafile (MET) files . . . . . . . . . . . 746 micro nudge (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 Micrografx Designer (DSF or DS4) files . . . . . .703 Picture Publisher (PP4, PP5) files . .746 Microsoft Excel (XLS, XLSM) files . . . . 746 Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 copying objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 exporting files to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 importing files from . . . . . . . . . . . .679 Microsoft PowerPoint (PPT) files . . . . . 746 Microsoft Publisher (PUB) files . . . . . . 702 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 Microsoft Word DOC, DOCX, or RTF files . . . . . . .699 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 midtones, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 mirroring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 text fitted to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Miscellaneous Shapes tool . . . . . . . . . . . 44 mismatched color profiles when importing files . . . . . . . . . . . .388 when opening documents . . . . . . . .387 when pasting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 845 missing color profiles when importing files . . . . . . . . . . . 388 when opening documents . . . . . . . 386 when pasting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 missing fonts, substituting . . . . . . . . . . 472 miter limit (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 nested group (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 810 nested PowerClip objects (definition) . 810 nested symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 network deployment guide . . . . . . . . . . 27 multi-core support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 nodes (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . 181 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 cusp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 editing in envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 joining subpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 maintaining in erased areas . . . . . . 189 mapping in blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 reducing number in curves . . . . . . . 181 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 selecting and deselecting . . . . . . . . 180 skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 multiple select (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 810 noise (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 Multi-Point Line tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 nonprinting characters (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 modules, code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displaying or hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 781 782 781 781 781 moiré pattern (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 809 monitor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 monochrome bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 mouse wheel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 moving objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 objects precisely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 objects while drawing . . . . . . . . . . 230 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 multipoint lines drawing curved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 drawing straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 N notes, adding to files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 nudge (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 nudging objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 changing nudge distance . . . . . . . . 231 NAP Metafile (NAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 navigating drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 846 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide O object coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 drawing circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 drawing ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 drawing multi-point lines . . . . . . . . 112 drawing polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 drawing rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 drawing squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 drawing straight lines . . . . . . . . . . . 111 object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 applying CGM data . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Object Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 adding fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 choosing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Object Manager docker . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 aligning and distributing . . . . . . . . 236 aligning text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 aligning to other objects . . . . . . . . . . 99 applying distortion effects . . . . . . . . 202 applying lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 breaking apart combined . . . . . . . . 244 breaking paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 changing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 constraining while drawing . . . . . . 102 converting outlines to . . . . . . . . . . . 152 converting to symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 254 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 copying between applications . . . . . 679 copying effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 copying fills to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 copying outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Index copying properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 copying to another layer . . . . . . . . .285 copying transformations . . . . . . . . .227 creating color palettes from . . . . . . .324 creating from boundaries . . . . . . . .196 creating from symbol instances . . . .252 creating multiple copies . . . . . . . . .225 creating Web-enabled . . . . . . . . . . .261 cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 deselecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 displaying geometric information . .247 dividing equally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 dividing multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 drawing in relation to other objects . .99 drawing projected . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 embedding in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 erasing portions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 extracting subpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 finding and replacing . . . . . . . . . . .246 flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 grouping and ungrouping . . . . . . . .242 intersecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 linking and embedding . . . . . . . . . .287 linking with text frames . . . . . . . . .460 locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 moving to another layer . . . . . . . . .285 moving to another page . . . . . . . . . .511 moving while drawing . . . . . . . . . .230 nudging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 pasting into drawings . . . . . . . . . . .224 paths and subpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 PowerClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 847 previewing selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 projecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 removing outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 reversing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 roughening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 saving selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 setting nudge distance . . . . . . . . . . 231 shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 shaping by using envelopes . . . . . . 204 sizing and scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 smudging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 snapping to guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . 91 snapping to pixel grid . . . . . . . . . . 515 splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 spraying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 unprojecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 using as guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 using dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . 95 welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 wrapping text around . . . . . . . . . . 461 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 opacity (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 ODBC data source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 origin (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 office productivity applications . . . . . . 679 orthogonal (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 offsetting sprayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 OS/2 Bitmap (BMP) files . . . . . . . . . . . 693 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 OLE objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 open object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Open Prepress Interface (OPI) . . . . . . 676 linking bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 maintaining OPI links . . . . . . . . . . 632 maintaining OPI links in PDF . . . . 676 opening content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Optimized palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 optimizing bitmaps for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 order of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 ordered black-and-white conversion . . 568 orientation Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Outline Pen button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Outline Trace method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 one-point perspective (definition) . . . . 811 Outline view. See Wireframe view online content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 disabling access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 changing for shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 converting to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 copying color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 848 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide copying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 roughening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 saving as styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 out-of-gamut overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 output resolution (definition) . . . . . . . . 811 overexposure (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 811 overprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570, 635 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 selected color separations . . . . . . . . 637 selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 setting black threshold . . . . . . . . . . 638 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 P changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 custom preset page sizes . . . . . . . . .505 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 layout styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 maintaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 matching printer settings . . . . . . . . .505 moving objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 rendering resolution . . . . . . . . . . . .504 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 viewing all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 viewing facing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 page background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 using bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 using solid color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 PaintBrush (PCX) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 page borders, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 palette types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 page frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 paletted color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .812 custom palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 palette types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 choosing style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 for new documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 setting default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 page numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 printers’ marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 adding and deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 bleed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Index Palette Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 displaying color palettes from . . . . .329 palettes. See color palettes . . . . . . . . . . 305 Pan tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 panning (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .812 in drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 settings for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 849 PANOSE (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 PANOSE font matching . . . . . . . . . . . preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . substitute font lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 471 473 472 PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 361 process colors (definition) . . . . . . . 812 paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See also text adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding within object . . . . . . . . . . . adjusting frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting to artistic text . . . . . . . . creating styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fitting to frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . indenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . making Web-compatible . . . . . . . . modifying hyphenation settings . . . separating frame from object . . . . . spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 812 431 452 431 431 440 440 355 452 451 455 683 456 431 440 461 paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 adjusting text on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 changing in blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 detaching from blends . . . . . . . . . . 415 extracting from objects . . . . . . . . . . 188 fitting text to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 mirroring text on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 separating text from . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Pattern File (PAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 pattern fills (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 applying bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 applying full-color . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 applying two-color . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 creating from imported image . . . . . 344 creating full-color from image . . . . 344 creating two-color . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 creating two-color from image . . . . 343 mirroring and rotating . . . . . . . . . . 344 sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 patterns, line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 parallel dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 PCD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Parallel Dimension tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 PCT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 parallel lines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 PCX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 parent colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 adding bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 adding links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 bitmap compression . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 choosing a color mode . . . . . . . . . . 670 compressing text and line art . . . . . 665 converting complex fills . . . . . . . . . 675 converting TrueType fonts . . . . . . . 668 358 812 360 361 361 passwords, adding to PDF files . . . . . . 671 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 850 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide creating presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 displaying EPS files . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 downsampling bitmaps . . . . . . . . . 665 editing presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 embedding fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 encoding text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 exporting multiple documents . . . . 662 exporting text as curves . . . . . . . . . . 668 exporting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 file encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 fonts and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 including printers’ marks . . . . . . . . 677 OPI links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 optimizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 optimizing for the Web . . . . . . . . . 674 preflight summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 prepress settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 reducing file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 saving files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 setting compatibility options . . . . . . 674 setting file permissions . . . . . . . . . . 671 setting security options . . . . . . . . . . 671 setting user password . . . . . . . . . . . 673 specifying encoding format . . . . . . . 669 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 pen tablets roughening objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 smudging objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Pen tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 perceptual rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Perfect Shapes tools (category) . . . . . . . 43 perpendicular lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 applying to effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 copying effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Index two-point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . .820 PFB files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 loading from digital cameras . . . . . . .58 sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 searching for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 PIC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Pick tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 PICT (PCT) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722 Picture Publisher File (PPF) . . . . . . . . . 746 pixel grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 changing color and opacity . . . . . . .515 snapping objects to . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 pixels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813 snapping objects to . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 placing files. See importing files planes, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 playing macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778 macros, saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785 macros, temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . .785 PLT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 plug-in filters, adding and removing . . . 552 PNG (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 PNG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729 point (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 851 polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 171 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 drawing regular polygons . . . . . . . 111 reshaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 using object coordinates . . . . . . . . . 110 Portable Network Graphics (PNG) files technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 PostScript (PS or PRN) files . . . . . . . . 713 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 PostScript fills (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 PostScript Interpreted PRN or PS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 PostScript printers . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 615 PowerClip effect (definition) . . . . . . . . 813 PowerClip object (definition) . . . . . . . 813 PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copying attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . extracting contents . . . . . . . . . . . . locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 197 227 197 197 198 198 197 PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 enhancements to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 panning and zooming . . . . . . . . . . 583 redoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 PP4 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 PP5 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 PPF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 PPT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 852 preflight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 options for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 summaries for PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 preserving pure black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 preset destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 preset lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 presets color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 soft proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Pressure tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 pressure-sensitive lines drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 previewing bleed area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 page border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 printable area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 traced results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 primary color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Primary Color Mode setting . . . . . . . . . 17 print merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 browsing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 changing order of fields . . . . . . . . . 620 creating data source files . . . . . . . . . 619 creating form documents . . . . 619, 622 deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 formatting numeric fields . . . . . . . . 620 importing data source files . . . . . . . 622 importing ODBC data source files . 622 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 saving to a new file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 viewing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Print Merge toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 viewing summary of issues . . . . . . . 609 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 print service providers working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 printable area, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 printer driver compatibility . . . . . . . . . 611 printers’ marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 printing applying styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 arranging pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 as bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 bitmap font limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 bleed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 color calibration bars . . . . . . . . . . . 629 color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 color proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 color trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 colors accurately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 converting spot to process colors . . . 634 crop/fold marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 customizing halftone screens . . . . . 634 densitometer scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 disabling Type 1 fonts . . . . . . . . . . 617 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 driver compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 file information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Index fine-tuning print jobs . . . . . . . . . . .610 fountain fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 GDI printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Help topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 imposition layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 increasing fountain steps . . . . . . . . .617 In-RIP trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 large bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 maintaining OPI links . . . . . . . . . .632 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 merged documents . . . . . . . . . 618, 623 negative images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 overprinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 page numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 PostScript printers . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 preflight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 preparing commercial print jobs . . .625 previewing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . .608 printers’ marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 registration marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 rendering intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 selecting binding method . . . . . . . .627 setting printer properties . . . . . . . . .605 setting warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 soft proofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 testing fountain fills for banding . . .616 tiling print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 to film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 to PostScript printer . . . . . . . . . . . .615 PRN files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 process colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813 color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 converting spot colors . . . . . . . . . . .634 displaying palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 853 processed color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . 574 Q product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Quattro Pro (WB) files . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 changing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Quick Trace method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 profiles, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 212 214 215 214 QuickCorrect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 adding words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 quotation marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 progressive (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 quitting Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . 76 project database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 quotation marks, customizing . . . . . . . 476 Projected Axes docker displaying or hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 R projected drawing modes . . . . . . . . . . objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 212 211 209 projecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 proofing overprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 adding and removing items . . . . . . 768 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 docking and undocking . . . . . . . . . 768 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 rearranging items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 property values changing default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 PS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 PSD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 PUB files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 Pull distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Push distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 854 radial dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Radial Dimension tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 radii, true . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 radius (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 range sensitivity (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 setting for bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 rasterized image (definition) . . . . . . . . 814 rasterizing complex fills in PDF files . . . . . . . . 675 for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 vector graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 while exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 RAW camera files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 adjusting color and tone . . . . . . . . . 597 opening and importing . . . . . . . . . . 594 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 reducing noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 support for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 using histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 viewing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 white balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide recording macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 macros, for future use . . . . . . . . . . . 783 macros, for temporary use . . . . . . . . 784 records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 deleting from data source files . . . . . 620 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 recovering backup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754 Rectangle tool using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Rectangle tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . 37 rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 adjusting corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 drawing 2-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 drawing 3-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 using object coordinates . . . . . . . . . 106 redoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Reflect Nodes mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 shaping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 registering Corel products . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 registration marks in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 in print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 relative colorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 renaming macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 modules in macro projects . . . . . . . 781 render (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 rendering intents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 rendering resolution for current document . . . . . . . . . . . 504 for new documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Index repeating actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 replacing comp images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 resample (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 resampling bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 while importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 resizing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 exporting bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 resolution (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814 changing in bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . .545 resources Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . .8 product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 RGB (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 RGB color mode in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 RGB color model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 rich text (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 RIF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 Right-Angle Connector tool . . . . . . . . . . 42 rollovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 deleting states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 duplicating states . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 modifying states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 viewing states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 855 rotating (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sprayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 183 233 162 446 rotation center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Roughen Brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 roughening objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Round Right-Angle connector tool . . . . 42 rounding corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 in rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . 166 round-tripping (definition) . . . . . . . . . 815 RTF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 rule classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 enabling and disabling . . . . . . . . . . 488 rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 to different formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Web presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) files . . 733 adding reference information . . . . . 736 choosing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 scale, drawing choosing preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 creating custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 scaling (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 brushstrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 sprayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 scalloping corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 in rectangles and squares . . . . . . . . 166 scanning images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 running macros. See playing macros SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT) files . . . . . . 746 S scratch marks removing from bitmaps . . . . . . . . . 550 safe CMYK workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 sampling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 application after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 options for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 search results for content narrowing and expanding . . . . . . . . . 86 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 showing and hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 saving advanced options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 auto-backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 856 searching for content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 for templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 segment dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Segment Dimension tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 segments (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 deleting virtual line . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 editing in envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 selection box (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 816 separating text from path . . . . . . . . . . 450 shadows, drop. See drop shadows shadows, image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 shape recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 changing outline thickness . . . . . . . 175 correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 setting recognition delay . . . . . . . . . 175 Shape tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Shape tools (category) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 shapes adding to line ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Smart Fill tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 smooth nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Smudge Brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 smudging objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 snapping (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816 objects to other objects . . . . . . . . . . .99 objects when drawing . . . . . . . . . . . .99 to dynamic guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 to guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 to pixels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 snapping, gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 snapshots in Image Adjustment Lab . . . 556 Soft Edge bevel effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 soft proofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 preserving color values . . . . . . . . . .380 presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 turning on by default . . . . . . . . . . .382 SHW files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 soft proofs exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 simple wireframe view (definition) . . . 816 source object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 816 simulating overprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 spacing interlanguage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 shifting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 sizing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 skewing (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Smart Drawing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Index special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 special effects applying to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . .551 color and tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 plug-in filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 857 spell checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automatic replacements . . . . . . . . . customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . entire drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . skipping errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . user word lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 480 483 478 479 480 490 splash screen (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 816 split blend (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 splitting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting to process colors . . . . . . displaying palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . setting print warnings . . . . . . . . . . 310 817 633 634 329 614 617 spraying lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 spraylists creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 specifying settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 spread (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 spreadsheets, importing as tables . . . . 536 squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjusting corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using object coordinates . . . . . . . . . 165 168 167 107 stacking order of layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Standard VGA palette type . . . . . . . . . 573 Star tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 starting Corel CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Corel DESIGNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 startup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 statistics, text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 adding and removing items . . . . . . 770 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 hiding or displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 resizing items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 restoring default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Step and Repeat docker . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Straighten Image Lab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 straightening images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Straight-Line Connector tool . . . . . . . . . 42 stretching nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Stucki black-and-white conversion . . . . . . 569 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 bevel effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . 356 for tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 loading from templates . . . . . . . . . . 121 PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 text wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 reshaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 858 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide subpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 extracting from combined objects . . 245 working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 subscript (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 substituting fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 PANOSE font matching . . . . . . . . 472 subtractive color model (definition) . . 817 super nudge (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 superscript (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 product updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SVG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 swap disk (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 swapping colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 swatch (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 SWF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 symbol collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 symbol instance (definition) . . . . . . . . . 818 symbol libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 adding symbols to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Symbol Manager docker . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Index symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818 adding to libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 breaking links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 converting objects to . . . . . . . . . . . .254 copying and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . .257 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 creating libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 deleting instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 editing in a library . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 editing internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 editing nested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 exporting libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 fixing broken links . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 formatting codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 locating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 modifying instances . . . . . . . . . . . .259 nested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 purging unused definitions . . . . . . .253 reverting instances to objects . . . . . .252 sharing between drawings . . . . . . . .257 unsupported object types . . . . . . . . .260 updating links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 using in drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 symmetrical nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 system information, viewing . . . . . . . . . 753 System palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 T tab stops adding to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 in table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 859 Table tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 tabs. See tab stops tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding background color . . . . . . . . adding to drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . breaking into curve objects . . . . . . . cell border spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . cell margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . converting to bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . converting to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating from text . . . . . . . . . . . . . customizing Tab key navigation . . cutting and pasting columns . . . . . cutting and pasting rows . . . . . . . . deleting rows and columns . . . . . . distributing rows and columns . . . . formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . importing from spreadsheets . . . . . importing from text files . . . . . . . . inserting columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . inserting images and graphics . . . . inserting rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inserting tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . inserting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . merging cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . moving rows and columns . . . . . . . navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . navigating cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resizing cells automatically . . . . . . resizing cells, rows, and columns . . rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting rows and columns . . . . . . splitting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tangent lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 860 521 536 521 530 535 530 530 535 532 522 522 525 525 525 527 528 529 536 536 526 535 526 532 531 535 533 535 524 523 525 535 532 528 535 523 524 523 533 Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) . . . . 741 TARGA (TGA) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741 target object (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . 818 technical graphic terms . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 adding reference information . . . . . 119 choosing for databases . . . . . . . . . . 294 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 creating files from templates . . . . . . 120 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 loading styles from . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 printing designer notes . . . . . . . . . . 117 starting drawings from . . . . . . . . . . . 56 viewing designer notes . . . . . . . . . . 117 viewing details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 templets. See templates temporary macros playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 adding bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 adding drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 adding paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 adding special characters . . . . . . . . 462 adding tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 adding to callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 adding to drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 adding to predefined shapes . . . . . . 174 adding to tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 adjusting position on path . . . . . . . 449 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 alternate for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide artistic. See artistic text Asian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 assigning hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 changing appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 434 changing case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 changing character properties . . . . . 435 changing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 changing default style . . . . . . . . . . . 435 changing flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 changing unit of measure . . . . . . . . 438 combining and breaking frames . . . 459 combining frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 compressing in PDF files . . . . . . . . 665 converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 converting artistic text to curves . . . 179 converting tables to . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 converting to table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 copying to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 displaying correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 embedding graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 embedding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 encoding in PDF files . . . . . . . . . . 666 exporting as curves in PDF files . . . 668 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 finding and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 439 fitting to path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 fitting to text frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 formatting codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 greeking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 gutter (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 HTML compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 hyphenating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 importing text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749 Index indenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 inserting formatting codes . . . . . . . .464 inserting special characters . . . . . . .463 kerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 linking with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 removing wrapping style . . . . . . . . .462 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 returning to baseline . . . . . . . . . . . .447 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 separating from path . . . . . . . . . . . .450 shaping by using envelopes . . . . . . .204 shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 subscript (definition) . . . . . . . . . . .817 superscript (definition) . . . . . . . . . .817 TrueType fonts (definition) . . . . . .820 wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818 adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 adjusting automatically . . . . . . . . . .431 aligning paragraph text . . . . . . . . . .442 combining and breaking apart . . . . .458 fitting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 fixed size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 separating from object . . . . . . . . . . .431 shaping by using envelopes . . . . . . .204 unlinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Text Source button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 861 text styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . creating from objects . . . . . . . . . . . deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . finding objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 818 357 355 356 357 358 357 357 Text tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Text toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 texture fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 applying PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 rotating, skewing, and mirroring . . 346 saving with file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 tile size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 TGA files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 thesaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inserting words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 483 481 481 three-dimensional effects . . . . . . . . . . bevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drop shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 404 410 393 407 399 397 threshold (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 thumbnails (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 tick (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 TIFF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741 862 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 tiling (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 tint (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 tips & tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 tone (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 adjusting in RAW camera files . . . . 597 tone curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 duotone color mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 tone effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 adding and deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 adding and removing items . . . . . . 765 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 customizing buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 docking and undocking . . . . . . . . . 764 editing button images . . . . . . . . . . . 766 hiding and displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 764 locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 moving and copying items . . . . . . . 766 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 exploring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 enhancements to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 traced results adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 changing color mode . . . . . . . . . . . 588 controlling colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 creating custom color palette . . . . . 588 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide determining quality . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 grouping objects by color . . . . . . . . 586 keeping object overlaps . . . . . . . . . . 586 merging adjacent colors . . . . . . . . . 586 merging colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 reducing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 tracing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Centerline Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 changing tracing method . . . . . . . . 585 default options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 in one step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Outline Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 performance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Quick Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Transparency tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 trapping (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 Tray docker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 adding content to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 removing content from . . . . . . . . . . .90 tree view (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 trial versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 trimming objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 front and back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 overlapping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 PowerClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 true radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 TrueType Font (TTF) files . . . . . . . . . . 742 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742 TrueType fonts (TTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820 converting to Type 1 in PDF . . . . . .668 tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 TTF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 training resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 TWAIN (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 Transform toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Twister distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 transformations copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 two-point perspective (definition) . . . . 820 transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 applying merge modes to . . . . . . . . 420 applying to mesh fills . . . . . . . . . . . 350 applying to outlines or fills . . . . . . . 419 applying to Web objects . . . . . . . . . 269 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 editing the colors of . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 fountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 patterned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 textured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Type 1 fonts disabling downloading . . . . . . . . . .617 Index TXT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 type. See text U underexposure (definition) . . . . . . . . . . 820 underlining text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 undoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 customizing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 saving as macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784 ungrouping grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 863 Unicode (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 encoding text in PDF files . . . . . . . 667 V uniform fills (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 See also macros Uniform palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 uninstalling applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 units of measure displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 for new documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 for text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 unloading macro projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 unlocking layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PowerClip objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vector graphics (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 compressing when saving . . . . . . . . . 72 converting to bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . 541 exporting as bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 vector objects (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 creating PowerClip objects . . . . . . . 197 vectorizing bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 283 245 198 767 unprojecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 changing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 URL (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 user guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 user interface, changing language . . . . . . 5 user word lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adding words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . alternative words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deleting words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vanishing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 490 491 492 493 493 492 493 492 vertical dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 viewing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 all pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 facing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Pixels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Rasterize Complex Effects . . . . . . . . 67 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Simple Wireframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Simulate Overprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 switching to saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Wireframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 virtual line segments, deleting . . . . . . . 190 Virtual Segment Delete tool . . . . . . . . . 47 Visio (VSD) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Visual Basic Editor. See Macro Editor Visual Basic for Applications. See VBA 864 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide Visual Studio Tools for Applications. See VSTA VSD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 VSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 See also macros support for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 VSTA Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 Web presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 WebCGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 support for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 WebCGM S1000D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 object data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Web-safe palette type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 W wedges, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 warning messages disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 for color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 checking while importing . . . . . . . . 647 detecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 getting a Digimarc Creator ID . . . . 549 welding (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 white point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821 WI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 WIA (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 Wavelet Compressed Bitmap WI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Windows Bitmap (BMP) files . . . . . . . . 692 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692 WB files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Windows Metafile Format (WMF) files 746 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 creating objects for . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 exporting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 image export options . . . . . . . . . . . 681 optimizing PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . 674 preflight options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 transparent bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Web colors, choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Web export enhancements . . . . . . . . . . 19 Web format enhancements . . . . . . . . . . 20 Web objects bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 creating text for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Web pages, previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Index Windows Touch support . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 WK files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 WMF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 WordPerfect Document (WPD) files . . 743 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) files . . . . 744 technical notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745 WordPerfect Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 copying objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 exporting files to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 importing files from . . . . . . . . . . . .679 WordStar (WSD) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746 workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 865 application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 dockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 e-mailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 property bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 restoring default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 standard toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Zoom toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 zooming (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 in drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 in PowerTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 settings for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 to pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 WPD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743 WPG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 wrapping text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 writing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 analyzing sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 changing language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 thesaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 WSD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 X XCF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 XLSM files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 XPixMap Image (XPM) files . . . . . . . . 746 Z ZIP (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 Zipper distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Zoom tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 866 Corel DESIGNER X5 User Guide
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Create Date : 2010:09:22 10:33:30-04:00 Modify Date : 2010:09:22 14:54:28-04:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Format : application/pdf Title : Corel DESIGNER User Guide Creator : Metadata Date : 2010:09:22 14:54:28-04:00 Document ID : uuid:05b607f3-e632-4ffe-9a92-d1114dfc059e Instance ID : uuid:c6a4c57a-e37d-4773-a5d7-4ae7755a4812 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 882EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools